Hp Wireless Switch Manager Software Command Reference Guide Cmdref

: Hp Hp-Wireless-Switch-Manager-Software-Command-Reference-Guide-156195 hp-wireless-switch-manager-software-command-reference-guide-156195 hp pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 616

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Wireless LAN Mobility System
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller
Command Reference

3CRWXR10095A, 3CRWX120695A, 3CRWX440095A

http://www.3com.com/
Part No. DUA1009-5CAA01
Published June 2005

3Com Corporation
350 Campus Drive
Marlborough, MA USA
01752-3064

Copyright © 2004, 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced
in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation, transformation, or
adaptation) without written permission from 3Com Corporation.
3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time
to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change.
3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty, term, or condition of any kind, either
implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties, terms or conditions of
merchantability, satisfactory quality, and fitness for a particular purpose. 3Com may make improvements or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this documentation at any time.
If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation, it is furnished under a license
agreement included with the product as a separate document, in the hard copy documentation, or on the
removable media in a directory file named LICENSE.TXT or !LICENSE.TXT. If you are unable to locate a copy,
please contact 3Com and a copy will be provided to you.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND
If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein are
provided to you subject to the following:
All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense.
Software is delivered as “Commercial Computer Software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995) or
as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as such is provided with only such rights as are
provided in 3Com’s standard commercial license for the Software. Technical data is provided with limited rights
only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995) or FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987), whichever is applicable.
You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or
documentation contained in, or delivered to you in conjunction with, this User Guide.
Unless otherwise indicated, 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may
not be registered in other countries.
3Com is a registered trademark of 3Com Corporation. The 3Com logo is a trademark of 3Com Corporation.
Mobility Domain, Mobility Point, Mobility Profile, Mobility System, Mobility System Software, MP, MSS, and
SentrySweep are trademarks of Trapeze Networks, Inc.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows XP,
and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are
associated.
ENVIRONMENTAL STATEMENT
It is the policy of 3Com Corporation to be environmentally-friendly in all operations. To uphold our policy, we
are committed to:
Establishing environmental performance standards that comply with national legislation and regulations.
Conserving energy, materials and natural resources in all operations.
Reducing the waste generated by all operations. Ensuring that all waste conforms to recognized environmental
standards. Maximizing the recyclable and reusable content of all products.
Ensuring that all products can be recycled, reused and disposed of safely.
Ensuring that all products are labelled according to recognized environmental standards.
Improving our environmental record on a continual basis.
End of Life Statement
3Com processes allow for the recovery, reclamation and safe disposal of all end-of-life electronic components.
Regulated Materials Statement
3Com products do not contain any hazardous or ozone-depleting material.
Environmental Statement about the Documentation
The documentation for this product is printed on paper that comes from sustainable, managed forests; it is
fully biodegradable and recyclable, and is completely chlorine-free. The varnish is environmentally-friendly, and
the inks are vegetable-based with a low heavy-metal content.

CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Conventions 19
Documentation 20
Documentation Comments

1

21

USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE
Overview 23
CLI Conventions 24
Command Prompts 24
Syntax Notation 24
Text Entry Conventions and Allowed Characters 25
MAC Address Notation 25
IP Address and Mask Notation 26
User Globs, MAC Address Globs, and VLAN Globs 26
Port Lists 28
Virtual LAN Identification 29
Command-Line Editing 29
Keyboard Shortcuts 29
History Buffer 30
Tabs 30
Single-Asterisk (*) Wildcard Character 30
Double-Asterisk (**) Wildcard Characters 30
Using CLI Help 31
Understanding Command Descriptions 32

2

ACCESS COMMANDS
Commands by Usage
disable 33
enable 34
quit 34
set enablepass 35

33

3

SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 37
clear banner motd 38
clear history 38
clear prompt 39
clear system 39
display banner motd 40
display base-information 41
display license 42
display system 42
help 45
history 46
set auto-config 46
set banner motd 49
set confirm 50
set length 51
set license 52
set prompt 53
set system contact 54
set system countrycode 54
set system ip-address 57
set system location 58
set system name 58

4

PORT COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 61
clear dap 62
clear port counters 63
clear port-group 63
clear port name 64
clear port preference 64
clear port type 65
display port counters 66
display port-group 67
display port poe 68
display port preference 69
display port status 70

monitor port counters 72
reset port 77
set dap 77
set port 80
set port-group 81
set port name 82
set port negotiation 83
set port poe 84
set port preference 85
set port speed 85
set port trap 86
set port type ap 87
set port type wired-auth 91

5

VLAN COMMANDS
Commands by usage 95
clear fdb 96
clear vlan 97
display fdb 98
display fdb agingtime 101
display fdb count 101
display roaming station 102
display roaming vlan 104
display tunnel 105
display vlan config 106
set fdb 107
set fdb agingtime 108
set vlan name 109
set vlan port 110
set vlan tunnel-affinity 111

6

IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 113
clear interface 115
clear ip alias 116
clear ip dns domain 117
clear ip dns server 117

clear ip route 118
clear ip telnet 119
clear ntp server 119
clear ntp update-interval 120
clear snmp community 121
clear snmp notify target 121
clear snmp profile 122
clear snmp trap receiver 122
clear snmp usm 122
clear summertime 123
clear system ip-address 124
clear timezone 124
display arp 125
display interface 126
display ip alias 127
display ip dns 128
display ip https 129
display ip route 131
display ip telnet 133
display ntp 134
display snmp configuration 136
display summertime 138
display timedate 138
display timezone 139
ping 140
set arp 141
set arp agingtime 142
set interface 143
set interface dhcp-client 144
set interface dhcp-server 145
set interface status 146
set ip alias 147
set ip dns 147
set ip dns domain 148
set ip dns server 149
set ip https server 150
set ip route 150
set ip snmp server 152

set ip ssh 153
set ip ssh absolute-timeout 154
set ip ssh idle-timeout 155
set ip ssh server 155
set ip telnet 156
set ip telnet server 157
set ntp 158
set ntp server 158
set ntp update-interval 159
set snmp community 160
set snmp notify target 162
set snmp profile 167
set snmp protocol 172
set snmp security 173
set snmp trap 174
set snmp trap receiver 174
set snmp usm 174
set summertime 177
set system ip-address 179
set timedate 180
set timezone 181
display dhcp-client 182
display dhcp-server 183
display snmp community 186
display snmp counters 187
display snmp notify profile 188
display snmp notify target 189
display snmp status 191
display snmp usm 193
telnet 195
traceroute 196

7

AAA COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 199
clear accounting 201
clear authentication admin 202
clear authentication console 203

clear authentication dot1x 204
clear authentication last-resort 205
clear authentication mac 205
clear authentication proxy 206
clear authentication web 207
clear location policy 208
clear mac-user 209
clear mac-user attr 209
clear mac-user group 210
clear mac-usergroup 211
clear mac-usergroup attr 212
clear mobility-profile 213
clear user 213
clear user attr 214
clear user group 215
clear usergroup 215
clear usergroup attr 216
display aaa 217
display accounting statistics 220
display location policy 222
display mobility-profile 222
set accounting {admin | console} 223
set accounting {dot1x | mac | web} 224
set authentication admin 226
set authentication console 228
set authentication dot1x 230
set authentication last-resort 234
set authentication mac 236
set authentication proxy 238
set authentication web 239
set location policy 241
set mac-user 245
set mac-user attr 246
set mac-usergroup attr 252
set mobility-profile 253
set mobility-profile mode 255
set user 256
set user attr 257

set user group 258
set usergroup 259
set web-aaa 260

8

MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 261
clear mobility-domain 262
clear mobility-domain member 262
display mobility-domain config 263
display mobility-domain status 263
set mobility-domain member 265
set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip 266
set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name 267

9

MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
MAP Access Point Commands by Usage
clear {ap | dap} radio 272
clear radio-profile 274
clear service-profile 275
clear service-profile 276
display {ap | dap} config 277
display {ap | dap} counters 280
display {ap | dap} qos-stats 282
display {ap | dap} etherstats 284
display {ap | dap} group 285
display {ap | dap} status 287
display auto-tune attributes 290
display auto-tune neighbors 292
display dap connection 294
display dap global 295
display dap unconfigured 297
display radio-profile 298
display service-profile 302
reset {ap | dap} 305
set dap auto 306
set dap auto mode 308
set dap auto radiotype 309

269

set {ap | dap} bias 310
set {ap | dap} blink 311
set dap fingerprint 312
set {ap | dap} group 313
set {ap | dap} name 315
set {ap | dap} radio antennatype 315
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-retransmissions 318
set {ap | dap} radio channel 320
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate 321
set {ap | dap} radio mode 323
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile 324
set {ap | dap} radio tx-power 325
set dap security 326
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware 328
set radio-profile 11g-only 329
set radio-profile active-scan 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown 331
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval 332
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval 335
set radio-profile beacon-interval 336
set radio-profile countermeasures 337
set radio-profile dtim-interval 338
set radio-profile frag-threshold 339
set radio-profile long-retry 339
set radio-profile max-rx-lifetime 340
set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime 341
set radio-profile mode 342
set radio-profile preamble-length 345
set radio-profile rts-threshold 346
set radio-profile service-profile 346
set radio-profile short-retry 350
set radio-profile wmm 350
set service-profile auth-dot1x 351
set service-profile auth-fallthru 352

set service-profile auth-psk 354
set service-profile beacon 355
set service-profile cipher-ccmp 356
set service-profile cipher-tkip 357
set service-profile cipher-wep104 358
set service-profile cipher-wep40 359
set service-profile psk-phrase 360
set service-profile psk-raw 361
set service-profile rsn-ie 362
set service-profile shared-key-auth 363
set service-profile ssid-name 363
set service-profile ssid-type 364
set service-profile tkip-mc-time 365
set service-profile web-aaa-form 366
set service-profile wep active-multicast-index 367
set service-profile wep active-unicast-index 368
set service-profile wep key-index 369
set service-profile wpa-ie 370

10

STP COMMANDS
STP Commands by Usage 371
clear spantree portcost 372
clear spantree portpri 373
clear spantree portvlancost 373
clear spantree portvlanpri 374
clear spantree statistics 375
display spantree 376
display spantree backbonefast 378
display spantree blockedports 379
display spantree portfast 380
display spantree portvlancost 381
display spantree statistics 381
display spantree uplinkfast 387
set spantree 388
set spantree backbonefast 389
set spantree fwddelay 390
set spantree hello 390

set spantree maxage 391
set spantree portcost 392
set spantree portfast 393
set spantree portpri 394
set spantree portvlancost 395
set spantree portvlanpri 396
set spantree priority 397
set spantree uplinkfast 397

11

IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
Commands by usage 399
clear igmp statistics 400
display igmp 400
display igmp mrouter 404
display igmp querier 405
display igmp receiver-table 407
display igmp statistics 409
set igmp 411
set igmp lmqi 412
set igmp mrouter 413
set igmp mrsol 414
set igmp mrsol mrsi 414
set igmp oqi 415
set igmp proxy-report 416
set igmp qi 417
set igmp qri 418
set igmp querier 419
set igmp receiver 419
set igmp rv 420

12

SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
Security ACL Commands by Usage
clear security acl 424
clear security acl map 425
commit security acl 427
display security acl dscp 428
display security acl 429

423

display security acl hits 430
display security acl info 431
display security acl map 432
display security acl resource-usage
hit-sample-rate 437
rollback security acl 438
set security acl 439
set security acl map 444

13

433

CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 447
crypto ca-certificate 448
crypto certificate 449
crypto generate key 451
crypto generate request 452
crypto generate self-signed 454
crypto otp 456
crypto pkcs12 457
display crypto ca-certificate 459
display crypto certificate 460
display crypto key ssh 461

14

RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 463
clear radius 464
clear radius client system-ip 465
clear radius proxy client 466
clear radius proxy port 466
clear radius server 467
clear server group 467
set radius 468
set radius client system-ip 469
set radius proxy client 470
set radius proxy port 471
set radius server 472
set server group 474
set server group load-balance 475

15

802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 477
clear dot1x bonded-period 478
clear dot1x max-req 479
clear dot1x port-control 479
clear dot1x quiet-period 480
clear dot1x reauth-max 481
clear dot1x reauth-period 481
clear dot1x timeout auth-server 482
clear dot1x timeout supplicant 482
clear dot1x tx-period 483
display dot1x 483
set dot1x authcontrol 486
set dot1x bonded-period 487
set dot1x key-tx 488
set dot1x max-req 489
set dot1x port-control 490
set dot1x quiet-period 491
set dot1x reauth 491
set dot1x reauth-max 492
set dot1x reauth-period 493
set dot1x timeout auth-server 493
set dot1x timeout supplicant 494
set dot1x tx-period 494
set dot1x wep-rekey 495
set dot1x wep-rekey-period 496

16

SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 497
clear sessions 497
clear sessions network 498
display sessions 500
display sessions network 503

17

RF DETECTION COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 511
clear rfdetect 512
clear rfdetect attack-list 512
clear rfdetect black-list 513
clear rfdetect countermeasures mac 513
clear rfdetect ignore 513
clear rfdetect ssid-list 514
clear rfdetect vendor-list 515
display rfdetect counters 515
display rfdetect countermeasures 517
display rfdetect data 518
display rfdetect ignore 520
display rfdetect mobility-domain 521
display rfdetect ssid-list 525
display rfdetect vendor-list 525
display rfdetect visible 526
set rfdetect active-scan 528
set rfdetect attack-list 528
set rfdetect black-list 529
set rf detect countermeasures 530
set rfdetect countermeasures mac 530
set rfdetect ignore 530
set rfdetect log 531
set rfdetect signature 532
set rfdetect ssid-list 532
set rfdetect vendor-list 533
display rfdetect attack-list 534
display rfdetect black-list 535
display rfdetect clients 535

18

FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 539
backup 540
clear boot config 541
copy 542
delete 544

dir 545
display boot 547
display config 548
display version 549
load config 551
mkdir 553
reset system 554
restore 555
rmdir 556
save config 557
set boot configuration-file
set boot partition 559

19

558

TRACE COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 561
clear log trace 562
clear trace 562
display trace 563
save trace 564
set trace authentication 564
set trace authorization 565
set trace dot1x 566
set trace sm 567

SNOOP COMMANDS
clear snoop 570
clear snoop map 570
set snoop 571
set snoop map 574
set snoop mode 575
display snoop 576
display snoop info 577
display snoop map 577
display snoop stats 578

21

SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 581
clear log 581
display log buffer 582
display log config 584
display log trace 585
set log 586
set log trace mbytes 589

22

BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
Boot Prompt Commands by Usage
autoboot 592
boot 593
change 595
create 596
delete 597
diag 598
dir 598
display 599
fver 601
help 602
ls 602
next 603
reset 604
test 605
version 606

A

591

OBTAINING SUPPORT FOR YOUR PRODUCT
Register Your Product 607
Purchase Value-Added Services 607
Troubleshoot Online 608
Access Software Downloads 608
Telephone Technical Support and Repair
Contact Us 609

INDEX

608

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

This command reference explains Mobility System Software (MSS™)
command line interface (CLI) that you enter on a 3Com WXR100 Remote
Office Wireless LAN Switch, WX1200 Wireless Switch, or WX4400
Wireless LAN Controller to configure and manage the Mobility System™
wireless LAN (WLAN).
Read this reference if you are a network administrator responsible for
managing WXR100, WX1200, or WX4400 wireless switches and their
Managed Access Points (MAPs) in a network.
If release notes are shipped with your product and the information there
differs from the information in this guide, follow the instructions in the
release notes.
Most user guides and release notes are available in Adobe Acrobat
Reader Portable Document Format (PDF) or HTML on the 3Com
World Wide Web site:
http://www.3com.com/

Conventions

Table 1 and Table 2 list conventions that are used throughout this guide.
Table 1 Notice Icons
Icon

Notice Type

Description

Information note

Information that describes important features or
instructions

Caution

Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or
potential damage to an application, system, or device

20

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

This manual uses the following text and syntax conventions:
Table 2 Text Conventions
Convention

Description

Monospace text

Sets off command syntax or sample commands and system
responses.

Bold text

Highlights commands that you enter or items you select.

Italic text

Designates command variables that you replace with
appropriate values, or highlights publication titles or words
requiring special emphasis.

[ ] (square brackets)

Enclose optional parameters in command syntax.

{ } (curly brackets)

Enclose mandatory parameters in command syntax.

| (vertical bar)

Separates mutually exclusive options in command syntax.

Keyboard key names

If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key
names are linked with a plus sign (+). Example:
Press Ctrl+Alt+Del

Words in italics

Documentation

Italics are used to:
„

Emphasize a point.

„

Denote a new term at the place where it is defined in the
text.

„

Highlight an example string, such as a username or SSID.

The MSS documentation set includes the following documents.
„

Wireless LAN Switch Manager (3WXM) Release Notes
These notes provide information about the system software release,
including new features and bug fixes.

„

Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Release Notes
These notes provide information about the system software release,
including new features and bug fixes.

„

Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Quick Start Guide
This guide provides instructions for performing basic setup of secure
(802.1X) and guest (WebAAA™) access, for configuring a Mobility
Domain for roaming, and for accessing a sample network plan in
3WXM for advanced configuration and management.

Documentation Comments

„

21

Wireless LAN Switch Manager Reference Manual
This manual shows you how to plan, configure, deploy, and manage a
Mobility System wireless LAN (WLAN) using the 3Com Wireless LAN
Switch Manager (3WXM).

„

Wireless LAN Switch Manager User’s Guide
This guide shows you how to plan, configure, deploy, and manage a
Mobility System wireless LAN (WLAN) using the 3Com Wireless LAN
Switch Manager (3WXM). It contains information about
recommended system requirements you should meet for optimum
3WXM performance, installing 3WXM client and 3WXM Services
software, and an introduction to using the 3WXM interface.

„

Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Installation and Basic
Configuration Guide
This guide provides instructions and specifications for installing a WX
wireless switch in a Mobility System WLAN, and basic instructions for
deploying a secure IEEE 802.11 wireless service.

„

Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide
This guide provides instructions for configuring and managing the
system through the Mobility System Software (MSS) CLI.

„

Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Command Reference
This reference provides syntax information for all MSS commands
supported on WX switches.

Documentation
Comments

Your suggestions are very important to us. They will help make our
documentation more useful to you. Please e-mail comments about this
document to 3Com at:
pddtechpubs_comments@3com.com
Please include the following information when contacting us:
„

Document title

„

Document part number and revision (on the title page)

„

Page number (if appropriate)

22

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

Example:
„

Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide

„

Part number 730-9502-0071, Revision B

„

Page 25

Please note that we can only respond to comments and questions about
3Com product documentation at this e-mail address. Questions related to
Technical Support or sales should be directed in the first instance to your
network supplier.

1

USING THE COMMAND-LINE
INTERFACE

This chapter discusses the 3Com Wireless Switch Manager (3WXM)
command-line interface (CLI). Described are the CLI conventions (see “CLI
Conventions” on page 24), editing on the command line (see
“Command-Line Editing” on page 29), using the CLI help feature (see
“Using CLI Help” on page 31), and information about the command
descriptions in this reference (see “Understanding Command
Descriptions” on page 32).

Overview

Mobility System Software (MSS) operates a 3Com Mobility System
wireless LAN (WLAN) consisting of 3Com Wireless Switch Manager
(3WXM) software and 3Com Wireless LAN Switch or 3Com Wireless LAN
Controller (WX switch) and 3Com Wireless LAN Managed Access Point
(MAP) hardware. There is a command-line interface (CLI) on the WX
switch that you can use to configure and manage the WX and its
attached access points.
You configure the wireless LAN switches and access points primarily with
set, clear, and display commands. Use set commands to change
parameters. Use clear commands to reset parameters to their defaults. In
many cases, you can overwrite a parameter with another set command.
Use display commands to show the current configuration and monitor
the status of network operations.
The wireless LAN switches support two connection modes:
„

„

Administrative access mode, which enables the network administrator
to connect to the WX switch and configure the network
Network access mode, which enables network users to connect
through the WX switch to access the network

24

CHAPTER 1: USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE

CLI Conventions

Command Prompts

Be aware of the following MSS CLI conventions for command entry:
„

“Command Prompts” on page 24

„

“Syntax Notation” on page 24

„

“Text Entry Conventions and Allowed Characters” on page 25

„

“User Globs, MAC Address Globs, and VLAN Globs” on page 26

„

“Port Lists” on page 28

„

“Virtual LAN Identification” on page 29

By default, the MSS CLI provides the following prompt for restricted
users. The mmmm portion shows the wireless LAN switch model number
(for example, 1200) and the aabbcc portion shows the last three octets of
the MAC address of the switch.
WXmmmm-aabbcc>

After you become enabled as an administrative user by typing enable
and supplying a suitable password, MSS displays the following prompt:
WXmmmm-aabbcc#

For information about changing the CLI prompt on a wireless LAN switch,
see “set prompt” on page 53.
Syntax Notation

The MSS CLI uses standard syntax notation:
„

Bold monospace font identifies the command and keywords you must
type. For example:
set enablepass

„

Italics indicate a placeholder for a value. For example, you replace
vlan-id in the following command with a virtual LAN (VLAN) ID:
clear interface vlan-id ip

„

Curly brackets ({ }) indicate a mandatory parameter, and square
brackets ([ ]) indicate an optional parameter. For example, you must
enter dynamic or port and a port list in the following command, but
a VLAN ID is optional:
clear fdb {dynamic | port port-list} [vlan vlan-id]

CLI Conventions

„

25

A vertical bar (|) separates mutually exclusive options within a list of
possibilities. For example, you enter either enable or disable, not
both, in the following command:
set port {enable | disable} port-list

Text Entry
Conventions and
Allowed Characters

Unless otherwise indicated, the MSS CLI accepts standard ASCII
alphanumeric characters, except for tabs and spaces, and is
case-insensitive.
The CLI has specific notation requirements for MAC addresses, IP
addresses, and masks, and allows you to group usernames, MAC
addresses, virtual LAN (VLAN) names, and ports in a single command.
3Com recommends that you do not use the same name with different
capitalizations for VLANs or access control lists (ACLs). For example, do
not configure two separate VLANs with the names red and RED.
The CLI does not support the use of special characters including the
following in any named elements such as SSIDs and VLANs: ampersand
(&), angle brackets (< >), number sign (#), question mark (?), or quotation
marks (“”).
In addition, the CLI does not support the use of international characters
such as the accented É in DÉCOR.

MAC Address
Notation

MSS displays MAC addresses in hexadecimal numbers with a colon (:)
delimiter between bytes — for example, 00:01:02:1a:00:01. You can
enter MAC addresses with either hyphen (-) or colon (:) delimiters, but
colons are preferred.
For shortcuts:
„

„

You can exclude leading zeros when typing a MAC address. MSS
displays of MAC addresses include all leading zeros.
In some specified commands, you can use the single-asterisk (*)
wildcard character to represent from 1 byte to 5 bytes of a MAC
address. (For more information, see “MAC Address Globs” on
page 27.)

26

CHAPTER 1: USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE

IP Address and Mask
Notation

MSS displays IP addresses in dotted decimal notation — for example,
192.168.1.111. MSS makes use of both subnet masks and wildcard
masks.
Subnet Masks
Unless otherwise noted, use classless interdomain routing (CIDR) format
to express subnet masks — for example, 192.168.1.112/24. You indicate
the subnet mask with a forward slash (/) and specify the number of bits in
the mask.
Wildcard Masks
Security access control lists (ACLs) use source and destination IP addresses
and wildcard masks to determine whether the wireless LAN switch filters
or forwards IP packets. Matching packets are either permitted or denied
network access. The ACL checks the bits in IP addresses that correspond
to any 0s (zeros) in the mask, but does not check the bits that correspond
to 1s (ones) in the mask. You specify the wildcard mask in dotted decimal
notation.
For example, the address 10.0.0.0 and mask 0.255.255.255 match all IP
addresses that begin with 10 in the first octet.

User Globs, MAC
Address Globs, and
VLAN Globs

Name “globbing” is a way of using a wildcard pattern to expand a single
element into a list of elements that match the pattern. MSS accepts user
globs, MAC address globs, and VLAN globs. The order in which globs
appear in the configuration is important, because once a glob is matched,
processing stops on the list of globs.
User Globs
A user glob is shorthand method for matching an authentication,
authorization, and accounting (AAA) command to either a single user or
a set of users.
A user glob can be up to 80 characters long and cannot contain spaces or
tabs. The double-asterisk (**) wildcard characters with no delimiter
characters match all usernames. The single-asterisk (*) wildcard character
matches any number of characters up to, but not including, a delimiter
character in the glob. Valid user glob delimiter characters are the at (@)
sign and the period (.).

CLI Conventions

27

Table 3 gives examples of user globs.
Table 3 User Globs
User Glob

User(s) Designated

jose@example.com

User jose at example.com

*@example.com

All users at example.com whose usernames do not
contain periods — for example, jose@example.com
and tamara@example.com, but not
nin.wong@example.com, because nin.wong
contains a period

*@marketing.example.com

All marketing users at example.com whose
usernames do not contain periods

*.*@marketing.example.com All marketing users at example.com whose
usernames contain periods
*

All users with usernames that have no delimiters

EXAMPLE\*

All users in the Windows Domain EXAMPLE with
usernames that have no delimiters

EXAMPLE\*.*

All users in the Windows Domain EXAMPLE whose
usernames contain periods

**

All users

MAC Address Globs
A media access control (MAC) address glob is a similar method for
matching some authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) and
forwarding database (FDB) commands to one or more 6-byte MAC
addresses. In a MAC address glob, you can use a single asterisk (*) as a
wildcard to match all MAC addresses, or as follows to match from 1 byte
to 5 bytes of the MAC address:
00:*
00:01:*
00:01:02:*
00:01:02:03:*
00:01:02:03:04:*

For example, the MAC address glob 02:06:8c* represents all MAC
addresses starting with 02:06:8c. Specifying only the first 3 bytes of a
MAC address allows you to apply commands to MAC addresses based on
an organizationally unique identity (OUI).

28

CHAPTER 1: USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE

VLAN Globs
A VLAN glob is a method for matching one of a set of local rules on an
wireless LAN switch, known as the location policy, to one or more users.
MSS compares the VLAN glob, which can optionally contain wildcard
characters, against the VLAN-Name attribute returned by AAA, to
determine whether to apply the rule.
To match all VLANs, use the double-asterisk (**) wildcard characters with
no delimiters. To match any number of characters up to, but not
including, a delimiter character in the glob, use the single-asterisk (*)
wildcard. Valid VLAN glob delimiter characters are the at (@) sign and the
period (.).
For example, the VLAN glob bldg4.* matches bldg4.security and bldg4.hr
and all other VLAN names with bldg4. at the beginning.
Matching Order for Globs
In general, the order in which you enter AAA commands determines the
order in which MSS matches the user, MAC address, or VLAN to a glob.
To verify the order, view the output of the display aaa or display config
command. MSS checks globs that appear higher in the list before items
lower in the list and uses the first successful match.
Port Lists

The physical Ethernet ports on a WX switch can be set for connection to
MAP access points, authenticated wired users, or the network backbone.
You can include a single port or multiple ports in one MSS CLI command
by using the appropriate list format.
The ports on a WX switch are numbered 1 and 2 (for the 3Com Remote
Office Wireless LAN Switch WXR100), 1 through 4 (for the 3Com
Wireless LAN Controller WX4400), and 1 through 8 (for the 3Com
Wireless Lan Switch WX1200). No port 0 exists on the WX switch. You
can include a single port or multiple ports in a command that includes
port port-list. Use one of the following formats for port-list:
„

A single port number. For example:
WX1200# set port enable 6

„

A comma-separated list of port numbers, with no spaces. For
example:
WX1200# display port poe 1,2,4

Command-Line Editing

„

29

A hyphen-separated range of port numbers, with no spaces. For
example:
WX1200# reset port 1-3

„

Any combination of single numbers, lists, and ranges. Hyphens take
precedence over commas. For example:
WX1200# display port status 1-3,6

Virtual LAN
Identification

Command-Line
Editing
Keyboard Shortcuts

The names of virtual LANs (VLANs), which are used in Mobility Domain™
communications, are set by you and can be changed. In contrast, VLAN
ID numbers, which the wireless LAN uses locally, are determined when
the VLAN is first configured and cannot be changed. Unless otherwise
indicated, you can refer to a VLAN by either its VLAN name or its VLAN
number. CLI set and display commands use a VLAN’s name or number
to uniquely identify the VLAN within the WX.

MSS editing functions are similar to those of many other network
operating systems.
The following table lists the keyboard shortcuts for entering and editing
CLI commands.
Table 4 Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard Shortcut(s)

Function

Ctrl+A

Jumps to the first character of the command line.

Ctrl+B or Left Arrow key

Moves the cursor back one character.

Ctrl+C

Escapes and terminates prompts and tasks.

Ctrl+D

Deletes the character at the cursor.

Ctrl+E

Jumps to the end of the current command line.

Ctrl+F or Right Arrow key

Moves the cursor forward one character.

Ctrl+K

Deletes from the cursor to the end of the command
line.

Ctrl+L or Ctrl+R

Repeats the current command line on a new line.

Ctrl+N or Down Arrow key

Enters the next command line in the history buffer.

Ctrl+P or Up Arrow key

Enters the previous command line in the history
buffer.

30

CHAPTER 1: USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE

Table 4 Keyboard Shortcuts (continued)

History Buffer

Tabs

Keyboard Shortcut(s)

Function

Ctrl+U or Ctrl+X

Deletes characters from the cursor to the beginning
of the command line.

Ctrl+W

Deletes the last word typed.

Esc B

Moves the cursor back one word.

Esc D

Deletes characters from the cursor forward to the
end of the word.

Delete key or Backspace key

Erases mistake made during command entry. Reenter
the command after using this key.

The history buffer stores the last 63 commands you entered during a
terminal session. You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to
select a command that you want to repeat from the history buffer.
The MSS CLI uses the Tab key for command completion. You can type
the first few characters of a command and press the Tab key to show the
command(s) that begin with those characters. For example:
WX1200# display i 
ifm
display interfaces maintained by the interface
manager
igmp
display igmp information
interface display interfaces
ip
display ip information

Single-Asterisk (*)
Wildcard Character

Double-Asterisk (**)
Wildcard Characters

You can use the single-asterisk (*) wildcard character in globbing. (For
details, see “User Globs, MAC Address Globs, and VLAN Globs” on
page 26.)
The double-asterisk (**) wildcard character matches all usernames. For
details, see “User Globs” on page 26.

Using CLI Help

Using CLI Help

31

The CLI provides online help. To see the full range of commands available
at your access level, type the help command. For example:

WX1200# help
Commands:
------------------------------------------------------------------------clear
Clear, use 'clear help' for more information
commit
Commit the content of the ACL table
copy
Copy from filename (or url) to filename (or url)
crypto
Crypto, use 'crypto help' for more information
delete
Delete url
dir
Show list of files on flash device
disable
Disable privileged mode
display
Display, use 'display help' for more information
exit
Exit from the Admin session
help
Show this help screen
history
Show contents of history substitution buffer
hit-sample-rate
Set NP hit-counter sample rate
load
Load, use 'load help' for more information
logout
Exit from the Admin session
monitor
Monitor, use 'monitor help' for more information
ping
Send echo packets to hosts
quit
Exit from the Admin session
reset
Reset, use 'reset help' for more information
rollback
Remove changes to the edited ACL table
save
Save the running configuration to persistent storage
set
Set, use 'set help' for more information
telnet
telnet IP address [server port]
traceroute
Print the route packets take to network host

For more information on help, see “help” on page 45.
To see a subset of the online help, type the command for which you want
more information. For example, to show all the commands that begin
with the letter i, type the following command:
WX1200# display i?
ifm
igmp
interface
ip

Show
Show
Show
Show

interfaces maintained by the interface manager
igmp information
interfaces
ip information

32

CHAPTER 1: USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE

To see all the variations, type one of the commands followed by a
question mark (?). For example:
WX1200# display ip ?
alias
display ip aliases
dns
display DNS status
https
display ip https
route
display ip route table
telnet
display ip telnet

To determine the port on which Telnet is running, type the following
command:
WX1200# display ip telnet
Server Status
Port
---------------------------------Enabled
23

Understanding
Command
Descriptions

Each command description in the 3Com Mobility System Software
Command Reference contains the following elements:
„

A command name, which shows the keywords but not the variables.
For example, the following command name appears at the top of a
command description and in the index:
set {ap | dap} name

The set {ap | dap} name command has the following complete syntax:
set {ap port-list | dap dap-num} name name
„

A brief description of the command’s functions.

„

The full command syntax.

„

Any command defaults.

„

„

„

„

„

The command access, which is either enabled or all. All indicates that
anyone can access this command. Enabled indicates that you must
enter the enable password before entering the command.
The command history, which identifies the MSS version in which the command
was introduced and the version numbers of any subsequent updates.
Special tips for command usage. These are omitted if the command
requires no special usage.
One or more examples of the command in context, with the
appropriate system prompt and response.
One or more related commands.

2

ACCESS COMMANDS

This chapter describes access commands used to control access to the
Mobility Software System (MSS) command-line interface (CLI).

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents access services commands alphabetically. Use
Table 5 to located commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 5 Access Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Access Privileges

“enable” on page 34
“set enablepass” on page 35
“disable” on page 33
“quit” on page 34

disable

Changes the CLI session from enabled mode to restricted access.
Syntax — disable
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command restricts access to the CLI for the
current session:
WX1200# disable
WX1200>

See Also
„

enable on page 34

34

CHAPTER 2: ACCESS COMMANDS

enable

Places the CLI session in enabled mode, which provides access to all
commands required for configuring and monitoring the system.
Syntax — enable
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS displays a password prompt to challenge you with the
enable password. To enable a session, your or another administrator must
have configured the enable password to this WX switch with the set
enablepass command.
Examples — The following command plus the enable password provides
enabled access to the CLI for the current sessions:
WX1200> enable
Enter password: password
WX1200#

See Also

quit

„

set enablepass on page 35

„

set confirm on page 50

Exit from the CLI session.
Syntax — quit
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To end the administrator’s session, type the following
command:
WX1200> quit

set enablepass

set enablepass

35

Sets the password that provides enabled access (for configuration and
monitoring) to the WX switch.
Syntax — set enablepass
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — After typing the set enablepass command, press Enter. If you
are entering the first enable password on this WX switch, press Enter at
the Enter old password prompt. Otherwise, type the old password.
Then type a password of up to 32 alphanumeric characters with no
spaces, and reenter it at the Retype new password prompt.
CAUTION: Be sure to use a password that you will remember. If you lose
the enable password, the only way to restore it causes the system to
return to its default settings and wipes out the configuration.
Examples — The following example illustrates the prompts that the
system displays when the enable password is changed. The passwords
you enter are not displayed.
WX1200# set enablepass
Enter old password: old-password
Enter new password: new-password
Retype new password: new-password
Password changed

See Also
„

disable on page 33

„

enable on page 34

36

CHAPTER 2: ACCESS COMMANDS

3

SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

Use system services commands to configure and monitor system
information for a WX switch.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents system services commands alphabetically. Use
Table 6 to located commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 6 System Services Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Auto-Config

set auto-config on page 46

Display

clear banner motd on page 38
set banner motd on page 49
display banner motd on page 40
set confirm on page 50
set length on page 51

System Identification

set prompt on page 53
set system name on page 58
set system location on page 58
set system contact on page 54
set system countrycode on page 54
set system ip-address on page 57
display system on page 42
clear system on page 39
clear prompt on page 39

Help

help on page 45

History

history on page 46

38

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

Table 6 System Services Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command
clear history on page 38

License

display license on page 42
set license on page 52

Technical Support

clear banner motd

display base-information on page 41

Deletes the message-of-the-day (MOTD) banner that is displayed before
the login prompt for each CLI session on the wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — clear banner motd
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To clear a banner, type the following command:
WX4400# clear banner motd
success: change accepted

As an alternative to clearing the banner, you can overwrite the existing
banner with an empty banner by typing the following command:
set banner motd ^^
See Also

clear history

„

display banner motd on page 40

„

set banner motd on page 49

Deletes the command history buffer for the current CLI session.
Syntax — clear history
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

clear prompt

39

Examples — To clear the history buffer, type the following command:
WX4400# clear history
success: command buffer was flushed.

See Also
„

clear prompt

history on page 46

Resets the system prompt to its previously configured value. If the prompt
was not configured previously, this command resets the prompt to its
default.
Syntax — clear prompt
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To reset the prompt, type the following command:
wildebeest# clear prompt
success: change accepted.
WX4400-01c840#

See Also
„

clear system

set prompt on page 53. (For information about default prompts, see
“Command Prompts” on page 24.)

Clears the system configuration of the specified information.
CAUTION: If you change the IP address, any currently configured
Mobility Domain operations cease. You must reset the Mobility Domain.
Syntax — clear system [contact | countrycode | ip-address |
location | name]
„

contact — Resets the name of contact person for the WX switch to

null.
„

countrycode — Resets the country code for the WX switch to null.

„

ip-address — Resets the IP address of the WX switch to null.

40

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

„

location — Resets the location of the WX switch to null.

„

name — Resets the name of the WX switch to the default system

name, which is the model number.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To clear the location of the WX switch, type the following
command:
WX4400# clear system location
success: change accepted.

See Also

display banner
motd

„

display config on page 548

„

display system on page 42

„

set system contact on page 54

„

set system countrycode on page 54

„

set system ip-address on page 57

„

set system location on page 58

Shows the banner that was configured with the set banner motd
command.
Syntax — display banner motd
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To show the banner with the message of the day, type the
following command:
WX4400# display banner motd
hello world

display base-information

41

See Also

display
base-information

„

clear banner motd on page 38

„

set banner motd on page 49

Provides an in-depth snapshot of the status of the wireless LAN switch,
which includes details about the boot image, the version, ports, and
other configuration values. This command also displays the last 100 log
messages.
Syntax — display base-information
[file [subdirname/]filename]
„

[subdirname/]filename — Optional subdirectory name, and a string

up to 32 alphanumeric characters. The command’s output is saved
into a file with the specified name in nonvolatile storage.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Enter this command before calling for Technical Support. See
“Obtaining Support for your Product” on page 607 for more
information.
See Also
„

display boot on page 547

„

display config on page 548

„

display license on page 42

„

display system on page 42

„

display version on page 549

42

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

display license

Displays information about the license currently installed on the WX
switch.
Syntax — display license
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
Examples — To view the WX switch license, type the following
command:
WX4400# display license
Serial Number
: M8XE4IBB8DB10
License Number
License Key
Activation key
Feature
Expires

:
:
:
:
:

245
WXL-076E-93E9-62DA-54D8
WXA-3E04-4CC2-430D-B508
24 additional ports
Never

The additional ports refers to the number of additional MAPs the switch
can boot and actively manage.
See Also
„

display system

set license on page 52

Shows system information.
Syntax — display system
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
Examples — To show system information, type the following command:

WX4400# display system
===============================================================================
Product Name:
WX4400
System Name:
WX-bldg3
System Countrycode: US
System Location:
first-floor-bldg3
System Contact:
tamara@example.com

display system

43

System IP:
192.168.12.7
System MAC:
00:0B:0E:00:04:30
===============================================================================
Boot Time:
2003-11-07 15:45:49
Uptime:
13 days 04:29:10
===============================================================================
Fan status: fan1 OK fan2 OK fan3 OK
Temperature: temp1 ok temp2 ok temp3 ok
PSU Status: Lower Power Supply DC ok AC ok Upper Power Supply missing
Memory:
97.04/744.03 (13%)
Total Power Over Ethernet : 29.000
===============================================================================

Table 7 describes the fields of display system output.
Table 7 display system output
Field

Description

Product Name

Switch model number.

System Name

System name (factory default, or optionally configured
with set system name).

System Countrycode

Country-specific 802.11 code required for MAP operation
(configured with set system countrycode).

System Location

Record of the WX switch’s physical location (optionally
configured with set system location).

System Contact

Contact information about the system administrator or
another person to contact about the system (optionally
configured with set system contact).

System IP

Common interface, source, and default IP address for the
device, in dotted decimal notation (configured with set
system ip-address).

System MAC

WX switch’s media access control (MAC) machine address
set at the factory, in 6-byte hexadecimal format.

License

License level installed on the WX switch (if applicable).

Boot Time

Date and time of the last system reboot.

Uptime

Number of days, hours, minutes, and seconds that the WX
has been operating since its last restart.

44

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

Table 7 display system output (continued)
Field

Description

Fan status

Operating status of the WX switch’s three cooling fans:
„

OK — Fan is operating.

„

Failed — Fan is not operating. MSS sends an alert to
the system log every 5 minutes until this condition is
corrected.

Fan 1 is located nearest the front of the chassis, and fan 3
is located nearest the back.
Temperature

PSU Status

Memory

Status of temperature sensors at three locations in the WX:
„

ok — Temperature is within the acceptable range of
0° C to 50° C (32° F to 122° F).

„

Alarm — Temperature is above or below the
acceptable range. MSS sends an alert to the system log
every 5 minutes until this condition is corrected.

Status of the lower and upper power supply units:
„

missing — Power supply is not installed or is
inoperable.

„

DC ok — Power supply is producing DC power.

„

DC output failure — Power supply is not producing
DC power. MSS sends an alert to the system log every
5 minutes until this condition is corrected.

„

AC ok — Power supply is receiving AC power.

„

AC not present — Power supply is not receiving AC
power.

Current size (in megabytes) of nonvolatile memory (NVRAM)
and synchronous dynamic RAM (SDRAM), plus the percentage
of total memory space in use, in the following format:
NVRAM size /SDRAM size (percent of total)

Total Power Over
Ethernet

Total power that the device is currently supplying to its
directly connected MAP access points, in watts.

See Also
„

clear system on page 39

„

set system contact on page 54

„

set system countrycode on page 54

„

set system ip-address on page 57

„

set system location on page 58

„

set system name on page 58

help

help

45

Displays a list of commands that can be used to configure and monitor
the WX switch.
Syntax — help
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Use this command to see a list of available commands. If
you have restricted access, you see fewer commands than if you have
enabled access. To show a list of CLI commands available at the enabled
access level, type the following command at the enabled access level:

WX4400# help
Commands:
------------------------------------------------------------------------clear
Clear, use 'clear help' for more information
commit
Commit the content of the ACL table
copy
Copy from filename (or url) to filename (or url)
crypto
Crypto, use 'crypto help' for more information
delete
Delete url
dir
Show list of files on flash device
disable
Disable privileged mode
display
Display, use 'display help' for more information
exit
Exit from the Admin session
help
Show this help screen
history
Show contents of history substitution buffer
hit-sample-rate
Set NP hit-counter sample rate
load
Load, use 'load help' for more information
logout
Exit from the Admin session
monitor
Monitor, use 'monitor help' for more information
ping
Send echo packets to hosts
quit
Exit from the Admin session
reset
Reset, use 'reset help' for more information
rollback
Remove changes to the edited ACL table
save
Save the running configuration to persistent storage
set
Set, use 'set help' for more information
telnet
telnet IP address [server port]
traceroute
Print the route packets take to network host

See Also
„

“Using CLI Help” on page 31

46

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

history

Displays the command history buffer for the current CLI session.
Syntax — history
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To show the history of your session, type the following
command:
WX4400> history
Show History (most recent first)
-------------------------------[00] display config
[01] display version
[02] enable

See Also
„

set auto-config

clear history on page 38

Enables a WX switch to contact a 3Com Wireless Switch Manager server
for its configuration.
Syntax — set auto-config {enable | disable}
„

„

enable — Enables the switch to contact a 3Com Wireless Switch
Manager server to request a configuration.
disable — Disables the auto-config option.

Defaults — The auto-config option is automatically enabled on an
unconfigured WXR100 when the Fn switch is pressed during power on.
However, auto-config is disabled by default on other models.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.

set auto-config

47

Usage — A network administrator at the corporate office can
preconfigure the switch in a 3Com Wireless Switch Manager network
plan. The switch configuration must have a name for the switch, the
model must be WXR100, and the serial number must match the switch’s
serial number. The configuration should also include all other settings
required for the deployment, including MAP configuration, SSIDs, AAA
settings, and so on.
When the 3Com Wireless Switch Manager server in the corporate
network receives the configuration request, the server looks in the
currently open network plan for a switch configuration with the same
model and serial number as the one in the configuration request.
„

„

If the network plan contains a configuration with a matching model
and serial number, the 3Com Wireless Switch Manager sends the
configuration to the switch and restarts the switch. The switch boots
using the configuration it received from the 3Com Wireless Switch
Manager.
If the network plan does not have a configuration with a matching
model and serial number, a verification warning appears in the 3Com
Wireless Switch Manager. The warning lists the switch’s serial number
and IP address. The network administrator can upload the switch into
the network plan, configure switch parameters, and deploy the
configuration to the switch.

To use the auto-config option with a new (unconfigured) WXR100, insert
a paperclip or similar object into the WXR100’s Fn hole to press the
switch. The Fn switch must be held for about 3 seconds while the Fn LED
(the right LED above port 1) is lit. Normally, this LED remains solidly lit for
3 seconds after power on. However, when the Fn switch is pressed, the
LED flashes for 3 seconds instead.
If you want another WX switch model to be able to access a 3Com
Wireless Switch Manager server for a configuration, you also must
preconfigure the WX with the following information:
„

IP address

„

Gateway address

„

Domain name and DNS server address

48

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

You can enable the switch to use the MSS DHCP client to obtain this
information from a DHCP server in the local network where the switch
will be deployed. Alternatively, you can statically configure the
information.
The IP address and DNS information are configured independently. You
can configure the combination of settings that work with the network
resources available at the deployment site. The following examples show
some of the combinations you can configure.
Examples — The following commands stage a WX-1200 switch to use
the auto-config option. The network where the switch is installed has a
DHCP server, so the switch is configured to use the MSS DHCP client to
obtain an IP address, default gateway address, DNS domain name, and
DNS server IP addresses.
Configure a VLAN:
WX-1200# set vlan 1 port 7
success: change accepted.

Enable the DHCP client on VLAN 1:
WX-1200# set interface 1 ip dhcp-client enable
success: change accepted.

Enable the auto-config option:
WX-1200# set auto-config enable
success: change accepted.

Create a self-signed administrative certificate, to enable the WX-1200 to
communicate with the 3Com Wireless Switch Manager server.
WX-1200# crypto generate key admin 1024
key pair generated
WX-1200# crypto generate self-signed admin
Country Name:
State Name:
Locality Name:
Organizational Name:
Organizational Unit:
Common Name: remoteswitch1@example.com
Email Address:
Unstructured Name:

set banner motd

49

Self-signed cert for admin is
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----MIICUzCCAbygAwIBAgICA+cwDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEEBQAwNjELMAkGA1UEBhMC
VVMx
CzAJBgNVBAgTAkNBMRowGAYDVQQDFBF0ZWNocHVic0B0cnB6LmNvbTAeFw0w
MzA0
...
Lm8wmVYLxP56MpCUAm9O8C2foYgOY40=
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

Save the configuration changes:
WX-1200# save config
success: configuration saved.

See Also

set banner motd

„

crypto generate key on page 451

„

crypto generate self-signed on page 454

„

save config on page 557

„

set interface dhcp-client on page 144

„

set vlan port on page 110

Configures the banner string that is displayed before the beginning of
each login prompt for each CLI session on the WX switch.
Syntax — set banner motd ^text^
„

^ — Delimiting character that begins and ends the message.

„

text — Up to 2000 alphanumeric characters, including tabs and

carriage returns, but not the delimiting character (^). The maximum
number of characters is approximately 24 lines by 80 characters.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Type a caret (^), then the message, then another caret.

50

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

Do not use the following characters with commands in which you set text
to be displayed on the WX switch, such as message-of-the-day (MOTD)
banners:
„

Ampersand (&)

„

Angle brackets (< >)

„

Double quotation marks (“”)

„

Number sign (#)

„

Question mark (?)

„

Single quotation mark (')

Examples — To create a banner that says Update meeting at 3 p.m.,
type the following command:
WX4400# set banner motd ^Update meeting at 3 p.m.^
success: change accepted.

See Also

set confirm

„

clear banner motd on page 38

„

display banner motd on page 40

Enables or disables the display of confirmation messages for commands
that might have a large impact on the network.
Syntax — set confirm {on | off}
„

on — Enables confirmation messages.

„

off — Disables confirmation messages.

Defaults — Configuration messages are enabled.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command remains in effect for the duration of the session,
until you enter a quit command, or until you enter another set confirm
command.

set length

51

MSS displays a message requiring confirmation when you enter certain
commands that can have a potentially large impact on the network. For
example:
WX4400# clear vlan red
This may disrupt user connectivity.
Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]

Examples — To turn off these confirmation messages, type the
following command:
WX4400# set confirm off
success: Confirm state is off

set length

Defines the number of lines of CLI output to display between paging
prompts. MSS displays the set number of lines and waits for you to press
any key to display another set, or type q to quit the display.
Syntax — set length number-of-lines
„

number-of-lines — Number of lines of text to display between

paging prompts. You can specify from 0 to 512. The 0 value disables
the paging prompt action entirely.
Defaults — MSS displays 24 lines by default.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use this command if the output of a CLI command is greater
than the number of lines allowed by default for a terminal type.
Examples — To set the number of lines displayed to 100, type the
following command:
WX4400# set length 100
success: screen length for this session set to 100

52

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

set license

Installs an upgrade license, for managing more MAPs.
Syntax — set license license-key activation-key
„

„

license-key — License key, starting with WXL. You can enter the
key with or without the hyphens.
activation-key — Activation key, starting with WXA. You can enter
the key with or without the hyphens.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The license key is shipped with the switch. To obtain the
activation key, access the 3Com web site. Each license and activation key
pair allows the switch to actively manage an additional 24 MAPs. You can
install up to three upgrade license and activation key pairs, to actively
manage up to 96 MAPs.
Examples — To install an upgrade license and activation key, type the
following command:
WX4400# set license WXL-076E-93E9-62DA-54D8
WXA-3E04-4CC2-430D-B508
Serial Number
: M8XE4IBB8DB10
License Number
License Key
Activation key
Feature
Expires

:
:
:
:
:

245
WXL-076E-93E9-62DA-54D8
WXA-3E04-4CC2-430D-B508
24 additional ports
Never

48 ports are enabled
success: license was installed

The additional ports refers to the number of additional MAPs the switch
can boot and actively manage.
See Also
„

display license on page 42

set prompt

set prompt

53

Changes the CLI prompt for the WX switch to a string you specify.
Syntax — set prompt string
„

string — Alphanumeric string up to 32 characters long. To include
spaces in the prompt, you must enclose the string in double quotation
marks (“”).

Defaults — The factory default for the WX switch name is the model
number (WX1200 for the 3Com Wireless LAN Switch WX1200, WX4400
for the 3Com Wireless LAN Controller WX4400, WXR100 for the 3Com
Remote Office Wireless LAN Switch) followed by the last three octets of
the switch’s MAC address.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When you first log in for the initial configuration of the WX
switch, the CLI provides a WXR100>, WX1200> or WX4400> prompt,
depending on your model. After you become enabled by typing enable
and giving a suitable password, the WXR100#, WX1200# or WX4400#
prompt is displayed.
If you use the set system name command to change the default system
name, MSS uses that name in the prompt, unless you also change the
prompt with set prompt.
Examples — The following example sets the prompt from WX4400 to
happy_days:
WX4400# set prompt happy_days
success: change accepted.
happy_days#

See Also
„

clear prompt on page 39

„

display config on page 548

„

set system name on page 58

54

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

set system contact

Stores a contact name for the WX switch.
Syntax — set system contact string
„

string — Alphanumeric string up to 256 characters long, with no
blank spaces.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
To view the system contact string, type the display system command.
Examples — The following command sets the system contact
information to tamara@example.com:
WX1200# set system contact tamara@example.com
success: change accepted.

See Also

set system
countrycode

„

clear system on page 39

„

display system on page 42

„

set system location on page 58

„

set system name on page 58

Defines the country-specific IEEE 802.11 regulations to enforce on the
WX switch.
Syntax — set system countrycode code
„

code — Two-letter code for the country of operation for the WX

switch. You can specify one of the codes listed in Table 8.
Table 8 Country Codes
Country

Code

Argentina

AR

Australia

AU

set system countrycode

Table 8 Country Codes (continued)
Country

Code

Austria

AT

Belgium

BE

Brazil

BR

Bulgaria

BG

Canada

CA

Chile

CL

China

CN

Columbia

CO

Croatia

HR

Cyprus

CY

Czech Republic

CZ

Denmark

DK

Estonia

EE

Finland

FI

France

FR

Germany

DE

Greece

GR

Hong Kong

HK

Hungary

HU

Iceland

IS

India

IN

Ireland

IE

Israel

IL

Italy

IT

Japan

JP

Latvia

LV

Liechtenstein

LI

Lithuania

LT

Luxembourg

LU

Malaysia

MY

Malta

MT

Mexico

MX

55

56

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

Table 8 Country Codes (continued)
Country

Code

Morocco

MA

Netherlands

NL

New Zealand

NZ

Norway

NO

Peru

PE

Philippines

PH

Poland

PL

Portugal

PT

Romania

RO

Russia

RU

Saudi Arabia

SA

Singapore

SG

Slovakia

SK

Slovenia

SI

South Africa

ZA

South Korea

KR

Spain

ES

Sweden

SE

Switzerland

CH

Taiwan

TW

Thailand

TH

Turkey

TR

United Arab Emirates

AE

United Kingdom

GB

United States

US

Defaults — The factory default country code is None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must set the system county code to a valid value before
using any set ap commands to configure a MAP.

set system ip-address

57

Examples — To set the country code to Canada, type the following
command:
WX1200# set system country code CA
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set system
ip-address

display config on page 548

Sets the system IP address so that it can be used by various services in the
WX switch.
CAUTION: Any currently configured Mobility Domain operations cease if
you change the IP address. If you change the address, you must reset the
Mobility Domain.
Syntax — set system ip-address ip-addr
„

ip-addr — IP address, in dotted decimal notation.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command sets the IP address of the WX
switch to 192.168.253.1:
WX4400# set system ip-address 192.168.253.1
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear system on page 39

„

set interface on page 143

„

display system on page 42

58

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

set system location

Stores location information for the WX switch.
Syntax — set system location string
„

string — Alphanumeric string up to 256 characters long, with no
blank spaces.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You cannot include spaces in the system location string.
To view the system location string, type the display system command.
Examples — To store the location of the WX switch in the WX’s
configuration, type the following command:
WX4400# set system location first-floor-bldg3
success: change accepted.

See Also

set system name

„

clear system on page 39

„

display system on page 42

„

set system contact on page 54

„

set system name on page 58

Changes the name of the WX switch from the default system name and
also provides content for the CLI prompt, if you do not specify a prompt.
Syntax — set system name string
„

string — Alphanumeric string up to 256 characters long, with no
blank spaces. Use a unique name for each WX switch.

set system name

59

Defaults — By default, the system name and command prompt have the
same value. The factory default for both is the model number (WXR100
for the 3Com Remote Office Wireless LAN Switch WXR100, WX1200 for
the 3Com Wireless LAN Switch WX1200, WX4400 for the 3Com Wireless
LAN Controller WX4400) followed by the last three octets of the switch’s
MAC address.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Entering set system name with no string resets the system
name to the factory default.
To view the system name string, type the display system command.
Examples — The following example sets the system name to a name
that identifies the WX switch:
WX4400# set system name WX-bldg3
success: change accepted.
WX-bldg3#

See Also
„

clear system on page 39

„

display system on page 42

„

set prompt on page 53

„

set system contact on page 54

„

set system location on page 58

60

CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS

4

PORT COMMANDS

Use port commands to configure and manage individual ports and
load-sharing port groups.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents port commands alphabetically. Use Table 9 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 9 Port Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Port Type

set port type ap on page 87
set dap on page 77
set port type wired-auth on page 91
clear port type on page 65
clear dap on page 62

Name

set port name on page 82
clear port name on page 64

State

set port on page 80
reset port on page 77
display port status on page 70

Gigabit Interface Type

display port preference on page 69
set port preference on page 85
clear port preference on page 64

Speed

set port speed on page 85

Autonegotiation

set port negotiation on page 83

PoE

set port poe on page 84
display port poe on page 68

SNMP

set port trap on page 86

62

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

Table 9 Port Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command

Port Groups

set port-group on page 81
display port-group on page 67
clear port-group on page 63

Statistics

display port counters on page 66
monitor port counters on page 72
clear port counters on page 63

clear dap

Removes a Distributed MAP.
CAUTION: When you clear a Distributed MAP, MSS ends user sessions
that are using the MAP.
Syntax — clear dap dap-num
„

dap-num — Number of the Distributed MAP(s) you want to remove.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears Distributed MAP 1:
WX4400# clear dap 1
This will clear specified DAP devices.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y

See Also
„

set dap on page 77

„

set port type ap on page 87

clear port counters

clear port counters

63

Clears port statistics counters and resets them to 0.
Syntax — clear port counters
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears all port statistics counters
and resets them to 0:
WX4400# clear port counters
success: cleared port counters

See Also

clear port-group

„

display port counters on page 66

„

monitor port counters on page 72

Removes a port group.
Syntax — clear port-group name name
„

name name — Name of the port group.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears port group server1:
WX4400# clear port-group name server1
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set port-group on page 81

„

display port-group on page 67

64

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

clear port name

Removes the name assigned to a port.
Syntax — clear port port-list name
„

port-list — List of physical ports. MSS removes the names from all
the specified ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears the names of ports 1
through 3:
WX4400# clear port 1-3 name

See Also

clear port
preference

„

display port status on page 70

„

set port name on page 82

Resets a gigabit Ethernet port on a WX4400 to use the GBIC (fiber)
interface for the active link.
Syntax — clear port preference port-list
„

port-list — List of physical ports. MSS clears the preference on all
the specified ports.

Defaults — When both the copper and fiber interfaces of a gigabit
Ethernet port are connected, the GBIC (fiber) interface is the active link.
The RJ-45 (copper) link is unused.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command applies only to the WX4400. This command
does not affect a link that is already active on the port.

clear port type

65

Examples — The following command clears the preference set on port 2
on a WX4400 switch:
WX4400# clear port preference 2

See Also

clear port type

„

display port preference on page 69

„

set port preference on page 85

Removes all configuration settings from a port and resets the port as a
network port.
CAUTION: When you clear a port, MSS ends user sessions that are using
the port.
Syntax — clear port type port-list
„

port-list — List of physical ports. MSS resets and removes the
configuration from all the specified ports.

Defaults — The cleared port becomes a network port but is not placed
in any VLANs.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use this command to change a port back to a network port. All
configuration settings specific to the port type are removed. For example,
if you clear an MAP access point port, all MAP-specific settings are
removed. Table 10 lists the default network port settings that MSS
applies when you clear a port’s type.
Table 10 Network port defaults
Port Parameter

Setting

VLAN membership

None.
Note: Although the command changes a port to a
network port, the command does not place the port
in any VLAN. To use the port in a VLAN, you must
add the port to the VLAN.

66

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

Table 10 Network port defaults (continued)
Port Parameter

Setting

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Based on the VLAN(s) you add the port to.
802.1X

No authorization.

Port groups

None.

Internet Group Management Enabled as port is added to VLANs.
Protocol (IGMP) snooping
Access point and radio
parameters

Not applicable

Maximum user sessions

Not applicable

Examples — The following command clears port 5:
WX1200# clear port type 5
This may disrupt currently authenticated users.
Are you sure? (y/n) [n]y
success: change accepted.

See Also

display port
counters

„

set port type ap on page 87

„

set port type wired-auth on page 91

Displays port statistics.
Syntax — display port counters
[octets | packets | receive-errors | transmit-errors |
collisions | receive-etherstats |
transmit-etherstats] [port port-list]
„

octets — Shows octet statistics.

„

packets — Shows packet statistics.

„

receive-errors— Shows errors in received packets.

„

transmit-errors — Shows errors in transmitted packets.

„

collisions — Shows collision statistics.

„

receive-etherstats — Shows Ethernet statistics for received

packets.
„

transmit-etherstats — Shows Ethernet statistics for transmitted

packets.

display port-group

„

67

port port-list — List of physical ports. If you do not specify a port
list, MSS shows statistics for all ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can specify one statistic type with the command.
Examples — The following command shows octet statistics for port 3:
WX1200> display port counters octets port 3
Port
Status
Rx Octets
Tx Octets
=============================================================================
3
Up
27965420
34886544

This command’s output has the same fields as the monitor port counters
command. For descriptions of the fields, see Table 16 on page 74.
See Also

display port-group

„

clear port counters on page 63

„

monitor port counters on page 72

Shows port group information.
Syntax — display port-group [all | name group-name]
„

all — Shows information for all port groups.

„

name group-name — Shows information for the specified port group.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the configuration of port
group server2:
WX1200# display port-group name server2
Port group: server2 is up
Ports: 5, 7

68

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

Table 11 describes the fields in the display port-group output.
Table 11 Output for display port-group
Field

Description

Port group

Name and state (enabled or disabled) of the port
group.

Ports

Ports contained in the port group.

See Also

display port poe

„

clear port-group on page 63

„

set port-group on page 81

Displays status information for ports on which Power over Ethernet (PoE)
is enabled.
Syntax — display port poe [port-list]
„

port-list — List of physical ports. If you do not specify a port list,

PoE information is displayed for all ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays PoE information for all
ports on a WX1200 switch:
WX1200# display port poe
Link
Port
PoE
PoE
Port Name
Status
Type
config
Draw
============================================================
1 1
up
disabled off
2 2
down
disabled off
3 3
down
disabled off
4 4
down
MAP
enabled 1.44
5 5
down
disabled off
6 6
down
disabled off

Table 12 describes the fields in this display.

display port preference

69

Table 12 Output for display port poe
Field

Description

Port

Port number.

Name

Port name. If the port does not have a name, the
port number is listed.

Link status

Link status of the port:

Port type

PoE config

PoE Draw

„

up—The port is connected.

„

down—The port is not connected.

Port type:
„

MAP —The port is an MAP access port.

„

- (The port is not an MAP access port.)

PoE state:
„

enabled

„

disabled

Power draw on the port, in watts.
For 10/100 Ethernet ports on which PoE is disabled,
this field displays off. For gigabit Ethernet ports, this
field displays invalid, because PoE is not supported
on gigabit Ethernet ports.
The value overcurrent indicates a PoE problem such
as a short in the cable.

See Also
„

display port
preference

set port poe on page 84

Displays the interface preferences set on WX4400 gigabit Ethernet ports.
Syntax — display port preference [port-list]
„

port-list — List of physical ports. MSS displays the preference for all
the specified ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command applies only to the WX4400.

70

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

Examples — The following command displays the preference settings on
all four ports of a WX4400 switch:
WX4400# display port preference
Port Preference
===========================================================
1 GBIC
2 RJ45
3 GBIC
4 GBIC

Table 13 describes the fields in this display.
Table 13 Output for display port preference
Field

Description

Port

Port number.

Preference

Preference setting:
„

GBIC — The GBIC (fiber) interface is selected as
the active interface.

„

RJ45 — The RJ-45 (copper) interface is selected
as the active interface.

See Also

display port status

„

clear port preference on page 64

„

set port preference on page 85

Displays configuration and status information for ports.
Syntax — display port status [port-list]
„

port-list — List of physical ports. If you do not specify a port list,
information is displayed for all ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

display port status

71

Examples — The following command displays information for all ports
on a WX1200 switch:
WX1200# display port status
Port Name
Admin Oper
Config
Actual
Type
Media
===============================================================================
1 1
up
up
auto
100/full network
10/100BaseTx
2 2
up
up
auto
100/full ap
10/100BaseTx
3 3
up
up
auto
100/full network
10/100BaseTx
4 4
up
down
auto
network
10/100BaseTx
5 5
up
down
auto
network
10/100BaseTx
6 6
up
down
auto
network
10/100BaseTx
7 7
up
down
auto
network
10/100BaseTx
8 8
up
down
auto
network
10/100BaseTx

Table 14 describes the fields in this display.
Table 14 Output for display port status
Field

Description

Port

Port number.

Name

Port name. If the port does not have a name, the
port number is listed.

Admin

Administrative status of the port:

Oper

Config

„

up — The port is enabled.

„

down — The port is disabled.

Operational status of the port:
„

up — The port is operational.

„

down — The port is not operational.

Port speed configured on the port:
„

10 — 10 Mbps.

„

100 — 100 Mbps.

„

1000 — 1000 Mbps.

„

auto — The port sets its own speed.

Actual

Speed and operating mode in effect on the port.

Type

Port type:
„

ap — MAP access point port

„

network — Network port

„

wa — Wired authentication port

72

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

Table 14 Output for display port status (continued)
Field

Description

Media

Link type:
10/100BaseTX — 10/100BASE-T.
GBIC — 1000BASE-SX or 1000BASE-LX GBIC.
1000BaseT — 1000BASE-T.
No connector — GBIC slot is empty.

See Also

monitor port
counters

„

clear port type on page 65

„

set port on page 80

„

set port name on page 82

„

set port negotiation on page 83

„

set port speed on page 85

„

set port type ap on page 87

„

set port type wired-auth on page 91

Displays and continually updates port statistics.
Syntax — monitor port counters
[octets | packets | receive-errors | transmit-errors |
collisions | receive-etherstats | transmit-etherstats]
„

octets — Displays octet statistics first.

„

packets — Displays packet statistics first.

„

receive-errors — Displays errors in received packets first.

„

transmit-errors — Displays errors in transmitted packets first.

„

collisions — Displays collision statistics first.

„

receive-etherstats — Displays Ethernet statistics for received

packets first.
„

transmit-etherstats — Displays Ethernet statistics for transmitted

packets first.

monitor port counters

73

Defaults — All types of statistics are displayed for all ports. MSS
refreshes the statistics every 5 seconds. This interval cannot be
configured. Statistics types are displayed in the following order by
default:
„

Octets

„

Packets

„

Receive errors

„

Transmit errors

„

Collisions

„

Receive Ethernet statistics

„

Transmit Ethernet statistics

Access — All.
History—Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Each type of statistic is displayed separately. Press the Spacebar
to cycle through the displays for each type.
If you use an option to specify a statistic type, the display begins with that
statistic type. You can use one statistic option with the command.
Use the keys listed in Table 15 to control the monitor display.
Table 15 Key Controls for Monitor Port Counters Display
Field

Description

Spacebar Advances to the next statistic type.
Esc

Exits the monitor. MSS stops displaying the statistics and displays a new
command prompt.

c

Clears the statistics counters for the currently displayed statistics type.
The counters begin incrementing again.

For error reporting, the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors include
misalignment errors. Jumbo packets with valid CRCs are not counted. A
short packet can be reported as a short packet, a CRC error, or an
overrun. In some circumstances, the transmitted octets counter might
increment a small amount for a port with nothing attached.

74

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

Examples — The following command starts the port statistics monitor
beginning with octet statistics (the default):
WX4400# monitor port counters

As soon as you press Enter, MSS clears the window and displays statistics
at the top of the window.
Port
Status
Rx Octets
Tx Octets
===============================================================================
1 Up
27965420
34886544
...

To cycle the display to the next set of statistics, press the Spacebar. In this
example, packet statistics are displayed next:
Port
Status
Rx Unicast
Rx NonUnicast
Tx Unicast
Tx NonUnicast
===============================================================================
1 Up
54620
62144
68318
62556
...

Table 16 describes the port statistics displayed by each statistics option.
The Port and Status fields are displayed for each option.
Table 16 Output for monitor port counters
Statistics Option Field

Description

Displayed for All
Options

Port

Port the statistics are displayed for.

Status

Port status. The status can be Up or Down.

Rx Octets

Total number of octets received by the port.

octets

This number includes octets received in frames
that contained errors.
Tx Octets

Total number of octets received.
This number includes octets received in frames
that contained errors.

monitor port counters

75

Table 16 Output for monitor port counters (continued)
Statistics Option Field

Description

packets

Number of unicast packets received.

Rx Unicast

This number does not include packets that
contain errors.
Rx
NonUnicast

Number of broadcast and multicast packets
received.
This number does not include packets that
contain errors.

Tx Unicast

Number of unicast packets transmitted.
This number does not include packets that
contain errors.

Tx
NonUnicast

Number of broadcast and multicast packets
transmitted.
This number does not include packets that
contain errors.

receive-errors

transmit-errors

Rx Crc

Number of frames received by the port that had
the correct length but contained an invalid
frame check sequence (FCS) value. This statistic
includes frames with misalignment errors.

Rx Error

Total number of frames received in which the
Physical layer (PHY) detected an error.

Rx Short

Number of frames received by the port that
were fewer than 64 bytes long.

Rx Overrun

Number of frames received by the port that
were valid but were longer than 1518 bytes.
This statistic does not include jumbo packets
with valid CRCs.

Tx Crc

Number of frames transmitted by the port that
had the correct length but contained an invalid
FCS value.

Tx Short

Number of frames transmitted by the port that
were fewer than 64 bytes long.

Tx Fragment

Total number of frames transmitted that were
less than 64 octets long and had invalid CRCs.

Tx Abort

Total number of frames that had a link pointer
parity error.

76

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

Table 16 Output for monitor port counters (continued)
Statistics Option Field

Description

collisions

Single Coll

Total number of frames transmitted that
experienced one collision before 64 bytes of the
frame were transmitted on the network.

Multiple Coll

Total number of frames transmitted that
experienced more than one collision before 64
bytes of the frame were transmitted on the
network.

Excessive Coll Total number of frames that experienced more
than 16 collisions during transmit attempts.
These frames are dropped and not transmitted.

receive-etherstats

Total Coll

Best estimate of the total number of collisions
on this Ethernet segment.

Rx 64

Number of packets received that were 64 bytes
long.

Rx 127

Number of packets received that were from 65
through 127 bytes long.

Rx 255

Number of packets received that were from 128
through 255 bytes long.

Rx 511

Number of packets received that were from 256
through 511 bytes long.

Rx 1023

Number of packets received that were from 512
through 1023 bytes long.

Rx 1518

Number of packets received that were from
1024 through 1518 bytes long.

transmit-etherstats Tx 64

Number of packets transmitted that were 64
bytes long.

Tx 127

Number of packets transmitted that were from
65 through 127 bytes long.

Tx 255

Number of packets transmitted that were from
128 through 255 bytes long.

Tx 511

Number of packets transmitted that were from
256 through 511 bytes long.

Tx 1023

Number of packets transmitted that were from
512 through 1023 bytes long.

Tx 1518

Number of packets transmitted that were from
1024 through 1518 bytes long.

See Also
„

display port counters on page 66

reset port

reset port

77

Resets a port by toggling its link state and Power over Ethernet (PoE)
state.
Syntax — reset port port-list
„

port-list — List of physical ports. MSS resets all the specified ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The reset command disables the port’s link and PoE (if
applicable) for at least 1 second, then reenables them. This behavior is
useful for forcing an MAP access point that is connected to two WX
switches to reboot over the link to the other switch.
Examples — The following command resets port 5:
WX1200# reset port 5

See Also
„

set dap

set port on page 80

Configures a Distributed MAP for an MAP access point that is indirectly
connected to the WX switch through an intermediate Layer 2 or Layer 3
network.
Before configuring a Distributed MAP, you must use the set
system countrycode command to set the IEEE 802.11 country-specific
regulations on the WX switch. See “set system countrycode” on page 54.
For an MAP that is directly connected to the WX switch, use the set port
type ap command to configure an MAP access port.
Syntax — set dap dap-num serial-id serial-ID model
{ap2750 | ap3750 | ap7250 | ap8250 | ap8750 | mp-52 | mp-101
| mp-122 | mp-241 | mp-252 | mp-262 | mp-341 | mp-352}
[radiotype {11a | 11b | 11g}]

78

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

„

„

dap-num — Number for the Distributed MAP. The range of valid
connection numbers depends on the WX switch model:
„

For a WX4400, you can specify a number from 1 to 256.

„

For a WX1200, you can specify a number from 1 to 30.

„

For a WXR100, you can specify a number from 1 to 8.

serial-id serial-ID — MAP access point serial ID. The serial ID is
listed on the MAP case. To show the serial ID using the CLI, use the
display version details command.

The serial ID of the AP2750, AP3750, AP7250, AP8250, or AP8750 might
be preceded by 4 digits and a slash (example: 0100/). Do not enter these
digits or the slash.
„

model {ap2750 | ap3750 | ap7250 | ap8250 | ap8750 | mp-52 |
mp-101 | mp-122 | mp-241 | mp-252 | mp-262 | mp-341 |
mp-352 | mp-372} — MAP access point model:
„

„

ap2750 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g. An external dual-mode
antenna may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
ap3750 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio and one 802.11a radio

with connectors for optional external antennas for each radio.
„

ap7250 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio. An external antenna

may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
„

ap8250 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio. It also has the ability to

have an additional 802.11a radio installed in it. An external
dual-mode antenna may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
„

ap8750 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b/g radio.

An external dual-mode antenna may be used in place of the
supplied antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
„

mp-52 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio,

with adjustable external antennas.
„

„
„

„

mp-101 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b.
mp-122 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b/g radio.
mp-241 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g.
mp-252 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio.

set dap

„

„

„

„

79

mp-262 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio,
and a connector for an external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-341 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g, and a connector for an
external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-352 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio,
and a connector for an external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-372 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio and one 802.11a radio

with connectors for optional external antennas for each radio.
„

radiotype 11a|11b|11g — Radio type:
„

11a — 802.11a

„

11b — 802.11b

„

11g — 802.11g

This option applies only to single-radio models. The value 11g does not
apply to model MP-101.
Defaults — The default radio type for model MP-101 is 802.11b. The
default radio type for model AP2750, AP7250, AP8250, MP-241, and
MP-341, and for the 802.11b/g radios in models AP3750, AP8250,
AP8750, MP-52, MP-252, and MP-262, and MP-352, is 802.11g in
regulatory domains that support 802.11g, or 802.11b in regulatory
domains that do not support 802.11g.
MAP radios configured for 802.11g also allow associations from 802.11b
clients by default. To disable support for 802.11b associations, use the
set radio-profile 11g-only command on the radio profile that contains
the radio.
MAP model MP-262 requires an external antenna for the 802.11b/g
radio. You must specify the antenna model. The AP3750 and MAP-3xx
models have an internal 802.1b/g antenna as well as a connector for an
external antenna, so use of an external antenna is optional on these
models. The AP3750 and MAP-372 also have a connector for an optional
external 802.11a antenna. MAP models MP-341 and MP-352 have an
internal 802.1b/g antenna as well as a connector for an external antenna,
so use of an external antenna is optional on these models. The AP2750,
AP7250, AP8250, and AP8750 models are supplied with detachable
antennas which may be replaced by an external dual-mode antenna. To

80

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

specify the external antenna fitted, use the set {ap | dap} radio
antennatype command.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command configures Distributed MAP 1 for
MAP model AP3750 with serial-ID M9DE48B012F00:
WX4400# set dap 1 serial-id M9DE48B012F00 model ap3750
success: change accepted.

The following command removes Distributed MAP 1:
WX4400# clear dap 1
This will clear specified DAP devices.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y

See Also

set port

„

clear dap on page 62

„

clear port type on page 65

„

set port type ap on page 87

„

set radio-profile 11g-only on page 329

„

set system countrycode on page 54

Administratively disables or reenables a port.
Syntax — set port {enable | disable} port-list
„

enable — Enables the specified ports.

„

disable — Disables the specified ports.

„

port-list — List of physical ports. MSS disables or reenables all the
specified ports.

Defaults — All ports are enabled.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set port-group

81

Usage — A port that is administratively disabled cannot send or receive
packets. This command does not affect the link state of the port.
Examples — The following command disables port 6:
WX1200# set port disable 6
success: set "disable" on port 6

The fol1owing command reenables the port:
WX1200# set port enable 6
success: set "enable" on port 6

See Also
„

set port-group

reset port on page 77

Configures a load-sharing port group. All ports in the group function as a
single logical link.
Syntax — set port-group name
mode {on | off}
„

group-name

port-list

name group-name — Alphanumeric string of up to 255 characters,

with no spaces.
„

„

port-list — List of physical ports. All the ports you specify are
configured together as a single logical link.
mode {on | off} — State of the group. Use on to enable the group

or off to disable the group. The group is enabled by default.
Defaults — Once configured, a group is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure up to 8 ports in a port group, in any
combination of ports. The port numbers do not need to be contiguous
and you can use 10/100 Ethernet ports and gigabit Ethernet ports in the
same port group.
After you add a port to a port group, you cannot configure port
parameters on the individual port. Instead, change port parameters on
the entire group. Specify the group name instead of an individual port
name or number in port configuration commands.

82

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

To add or remove ports in a group that is already configured, change the
mode to off, add or remove the ports, then change the mode to on.
Examples — The following command configures a port group named
server1 containing ports 1 through 5, and enables the link:
WX1200# set port-group name server1 1-5 mode on
success: change accepted.

The following commands disable the link for port group server1, change
the list of ports in the group, and reenable the link:
WX1200# set port-group name server1 1-5 mode off
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set port-group name server1 1-4,7 mode on
success: change accepted.

See Also

set port name

„

clear port-group on page 63

„

display port-group on page 67

Assigns a name to a port. After naming a port, you can use the port
name or number in other CLI commands.
Syntax — set port port name name
„
„

port — Number of a physical port. You can specify only one port.
name name — Alphanumeric string of up to 16 characters, with no

spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To simplify configuration and avoid confusion between a port’s
number and its name, 3Com recommends that you do not use numbers
as port names.

set port negotiation

83

Examples — The following command sets the name of port 7 to
adminpool:
WX1200# set port 7 name adminpool
success: change accepted.

See Also

set port negotiation

„

clear port name on page 64

„

display port status on page 70

Disables or reenables autonegotiation on gigabit Ethernet or 10/100
Ethernet ports.
Syntax — set port negotiation port-list {enable | disable}
„

port-list — List of physical ports. MSS disables or reenables
autonegotiation on all the specified ports.

„

enable — Enables autonegotiation on the specified ports.

„

disable — Disables autonegotiation on the specified ports.

Defaults — Autonegotiation is enabled on all Ethernet ports by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — WX1200 10/100 Ethernet ports support half-duplex and
full-duplex operation.
Examples — The following command disables autonegotiation on ports
3 and 5:
WX1200# set port negotiation 3,5 disable

The following command enables autonegotiation on port 2:
WX1200# set port negotiation 2 enable

84

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

set port poe

Enables or disables Power over Ethernet (PoE) on ports connected to MAP
access points.
CAUTION: When you set the port type for MAP use, you can enable PoE
on the port. Use the WX switch’s PoE to power 3Com MAP access points
only. If you enable PoE on ports connected to other devices, damage can
result.
Syntax — set port poe port-list enable | disable
„

port-list — List of physical ports. MSS disables or reenables PoE on
all the specified ports.

„

enable — Enables PoE on the specified ports.

„

disable — Disables PoE on the specified ports.

Defaults — PoE is disabled on network and wired authentication ports.
The state on MAP access point ports depends on whether you enabled or
disabled PoE when setting the port type. See set port type ap on
page 87.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command does not apply to any gigabit Ethernet ports or
to ports 7 and 8 on the WX1200 switch.
Examples — The following command disables PoE on ports 4 and 5,
which are connected to an MAP access point:
WX1200# set port poe 4,5 disable
If you are enabling power on these ports, they must be connected only to approved
PoE devices with the correct wiring. Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y

The following command enables PoE on ports 4 and 5:
WX1200# set port poe 4,5 enable
If you are enabling power on these ports, they must be connected only to approved
PoE devices with the correct wiring. Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y

See Also
„

set port type ap on page 87

„

set port type wired-auth on page 91

set port preference

set port preference

85

Configures a gigabit Ethernet port on a WX4400 to use the RJ-45
(copper) interface, when available, as the active link instead of the fiber
interface.
Syntax — set port preference port-list rj45
„

„

port-list — List of physical ports. MSS sets the preference on all the
specified ports.
rj45 — Prefers the copper interface.

Defaults — When both the copper and fiber interfaces of a gigabit
Ethernet port are connected, the GBIC (fiber) interface is the active link.
The RJ-45 (copper) link is unused.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command applies only to the WX4400.
If you set the preference to RJ-45 (copper) on a port that already has an
active fiber link, MSS immediately changes the link to the copper
interface.
Examples — The following command sets the preference of port 2 on a
WX4400 to RJ-45 (copper):
WX4400# set port preference 2 rj45

See Also

set port speed

„

clear port preference on page 64

„

display port preference on page 69

Changes the speed of a port.
Syntax — set port speed port-list {10 | 100 | 1000 | auto}
„

„

port-list — List of physical ports. MSS sets the port speed on all the
specified ports.
10 — Sets the port speed of a 10/100 Ethernet port to 10 Mbps and

sets the operating mode to full-duplex.

86

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

„

„

100 — Sets the port speed of a 10/100 Ethernet port to 100 Mbps
and sets the operating mode to full-duplex.
1000 — Sets the port speed of a gigabit Ethernet port to 1000 Mbps

and sets the operating mode to full-duplex.
„

auto — Enables a port to detect the speed and operating mode of the

traffic on the link and set itself accordingly.
Defaults — All ports are set to auto.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command sets the port speed on ports 1 and
3 through 4 to 10 Mbps and sets the operating mode to full-duplex:
WX1200# set port speed 1,3-4 10

set port trap

Enables or disables Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) linkup
and linkdown traps on an individual port.
Syntax — set port trap port-list {enable | disable}
„

port-list — List of physical ports.

„

enable — Enables the Telnet server.

„

disable — Disables the Telnet server.

Defaults — SNMP linkup and linkdown traps are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The set port trap command overrides the global setting of the
set snmp profile command.
The set port type command does not affect the global trap information
displayed by the display snmp configuration command. For example, if
you globally enable linkup and linkdown traps but then disable the traps
on a single port, the display snmp configuration command still
indicates that the traps are globally enabled.

set port type ap

87

Examples — The following command enables SNMP linkup and
linkdown traps on ports 3 and 4:
WX1200# set port trap 3-4 enable

See Also

set port type ap

„

display snmp configuration on page 136

„

set ip snmp server on page 152

„

set snmp community on page 160

„

set snmp profile on page 167

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

Configures an WX switch port for an MAP access point.
CAUTION: When you set the port type for MAP use, you must specify
the PoE state (enable or disable) of the port. Use the WX switch’s PoE to
power 3Com MAP access points only. If you enable PoE on a port
connected to another device, physical damage to the device can result.
Before configuring a port as an MAP access point port, you must use the
set system countrycode command to set the IEEE 802.11
country-specific regulations on the WX switch. See “set system
countrycode” on page 54.
For an MAP that is indirectly connected to the WX switch through an
intermediate Layer 2 or Layer 3 network, use the set dap command to
configure a Distributed MAP.
Before changing the port type from ap to wired-auth or from
wired-auth to ap, you must reset the port with the clear port type
command.
Syntax — set port type ap port-list model {ap2750 | ap3750 |
ap7250 | ap8250 | ap8750 | mp-52 | mp-101 | mp-122 | mp-241 |
mp-252 | mp-262 | mp-341 | mp-352| mp-372}
poe {enable | disable} [radiotype {11a | 11b | 11g}]
„
„

port-list — List of physical ports.
model {ap2750 | ap3750 | ap7250 | ap8250 | ap8750 | mp-52 |
mp-101 | mp-122 | mp-241 | mp-252 | mp-262 | mp-341 |
mp-352| mp-372} — MAP access point model:

88

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

„

„

ap2750 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g. An external dual-mode
antenna may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
ap3750 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio and one 802.11a radio

with connectors for optional external antennas for each radio.
„

ap7250 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio. An external antenna

may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
„

ap8250 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio. It also has the ability to

have an additional 802.11a radio installed in it. An external
dual-mode antenna may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
„

ap8750 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b/g radio.

An external dual-mode antenna may be used in place of the
supplied antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
„

mp-52 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio, with

adjustable external antennas.
„

mp-101 — Contains one radio that can be configured through

software for 802.11a or 802.11b.
„

mp-122 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b/g radio.

„

mp-241 — Contains one radio that can be configured through

software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g.
„
„

„

mp-252 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio.
mp-262 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio,
and a connector for an external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-341 — Contains one radio that can be configured through

software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g, and a connector for an
external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
„

mp-352 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio,

and a connector for an external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
„

mp-372 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio and one 802.11a radio
with connectors for optional external antennas for each radio.

„

poe enable | disable — Power over Ethernet (PoE) state.

„

radiotype 11a | 11b | 11g — Radio type:
„

11a — 802.11a

„

11b — 802.11b

„

11g — 802.11g

set port type ap

89

This option does not apply to single-radio models. The value 11g does
not apply to model MP-101.
Defaults — All WX ports are network ports by default.
The default radio type for model MP-101 is 802.11b. The default radio
type for model AP2750, AP7250, MP-241, and MP-341, and for the
802.11b/g radios in models AP3750, AP8250, AP8750, MP-52, MP-252,
MP-262, and MP-352 is 802.11g in regulatory domains that support
802.11g, or 802.11b in regulatory domains that do not support 802.11g.
MAP radios configured for 802.11g also allow associations from 802.11b
clients by default. To disable support for 802.11b associations, use the
set radio-profile 11g-only command on the radio profile that contains
the radio.
MAP model MP-262 requires an external antenna for the 802.11b/g
radio. You must specify the antenna model. The AP3750 and MAP-3xx
models have an internal 802.1b/g antenna as well as a connector for an
external antenna, so use of an external antenna is optional on these
models. The AP3750 and MAP-372 also have a connector for an optional
external 802.11a antenna. MAP models MP-341 and MP-352 have an
internal 802.1b/g antenna as well as a connector for an external antenna,
so use of an external antenna is optional on these models. The AP2750,
AP7250, AP8250, and AP8750 models are supplied with detachable
antennas which may be replaced by an external dual-mode antenna. To
specify the external antenna fitted, use the set {ap | dap} radio
antennatype command.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You cannot set a port’s type if the port is a member of a port
VLAN. To remove a port from a VLAN, use the clear vlan command. To
reset a port as a network port, use the clear port type command.
When you change port type, MSS applies default settings appropriate for
the port type. Table 17 lists the default settings that MSS applies when
you set a port’s type to ap.

90

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

Table 17 MAP Access Port Defaults
Port Parameter

Setting

VLAN membership

Removed from all VLANs. You cannot assign an MAP
access port to a VLAN. MSS automatically assigns MAP
access ports to VLANs based on user traffic.

Spanning Tree Protocol Not applicable
(STP)
802.1X

Uses authentication parameters configured for users.

Port groups

Not applicable

IGMP snooping

Enabled as users are authenticated and join VLANs.

Maximum user
sessions

Not applicable

This command does not apply to any gigabit Ethernet ports or to ports 7
and 8 on the WX1200 switch. To manage a MAP access point on a
WX4400 switch, use the set dap command to configure a Distributed
MAP connection on the switch.
Examples — The following command sets ports 1 through 3 and port 5
for MAP access point model AP3750 and enables PoE on the ports:
WX1200# set port type ap 1-3,5 model ap3750 poe enable
This may affect the power applied on the configured ports.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y

The following command sets ports 1 through 3 and port 5 for MAP
access point model AP3750 and enables PoE on the ports:
WX1200# set port type ap 1-3,5 model ap3750 poe enable
This may affect the power applied on the configured ports.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y

The following command sets ports 1 through 3 and port 5 for MAP
access point model AP8250 and enables PoE on the ports:
WX1200# set port type ap 1-3,5 model ap8250 poe enable
This may affect the power applied on the configured ports.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y

The following command sets ports 1 through 3 and port 5 for MAP
access point model AP8750 and enables PoE on the ports:
WX1200# set port type ap 1-3,5 model ap8750 poe enable
This may affect the power applied on the configured ports.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y

set port type wired-auth

91

The following command resets port 5 by clearing it:
WX1200# clear port type 5
This may disrupt currently authenticated users.
Are you sure? (y/n) [n]y
success: change accepted.

See Also

set port type
wired-auth

„

clear dap on page 62

„

clear port type on page 65

„

set {ap | dap} radio antennatype on page 315

„

set dap on page 77

„

set port type wired-auth on page 91

„

set radio-profile 11g-only on page 329

„

set system countrycode on page 54

Configures a WX switch port for a wired authentication user.
Before changing the port type from ap to wired-auth or from
wired-auth to ap, you must reset the port with the clear port type
command.
Syntax — set port type wired-auth port-list [tag tag-list]
[max-sessions num] [auth-fall-thru {last-resort | none | web
portal}]
„
„

port-list — List of physical ports.
tag-list — One or more numbers between 1 and 4094 that
subdivide a wired authentication port into virtual ports.

„

num — Maximum number of simultaneous user sessions supported.

„

last resort — Automatically authenticates the user, without

requiring a username and password.
„

none— Denies authentication and prohibits the user from accessing

the network over this port.
„

web portal — Serves the user a web page from the WX switch’s

nonvolatile storage for secure login to the network.

92

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

Defaults — The default tag-list is null (no tag values). The default
number of sessions is 1. The default fallthru authentication type is none.
Access — Enabled.
History—Version 3.0: Options added to change the fallthru
authentication type. This is the authentication type that MSS uses is the
user does not support 802.1X and is not authenticated by MAC
authentication. Version 4.0: Option for WebAAA fallthru authentication
type changed from web-auth to web-portal.
Usage — You cannot set a port’s type if the port is a member of a port
VLAN. To remove a port from a VLAN, use the clear vlan command. To
reset a port as a network port, use the clear port type command.
When you change port type, MSS applies default settings appropriate for
the port type. Table 18 lists the default settings that MSS applies when
you set a port’s type to ap.
Table 18 Wired Authentication Port Details
Port Parameter

Setting

VLAN membership

Removed from all VLANs. You cannot assign an MAP access
port to a VLAN. MSS automatically assigns MAP access ports
to VLANs based on user traffic.

Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP)

Not applicable

802.1X

Uses authentication parameters configured for users.

Port groups

Not applicable

IGMP snooping

Enabled as users are authenticated and join VLANs.

Maximum user
sessions

1 (one).

Fallthru
authentication type

None.

Examples — The following command sets port 2 for a wired
authentication user:
WX1200# set port type wired-auth 2
success: change accepted

set port type wired-auth

93

The following command sets port 7 for a wired authentication user and
subdivides the port into three virtual ports to support three simultaneous
user sessions:
WX1200# set port type wired-auth 7 1,2,3
success: change accepted

See Also
„

clear port type on page 65

„

set port type ap on page 87

94

CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS

5

VLAN COMMANDS

Use virtual LAN (VLAN) commands to configure and manage parameters
for individual port VLANs on network ports, and to display information
about clients roaming within a mobility domain.

Commands by
usage

This chapter presents VLAN commands alphabetically. Use Table 19 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 19 VLAN Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Creation

set vlan name on page 109

Ports

set vlan port on page 110
clear vlan on page 97
display vlan config on page 106

Roaming and Tunnels display roaming station on
page 102
display roaming vlan on page 104
display tunnel on page 105
Tunnel Affinity

set vlan tunnel-affinity on
page 111

FDB Entries

set fdb on page 107
display fdb on page 98
display fdb count on page 101
clear fdb on page 96

FDB Aging Timeout

set fdb agingtime on page 108
display fdb agingtime on page 101

96

CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS

clear fdb

Deletes an entry from the forwarding database (FDB).
Syntax — clear fdb {perm | static | dynamic |
port port-list} [vlan vlan-id] [tag tag-value]
„

„

„

„

„

perm — Clears permanent entries. A permanent entry does not age
out and remains in the database even after a reboot, reset, or power
cycle. You must specify a VLAN name or number with this option.
static — Clears static entries. A static entry does not age out, but is
removed from the database after a reboot, reset, or power cycle. You
must specify a VLAN name or number with this option.
dynamic — Clears dynamic entries. A dynamic entry is automatically
removed through aging or after a reboot, reset, or power cycle. You
are not required to specify a VLAN name or number with this option.
port port-list — Clears dynamic entries that match destination
ports in the port list. You are not required to specify a VLAN name or
number with this option.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number—required for removing

permanent and static entries. For dynamic entries, specifying a VLAN
removes entries that match only that VLAN. Otherwise, dynamic
entries that match all VLANs are removed.
„

tag tag-value — VLAN tag value that identifies a virtual port. If you

do not specify a tag value, MSS deletes only entries that match
untagged interfaces. Specifying a tag value deletes entries that match
only the specified tagged interfaces
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can delete forwarding database entries based on entry
type, port, or VLAN. A VLAN name or number is required for deleting
permanent or static entries.
Examples — The following command clears all static forwarding
database entries that match VLAN blue:
WX4400# clear fdb static vlan blue
success: change accepted.

clear vlan

97

The following command clears all dynamic forwarding database entries
that match all VLANs:
WX4400# clear fdb dynamic
success: change accepted.

The following command clears all dynamic forwarding database entries
that match ports 3 and 5:
WX4400# clear fdb port 3,5
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear vlan

„

display fdb on page 98

„

set fdb on page 107

Removes physical or virtual ports from a VLAN or removes a VLAN
entirely.
CAUTION: When you remove a VLAN, MSS completely removes the
VLAN from the configuration and also removes all configuration
information that uses the VLAN. If you want to remove only a specific
port from the VLAN, make sure you specify the port number in the
command.
Syntax — clear vlan vlan-id [port port-list [tag tag-value]]
„
„

„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number.

port port-list — List of physical ports. MSS removes the specified
ports from the VLAN. If you do not specify a list of ports, MSS removes
the VLAN entirely.
tag tag-value — Tag number that identifies a virtual port. MSS
removes only the specified virtual port from the specified physical
ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

98

CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS

Usage — If you do not specify a port-list, the entire VLAN is removed
from the configuration.
You cannot delete the default VLAN but you can remove ports from it. To
remove ports from the default VLAN, use the port port-list option.
Examples — The following command removes port 1 from VLAN green:
WX4400# clear vlan green port 1
This may disrupt user connectivity.
Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
success: change accepted.

The following command removes port 4, which uses tag value 69, from
VLAN red:
WX1200# clear vlan red port 4 tag 69
This may disrupt user connectivity.
Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
success: change accepted.

The following command completely removes VLAN marigold:
WX4400# clear vlan marigold
This may disrupt user connectivity.
Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
success: change accepted.

See Also

display fdb

„

set vlan port on page 110

„

display vlan config on page 106

Displays entries in the forwarding database.
Syntax — display fdb [mac-addr-glob [vlan vlan-id ]]
display fdb {perm | static | dynamic | system | all} [port
port-list | vlan vlan-id]
„

„

mac-addr-glob — A single MAC address or set of MAC addresses.
Specify a MAC address, or use the wildcard character (*) to specify a
set of MAC addresses. (For details, see “MAC Address Globs” on
page 27.)
vlan vlan-id — Name or number of a VLAN for which to display

entries.

display fdb

„

99

perm — Displays permanent entries. A permanent entry does not age

out and remains in the database even after a reboot, reset, or power
cycle.
„

static — Displays static entries. A static entry does not age out, but

is removed from the database after a reboot, reset, or power cycle.
„

„

„

„

dynamic — Displays dynamic entries. A dynamic entry is automatically
removed through aging or after a reboot, reset, or power cycle.
system — Displays system entries. A system entry is added by MSS.
For example, the authentication protocols can add entries for wired
and wireless authentication users.
all — Displays all entries in the database, or all the entries that match
a particular port or ports or a particular VLAN.

port port-list — Destination port(s) for which to display entries.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To display the entire forwarding database, enter the display
fdb command without options. To display only a portion of the database,
use optional parameters to specify the types of entries you want to
display.
Examples — The following command displays all entries in the
forwarding database:
WX4400# display fdb all
* = Static Entry. + = Permanent Entry. # = System Entry.
VLAN TAG Dest MAC/Route Des [CoS] Destination Ports
[Protocol Type]
---- ---- ------------------ ----- ----------------------------------------1
00:01:97:13:0b:1f
1
[ALL]
1
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff
*
3
[ALL]
1
00:0b:0e:02:76:f5
1
[ALL]
Total Matching FDB Entries Displayed = 3

The top line of the display identifies the characters to distinguish among
the entry types.

100

CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS

The following command displays all entries that begin with the MAC
address glob 00:
WX4400# display fdb 00:*
* = Static Entry. + = Permanent Entry. # = System Entry.
VLAN TAG Dest MAC/Route Des [CoS] Destination Ports
[Protocol Type]
---- ---- ------------------ ----- ----------------------------------------1
00:01:97:13:0b:1f
1
[ALL]
1
00:0b:0e:02:76:f5
1
[ALL]
Total Matching FDB Entries Displayed = 2

Table 20 describes the fields in the display fdb output.
Table 20 Output for display fdb
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN number.

TAG

VLAN tag value. If the interface is untagged, the TAG field
is blank.

Dest MAC/Route Des

MAC address of this forwarding entry’s destination.

CoS

Type of entry. The entry types are explained in the first
row of the command output.
Note: This Class of Service (CoS) value is not associated
with MSS quality of service (QoS) features.

Destination Ports

Wireless LAN switch port associated with the entry. A WX
switch sends traffic to the destination MAC address
through this port.

Protocol Type

Layer 3 protocol address types that can be mapped to this
entry.

Total Matching FDB
Entries Displayed

Number of entries displayed by the command.

See Also
„

clear fdb on page 96

„

set fdb on page 107

display fdb agingtime

display fdb
agingtime

101

Displays the aging timeout period for forwarding database entries.
Syntax — display fdb agingtime [vlan vlan-id]
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a

VLAN, the aging timeout period for each VLAN is displayed.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the aging timeout period
for all VLANs:
WX1200# display fdb agingtime
VLAN 2 aging time = 600 sec
VLAN 1 aging time = 300 sec

Because the forwarding database aging timeout period can be
configured only on an individual VLAN basis, the command lists the aging
timeout period for each VLAN separately.
See Also
„

display fdb count

set fdb agingtime on page 108

Lists the number of entries in the forwarding database.
Syntax — display fdb count {perm | static | dynamic}
[vlan vlan-id]
„

perm — Lists the number of permanent entries. A permanent entry

does not age out and remains in the database even after a reboot,
reset, or power cycle.
„

„

static — Lists the number of static entries. A static entry does not
age out, but is removed from the database after a reboot, reset, or
power cycle.
dynamic — Lists the number of dynamic entries. A dynamic entry is
automatically removed through aging or after a reboot, reset, or
power cycle.

102

CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. Entries are listed for only the
specified VLAN.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
The following command lists the number of dynamic entries that the
forwarding database contains:
WX1200# display fdb count dynamic
Total Matching Entries = 2

See Also
„

display roaming
station

display fdb on page 98

Shows a list of the stations roaming to the wireless LAN switch through a
VLAN tunnel.
Syntax — display roaming station
[vlan vlan-id] [peer ip-addr]
„

vlan vlan-id — Output is restricted to stations using this VLAN.

„

peer ip-addr — Output is restricted to stations tunnelling through

this peer WX switch in the Mobility Domain.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The output displays roaming stations within the previous 1
second.
Examples — To display all stations roaming to the WX switch, type the
following command:
WX4400# display roaming
User Name
----------------------redsqa

station
Station IP Addr Old AP MAC
VLAN
State
--------------- ----------------- -------------- -----0.0.0.0
00:00:00:00:00:00 violet
Up

display roaming station

103

Table 21 describes the fields in the display.
Table 21 Output for display roaming station
Field

Description

User Name

Name of the user. This is the name used for authentication. The
name resides in a RADIUS server database or the local user
database on a wireless LAN switch.

Station IP Addr IP address of the user WX switch.
Old AP MAC

MAC address of the access point from which the station is
roaming or attempting to roam.
Note: This field is applicable only for clients that reassociate with
this WX switch from another WX switch.

VLAN

Name of the VLAN to which the RADIUS server or WX switch
local user database assigned the user.

State

State of the session:
„

Setup — Station is attempting to roam to this WX switch.
This switch has asked the WX from which the station is
roaming for the station’s session information and is waiting
for a reply.

„

Up — MSS has established a tunnel between the WX switches
and the station has successfully roamed to this WX over the
tunnel.

„

Chck — This WX switch is in the process of accepting a
reassociation request from the roaming peer WX switch for a
station currently roaming to the peer switch.

„

TChck — This WX switch is in the process of accepting a
reassociation request from the roaming peer WX switch for a
station currently roaming to this switch.

„

WInd — This WX switch is waiting for network congestion to
clear before sending the roaming indication to the roaming
peer WX switch.

„

WResp — This WX switch is waiting for network congestion
to clear before sending the roaming response to the roaming
peer WX switch.

See Also
„

display roaming vlan on page 104

104

CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS

display roaming
vlan

Shows all VLANs in the mobility domain, the WX switches servicing the
VLANs, and their tunnel affinity values configured on each switch for the
VLANs.
Syntax — display roaming vlan
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command shows the current roaming
VLANs:
WX4400# display roaming vlan
VLAN
WX
Affinity
---------------- --------------- -------vlan-cs
192.168.14.2
5
vlan-eng
192.168.14.4
5
vlan-fin
192.168.14.2
5
vlan-it
192.168.14.4
5
vlan-it
192.168.14.2
5
vlan-pm
192.168.14.2
5
vlan-sm
192.168.14.2
5
vlan-tp
192.168.14.4
5
vlan-tp
192.168.14.2
5

Table 22 describes the fields in the display.
Table 22 Output for display roaming vlan
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN name.

WX

System IP address of the wireless LAN switch on which the
VLAN is configured.

Affinity

Preference of this WX switch for forwarding user traffic for
the VLAN. A higher number indicates a greater preference.

See Also
„

display roaming station on page 102

„

display vlan config on page 106

display tunnel

display tunnel

105

Shows the tunnels from the wireless LAN switch where you type the
command.
Syntax — display tunnel
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display all tunnels from a WX switch to other WX
switches in the Mobility Domain, type the following command.

WX4400# display
VLAN
--------------vlan-eng

tunnel
Local Address
Remote Address State
Port LVID RVID
--------------- --------------- ------- ----- ----- ----192.168.14.2
192.168.14.4
DORMANT 1024 4096
130

Table 23 describes the fields in the display.
Table 23 Output for display tunnel
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN name.

Local Address

IP address of the local end of the tunnel. This is the system
IP address of the wireless access switch where you enter
the command.

Remote Address

IP address of the remote end of the tunnel. This is the
system IP address of another WX switch in the mobility
domain.

State

Tunnel state:
„

Up

„

Dormant

Port

Tunnel port ID.

LVID

Local VLAN ID.

RVID

Remote VLAN ID.

See Also
„

display vlan config on page 106

106

CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS

display vlan config

Shows VLAN information.
Syntax — display vlan config [vlan-id]
„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a VLAN,
information for all VLANs is displayed.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays information for VLAN
burgundy:
WX1200# display vlan config burgundy
Admin VLAN Tunl
VLAN Name
Status State Affin Port
Tag
---- ---------------- ------ ----- ----- ---------------- ----2 burgundy
Up
Up
5
2
none
3
none
4
none
6
none
t:10.10.40.4
none

Table 24 describes the fields in this display.
Table 24 Output for display vlan config
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN number.

Name

VLAN name.

Admin Status Administrative status of the VLAN:

VLAN State

„

Down — The VLAN is disabled.

„

Up — The VLAN is enabled.

Link status of the VLAN:
„

Down — The VLAN is not connected.

„

Up — The VLAN is connected.

Port
State
----Up
Up
Up
Up
Up

set fdb

107

Table 24 Output for display vlan config (continued)
Field

Description

Tunl Affin

Tunnel affinity value assigned to the VLAN.

Port

Member port of the VLAN. The port can be a physical port or a
virtual port.
„

Physical ports are 10/100 Ethernet or gigabit Ethernet ports on
the WX switch, and are listed by port number.

„

Virtual ports are tunnels to other WX switches in a mobility
domain, and are listed as follows: t:ip-addr, where ip-addr is the
system IP address of the WX switch at the other end of the
tunnel.

Note: This field can include MAP access ports and wired
authentication ports, because MSS dynamically adds these ports to a
VLAN when handling user traffic for the VLAN.
Tag

Tag value assigned to the port.

Port State

Link state of the port:
„

Down — The port is not connected.

„

Up — The port is connected.

See Also

set fdb

„

clear vlan on page 97

„

set vlan name on page 109

„

set vlan port on page 110

„

set vlan tunnel-affinity on page 111

Adds a permanent or static entry to the forwarding database.
Syntax — set fdb {perm | static}
mac-addr port port-list vlan vlan-id [tag tag-value]
„

perm — Adds a permanent entry. A permanent entry does not age out

and remains in the database even after a reboot, reset, or power cycle.
„

„

„

static — Adds a static entry. A static entry does not age out, but is
removed from the database after a reboot, reset, or power cycle.
mac-addr — Destination MAC address of the entry. Use colons to
separate the octets (for example, 00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).
port port-list — List of physical destination ports for which to add

the entry. A separate entry is added for each port you specify.

108

CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS

„

„

vlan vlan-id — Name or number of a VLAN of which the port is a
member. The entry is added only for the specified VLAN.
tag tag-value — VLAN tag value that identifies a virtual port. You

can specify a number from 1 through 4095. If you do not specify a tag
value, an entry is created for an untagged interface only. If you specify
a tag value, an entry is created only for the specified tagged interface.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You cannot add a multicast or broadcast address as a
permanent or static FDB entry.
Examples — The following command adds a permanent entry for MAC
address 00:11:22:aa:bb:cc on ports 3 and 5 in VLAN blue:
WX1200# set fdb perm 00:11:22:aa:bb:cc port 3,5 vlan blue
success: change accepted.

The following command adds a static entry for MAC address
00:2b:3c:4d:5e:6f on port 1 in the default VLAN:
WX4400# set fdb static 00:2b:3c:4d:5e:6f port 1 vlan default
success: change accepted.

See Also

set fdb agingtime

„

clear fdb on page 96

„

display fdb on page 98

Changes the aging timeout period for dynamic entries in the forwarding
database.
Syntax — set fdb agingtime vlan-id age seconds
„

„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number. The timeout period change
applies only to entries that match the specified VLAN.
age seconds — Value for the timeout period, in seconds. You can

specify a value from 0 through 1,000,000. If you change the timeout
period to 0, aging is disabled.

set vlan name

109

Defaults — The aging timeout period is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the aging timeout period
to 600 seconds for entries that match VLAN orange:
WX4400# set fdb agingtime orange age 600
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set vlan name

display fdb agingtime on page 101

Creates a VLAN and assigns a number and name to it.
Syntax — set vlan vlan-num name name
„

vlan-num — VLAN number. You can specify a number from 2 through

4095.
„

name — String up to 16 alphabetic characters long.

Defaults — VLAN 1 is named default by default. No other VLANs have
default names.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must assign a name to a VLAN (other than the default
VLAN) before you can add ports to the VLAN.
3Com recommends that you do not use the name default. This name is
already used for VLAN 1. 3Com also recommends that you do not
rename the default VLAN.
You cannot use a number as the first character in a VLAN name. 3Com
recommends that you do not use the same name with different
capitalizations for VLANs. For example, do not configure two separate
VLANs with the names red and RED.

110

CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS

VLAN names are case-sensitive for RADIUS authorization when a client
roams to a wireless LAN switch. If the WX switch is not configured with
the VLAN the client is on, but is configured with a VLAN that has the
same spelling but different capitalization, authorization for the client fails.
For example, if the client is on VLAN red but the WX switch to which the
client roams has VLAN RED instead, RADIUS authorization fails.
Examples — The following command assigns the name marigold to
VLAN 3:
WX4400# set vlan 3 name marigold
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set vlan port

set vlan port on page 110

Assigns one or more network ports to a VLAN. You also can add a virtual
port to each network port by adding a tag value to the network port.
Syntax — set vlan vlan-id port port-list [tag tag-value]
„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number.

„

port port-list — List of physical ports.

„

tag tag-value — Tag value that identifies a virtual port. You can

specify a value from 1 through 4095.
By default, no ports are members of any VLANs. A wireless LAN switch
cannot forward traffic on the network until you configure VLANs and add
network ports to the VLANs.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can combine this command with the set port name
command to assign the name and add the ports at the same time.
If you do not specify a tag value, the WX switch sends untagged frames
for the VLAN. If you do specify a tag value, the WX sends tagged frames
only for the VLAN.

set vlan tunnel-affinity

111

If you do specify a tag value, 3Com recommends that you use the same
value as the VLAN number. MSS does not require the VLAN number and
tag value to be the same but some other switches do.
Examples — The following command assigns the name beige to VLAN
11 and adds ports 1 through 3 to the VLAN:
WX1200# set vlan 11 name beige port 1-3
success: change accepted.

The following command adds port 6 to VLAN beige and assigns tag value
86 to the port:
WX1200# set vlan beige port 6 tag 86
success: change accepted.

See Also

set vlan
tunnel-affinity

„

clear vlan on page 97

„

display vlan config on page 106

„

set vlan name on page 109

Changes a wireless LAN switch’s preferability within a mobility domain for
tunneling user traffic for a VLAN. When a user roams to a WX switch that
is not a member of the user’s VLAN, the WX can forward the user traffic
by tunneling to another WX switch that is a member of the VLAN.
Syntax — set vlan vlan-id tunnel-affinity num
„
„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number.
num — Preference of this switch for forwarding user traffic for the
VLAN. You can specify a value from 1 through 10. A higher number
indicates a greater preference.

Defaults — Each VLAN on a WX switch’s network ports has an affinity
value of 5 by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Increasing a WX switch’s affinity value increases the WX’s
preferability for forwarding user traffic for the VLAN.

112

CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS

If more than one WX switch has the highest affinity value, MSS randomly
selects one of the WX switches for the tunnel.
Examples — The following command changes the VLAN affinity for
VLAN beige to 10:
WX4400# set vlan beige tunnel-affinity 10
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display roaming vlan on page 104

„

display vlan config on page 106

6

IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Use IP services commands to configure and manage IP interfaces,
management services, the Domain Name Service (DNS), Network Time
Protocol (NTP), and aliases, and to ping a host or trace a route.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents IP services commands alphabetically. Use Table 25
to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 25 IP Services Commands by Usage
Type

Command

IP Interface

set interface on page 143
set interface dhcp-client on page 144
set interface status on page 146
display interface on page 126
display dhcp-client on page 182
clear interface on page 115

System IP Address

set system ip-address on page 179
clear system ip-address on page 124

IP Route

set ip route on page 150
display ip route on page 131
clear ip route on page 118

SSH Management

set ip ssh server on page 155
set ip ssh on page 153
set ip ssh idle-timeout on page 155
set ip ssh absolute-timeout on page 154

Telnet Management set ip telnet on page 156
set ip telnet server on page 157

114

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Table 25 IP Services Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command
display ip telnet on page 133
clear ip telnet on page 119

HTTPS Management set ip https server on page 150
display ip https on page 129
DNS

set ip dns on page 147
set ip dns domain on page 148
set ip dns server on page 149
display ip dns on page 128
clear ip dns domain on page 117
clear ip dns server on page 117

IP Alias

set ip alias on page 147
display ip alias on page 127
clear ip alias on page 116

Time and Date

set timedate on page 180
set timezone on page 181
set summertime on page 177
display timedate on page 138
display timezone on page 139
display summertime on page 138
clear timezone on page 124
clear snmp usm on page 122

NTP

set ntp on page 158
set ntp server on page 158
set ntp update-interval on page 159
display ntp on page 134
clear ntp server on page 119
clear ntp update-interval on page 120

ARP

set arp on page 141
set arp agingtime on page 142
telnet on page 195

SNMP

set snmp protocol on page 172
set snmp security on page 173

clear interface

Table 25 IP Services Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp usm on page 174
set snmp profile on page 167
set snmp notify target on page 162
set ip snmp server on page 152
display snmp status on page 191
display snmp community on page 186
display snmp usm on page 193
display snmp notify profile on page 188
display snmp notify target on page 189
display snmp counters on page 187
clear snmp community on page 121
clear snmp usm on page 122
clear snmp profile on page 122
clear snmp notify target on page 121

Ping

ping on page 140

Telnet Client

telnet on page 195

Traceroute

traceroute on page 196

DHCP server

set interface dhcp-server on page 145
display dhcp-server on page 183

clear interface

Removes an IP interface.
Syntax — clear interface vlan-id ip
„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

115

116

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Usage — If the interface you want to remove is configured as the system
IP address, removing the address can interfere with system tasks that use
the system IP address, including the following:
„

Mobility domain operations

„

Topology reporting for dual-homed MAP access points

„

Default source IP address used in unsolicited communications such as
AAA accounting reports and SNMP traps

Examples — The following command removes the IP interface
configured on VLAN mauve:
WX1200# clear interface mauve ip
success: cleared ip on vlan mauve

See Also

clear ip alias

„

set interface on page 143

„

set interface status on page 146

„

display interface on page 126

Removes an alias, which is a string that represents an IP address.
Syntax — clear ip alias name
name — Alias name

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the alias server1:
WX1200# clear ip alias server1
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display ip alias on page 127

clear ip dns domain

clear ip dns domain

117

Removes the default DNS domain name.
Syntax — clear ip dns domain
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the default DNS domain
name from a WX switch:
WX1200# clear ip dns domain
Default DNS domain name cleared.

See Also

clear ip dns server

„

clear ip dns server on page 117

„

display ip dns on page 128

„

set ip dns on page 147

„

set ip dns domain on page 148

„

set ip dns server on page 149

Removes a DNS server from a WX switch configuration.
Syntax — clear ip dns server ip-addr
„

ip-addr — IP address of a DNS server.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes DNS server 10.10.10.69
from a WX switch’s configuration:
WX4400# clear ip dns server 10.10.10.69
success: change accepted.

118

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

See Also

clear ip route

„

clear ip dns domain on page 117

„

display ip dns on page 128

„

set ip dns on page 147

„

set ip dns domain on page 148

„

set ip dns server on page 149

Removes a route from the IP route table.
Syntax — clear ip route {default | ip-addr mask |
ip-addr/mask-length} gateway
„

default — Default route.

default is an alias for IP address 0.0.0.0/0.
„

ip-addr mask — IP address and subnet mask for the route

destination, in dotted decimal notation (for example, 10.10.10.10
255.255.255.0).
„

„

ip-addr/mask-length — IP address and subnet mask length in CIDR
format (for example, 10.10.10.10/24).
gateway — IP address, DNS hostname, or alias of the next-hop router.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the route to destination
10.10.10.68/24 through gateway router 10.10.10.1:
WX1200# clear ip route 10.10.10.68/24 10.10.10.1
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display ip route on page 131

„

set ip route on page 150

clear ip telnet

clear ip telnet

119

Resets the Telnet server’s TCP port number to its default value. A WX
switch listens for Telnet management traffic on the Telnet server port.
Syntax — clear ip telnet
Defaults — The default Telnet port number is 23.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command resets the TCP port number for
Telnet management traffic to its default:
WX4400# clear ip telnet
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear ntp server

„

display ip https on page 129

„

display ip telnet on page 133

„

set ip https server on page 150

„

set ip telnet on page 156

„

set ip telnet server on page 157

Removes an NTP server from a WX switch configuration.
Syntax — clear ntp server {ip-addr | all}
„

„

ip-addr — IP address of the server to remove, in dotted decimal
notation.
all — Removes all NTP servers from the configuration.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

120

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Examples — The following command removes NTP server
192.168.40.240 from a WX switch configuration:
WX4400# clear ntp server 192.168.40.240
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear ntp
update-interval

„

clear ntp update-interval on page 120

„

display ntp on page 134

„

set ntp on page 158

„

set ntp server on page 158

„

set ntp update-interval on page 159

Resets the NTP update interval to the default value.
Syntax — clear ntp update-interval
Defaults — The default NTP update interval is 64 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To reset the NTP interval to the default value, type the
following command:
WX4400# clear ntp update-interval
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear ntp server on page 119

„

display ntp on page 134

„

set ntp on page 158

„

set ntp server on page 158

„

set ntp update-interval on page 159

clear snmp community

clear snmp
community

121

Clears an SNMP community string.
Syntax — clear snmp community name comm-string
„

comm-string — Name of the SNMP community you want to clear.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears community string
setswitch2:
WX-1200# clear snmp community name setswitch2
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear snmp notify
target

„

set snmp community on page 160

„

display snmp community on page 186

Clears an SNMP notification target.
Syntax — clear snmp notify target target-num
„

target-num — ID of the target.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears notification target 3:
WX-1200# clear snmp notify target 3
success: change accepted.

122

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

See Also

clear snmp profile

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

„

display snmp notify target on page 189

Clears an SNMP notification profile.
Syntax — clear snmp profile profile-name
„

profile-name — Name of the notification profile you are clearing.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears notification profile
snmpprof_rfdetect:
WX-1200# clear snmp profile snmpprof_rfdetect
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set snmp profile on page 167

„

display snmp notify profile on page 188

clear snmp trap
receiver

This command is deprecated in MSS Version 4.0. To clear an SNMP
notification target (also called trap receiver), see clear snmp notify
target on page 121.

clear snmp usm

Clears an SNMPv3 user.
Syntax — clear snmp usm usm-username
„

usm-username — Name of the SNMPv3 user you want to clear.

Defaults — None.

clear summertime

123

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears SNMPv3 user snmpmgr1:
WX-1200# clear snmp usm snmpmgr1
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear summertime

„

set snmp usm on page 174

„

display snmp usm on page 193

Clears the summertime setting from a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — clear summertime
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To clear the summertime setting from a WX switch, type
the following command:
WX1200# clear summertime
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear timezone on page 124

„

display summertime on page 138

„

display timedate on page 138

„

display timezone on page 139

„

set summertime on page 177

„

set timedate on page 180

„

set timezone on page 181

124

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

clear system
ip-address

Clears the system IP address.
CAUTION: Clearing the system IP address disrupts the system tasks that
use the address.
Syntax — clear system ip-address
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Clearing the system IP address can interfere with system tasks
that use the system IP address, including the following:
„

Mobility Domain operations

„

Topology reporting for dual-homed MAP access points

„

Default source IP address used in unsolicited communications such as
AAA accounting reports and SNMP traps

Examples — To clear the system IP address, type the following
command:
WX1200# clear system ip-address
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear timezone

„

display system on page 42

„

set system ip-address on page 179

Clears the time offset for the wireless LAN switch’s real-time clock from
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). UTC is also know as Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
Syntax — clear timezone
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

display arp

125

History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To return the WX switch’s real-time clock to UTC, type the
following command:
WX4400# clear timezone
success: change accepted.

See Also

display arp

„

clear snmp usm on page 122

„

set summertime on page 177

„

set timedate on page 180

„

set timezone on page 181

„

display summertime on page 138

„

display timedate on page 138

„

display timezone on page 139

Shows the ARP table.
Syntax — display arp [ip-addr]
„

ip-addr — IP address.

Defaults — If you do not specify an IP address, the whole ARP table is
displayed.
Usage — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays ARP entries:
WX4400# display arp
ARP aging time: 1200 seconds
Host
-----------------------------10.5.4.51
10.5.4.53

HW Address
VLAN
----------------- ----00:0b:0e:02:76:f5
1
00:0b:0e:02:76:f7
1

Table 26 describes the fields in this display.

Type
------DYNAMIC
LOCAL

State
-------RESOLVED
RESOLVED

126

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Table 26 Output for display arp
Field

Description

ARP aging time

Number of seconds a dynamic entry can remain unused
before MSS removes the entry from the ARP table.

Host

IP address, hostname, or alias.

HW Address

MAC address mapped to the IP address, hostname, or alias.

VLAN

VLAN the entry is for.

Type

Entry type:

State

„

DYNAMIC — Entry was learned from network traffic and
ages out if unused for longer than the ARP aging
timeout.

„

LOCAL — Entry for the WX switch’s MAC address. Each
VLAN has one local entry for the WX switch’s MAC
address.

„

PERMANENT — Entry does not age out and remains in
the configuration even following a reboot.

„

STATIC — Entry does not age out but is removed after a
reboot.

Entry state:
„

RESOLVING — MSS sent an ARP request for the entry
and is waiting for the reply.

„

RESOLVED — Entry is resolved.

See Also

display interface

„

set arp on page 141

„

set arp agingtime on page 142

Shows the IP interfaces configured on the wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — display interface [vlan-id]
„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number.

Defaults — If you do not specify a VLAN ID, interfaces for all VLANs are
displayed.
Usage — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

display ip alias

127

Examples — The following command displays all the IP interfaces
configured on a WX switch:
WX4400# display interface
VLAN Name
Address
---- --------------- --------------1 default
10.10.10.10
2 mauve
10.10.20.10

Mask
--------------255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0

Enabled
------YES
NO

State
----Up
Down

Table 27 describes the fields in this display.
Table 27 Output for display interface
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN number

Name

VLAN name

Address

IP address

Mask

Subnet mask

Enabled

Administrative state:

State

„

YES (enabled)

„

NO (disabled)

Link state:
„

Up (operational)

„

Down (unavailable)

See Also

display ip alias

„

set interface on page 143

„

set interface status on page 146

Shows the IP aliases configured on the wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — display ip alias [name]
„

name — Alias string.

Defaults — If you do not specify an alias name, all aliases are displayed.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

128

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Examples — The following command displays all the aliases configured
on a WX switch:
WX4400# display ip alias
Name
IP Address
--------------------------------------HR1
192.168.1.2
payroll
192.168.1.3
radius1
192.168.7.2

Table 28 describes the fields in this display.
Table 28 Output for display ip alias
Field

Description

Name

Alias string.

IP Address

IP address associated with the alias.

See Also

display ip dns

„

clear ip alias on page 116

„

set ip alias on page 147

Shows the DNS servers the wireless LAN switch is configured to use.
Syntax — display ip dns
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the DNS information:
WX4400# display ip dns
Domain Name: example.com
DNS Status: enabled
IP Address
Type
----------------------------------10.1.1.1
PRIMARY
10.1.1.2
SECONDARY
10.1.2.1
SECONDARY

display ip https

Table 29 describes the fields in this display.
Table 29 Output for display ip dns
Field

Description

Domain Name

Default domain name configured on the WX switch

DNS Status

Status of the WX switch’s DNS client:
„

Enabled

„

Disabled

IP Address

IP address of the DNS server

Type

Server type:
„

PRIMARY

„

SECONDARY

See Also

display ip https

„

clear ip dns domain on page 117

„

clear ip dns server on page 117

„

set ip dns on page 147

„

set ip dns domain on page 148

„

set ip dns server on page 149

Shows information about the HTTPS management port.
Syntax — display ip https
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

129

130

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Examples — The following command shows the status and port number
for the HTTPS management interface to the WX switch:
WX4400# display ip https
HTTPS is enabled
HTTPS is set to use port 443
Last 10 Connections:
IP Address
Last Connected
Time Ago (s)
---------------------------------- -----------10.10.10.56
2003/05/09 15:51:26 pst
349

Table 30 describes the fields in this display.
Table 30 Output for display ip https
Field

Description

HTTPS is
enabled/disabled

State of the HTTPS server:
„

Enabled

„

Disabled

HTTPS is set to use port TCP port number on which the WX switch listens for
HTTPS connections.
Last 10 connections

List of the last 10 devices to establish connections to
the WX switch’s HTTPS server.

IP Address

IP address of the device that established the
connection.
If a browser connects to a WX switch from behind a
proxy, then only the proxy IP address is shown. If
multiple browsers connect using the same proxy, the
proxy address appears only once in the output.

Last Connected

Time when the WX switch established the HTTPS
connection to the WX switch.

Time Ago (s)

Number of seconds since the device established the
HTTPS connection to the WX switch.

See Also
„

clear ip telnet on page 119

„

display ip telnet on page 133

„

set ip https server on page 150

„

set ip telnet on page 156

„

set ip telnet server on page 157

display ip route

display ip route

131

Shows the IP route table.
Syntax — display ip route [destination]
„

destination — Route destination IP address, in dotted decimal

notation.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When you add an IP interface to a VLAN that is up, MSS adds
direct and local routes for the interface to the route table. If the VLAN is
down, MSS does not add the routes. If you add an interface to a VLAN
but the routes for that interface do not appear in the route table, use the
display vlan config command to check the VLAN state.
If you add a static route and the route’s state is shown as Down, use the
display interface command to verify that the route has an IP interface in
the gateway router’s subnet. MSS cannot resolve a static route unless one
of the WX switch’s VLANs has an interface in the gateway router’s
subnet. If the WX switch has such an interface but the static route is still
down, use the display vlan config command to check the state of the
VLAN’s ports.
Examples — The following command shows all routes in a WX switch’s
IP route table:
WX4400# display ip route
Router table for IPv4
Destination/Mask
Proto
Metric NH-Type Gateway
VLAN:Interface
__________________ _______ ______ _______ _______________ _______________
0.0.0.0/ 0
0.0.0.0/ 0
10.0.2.1/24
10.0.2.1/32
10.0.2.255/32
224.0.0.0/ 4

Static
Static
IP
IP
IP
IP

1
2
0
0
0
0

Router
Router
Direct
Direct
Direct
Local

10.0.1.17
10.0.2.17

Table 31 describes the fields in this display.

Down
vlan:2:ip
vlan:2:ip
vlan:2:ip:10.0.1.1/24
vlan:2:ip:10.0.1.1/24
MULTICAST

132

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Table 31 Output of display ip route
Field

Description

Destination/Mask IP address and subnet mask of the route destination.
The 244.0.0.0 route is automatically added by MSS and
supports the IGMP snooping feature.
Proto

Protocol that added the route to the IP route table. The protocol
can be one of the following:
„

IP — MSS added the route.

„

Static — An administrator added the route.

Metric

Cost for using the route.

NH-Type

Next-hop type:

Gateway

„

Local — Route is for a local interface. MSS adds the route
when you configure an IP address on the WX switch.

„

Direct — Route is for a locally attached subnet. MSS adds
the route when you add an interface in the same subnet to
the WX switch.

„

Router — Route is for a remote destination. A WX switch
forwards traffic for the destination to the gateway router.

Next-hop router for reaching the route destination.
This field applies only to static routes.

VLAN:Interface

Destination VLAN, protocol type, and IP address of the route.
Because direct routes are for local interfaces, a destination IP
address is not listed.
The destination for the IP multicast route is MULTICAST.
For static routes, the value Down means the WX switch does not
have an interface to the destination’s next-hop router. To
provide an interface, configure an IP interface that is in the same
IP subnet as the next-hop router. The IP interface must be on a
VLAN containing the port that is attached to the gateway
router.

See Also
„

clear ip route on page 118

„

display interface on page 126

„

display vlan config on page 106

„

set interface on page 143

„

set ip route on page 150

display ip telnet

display ip telnet

133

Shows information about the Telnet management port.
Syntax — display ip telnet
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command shows the status and port number
for the Telnet management interface to the WX switch:
WX4400> display ip telnet
Server Status
Port
---------------------------------Enabled
23

Table 32 describes the fields in this display.
Table 32 Output for display ip telnet
Field

Description

Server Status State of the HTTPS server:

Port

„

Enabled

„

Disabled

TCP port number on which the WX switch listens for Telnet
management traffic.

See Also
„

clear ip telnet on page 119

„

display ip https on page 129

„

set ip https server on page 150

„

set ip telnet on page 156

„

set ip telnet server on page 157

134

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

display ntp

Shows NTP client information.
Syntax — display ntp
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display NTP information for a WX switch, type the
following command:
WX4400> display ntp
NTP client: enabled
Current update-interval: 20(secs)
Current time: Fri Feb 06 2004, 12:02:57
Timezone is set to 'PST', offset from UTC is -8:0 hours.
Summertime is enabled.
Last NTP update: Fri Feb 06 2004, 12:02:46
NTP Server
Peer state
Local State
--------------------------------------------------192.168.1.5
SYSPEER
SYNCED

Table 33 describes the fields in this display.
Table 33 Output for display ntp
Field

Description

NTP client

State of the NTP client. The state can be one of the
following:
„

Enabled

„

Disabled

Current update-interval Number of seconds between queries sent by the WX
switch to the NTP servers for updates.
Current time

System time that was current on the WX switch when you
pressed Enter after typing the display ntp command.

Timezone

Time zone configured on the WX switch. MSS offsets the
time reported by the NTP server based on the time zone.
This field is displayed only if you change the time zone.

display ntp

135

Table 33 Output for display ntp (continued)
Field

Description

Summertime

Summertime period configured on the WX switch. MSS
offsets the system time +1 hour and returns it to standard
time for daylight savings time or a similar summertime
period that you set.
This field is displayed only if you enable summertime.

Last NTP update

Time when the WX switch received the most recent
update from an NTP server.

NTP Server

IP address of the NTP server.

Peer state

State of the NTP session from the point of view of the NTP
server:

Local state

„

CORRECT

„

REJECT

„

SELCAND

„

SYNCCAND

„

SYSPEER

State of the NTP session from the point of view of the WX
switch’s NTP client:
„

INITED

„

START

„

SYNCED

See Also
„

clear ntp server on page 119

„

clear snmp usm on page 122

„

clear timezone on page 124

„

display timezone on page 139

„

set ntp on page 158

„

set ntp server on page 158

„

set summertime on page 177

„

set timezone on page 181

136

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

display snmp
configuration

Shows SNMP settings on a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — display snmp configuration
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display SNMP settings on a WX switch, type the
following command:
WX1200# display snmp configuration
Snmp agent is enabled
System Name: WX1200
System location:
System contact:
Trap Name
---------------------------------LinkDownTraps
LinkUpTraps
AuthenTraps
DeviceFailTraps
DeviceOkayTraps
PoEFailTraps
MAPTimeoutTraps
MAPBootTraps
MobilityDomainJoinTraps
MobilityDomainTimeoutTraps
MichaelMICFailureTraps
RFDetectRogueAPTraps
RFDetectAdhocUserTraps
RFDetectRogueDisappearTraps
ClientAuthenticationFailureTraps
ClientAuthorizationFailureTraps
ClientAssociationFailureTraps
ClientAuthorizationSuccessTraps
ClientClearedTraps
ClientDeAssociationTraps
ClientRoamingTraps
AutoTuneRadioPowerChangeTraps
AutoTuneRadioChannelChangeTraps
CounterMeasureStartTraps

Enabled
------YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES

display snmp configuration

CounterMeasureStopTraps
ClientDot1xFailureTraps
Community Access
---------------read-only
read-write

YES
YES

Community Name
-------------public
private

Table 34 describes the fields in this display.
Table 34 Output of display snmp configuration
Field

Description

Snmp agent is

State of the SNMP agent on the WX switch:
„

Enabled

„

Disabled

System Name

String configured by the set system name command.

System location

String configured by the set system location command.

System contact

String configured by the set system contact command.

System description

WX switch model.

Trap Receiver

IP address of each trap receiver.

Trap Name

SNMP traps supported by MSS.

Enabled

State of each trap:
„

Yes

„

No

Community Access Type of access for an SNMP community.

See Also
„

set ip snmp server on page 152

„

set port trap on page 86

„

set snmp community on page 160

„

set snmp profile on page 167

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

„

set system contact on page 54

„

set system location on page 58

„

set system name on page 58

137

138

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

display
summertime

Shows a wireless LAN switch’s offset from its real-time clock.
Syntax — display summertime
Defaults — There is no summertime offset by default.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display the summertime setting on a WX switch, type
the following command:

WX1200# display summertime
Summertime is enabled, and set to 'PDT'.
Start : Sun Apr 04 2004, 02:00:00
End
: Sun Oct 31 2004, 02:00:00
Offset : 60 minutes
Recurring : yes, starting at 2:00 am of first Sunday of April
and ending at 2:00 am on last Sunday of October.

See Also

display timedate

„

clear snmp usm on page 122

„

clear timezone on page 124

„

display timedate on page 138

„

display timezone on page 139

„

set summertime on page 177

„

set timedate on page 180

„

set timezone on page 181

Shows the date and time of day currently set on a wireless LAN switch’s
real-time clock.
Syntax — display timedate
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

display timezone

139

Examples — To display the time and date set on a WX switch’s real-time
clock, type the following command:
WX1200# display timedate
Sun Feb 29 2004, 23:59:02 PST

See Also

display timezone

„

clear snmp usm on page 122

„

clear timezone on page 124

„

display summertime on page 138

„

display timezone on page 139

„

set summertime on page 177

„

set timedate on page 180

„

set timezone on page 181

Shows the time offset for the real-time clock from UTC on a wireless LAN
switch.
Syntax — display timezone
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display the offset from UTC, type the following
command:
WX4400# display timezone
Timezone set to 'pst', offset from UTC is -8 hours

See Also
„

clear snmp usm on page 122

„

clear timezone on page 124

„

display summertime on page 138

„

display timedate on page 138

„

set summertime on page 177

140

ping

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

„

set timedate on page 180

„

set timezone on page 181

Tests IP connectivity between a wireless LAN switch and another device.
MSS sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo packet to
the specified WX switch and listens for a reply packet.
Syntax — ping host [count num-packets ] [dnf] [flood]
[interval time] [size size] [source-ip ip-addr | vlan-name]
„

host — IP address, MAC address, hostname, alias, or user to ping.

„

count num-packets — Number of ping packets to send. You can

specify from 0 through 2,147,483,647. If you enter 0, MSS pings
continuously until you interrupt the command.
„

dnf — Enables the Do Not Fragment bit in the ping packet to prevent

the packet from being fragmented.
„

flood — Sends new ping packets as quickly as replies are received, or

100 times per second, whichever is greater.
Use the flood option sparingly. This option creates a lot of traffic and can
affect other traffic on the network.
„

interval time — Time interval between ping packets, in

milliseconds. You can specify from 100 through 10,000.
„

size size — Packet size, in bytes. You can specify from 56 through

65,507.
Because the WX switch adds header information, the ICMP packet size is
8 bytes larger than the size you specify.
„

source-ip ip-addr — IP address, in dotted decimal notation, to use

as the source IP address in the ping packets.
„

source-ip vlan-name — VLAN name to use as the ping source. MSS

uses the IP address configured on the VLAN as the source IP address in
the ping packets.
Defaults
„

count — 5.

„

dnf — Disabled.

„

interval — 100 (one tenth of a second)

set arp

„

141

size — 56.

Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To stop a ping command that is in progress, press Ctrl+C.
Examples — The following command pings a WX switch that has IP
address 10.1.1.1:
WX1200# ping 10.1.1.1
PING 10.1.1.1 (10.1.1.1) from 10.9.4.34 : 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time=0.769 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time=0.628 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time=0.676 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=4 ttl=255 time=0.619 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=5 ttl=255 time=0.608 ms
--- 10.1.1.1 ping statistics --5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0 errors, 0% packet loss

See Also
„

set arp

traceroute on page 196

Adds an ARP entry to the ARP table.
Syntax — set arp {permanent | static | dynamic }
ip-addr mac-addr
„

„

permanent — Adds a permanent entry. A permanent entry does not
age out and remains in the database even after a reboot, reset, or
power cycle.
static — Adds a static entry. A static entry does not age out, but the

entry does not remain in the database after a reboot, reset, or power
cycle.
„

„
„

dynamic — Adds a dynamic entry. A dynamic entry is automatically
removed if the entry ages out, or after a reboot, reset, or power cycle.
ip-addr — IP address of the entry, in dotted decimal notation.
mac-addr — MAC address to map to the IP address. Use colons to
separate the octets (for example, 00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).

Defaults — The default aging timeout is 1200 seconds.

142

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command adds a static ARP entry that maps
IP address 10.10.10.1 to MAC address 00:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff:
WX1200# set arp static 10.10.10.1 00:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff
success: added arp 10.10.10.1 at 00:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff on VLAN 1

See Also

set arp agingtime

„

set arp agingtime on page 142

„

telnet on page 195

Changes the aging timeout for dynamic ARP entries.
Syntax — set arp agingtime seconds
„

seconds — Number of seconds an entry can remain unused before
MSS removes the entry. You can specify from 0 through 1,000,000.
To disable aging, specify 0.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Aging applies only to dynamic entries.
To reset the ARP aging timeout to its default value, use the set arp
agingtime 1200 command.
Examples — The following command changes the ARP aging timeout to
1800 seconds:
WX1200# set arp agingtime 1800
success: set arp aging time to 1800 seconds

The following command disables ARP aging:
WX1200# set arp agingtime 0
success: set arp aging time to 0 seconds

set interface

143

See Also

set interface

„

set arp on page 141

„

telnet on page 195

Configures an IP interface on a VLAN.
Syntax — set interface vlan-id ip
{ip-addr mask | ip-addr/mask-length}
„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number.

„

ip-addr mask — IP address and subnet mask in dotted decimal

notation (for example, 10.10.10.10 255.255.255.0).
„

ip-addr/mask-length — IP address and subnet mask length in CIDR

format (for example, 10.10.10.10/24).
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can assign one IP interface to each VLAN.
If an interface is already configured on the VLAN you specify, this
command replaces the interface. If you replace an interface that is in use
as the system IP address, replacing the interface can interfere with system
tasks that use the system IP address, including the following:
„

Mobility domain operations

„

Topology reporting for dual-homed MAP access points

„

Default source IP address used in unsolicited communications such as
AAA accounting reports and SNMP traps

Examples — The following command configures IP interface
10.10.10.10/24 on VLAN default:
WX1200# set interface default ip 10.10.10.10/24
success: set ip address 10.10.10.10 netmask 255.255.255.0 on vlan default

144

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

The following command configures IP interface 10.10.20.10
255.255.255.0 on VLAN mauve:
WX1200# set interface mauve ip 10.10.20.10 255.255.255.0
success: set ip address 10.10.20.10 netmask 255.255.255.0 on vlan mauve

See Also

set interface
dhcp-client

„

clear interface on page 115

„

display interface on page 126

„

set interface status on page 146

Configures the DHCP client on a VLAN, to allow the VLAN to obtain its
IP interface from a DHCP server.
Syntax — set interface vlan-id ip dhcp-client {enable | disable}
„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number.

„

enable — Enables the DHCP client on the VLAN.

„

disable — Disables the DHCP client on the VLAN.

Defaults — The DHCP client is enabled by default on an unconfigured
WXR100 when the Fn switch is pressed and held during power on.
The DHCP client is disabled by default on all other switch models, and is
disabled on an WXR100 if the switch is already configured or the Fn
switch is not pressed and held during power on.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — You can enable the DHCP client on one VLAN only. You can
configure the DHCP client on more than one VLAN, but the client can be
active on only one VLAN.
MSS also has a configurable DHCP server. (See set interface
dhcp-server on page 145.) You can configure a DHCP client and DHCP
server on the same VLAN, but only the client or the server can be
enabled. The DHCP client and DHCP server cannot both be enabled on
the same VLAN at the same time.

set interface dhcp-server

145

Examples — The following command enables the DHCP client on VLAN
corpvlan:
WX-1200# set interface corpvlan ip dhcp-client enable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set interface
dhcp-server

„

clear interface on page 115

„

display dhcp-client on page 182

„

display interface on page 126

Configures the MSS DHCP server.
Use of the MSS DHCP server to allocate client addresses is intended for
temporary, demonstration deployments and not for production
networks. 3Com recommends that you do not use the MSS DHCP server
to allocate client addresses in a production network.
Syntax — set interface vlan-id ip dhcp-server [enable | disable]
[start ip-addr1 stop ip-addr2]
„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number.

„

enable — Enables the DHCP server.

„

disable — Disables the DHCP server.

„

„

start ip-addr1 — Specifies the beginning address of the address range
(also called the address pool).
stop ip-addr2 — Specifies the ending address of the address range.

Defaults — The DHCP server is enabled by default on a new
(unconfigured) WXR100 or WX1200, in order to provide an IP address to
the host connected to the switch for access to the Web Quick Start. On
all switch models, the DHCP server is enabled and cannot be disabled for
directly connected MAPs.
The DHCP server is disabled by default for any other use.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.

146

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Usage — By default, all addresses except the host address of the VLAN,
the network broadcast address, and the subnet broadcast address are
included in the range. If you specify the range, the start address must be
lower than the stop address, and all addresses must be in the same
subnet. The IP interface of the VLAN must be within the same subnet but
is not required to be within the range.
Examples — The following command enables the DHCP server on VLAN
red-vlan to serve addresses from the 192.168.1.5 to 192.168.1.25 range:
WX-1200# set interface red-vlan ip dhcp-server enable start
192.168.1.5 stop 192.168.1.25
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set interface status

display dhcp-server on page 183

Administratively disables or reenables an IP interface.
Syntax — set interface vlan-id status {up | down}
„

vlan-id — VLAN name or number.

„

up — Enables the interface.

„

down — Disables the interface.

Defaults — IP interfaces are enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command disables the IP interface on VLAN
mauve:
WX4400# set interface mauve status down
success: set interface mauve to down

See Also
„

clear interface on page 115

„

display interface on page 126

„

set interface on page 143

set ip alias

set ip alias

147

Configures an alias, which maps a name to an IP address. You can use
aliases as shortcuts in CLI commands.
Syntax — set ip alias name ip-addr
„

name — String of up to 32 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.

„

ip-addr — IP address in dotted decimal notation.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command configures the alias HR1 for IP
address 192.168.1.2:
WX4400# set ip alias HR1 192.168.1.2
success: change accepted.

See Also

set ip dns

„

clear ip alias on page 116

„

display ip alias on page 127

Enables or disables DNS on a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set ip dns {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables DNS.

„

disable — Disables DNS.

Defaults — DNS is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command enables DNS on a WX switch:
WX1200# set ip dns enable
Start DNS Client

148

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

See Also

set ip dns domain

„

clear ip dns domain on page 117

„

clear ip dns server on page 117

„

display ip dns on page 128

„

set ip dns domain on page 148

„

set ip dns server on page 149

Configures a default domain name for DNS queries. The wireless LAN
switch appends the default domain name to domain names or
hostnames you enter in commands.
Syntax — set ip dns domain name
„

name — Domain name of between 1 and 64 alphanumeric characters

with no spaces (for example, example.org).
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
Usage — To override the default domain name when entering a
hostname in a CLI command, enter a period at the end of the hostname.
For example, if the default domain name is example.com, enter chris. if
the fully qualified hostname is chris and not chris.example.com.
Aliases take precedence over DNS. When you enter a hostname, MSS checks
for an alias with that name first, before using DNS to resolve the name.
Examples — The following command configures the default domain
name example.com:
WX1200# set ip dns domain example.com
Domain name changed

See Also
„

clear ip dns domain on page 117

„

clear ip dns server on page 117

„

display ip dns on page 128

„

set ip dns on page 147

„

set ip dns server on page 149

set ip dns server

set ip dns server

149

Specifies a DNS server to use for resolving hostnames you enter in CLI
commands.
Syntax — set ip dns server ip-addr {primary | secondary}
„

„

„

ip-addr — IP address of a DNS server, in dotted decimal or CIDR
notation.
primary — Makes the server the primary server, which MSS always
consults first for resolving DNS queries.
secondary — Makes the server a secondary server. MSS consults a
secondary server only if the primary server does not reply.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
Usage — You can configure a WX switch to use one primary DNS server
and up to five secondary DNS servers.
Examples — The following commands configure a WX switch to use a
primary DNS server and two secondary DNS servers:
WX1200# set ip dns server 10.10.10.50/24 primary
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set ip dns server 10.10.20.69/24 secondary
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set ip dns server 10.10.30.69/24 secondary
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear ip dns domain on page 117

„

clear ip dns server on page 117

„

display ip dns on page 128

„

set ip dns on page 147

„

set ip dns domain on page 148

150

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

set ip https server

Enables the HTTPS server on a WX switch. The HTTPS server is required
for Web Manager access to the switch.
CAUTION: If you disable the HTTPS server, Web Manager access to the
WX switch is disabled.
Syntax — set ip https server {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables the HTTPS server.

„

disable — Disables the HTTPS server.

Defaults — The HTTPS server is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — The default is changed to disabled in 3.1. In addition, the
HTTPS server is no longer required for WebAAA.
Examples — The following command enables the HTTPS server on a WX
switch:
WX1200# set ip https server enable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set ip route

„

clear ip telnet on page 119

„

display ip https on page 129

„

display ip telnet on page 133

„

set ip telnet on page 156

„

set ip telnet server on page 157

Adds a static route to the IP route table.
Syntax — set ip route {default | ip-addr mask |
ip-addr/mask-length} gateway metric
„

default — Default route. A WX switch uses the default route if an
explicit route is not available for the destination.

Default is an alias for IP address 0.0.0.0/0.

set ip route

„

151

ip-addr mask — IP address and subnet mask for the route

destination, in dotted decimal notation (for example, 10.10.10.10
255.255.255.0).
„

„
„

ip-addr/mask-length — IP address and subnet mask length in CIDR
format (for example, 10.10.10.10/24).
gateway — IP address, DNS hostname, or alias of the next-hop router.
metric — Cost for using the route. You can specify a value from
0 through 2,147,483,647. Lower-cost routes are preferred over
higher-cost routes.

Defaults — The HTTPS server is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
Usage — MSS can use a static route only if a direct route in the route
table resolves the static route. MSS adds routes with next-hop types Local
and Direct when you add an IP interface to a VLAN, if the VLAN is up. If
one of these added routes can resolve the static route, MSS can use the
static route.
Before you add a static route, use the display interface command to
verify that the WX switch has an IP interface in the same subnet as the
route’s next-hop router. If not, the VLAN:Interface field of the display ip
route command output shows that the route is down.
You can configure a maximum of 4 routes per destination. This includes
default routes, which have destination 0.0.0.0/0. Each route to a given
destination must have a unique gateway address. When the route table
contains multiple default or explicit routes to the same destination, MSS
uses the route with the lowest cost. If two or more routes to the same
destination have the lowest cost, MSS selects the first route in the route
table.
When you add multiple routes to the same destination, MSS groups the
routes and orders them from lowest cost at the top of the group to
highest cost at the bottom of the group. If you add a new route that has
the same destination and cost as a route already in the table, MSS places
the new route at the top of the group of routes with the same cost.

152

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Examples — The following command adds a default route that uses
gateway 10.5.4.1 and gives the route a cost of 1:
WX4400# set ip route default 10.5.4.1 1
success: change accepted.

The following commands add two default routes, and configure MSS to
always use the route through 10.2.4.69 when the interface to that
gateway router is up:
WX4400# set ip route default 10.2.4.69 1
success: change accepted.
WX4400# set ip route default 10.2.4.17 2
success: change accepted.

The following command adds an explicit route from a WX switch to any
host on the 192.168.4.x subnet through the local router 10.5.4.2, and
gives the route a cost of 1:
WX4400# set ip route 192.168.4.0 255.255.255.0 10.5.4.2 1
success: change accepted.

The following command adds another explicit route, using CIDR notation
to specify the subnet mask:
WX4400# set ip route 192.168.5.0/24 10.5.5.2 1
success: change accepted.

See Also

set ip snmp server

„

clear ip route on page 118

„

display interface on page 126

„

display ip route on page 131

Enables or disables the SNMP service on the wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set ip snmp server {enable | disable}
enable — Enables the SNMP service.
disable — Disables the SNMP service.

Defaults — The SNMP service is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.

set ip ssh

153

History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command enables the SNMP server on a WX
switch:
WX4400# set ip snmp server enable
success: change accepted.

See Also —

set ip ssh

„

clear snmp notify target on page 121

„

display snmp configuration on page 136

„

set port trap on page 86

„

set snmp community on page 160

„

set snmp profile on page 167

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

Changes the TCP port number on which a wireless LAN switch listens for
Secure Shell (SSH) management traffic.
CAUTION: If you change the SSH port number from an SSH session, MSS
immediately ends the session. To open a new management session, you
must configure the SSH client to use the new TCP port number.
Syntax — set ip ssh port port-num
„

port-num — TCP port number.

Defaults — The default SSH port number is 22.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the SSH port number on
a WX switch to 6000:
WX4400# set ip ssh port 6000
success: change accepted.

154

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

See Also

set ip ssh
absolute-timeout

„

set ip ssh absolute-timeout on page 154

„

set ip ssh idle-timeout on page 155

„

set ip ssh server on page 155

Changes the number of minutes an SSH session can remain open. The
absolute-timeout value applies regardless of whether the session is active
or idle.
Syntax — set ip ssh absolute-timeout minutes
„

minutes — Number of minutes an SSH session can remain open. You
can set the absolute timeout to a value from 0 (disabled) to
2,147,483,647 minutes

Defaults — The absolute timeout is disabled by default. 3Com
recommends using the idle timeout instead to close unused sessions.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If the idle timeout is disabled, MSS changes the default
absolute timeout from 0 (disabled) to 60 minutes to prevent an
abandoned session from remaining open indefinitely.
Examples — The following command changes the absolute timeout
value to 30 minutes:
WX4400# set ip ssh absolute-timeout 30
success: absolute timeout set to 30 minutes

See Also
„

set ip ssh on page 153

„

set ip ssh idle-timeout on page 155

„

set ip ssh server on page 155

set ip ssh idle-timeout

set ip ssh
idle-timeout

155

Changes the number of minutes an SSH session can remain idle.
Syntax — set ip ssh idle-timeout minutes
„

minutes — Number of minutes an SSH session can remain idle. You
can set the idle timeout to a value from 0 (disabled) to 2,147,483,647
minutes.

Defaults — The default idle timeout is 30 minutes.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If the idle timeout is disabled, MSS changes the default
absolute timeout from 0 (disabled) to 60 minutes to prevent an
abandoned session from remaining open indefinitely. 3Com recommends
using the idle timeout instead to close unused sessions.
Examples — The following command changes the idle timeout value to
20 minutes:
WX4400# set ip ssh idle-timeout 20
success: idle timeout set to 20 minutes

See Also

set ip ssh server

„

set ip ssh on page 153

„

set ip ssh absolute-timeout on page 154

„

set ip ssh server on page 155

Disables or reenables the SSH server on a wireless LAN switch.
CAUTION: If you disable the SSH server, SSH access to the WX switch is
also disabled.
Syntax — set ip ssh server {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables the SSH server.

„

disable — Disables the SSH server.

Defaults — The SSH server is enabled by default.

156

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must generate an SSH authentication key to use SSH.
The maximum number of SSH sessions supported on a WX switch is
eight. If Telnet is also enabled, the WX switch can have up to eight Telnet
or SSH sessions, in any combination, and one Console session.
See Also

set ip telnet

„

crypto generate key on page 451

„

set ip ssh on page 153

„

set ip ssh absolute-timeout on page 154

„

set ip ssh idle-timeout on page 155

Changes the TCP port number on which a wireless LAN switch listens for
Telnet management traffic.
CAUTION: f you change the Telnet port number from a Telnet session,
MSS immediately ends the session. To open a new management session,
you must Telnet to the WX switch with the new Telnet port number.
Syntax — set ip telnet port-num
„

port-num — TCP port number.

Defaults — The default Telnet port number is 23.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the Telnet port number
on a WX switch to 5000:
WX4400# set ip telnet 5000
success: change accepted.

set ip telnet server

157

See Also

set ip telnet server

„

clear ip telnet on page 119

„

display ip https on page 129

„

display ip telnet on page 133

„

set ip https server on page 150

„

set ip telnet server on page 157

Enables the Telnet server on a wireless LAN switch.
CAUTION: If you disable the Telnet server, Telnet access to the WX
switch is also disabled.
Syntax — set ip telnet server {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables the Telnet server.

„

disable — Disables the Telnet server.

Defaults — The Telnet server is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
Usage — The maximum number of Telnet sessions supported on a WX
switch is eight. If SSH is also enabled, the WX switch can have up to eight
Telnet or SSH sessions, in any combination, and one console session.
Examples — The following command enables the Telnet server on a WX
switch:
WX4400# set ip telnet server enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear ip telnet on page 119

„

display ip https on page 129

„

display ip telnet on page 133

„

set ip https server on page 150

„

set ip telnet on page 156

158

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

set ntp

Enables or disables the NTP client on a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set ntp {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables the NTP client.

„

disable — Disables the NTP client.

Defaults — The NTP client is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If NTP is configured on a system whose current time differs
from the NTP server time by more than 10 minutes, convergence of the
WX time can take many NTP update intervals. 3Com recommends that
you set the time manually to the NTP server time before enabling NTP to
avoid a significant delay in convergence.
Examples — The following command enables the NTP client:
WX4400# set ntp enable
success: NTP Client enabled

See Also

set ntp server

„

clear ntp server on page 119

„

clear ntp update-interval on page 120

„

display ntp on page 134

„

set ntp server on page 158

„

set ntp update-interval on page 159

Configures a wireless LAN switch to use an NTP server.
Syntax — set ntp server ip-addr
„

ip-addr — IP address of the NTP server, in dotted decimal notation.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

set ntp update-interval

159

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure up to three NTP servers. MSS queries all the
servers and selects the best response based on the method described in
RFC 1305, Network Time Protocol (Version 3) Specification,
Implementation and Analysis.
To use NTP, you also must enable the NTP client with the set ntp
command.
Examples — The following command configures a WX switch to use
NTP server 192.168.1.5:
WX4400# set ntp server 192.168.1.5

See Also

set ntp
update-interval

„

clear ntp server on page 119

„

clear ntp update-interval on page 120

„

display ntp on page 134

„

set ntp on page 158

„

set ntp update-interval on page 159

Changes how often MSS sends queries to the NTP servers for updates.
Syntax — set ntp update-interval seconds
„

seconds — Number of seconds between queries. You can specify
from 16 through 1,024 seconds.

Defaults — The default NTP update interval is 64 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the NTP update interval
to 128 seconds:
WX4400# set ntp update-interval 128
success: change accepted.

160

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

See Also

set snmp
community

„

clear ntp server on page 119

„

clear ntp update-interval on page 120

„

display ntp on page 134

„

set ntp on page 158

„

set ntp server on page 158

Configures a community string for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c.
For SNMPv3, use the set snmp usm command to configure an SNMPv3
user. SNMPv3 does not use community strings.
Syntax — set snmp community name comm-string
access {read-only | read-notify | notify-only | read-write |
notify-read-write}
„

comm-string — Name of the SNMP community. Specify between 1

and 32 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
„

„

read-only — Allows an SNMP management application using the
string to get (read) object values on the switch but not to set (write)
them.
read-notify — Allows an SNMP management application using the

string to get object values on the switch but not to set them. The
switch can use the string to send notifications.
„

notify-only — Allows the switch to use the string to send

notifications.
„

read-write — Allows an SNMP management application using the

string to get and set object values on the switch.
„

notify-read-write — Allows an SNMP management application

using the string to get and set object values on the switch. The switch
also can use the string to send notifications.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

set snmp community

161

History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. In Version 4.0, new access
types were added for SNMPv3:read-notify, notify-only,
notify-read-write
SNMP community strings are passed as clear text in SNMPv1 and
SNMPv2c. 3Com recommends that you use strings that cannot easily be
guessed by unauthorized users. For example, do not use the well-known
strings public and private.
If you are using SNMPv3, you can configure SNMPv3 users to use
authentication and to encrypt SNMP data.
Examples — The following command configures the read-write
community good_community:
WX-1200# set snmp community read-write good_community
success: change accepted.

The following command configures community string switchmgr1 with
access level notify-read-write:
WX-1200# set snmp community name switchmgr1 notify-read-write
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear snmp community on page 121

„

set ip snmp server on page 152

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

„

set snmp profile on page 167

„

set snmp protocol on page 172

„

set snmp security on page 173

„

set snmp usm on page 174

„

display snmp community on page 186

162

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

set snmp notify
target

Configures a notification target for informs from SNMP.
A notification target is a remote device to which MSS sends SNMP
notifications. You can configure the MSS SNMP engine to send
confirmed notifications (informs) or unconfirmed notifications (traps).
Some of the command options differ depending on the SNMP version
and the type of notification you specify. You can configure up to 10
notification targets.
SNMPv3 with Informs
To configure a notification target for informs from SNMPv3, use the
following command:
Syntax — set snmp notify target target-num
ip-addr[:udp-port-number]
usm inform user username
snmp-engine-id {ip | hex hex-string}
[profile profile-name]
[security {unsecured | authenticated | encrypted}]
[retries num]
[timeout num]
„

target-num — ID for the target. This ID is local to the WX switch and

does not need to correspond to a value on the target itself. You can
specify a number from 1 to 10.
„

ip-addr[:udp-port-number] — IP address of the server. You also

can specify the UDP port number to send notifications to.
„

username — USM username. This option is applicable only when the

SNMP version is usm.
If the user will send informs rather than traps, you also must specify
the snmp-engine-id of the target.
„

snmp-engine-id {ip | hex hex-string} — SNMP engine ID of the

target. Specify ip if the target’s SNMP engine ID is based on its
IP address. If the target’s SNMP engine ID is a hexadecimal value, use
hex hex-string to specify the value.
„

profile profile-name — Notification profile this SNMP user will use

to specify the notification types to send or drop.

set snmp notify target

„

163

security — Specifies the security level, and is applicable only when

the SNMP version is usm:
„

unsecured — Message exchanges are not authenticated, nor are

they encrypted. This is the default.
„

authenticated — Message exchanges are authenticated, but are

not encrypted.
„

encrypted — Message exchanges are authenticated and

encrypted.
„

retries num — Specifies the number of times the MSS SNMP engine

will resend a notification that has not been acknowledged by the
target. You can specify from 0 to 3 retries.
„

timeout num — Specifies the number of seconds MSS waits for

acknowledgement of a notification. You can specify from 1 to 5
seconds.
SNMPv3 with Traps
To configure a notification target for traps from SNMPv3, use the
following command:
Syntax — set snmp notify target target-num
ip-addr[:udp-port-number]
usm trap user username
[profile profile-name]
[security {unsecured | authenticated | encrypted}]
„

target-num — ID for the target. This ID is local to the WX switch and

does not need to correspond to a value on the target itself. You can
specify a number from 1 to 10.
„

ip-addr[:udp-port-number] — IP address of the server. You also

can specify the UDP port number to send notifications to.
„

username — USM username. This option is applicable only when the

SNMP version is usm.
„

„

profile profile-name — Notification profile this SNMP user will use
to specify the notification types to send or drop.
security {unsecured | authenticated | encrypted} — Specifies
the security level, and is applicable only when the SNMP version is
usm:

164

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

„

unsecured — Message exchanges are not authenticated, nor are

they encrypted. This is the default.
„

authenticated — Message exchanges are authenticated, but are

not encrypted.
„

encrypted — Message exchanges are authenticated and

encrypted.
SNMPv2c with Informs
To configure a notification target for informs from SNMPv2c, use the
following command:
Syntax — set snmp notify target target-num
ip-addr[:udp-port-number]
v2c community-string inform
[profile profile-name]
[retries num]
[timeout num]
„

target-num — ID for the target. This ID is local to the WX switch and

does not need to correspond to a value on the target itself. You can
specify a number from 1 to 10.
„

ip-addr[:udp-port-number] — IP address of the server. You also

can specify the UDP port number to send notifications to.
„

community-string — Community string.

„

profile profile-name — Notification profile this SNMP user will use

to specify the notification types to send or drop.
„

retries num — Specifies the number of times the MSS SNMP engine

will resend a notification that has not been acknowledged by the
target. You can specify from 0 to 3 retries.
„

timeout num — Specifies the number of seconds MSS waits for

acknowledgement of a notification. You can specify from 1 to
5 seconds.

set snmp notify target

165

SNMPv2c with Traps
To configure a notification target for traps from SNMPv2c, use the
following command:
Syntax — set snmp notify target target-num
ip-addr[:udp-port-number]
v2c community-string trap
[profile profile-name]
„

target-num — ID for the target. This ID is local to the WX switch and

does not need to correspond to a value on the target itself. You can
specify a number from 1 to 10.
„

ip-addr[:udp-port-number] — IP address of the server. You also

can specify the UDP port number to send notifications to.
„
„

community-string — Community string.
profile profile-name — Notification profile this SNMP user will use
to specify the notification types to send or drop.

SNMPv1 with Traps
To configure a notification target for traps from SNMPv1, use the
following command:
Syntax — set snmp notify target target-num
ip-addr[:udp-port-number]
v1 community-string
[profile profile-name]
„

target-num — ID for the target. This ID is local to the WX switch and

does not need to correspond to a value on the target itself. You can
specify a number from 1 to 10.
„

ip-addr[:udp-port-number] — IP address of the server. You also

can specify the UDP port number to send notifications to.
„

community-string — Community string.

„

profile profile-name — Notification profile this SNMP user will use

to specify the notification types to send or drop.

166

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Defaults — The default UDP port number on the target is 162. The
default minimum required security level is unsecured. The default
number of retries is 0 and the default timeout is 2 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The inform or trap option specifies whether the MSS SNMP
engine expects the target to acknowledge notifications sent to the target
by the WX switch. Use inform if you want acknowledgements. Use trap
if you do not want acknowledgements. The inform option is applicable
to SNMP version v2c or usm only.
Examples — The following command configures a notification target for
acknowledged notifications:
WX-1200# set snmp notify target 1 10.10.40.9 usm inform user
securesnmpmgr1 snmp-engine-id ip
success: change accepted.

This command configures target 1 at IP address 10.10.40.9. The target’s
SNMP engine ID is based on its address. The MSS SNMP engine will send
notifications based on the default profile, and will require the target to
acknowledge receiving them.
The following command configures a notification target for
unacknowledged notifications:
WX-1200# set snmp notify target 2 10.10.40.10 v1 trap
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear snmp notify target on page 121

„

set ip snmp server on page 152

„

set snmp community on page 160

„

set snmp profile on page 167

„

set snmp protocol on page 172

„

set snmp security on page 173

„

set snmp usm on page 174

„

display snmp notify target on page 189

set snmp profile

set snmp profile

167

Configures an SNMP notification profile. A notification profile is a named
list of all the notification types that can be generated by a switch, and for
each notification type, the action to take (drop or send) when an event
occurs.
You can configure up to 10 notification profiles.
Syntax — set snmp profile {default | profile-name} {drop | send}
{notification-type | all}
„

default | profile-name — Name of the notification profile you are
creating or modifying. The profile-name can be up to 32

alphanumeric characters long, with no spaces.
To modify the default notification profile, specify default.
„

drop | send —Specifies the action that the SNMP engine takes with

regard to the notifications you specify with notification-type or all.
„

notification-type — Any of the items in Table 35.

Table 35 SNMP notification types
AuthenTraps

Generated when the WX switch’s SNMP
engine receives a bad community string.

AutoTuneRadioChannelChangeTraps

Generated when the RF Auto-Tuning
feature changes the channel on a radio.

AutoTuneRadioPowerChangeTraps

Generated when the RF Auto-Tuning
feature changes the power setting on a
radio.

ClientAssociationFailureTraps

Generated when a client’s attempt to
associate with a radio fails.

ClientAuthorizationSuccessTraps

Generated when a client is successfully
authorized.

ClientAuthenticationFailureTraps

Generated when authentication fails for a
client.

ClientAuthorizationFailureTraps

Generated when authorization fails for a
client.

ClientClearedTraps

Generated when a client’s session is
cleared.

ClientDeAssociationTraps

Generated when a client is dissociated from
a radio.

168

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Table 35 SNMP notification types (continued)
ClientDot1xFailureTraps

Generated when a client experiences an
802.1X failure.

ClientRoamingTraps

Generated when a client roams.

CounterMeasureStartTraps

Generated when MSS begins
countermeasures against a rogue access
point.

CounterMeasureStopTraps

Generated when MSS stops
countermeasures against a rogue access
point.

DAPConnectWarningTraps

Generated when a Distributed MAP whose
fingerprint has not been configured in MSS
establishes a management session with the
switch.

DeviceFailTraps

Generated when an event with an Alert
severity occurs.

DeviceOkayTraps

Generated when a device returns to its
normal state.

LinkDownTraps

Generated when the link is lost on a port.

LinkUpTraps

Generated when the link is detected on a
port.

MichaelMICFailureTraps

Generated when two Michael message
integrity code (MIC) failures occur within 60
seconds, triggering Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA) countermeasures.

MobilityDomainJoinTraps

Generated when the WX switch is initially
able to contact a mobility domain seed
member, or can contact the seed member
after a timeout.

MobilityDomainTimeoutTraps

Generated when a timeout occurs after an
WX switch has unsuccessfully tried to
communicate with a seed member.

MPBootTraps

Generated when an MAP access point
boots.

MPTimeoutTraps

Generated when an MAP access point fails
to respond to the WX switch.

PoEFailTraps

Generated when a serious PoE problem,
such as a short circuit, occurs.

RFDetectAdhocUserTraps

Generated when MSS detects an ad-hoc
user.

RFDetectRogueAPTraps

Generated when MSS detects a rogue
access point.

set snmp profile

169

Table 35 SNMP notification types (continued)
RFDetectRogueDisappearTraps

Generated when a rogue access point is no
longer being detected.

RFDetectClientViaRogueWiredAPTraps Generated when MSS detects, on the wired
part of the network, the MAC address of a
wireless client associated with a third-party
AP.
RFDetectDoSPortTraps

Generated when MSS detects an associate
request flood, reassociate request flood, or
disassociate request flood.

RFDetectDoSTraps

Generated when MSS detects a DoS attack
other than an associate request flood,
reassociate request flood, or disassociate
request flood.

RFDetectInterferingRogueAPTraps

Generated when an interfering device is
detected.

RFDetectInterferingRogueDisappearTr
aps

Generated when an interfering device is no
longer detected.

RFDetectClientViaRogueWiredAPTraps Generated when MSS detects, on the wired
part of the network, the MAC address of a
wireless client associated with a third-party
AP.
RFDetectDoSPortTraps

Generated when MSS detects an associate
request flood, reassociate request flood, or
disassociate request flood.

RFDetectDoSTraps

Generated when MSS detects a DoS attack
other than an associate request flood,
reassociate request flood, or disassociate
request flood.

RFDetectInterferingRogueAPTraps

Generated when an interfering device is
detected.

RFDetectInterferingRogueDisappearTr
aps

Generated when an interfering device is no
longer detected.

RFDetectSpoofedMacAPTraps

Generated when MSS detects a wireless
packet with the source MAC address of a
3Com MAP, but without the spoofed
MAP’s signature (fingerprint).

RFDetectSpoofedSsidAPTraps

Generated when MSS detects beacon
frames for a valid SSID, but sent by a rogue
AP.

RFDetectUnAuthorizedAPTraps

Generated when MSS detects the MAC
address of an AP that is on the attack list.

170

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Table 35 SNMP notification types (continued)
RFDetectUnAuthorizedOuiTraps

Generated when a wireless device that is
not on the list of permitted vendors is
detected.

RFDetectUnAuthorizedSsidTraps

Generated when an SSID that is not on the
permitted SSID list is detected.

„

all — Sends or drops all notifications.

Defaults — A default notification profile (named default) is already
configured in MSS. All notifications in the default profile are dropped by
default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command changes the action in the default
notification profile from drop to send for all notification types:
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile default send all
success: change accepted.

The following commands create notification profile snmpprof_rfdetect,
and change the action to send for all RF detection notification types:
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect
RFDetectAdhocUserTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect
RFDetectClientViaRogueWiredAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect
RFDetectDoSTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect
RFDetectAdhocUserTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect
RFDetectInterferingRogueAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect
RFDetectInterferingRogueDisappearTraps
success: change accepted.

send

send

send

send

send

send

set snmp profile

WX-1200# set snmp notify profile
RFDetectRogueAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile
RFDetectRogueDisappearTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile
RFDetectSpoofedMacAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile
RFDetectSpoofedSsidAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile
RFDetectUnAuthorizedAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile
RFDetectUnAuthorizedOuiTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile
RFDetectUnAuthorizedSsidTraps
success: change accepted.

snmpprof_rfdetect send

snmpprof_rfdetect send

snmpprof_rfdetect send

snmpprof_rfdetect send

snmpprof_rfdetect send

snmpprof_rfdetect send

snmpprof_rfdetect send

See Also
„

clear snmp profile on page 122

„

set ip snmp server on page 152

„

set snmp community on page 160

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

„

set snmp protocol on page 172

„

set snmp security on page 173

„

set snmp usm on page 174

„

display snmp notify profile on page 188

171

172

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

set snmp protocol

Enables an SNMP protocol. MSS supports SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and
SNMPv3.
Syntax — set snmp protocol {v1 | v2c | usm | all} {enable |
disable}
„

v1 — SNMPv1

„

v2c — SNMPv2c

„

usm — SNMPv3 (with the user security model)

„

all — Enables all supported versions of SNMP.

„

enable — Enables the specified SNMP version(s).

„

disable — Disables the specified SNMP version(s).

Defaults — All SNMP versions are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — SNMP requires the switch’s system IP address to be set. SNMP
will not work without the system IP address.
You also must enable the SNMP service using the set ip snmp server
command.
Examples — The following command enables all SNMP versions:
WX-1200# set snmp protocol all enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set ip snmp server on page 152

„

set snmp community on page 160

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

„

set snmp profile on page 167

„

set snmp security on page 173

„

set snmp usm on page 174

„

display snmp status on page 191

set snmp security

set snmp security

173

Sets the minimum level of security MSS requires for SNMP message
exchanges.
Syntax — set snmp security
{unsecured | authenticated | encrypted |
auth-req-unsec-notify}
„

unsecured — SNMP message exchanges are not secure. This is the

only value supported for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c.
„

„

authenticated — SNMP message exchanges are authenticated but
are not encrypted.
encrypted — SNMP message exchanges are authenticated and

encrypted.
„

auth-req-unsec-notify — SNMP message exchanges are
authenticated but are not encrypted, and notifications are neither
authenticated nor encrypted.

Defaults — By default, MSS allows nonsecure (unsecured) SNMP
message exchanges.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c do not support authentication or
encryption. If you plan to use SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c, leave the minimum
level of SNMP security set to unsecured.
Examples — The following command sets the minimum level of SNMP
security allowed to authentication and encryption:
WX-1200# set snmp security encrypted
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set ip snmp server on page 152

„

set snmp community on page 160

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

„

set snmp profile on page 167

174

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

„

set snmp protocol on page 172

„

set snmp usm on page 174

„

display snmp status on page 191

set snmp trap

This command is deprecated in MSS Version 4.0. To enable or disable
SNMP notifications, configure a notification profile. See set snmp
profile on page 167.

set snmp trap
receiver

This command is deprecated in MSS Version 4.0. To configure an SNMP
notification target (also called trap receiver), see set snmp notify target
on page 162.

set snmp usm

Creates a USM user for SNMPv3.
This command does not apply to SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. For these SNMP
versions, use the set snmp community command to configure
community strings.
Syntax — set snmp usm usm-username
snmp-engine-id {ip ip-addr | local | hex hex-string}
access {read-only | read-notify | notify-only | read-write |
notify-read-write}
auth-type {none | md5 | sha}
{auth-pass-phrase string | auth-key hex-string}
encrypt-type {none | des | 3des | aes}
{encrypt-pass-phrase string | encrypt-key hex-string}
„

usm-username — Name of the SNMPv3 user. Specify between 1 and

32 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
„

snmp-engine-id {ip ip-addr | local | hex hex-string} —

Specifies a unique identifier for the SNMP engine.
To send informs, you must specify the engine ID of the inform
receiver. To send traps and to allow get and set operations and so on,
specify local as the engine ID.
„

hex hex-string — ID is a hexadecimal string.

set snmp usm

„

175

ip ip-addr — ID is based on the IP address of the station running

the management application. Enter the IP address of the station.
MSS calculates the engine ID based on the address.
„

local — Uses the value computed from the switch’s system IP

address.
„

access {read-only | read-notify | notify-only | read-write
| notify-read-write}

Specifies the access level of the user:
„

read-only — An SNMP management application using the string

can get (read) object values on the switch but cannot set (write)
them.
„

read-notify — An SNMP management application using the

string can get object values on the switch but cannot set them. The
switch can use the string to send notifications.
„

notify-only — The switch can use the string to send

notifications.
„

read-write — An SNMP management application using the string

can get and set object values on the switch.
„

notify-read-write — An SNMP management application using

the string can get and set object values on the switch. The switch
can use the string to send notifications.
„

auth-type {none | md5 | sha} {auth-pass-phrase string |
auth-key hex-string}

Specifies the authentication type used to authenticate
communications with the remote SNMP engine. You can specify one
of the following:
„

none—No authentication is used.

„

md5—Message-digest algorithm 5 is used.

„

sha—Secure Hashing Algorithm (SHA) is used.

If the authentication type is md5 or sha, you can specify a passphrase
or a hexadecimal key.

176

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

„

„
„

To specify a passphrase, use the auth-pass-phrase string option.
The string can be from 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters long, with
no spaces.
To specify a key, use the auth-key hex-string option.

encrypt-type {none | des | 3des | aes}
{encrypt-pass-phrase string | encrypt-key hex-string} —

Specifies the encryption type used for SNMP traffic. You can specify
one of the following:
„

none—No encryption is used. This is the default.

„

des—Data Encryption Standard (DES) encryption is used.

„

3des—Triple DES encryption is used.

„

aes—Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption is used.

If the encryption type is des, 3des, or aes, you can specify a
passphrase or a hexadecimal key.
„

„

To specify a passphrase, use the encrypt-pass-phrase string
option. The string can be from 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters
long, with no spaces.
To specify a key, use the encrypt-key hex-string option.

Defaults — No SNMPv3 users are configured by default. When you
configure an SNMPv3 user, the default access is read-only, and the
default authentication and encryption types are both none.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command creates USM user snmpmgr1,
associated with the local SNMP engine ID. This user can send traps to
notification receivers.
WX-1200# set snmp usm snmpmgr1 snmp-engine-id local
success: change accepted.

The following command creates USM user securesnmpmgr1, which uses
SHA authentication and 3DES encryption with passphrases. This user can
send informs to the notification receiver that has engine ID 192.168.40.2.

set summertime

177

WX-1200# set snmp usm securesnmpmgr1 snmp-engine-id
ip 192.168.40.2 auth-type sha auth-pass-phrase myauthpword
encrypt-type 3des encrypt-pass-phrase mycryptpword
success: change accepted.

See Also

set summertime

„

clear snmp usm on page 122

„

set ip snmp server on page 152

„

set snmp community on page 160

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

„

set snmp profile on page 167

„

set snmp protocol on page 172

„

set snmp security on page 173

„

display snmp usm on page 193

Offsets the real-time clock of a wireless LAN switch by +1 hour and
returns it to standard time for daylight savings time or a similar
summertime period that you set.
Syntax — set summertime summer-name [start week weekday
month hour min end week weekday month hour min]
„

summer-name — Name of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that

describes the summertime offset. You can use a standard name or any
name you like.
„

start — Start of the time change period.

„

week — Week of the month to start or end the time change. Valid

values are first, second, third, fourth, or last.
„

„

weekday — Day of the week to start or end the time change. Valid
values are sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri, and sat.
month — Month of the year to start or end the time change. Valid

values are jan, feb, mar, apr, may, jun, jul, aug, sep, oct, nov, and
dec.
„

hour — Hour to start or end the time change — a value between 0

and 23 on the 24-hour clock.

178

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

„

„

min — Minute to start or end the time change — a value between 0
and 59.
end — End of the time change period.

Defaults — If you do not specify a start and end time, the system
implements the time change starting at 2:00 a.m. on the first Sunday in
April and ending at 2:00 a.m. on the last Sunday in October, according to
the North American standard.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must first set the time zone with the set timezone
command for the offset to work properly without the start and end
values.
Configure summertime before you set the time and date. Otherwise,
summertime’s adjustment of the time will make the time incorrect, if the
date is within the summertime period.
Examples — To enable summertime and set the summertime time zone
to PDT (Pacific Daylight Time), type the following command:
WX1200# set summertime PDT
success: change accepted

See Also
„

clear snmp usm on page 122

„

clear timezone on page 124

„

display summertime on page 138

„

display timedate on page 138

„

display timezone on page 139

„

set timedate on page 180

„

set timezone on page 181

set system ip-address

set system
ip-address

179

Configures the system IP address. The system IP address determines the
interface or source IP address MSS uses for system tasks, including the
following:
„

Mobility domain operations

„

Topology reporting for dual-homed MAP access points

„

Default source IP address used in unsolicited communications such as
AAA accounting reports and SNMP traps

Syntax — set system ip-address ip-addr
„

ip-addr — IP address, in dotted decimal notation. The address must
be configured on one of the WX switch’s VLANs.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must use an address that is configured on one of the WX
switch’s VLANs.
To display the system IP address, use the display system command.
Examples — The following commands configure an IP interface on
VLAN taupe and configure the interface to be the system IP address:
WX4400# set interface taupe ip 10.10.20.20/24
success: set ip address 10.10.20.20 netmask 255.255.255.0 on vlan taupe
WX4400# set system ip-address 10.10.20.20
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear system ip-address on page 124

„

display system on page 42

„

set interface on page 143

180

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

set timedate

Sets the time of day and date on the wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set timedate {date mmm dd yyyy [time hh:mm:ss]}
„

„

date mmm dd yyyy — System date:
„

mmm — month

„

dd — day

„

yyyy — year

time hh:mm:ss — System time, in hours, minutes, and seconds.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The day of week is automatically calculated from the day you set.
The time displayed by the CLI after you type the command might be slightly
later than the time you enter due to the interval between when you press
Enter and when the CLI reads and displays the new time and date.
Configure summertime before you set the time and date. Otherwise,
summertime’s adjustment of the time will make the time incorrect, if the
date is within the summertime period.
Examples — The following command sets the date to March 13, 2003
and time to 11:11:12:
WX4400# set timedate date feb 29 2004 time 23:58:00
Time now is:
Sun Feb 29 2004, 23:58:02 PST

See Also
„

clear snmp usm on page 122

„

clear timezone on page 124

„

display summertime on page 138

„

display timedate on page 138

„

display timezone on page 139

„

set summertime on page 177

„

set timezone on page 181

set timezone

set timezone

181

Sets the number of hours, and optionally the number of minutes, that the
wireless LAN switch’s real-time clock is offset from Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC). These values are also used by Network Time Protocol (NTP), if
it is enabled.
Syntax — set timezone zone-name {-hours [minutes]}
„

zone-name — Time zone name of up to 32 alphabetic characters. You

can use a standard name or any name you like.
„

- (minus sign) — Minus time to indicate hours (and minutes) to be

subtracted from UTC. Otherwise, hours and minutes are added by
default.
„

hours — Number of hours to add or subtract from UTC.

„

minutes — Number of minutes to add or subtract from UTC.

Defaults — If this command is not used, then the default time zone is
UTC.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To set the time zone for Pacific Standard Time (PST), type
the following command:
WX1200# set timezone PST -8
Timezone is set to 'PST', offset from UTC is -8:0 hours.

See Also
„

clear snmp usm on page 122

„

clear timezone on page 124

„

display summertime on page 138

„

display timedate on page 138

„

display timezone on page 139

„

set summertime on page 177

„

set timedate on page 180

182

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

display dhcp-client

Displays DHCP client information for all VLANs.
Syntax — display dhcp-client
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command displays DHCP client information:
WX-1200# display dhcp-client
Interface:
corpvlan(4)
Configuration Status: Enabled
DHCP State:
IF_UP
Lease Allocation:
65535 seconds
Lease Remaining:
65532 seconds
IP Address:
10.3.1.110
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Default Gateway:
10.3.1.1
DHCP Server:
10.3.1.4
DNS Servers:
10.3.1.29
DNS Domain Name:
mycorp.com

Table 36 describes the fields in this display.
Table 36 Output for display dhcp-client
Field

Description

Interface

VLAN name and number.

Configuration Status

Status of the DHCP client on this VLAN:

DHCP State

„

Enabled

„

Disabled

State of the IP interface:
„

IF_UP

„

IF_DOWN

Lease Allocation

Duration of the address lease.

Lease Remaining

Number of seconds remaining before the address lease
expires.

IP Address

IP address received from the DHCP server.

display dhcp-server

183

Table 36 Output for display dhcp-client (continued)
Field

Description

Subnet Mask

Network mask of the IP address received from the
DHCP server.

Default Gateway

Default gateway IP address received from the DHCP
server. If the address is 0.0.0.0, the server did not
provide an address.

DHCP Server

IP address of the DHCP server.

DNS Servers

DNS server IP address(es) received from the DHCP
server.

DNS Domain Name

Default DNS domain name received from the DHCP
server.

See Also
„

display dhcp-server

set interface dhcp-client on page 144

Displays MSS DHCP server information.
Syntax — display dhcp-server [interface vlan-id] [verbose]
„

interface vlan-id — Displays the IP addresses leased by the

specified VLAN.
„

verbose — Displays configuration and status information for the MSS

DHCP server.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command displays the addresses leased by
the MSS DHCP server:
WX-1200# display dhcp-server
VLAN Name
Address
---- -------------- --------------1 default
10.10.20.2
1 default
10.10.20.3
2 red-vlan
192.168.1.5
2 red-vlan
192.168.1.7

MAC
Lease Remaining (sec)
----------------- -------------------00:01:02:03:04:05
12345
00:01:03:04:06:07
2103
00:01:03:04:06:08
102
00:01:03:04:06:09
16789

184

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

The following command displays configuration and status information for
each VLAN on which the DHCP server is configured:
WX-1200# display dhcp-server
Interface:
0 (Direct AP)
Status:
UP
Address Range:
10.0.0.1-10.0.0.253
Interface:
Status:
Address Range:
DHCP Clients:
Hardware Address:
State:
Lease Allocation:
Lease Remaining:
IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
Default Gateway:
DNS Servers:
DNS Domain Name:

default(1)
UP
10.10.20.2-10.10.20.254
00:01:02:03:04:05
BOUND
43200 seconds
12345 seconds
10.10.20.2
255.255.255.0
10.10.20.1
10.10.20.4 10.10.20.5
mycorp.com

Table 37 and Table 38 describe the fields in these displays.
Table 37 Output for display dhcp-server
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN number.

Name

VLAN name.

Address

IP address leased by the server.

MAC Address

MAC address of the device that holds the lease for the
address.

Lease Remaining

Number of seconds remaining before the address lease
expires.

display dhcp-server

185

Table 38 Output for display dhcp-client verbose
Field

Description

Interface

VLAN name and number.

Status

Status of the interface:
„

UP

„

DOWN

Address Range

Range from which the server can lease addresses.

Hardware Address

MAC address of the DHCP client.

State

State of the address lease:
„

SUSPEND—MSS is checking for the presence of
another DHCP server on the subnet. This is the initial
state of the MSS DHCP server. The MSS DHCP server
remains in this state if another DHCP server is
detected.

„

CHECKING—MSS is using ARP to verify whether the
address is available.

„

OFFERING—MSS offered the address to the client
and is waiting for the client to send a
DHCPREQUEST for the address.

„

BOUND—The client accepted the address.

„

HOLDING—The address is already in use and is
therefore unavailable.

Lease Allocation

Duration of the address lease, in seconds.

Lease Remaining

Number of seconds remaining before the address lease
expires.

IP Address

IP address leased to the client.

Subnet Mask

Network mask of the IP address leased to the client.

Default Gateway

Default gateway IP address included in the DHCP Offer
to the client.

DNS Servers

DNS server IP address(es) included in the DHCP Offer to
the client.

DNS Domain Name

Default DNS domain name included in the DHCP Offer
to the client.

See Also
„

set interface dhcp-server on page 145

186

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

display snmp
community

Displays the configured SNMP community strings.
Syntax — display snmp community
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display the configured SNMP community strings, use the
following command:
WX-1200# display snmp community
Communities:
"wireless_switch", access=read-write-notify, notify target
use cnt=0

Table 39 describes the fields in this display.
Table 39 Outpot for display snmp community
Field

Description

Community string

Community string.

access

Access settings for the string:

notify target use cnt

„

notify-only—An SNMP management application
using the string can receive notifications from the
switch, but cannot get or set object values.

„

notify-read-write—An SNMP management
application using the string can get and set object
values on the switch. The application can also
receive notifications from the switch.

„

read-notify—An SNMP management application
using the string can get object values on the switch
but cannot set them. The application can also
receive notifications from the switch.

„

read-only—An SNMP management application
using the string can get (read) object values on the
switch but cannot set (write) them.

„

read-write—An SNMP management application
using the string can get and set object values on the
switch.

Number of times this community is specified in a
notification target entry.

display snmp counters

See Also

display snmp
counters

„

clear snmp community on page 121

„

set snmp community on page 160

Displays SNMP statistics counters.
Syntax — display snmp counters
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display SNMP statistics counters, use the following
command:
WX-1200# display snmp counters
Base SNMP Stats:
input packets: 0
output packets: 0
output notifys(traps & informs): 0
input packets with bad version: 0
input packets with ASN.1 parse errs: 0
input packets silently dropped: 0
Community Stats:
input packets with bad community names: 0
input packets with bad community uses: 0
SNMPv3 Stats:
input packets with unknown security models: 0
input packets that are invalid: 0
input packets without PDU handlers: 0
input packets specifying an unavailable context: 0
input packets specifying an unknown context: 0
SNMPv3/USM Stats:
input packets with unsupported security level: 0
input packets not in time window: 0
input packets with an unknown user name: 0
input packets with an unknown engineID: 0
input packets with an authentication failure: 0
input packets with a decryption failure: 0

187

188

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

display snmp notify
profile

Displays SNMP notification profiles.
Syntax — display snmp notify profile
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display notification profiles, use the following
command:
WX-1200# display snmp notify profile
Notify profiles:
default
notify profile use cnt=0
notify status for profile:
LINKDOWN, drop
LINKUP, drop
AUTHENTICATION, drop
DEVFAIL, drop
DEVOKAY, drop
POEFAIL, drop
MPTIMEOUT, drop
MPBOOT, drop
MOBDOMJOIN, drop
MOBDOMTIMEOUT, drop
MIKEMICFAIL, drop
ROGUEDETECT, drop
RFDETECTADHOCUSER, drop
RFDETECTROGUEDISAPPEAR, drop
CLIENTAUTHENFAIL, drop
CLIENTAUTHORFAIL, drop
CLIENTASSOCFAIL, drop
CLIENTDEASSOC, drop
CLIENTROAMING, drop
AUTOTUNERADIOPOWERCHANGE, drop
AUTOTUNERADIOCHANNELCHANGE, drop
COUNTERMEASURESTART, drop
COUNTERMEASURESTOP, drop
CLIENTDOT1XFAIL, drop
CLIENTCLEARED, drop
CLIENTAUTHORSUC, drop
RFDSPOOFMACAP, drop

display snmp notify target

189

RFDSPOOFSSIDAP, drop
RFDDETECTDOS, drop
RFDCLNTROGUEWAP, drop
RFDINTROGUEAP, drop
RFDINTROGUEDISAP, drop
RFDUNAUTHORSSID, drop
RFDUNAUTHOROUI, drop
RFDUNAUTHORAP, drop
DAPCONNWARN, drop
RFDDETECTDOSPORT, drop

The command lists settings separately for each notification profile. The
use count indicates how many notification targets use the profile. For
each notification type, the command lists whether MSS sends
notifications of that type to the targets that use the notification profile.
See Also

display snmp notify
target

„

clear snmp profile on page 122

„

set snmp profile on page 167

Displays SNMP notification targets.
Syntax — display snmp notify target
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
‘History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display a list of the SNMP notification targets, use the
following command:
WX-1200# display snmp notification target
Notify targets:
1: 10.10.40.99:162
user="remote-nmsuser", exists=no
engineID=ip
notify profile=default, exists=yes
security model=USM
security type=notify
notify type=INFORM

190

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

retry count=snmp-engine-id
timeout=1

Table 40 describes the fields in this display.
Table 40 Output for display snmp notification target
Field

Description

user

Name of the SNMP user.

engineID

SNMP engine ID associated with the user. For traps, the
engine ID is local. For informs, the engine ID is that of
the notification receiver.

notify profile

Name of the notification profile used by the target.

security model

SNMP security model:

security type

notify type

„

v1

„

v2c

„

usm

Security requirements for exchanging messages with
the target:
„

unsecured—SNMP message exchanges are not
secure.

„

authenticated—SNMP message exchanges are
authenticated but are not encrypted.

„

encrypted—SNMP message exchanges are
authenticated and encrypted.

Type of notification sent to the target:
„

inform

„

trap

retry count

Number of times MSS will resend an unacknowledged
inform.

timeout

Number of seconds MSS waits for acknowledgement of
an inform before resending the inform (if retries are
available).

See Also
„

clear snmp notify target on page 121

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

display snmp status

display snmp status

191

Displays SNMP version and status information.
Syntax — display snmp status
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display SNMP version and status information, use the
following command:
WX-1200# display snmp status
Server:
SNMP agent (server) is enabled
SNMPv1 is enabled
SNMPv2c is disabled
SNMPv3/USM is disabled
SNMP minimum security is unsecured
System name: pubs
System location: -- not set -System contact: -- not set -SNMP engine ID: 00000063000000a1c0a80142 (IP
192.168.1.66:161)
SNMP engine boots: 1
SNMP engine time: 19410
SNMP max message size: 2048

Table 41 describes the fields in this display.

Table 41 Output for display SNMP status
Field

Description

SNMP agent (server) is

State of the SNMP service on the switch:
„

Enabled

„

Disabled

SNMPv1 is ...

State of each supported protocol version of SNMP:

SNMPv2c is ...

„

Enabled

SNMPv3 is ...

„

Disabled

192

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Table 41 Output for display SNMP status (continued)
Field

Description

SNMP minimum security

Lowest (least secure) security level set on the switch:
„

authenticated—SNMP message exchanges are
authenticated but are not encrypted.

„

auth-req-unsec-notify—SNMP message exchanges
are authenticated but are not encrypted, and
notifications are neither authenticated nor
encrypted.

„

encrypted—SNMP message exchanges are
authenticated and encrypted.

„

unsecured—SNMP message exchanges are not
secure.

System Name

String configured by the set system name command.

System location

String configured by the set system location
command.

System contact

String configured by the set system contact
command.

SNMP engine ID

Unique ID of this SNMP engine.

SNMP engine boots

Number of times the SNMP engine has booted. This
number is at least as great as the number of times the
switch has booted.

SNMP engine time

Number of seconds since the SNMP engine was
rebooted.

SNMP max message size

Maximum length, in bytes, of SNMP messages sent by
this SNMP engine.

See Also
„

set snmp community on page 160

„

set snmp notify target on page 162

„

set snmp profile on page 167

„

set snmp protocol on page 172

„

set snmp security on page 173

„

set snmp usm on page 174

„

display snmp community on page 186

„

display snmp counters on page 187

„

display snmp notify profile on page 188

display snmp usm

display snmp usm

„

display snmp notify target on page 189

„

display snmp usm on page 193

193

Displays information about SNMPv3 users.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display USM settings, use the following command:
WX-1200# display snmp usm
USM users:
"nmsuser", engineID=localSnmpID
access=read-notify
auth=NONE
encrypt=NONE
notify target use cnt=0

Table 42 describes the fields in this display.
Table 42 Output for display snmp usm
Field

Description

USM name

Name of the SNMPv3 user.

engineID

Engine ID for the USM name, which is either the local
switch or the notification target where informs are to
be sent.

194

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

Table 42 Output for display snmp usm (continued)
Field

Description

access

Access settings for the string:

auth

encrypt

notify target use cnt

„

read-only—An SNMP management application
using the string can get (read) object values on the
switch but cannot set (write) them.

„

read-notify—An SNMP management application
using the string can get object values on the switch
but cannot set them. The switch can use the string
to send notifications.

„

notify-only—The switch can use the string to send
notifications.

„

read-write—An SNMP management application
using the string can get and set object values on the
switch.

„

notify-read-write—An SNMP management
application using the string can get and set object
values on the switch. The switch can use the string
to send notifications.

Authentication type:
„

md5

„

sha

„

none

Encryption (privacy) setting:
„

des

„

3des

„

aes

„

none

Number of times this community is specified in a
notification target entry.

See Also
„

clear snmp usm on page 122

„

display snmp usm on page 193

telnet

telnet

195

Opens a Telnet client session with a remote device.
Syntax — telnet {ip-addr | hostname} [port port-num]
„

ip-addr — IP address of the remote device.

„

hostname — Hostname of the remote device.

„

port port-num — TCP port number on which the TCP server on the
remote device listens for Telnet connections.

Defaults — MSS attempts to establish Telnet connections with TCP port
23 by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To end a Telnet session from the remote device, press Ctrl+t or
type quit or logout in the management session on the remote device. To
end a client session from the local WX switch, use the clear sessions
telnet client command.
If the configuration of the WX switch from which you enter the telnet
command has an ACL that denies Telnet client traffic, the ACL also
denies access by the telnet command.
Examples — In the following example, an administrator establishes a
Telnet session with another device and enters a command on the remote
device:
WX4400# telnet 10.10.10.90
Session 0 pty tty2.d Trying 10.10.10.90...
Connected to 10.10.10.90
Disconnect character is '^t'
Copyright (c) 2004 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved.
Username: username
Password: password
WX1200-remote> display vlan
Admin
VLAN Name
Status
---- ---------------- -----1 default
Up

VLAN Tunl
State Affin Port
Tag
----- ----- ---------------- ----Up
5
3
none

Port
State
----Up

196

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

3 red
10 backbone

Up
Up

Up
Up

5
5
1
2

none Up
none Up

When the administrator presses Ctrl+t to end the Telnet connection, the
management session returns to the local prompt:
WX1200-remote> Session 0 pty tty2.d terminated tt name tty2.d
WX1200#

See Also

traceroute

„

clear sessions on page 497

„

display sessions on page 500

Traces the route to an IP host.
Syntax — traceroute host [dnf] [no-dns] [port port-num]
[queries num] [size size] [ttl hops] [wait ms]
„

host — IP address, hostname, or alias of the destination host. Specify

the IP address in dotted decimal notation.
„

„

„

dnf — Sets the Do Not Fragment bit in the ping packet to prevent the
packet from being fragmented.
no-dns — Prevents MSS from performing a DNS lookup for each hop
to the destination host.
port port-num — TCP port number listening for the traceroute

probes.
„
„

„

queries num — Number of probes per hop.
size size — Probe packet size in bytes. You can specify from 40
through 1,460.
ttl hops — Maximum number of hops, which can be from 1 through

255.
„

wait ms — Probe wait in milliseconds. You can specify from 1 through

100,000.
Defaults
„

dnf — Disabled

traceroute

„

no-dns — Disabled

„

port — 33434

„

queries — 3

„

size — 38

„

ttl — 30

„

wait — 5000

197

Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To stop a traceroute command that is in progress, press
Ctrl+C.

Examples — The following example traces the route to host server1:
WX4400# traceroute server1
traceroute to server1.example.com (192.168.22.7), 30 hops max, 38 byte packets
1 engineering-1.example.com (192.168.192.206) 2 ms 1 ms 1 ms
2 engineering-2.example.com (192.168.196.204) 2 ms 3 ms 2 ms
3 gateway_a.example.com (192.168.1.201) 6 ms 3 ms 3 ms
4 server1.example.com (192.168.22.7) 3 ms * 2 ms

The first row of the display indicates the target host, the maximum
number of hops, and the packet size. Each numbered row displays
information about one hop. The rows are displayed in the order in which
the hops occur, beginning with the hop closest to the WX switch.
The row for a hop lists the total time in milliseconds for each ICMP packet
to reach the router or host, plus the time for the ICMP Time Exceeded
message to return to the host.
An exclamation point (!) following any of these values indicates that the
Port Unreachable message returned by the destination has a maximum
hop count of 0 or 1. This can occur if the destination uses the maximum
hop count value from the arriving packet as the maximum hop count in
its ICMP reply. The reply does not arrive at the source until the destination
receives a traceroute packet with a maximum hop count equal to the
number of hops between the source and destination.
An asterisk (*) indicates that the timeout period expired before MSS
received a Time Exceeded message for the packet.

198

CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS

If Traceroute receives an ICMP error message other than a Time Exceeded
or Port Unreachable message, MSS displays one of the error codes
described in Table 43 instead of displaying the round-trip time or an
asterisk (*).
Table 43 describes the traceroute error messages.
Table 43 Error messages for traceroute
Field

Description

!N

No route to host. The network is unreachable.

!H

No route to host. The host is unreachable.

!P

Connection refused. The protocol is unreachable.

!F

Fragmentation needed but Do Not Fragment (DNF) bit was set.

!S

Source route failed.

!A

Communication administratively prohibited.

?

Unknown error occurred.

See Also
„

ping on page 140

7

AAA COMMANDS

Use authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) commands to
provide a secure network connection and a record of user activity.
Location policy commands override any virtual LAN (VLAN) or security
ACL assignment by AAA or the local WX database to help you control
access locally.
(Security ACLs are packet filters. For command descriptions, see
Chapter 12.)

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents AAA commands alphabetically. Use Table 44 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 44 AAA Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Authentication

set authentication console on page 228
set authentication admin on page 226
set authentication dot1x on page 230
set authentication mac on page 236
set authentication last-resort on page 234
set authentication web on page 239
set authentication proxy on page 238
clear authentication admin on page 202
clear authentication console on page 203
clear authentication dot1x on page 204
clear authentication last-resort on page 205
clear authentication mac on page 205
clear authentication proxy on page 206

200

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

Table 44 AAA Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command
clear authentication web on page 207

Local Authorization set user on page 256
for Password Users
clear user on page 213
set user attr on page 257
clear user attr on page 214
set usergroup on page 259
clear usergroup on page 215
set user group on page 258
clear user group on page 215
clear usergroup attr on page 216
Local Authorization set mac-user on page 245
for MAC Users
clear mac-user on page 209
set mac-user attr on page 246
clear mac-user attr on page 209
set mac-usergroup attr on page 252
clear mac-usergroup attr on page 212
clear mac-user group on page 210
clear mac-usergroup on page 211
Web authorization

set web-aaa on page 260

Accounting

set accounting {admin | console} on page 223
set accounting {dot1x | mac | web} on page 224
display accounting statistics on page 220
clear accounting on page 201

AAA information

display aaa on page 217

Mobility Profiles

set mobility-profile on page 253
set mobility-profile mode on page 255
display mobility-profile on page 222
clear mobility-profile on page 213

Location Policy

set location policy on page 241
display location policy on page 222
clear location policy on page 208

clear accounting

clear accounting

201

Removes accounting services for specified wireless users with
administrative access or network access.
Syntax — clear accounting {admin | dot1x} {user-glob}
„

admin — Users with administrative access to the WX switch through a

console connection or through a Telnet or Web Manager connection.
„

dot1x — Users with network access through the WX switch. Users

with network access are authorized to use the network through either
an IEEE 802.1X method or their media access control (MAC) address.
„

user-glob — Single user or set of users with administrative access or
network access.

Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes accounting services for
authorized network user Nin:
WX4400# clear accounting dot1x Nin
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set accounting {admin | console} on page 223

„

display accounting statistics on page 220

202

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

clear authentication
admin

Removes an authentication rule for administrative access through Telnet
or Web Manager.
Syntax — clear authentication admin user-glob
„

user-glob — A single user or set of users.

Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears authentication for
administrator Jose:
WX4400# clear authentication admin Jose
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear authentication console on page 203

„

clear authentication dot1x on page 204

„

clear authentication last-resort on page 205

„

clear authentication mac on page 205

„

clear authentication web on page 207

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication admin on page 226

clear authentication console

clear authentication
console

203

Removes an authentication rule for administrative access through the
Console.
Syntax — clear authentication console user-glob
„

user-glob — A single user or set of users.

Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
The syntax descriptions for the clear authentication commands have
been separated for clarity. However, the options and behavior for the
clear authentication console command are the same as in previous
releases.
Examples — The following command clears authentication for
administrator Regina:
WX4400# clear authentication console Regina
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear authentication admin on page 202

„

display aaa on page 217

„

clear authentication dot1x on page 204

„

clear authentication last-resort on page 205

„

clear authentication mac on page 205

„

clear authentication web on page 207

„

set authentication console on page 228

204

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

clear authentication
dot1x

Removes an 802.1X authentication rule.
Syntax — clear authentication dot1x {ssid ssid-name | wired}
user-glob
„

ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule

applies.
„

wired — Clears a rule used for access over an WX switch’s

wired-authentication port.
„

user-glob — User-glob associated with the rule you are removing.

Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes 802.1X authentication
for network users with usernames ending in @thiscorp.com who try to
access SSID finance:
WX4400# clear authentication dot1x ssid finance
*@thiscorp.com

See Also
„

clear authentication admin on page 202

„

clear authentication console on page 203

„

clear authentication last-resort on page 205

„

clear authentication mac on page 205

„

clear authentication web on page 207

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication dot1x on page 230

clear authentication last-resort

clear authentication
last-resort

205

Removes a last-resort authentication rule.
Syntax — clear authentication last-resort {ssid ssid-name |
wired}
„

ssid ssid-name —SSID name to which this authentication rule

applies.
„

wired — Clears a rule used for access over an WX switch’s

wired-authentication port.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes a last-resort
authentication rule for wired-authentication access:
WX4400# clear authentication last-resort wired

See Also

clear authentication
mac

„

clear authentication admin on page 202

„

clear authentication console on page 203

„

clear authentication dot1x on page 204

„

clear authentication mac on page 205

„

clear authentication web on page 207

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication last-resort on page 234

Removes a MAC authentication rule.
Syntax — clear authentication mac {ssid ssid-name | wired}
mac-addr-glob
„

ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule

applies.
„

wired — Clears a rule used for access over an WX switch’s

wired-authentication port.

206

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

„

mac-addr-glob — MAC address glob associated with the rule you are
removing. Specify a MAC address, or use the wildcard (*) character to
specify a set of MAC addresses. (For details, see “MAC Address
Globs” on page 27.)

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes a MAC authentication
rule for access to SSID thatcorp by MAC addresses beginning with
aa:bb:cc:
WX4400# clear authentication mac ssid thatcorp aa:bb:cc:*

See Also

clear authentication
proxy

„

clear authentication admin on page 202

„

clear authentication console on page 203

„

clear authentication dot1x on page 204

„

clear authentication last-resort on page 205

„

clear authentication web on page 207

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication mac on page 236

Removes a proxy rule for third-party AP users.
Syntax — clear authentication proxy ssid ssid-name user-glob
„

ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule applies.

„

user-glob — User-glob associated with the rule you are removing.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.

clear authentication web

207

Examples — The following command removes the proxy rule for SSID
mycorp and userglob **:
WX-1200# clear authentication proxy ssid mycorp **

See Also
„
„

clear authentication
web

set authentication proxy on page 238
on page 260

Removes a WebAAA rule.
Syntax — clear authentication web {ssid ssid-name | wired}
user-glob
„

ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule

applies.
„

wired — Clears a rule used for access over an WX switch’s

wired-authentication port.
„

user-glob — User-glob associated with the rule you are removing.

Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes WebAAA for SSID
research and userglob temp*@thiscorp.com:
WX4400# clear authentication web ssid research
temp*@thiscorp.com

See Also
„

clear authentication admin on page 202

„

clear authentication console on page 203

208

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

clear location policy

„

clear authentication dot1x on page 204

„

clear authentication last-resort on page 205

„

clear authentication mac on page 205

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication web on page 239

Removes a rule from the location policy on a WX switch.
Syntax — clear location policy rule-number
„

rule-number — Index number of a location policy rule to remove

from the location policy.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To determine the index numbers of location policy rules, use
the display location policy command. Removing all the ACEs from the
location policy disables this function on the WX switch.
Examples — The following command removes location policy rule 4
from an WX switch’s location policy:
WX4400# clear location policy 4
success: clause 4 is removed.

See Also
„

display location policy on page 222

„

set location policy on page 241

clear mac-user

clear mac-user

209

Removes a user profile from the local database on the WX switch, for a
user who is authenticated by a MAC address.
(To remove a user profile in RADIUS, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear mac-user mac-addr
„

mac-addr — MAC address of the user, in hexadecimal numbers
separated by colons (:). You can omit leading zeros.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Deleting a MAC user’s profile from the database deletes the
assignment of any attributes in the profile to the user.
Examples — The following command removes the user profile for a user
at MAC address 01:02:03:04:05:06:
WX4400# clear mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear mac-user attr

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set mac-usergroup attr on page 252

„

set mac-user attr on page 246

Removes an authorization attribute from the user profile in the local
database on the WX switch, for a user who is authenticated by a MAC
address.
(To remove an authorization attribute in RADIUS, see the documentation
for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear mac-user mac-addr attr attribute-name
„

mac-addr — MAC address of the user, in hexadecimal numbers
separated by colons (:). You can omit leading zeros.

210

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

„

attribute-name — Name of an attribute used to authorize the MAC
user for a particular service or session characteristic. (For a list of
authorization attributes, see Table 47 on page 247.)

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes an access control list
(ACL) from the profile of a user at MAC address 01:02:03:04:05:06:
WX4400# clear mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06 attr filter-id
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear mac-user
group

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set mac-user attr on page 246

Removes a user profile from a MAC user group in the local database on
the WX switch, for a user who is authenticated by a MAC address.
(To remove a MAC user group profile in RADIUS, see the documentation
for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear mac-user mac-addr group
„

mac-addr — MAC address of the user, in hexadecimal numbers
separated by colons (:). You can omit leading zeros.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Removing a MAC user from a MAC user group removes the
group name from the user’s profile, but does not delete the user group
from the local WX database. To remove the group, use clear
mac-usergroup.

clear mac-usergroup

211

Examples — The following command deletes the user profile for a user
at MAC address 01:02:03:04:05:06 from its user group:
WX4400# clear mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06 group
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear
mac-usergroup

„

clear mac-usergroup on page 211

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set mac-user on page 245

Removes a user group from the local database on the WX switch, for a
group of users who are authenticated by a MAC address.
(To delete a MAC user group in RADIUS, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear mac-usergroup group-name
„

group-name — Name of an existing MAC user group.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To remove a user from a MAC user group, use the clear
mac-user group command.
Examples — The following command deletes the MAC user group
eastcoasters from the local database:
WX4400# clear mac-usergroup eastcoasters
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear mac-usergroup attr on page 212

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set mac-usergroup attr on page 252

212

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

clear
mac-usergroup attr

Removes an authorization attribute from a MAC user group in the local
database on the WX switch, for a group of users who are authenticated
by a MAC address.
(To unconfigure an authorization attribute in RADIUS, see the
documentation for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear mac-usergroup group-name attr attribute-name
„
„

group-name — Name of an existing MAC user group.
attribute-name — Name of an attribute used to authorize the MAC
users in the user group for a particular service or session characteristic.
(For a list of authorization attributes, see Table 47 on page 247.)

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To remove the group itself, use the clear mac-usergroup
command.
Examples — The following command removes the members of the MAC
user group eastcoasters from a VLAN assignment by deleting the
VLAN-Name attribute from the group:
WX4400# clear mac-usergroup eastcoasters attr vlan-name
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear mac-usergroup on page 211

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set mac-usergroup attr on page 252

clear mobility-profile

clear
mobility-profile

213

Removes a Mobility Profile entirely.
Syntax — clear mobility-profile name
„

name — Name of an existing Mobility Profile.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the Mobility Profile for
user Nin:
WX1200# clear mobility-profile Nin
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear user

„

set mobility-profile on page 253

„

set mobility-profile mode on page 255

„

display mobility-profile on page 222

Removes a user profile from the local database on the WX switch, for a
user with a password.
(To remove a user profile in RADIUS, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear user username
„

username — Username of a user with a password.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Deleting the user’s profile from the database deletes the
assignment of any attributes in the profile to the user.

214

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

Examples — The following command deletes the user profile for user
Nin:
WX4400# clear user Nin
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear user attr

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set user on page 256

Removes an authorization attribute from the user profile in the local
database on the WX switch, for a user with a password.
(To remove an authorization attribute from a RADIUS user profile, see the
documentation for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear user username attr attribute-name
„
„

username — Username of a user with a password.
attribute-name — Name of an attribute used to authorize the user
for a particular service or session characteristic. (For a list of
authorization attributes, see Table 47 on page 247.)

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the Session-Timeout
attribute from Hosni’s user profile:
WX4400# clear user Hosni attr session-timeout
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display aaa on page 217

„

set user attr on page 257

clear user group

clear user group

215

Removes a user with a password from membership in a user group in the
local database on the WX switch.
(To remove a user from a user group in RADIUS, see the documentation
for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear user username group
„

username — Username of a user with a password.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Removing the user from the group removes the group name
from the user’s profile, but does not delete either the user or the user
group from the local WX database. To remove the group, use clear
usergroup.
Examples — The following command removes the user Nin from a user
group:
WX4400# clear user Nin group
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear usergroup

„

clear usergroup on page 215

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set user group on page 258

Removes a user group and its attributes from the local database on the
WX switch, for users with passwords.
(To delete a user group in RADIUS, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear usergroup group-name
„

group-name — Name of an existing user group.

216

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Removing a user group from the local WX database does not
remove the user profiles of the group’s members from the database.
Examples — The following command deletes the cardiology user group
from the local database:
WX4400# clear usergroup cardiology
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear usergroup attr

„

clear usergroup attr on page 216

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set usergroup on page 259

Removes an authorization attribute from a user group in the local
database on the WX switch.
(To remove an authorization attribute in RADIUS, see the documentation
for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear usergroup group-name attr attribute-name
„
„

group-name — Name of an existing user group.
attribute-name — Name of an attribute used to authorize all the
users in the group for a particular service or session characteristic. (For
a list of authorization attributes, see Table 47 on page 247.)

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

display aaa

217

Examples — The following command removes the members of the user
group cardiology from a network access time restriction by deleting the
Time-Of-Day attribute from the group:
WX4400# clear usergroup cardiology attr time-of-day
success: change accepted.

See Also

display aaa

„

clear usergroup on page 215

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set usergroup on page 259

Displays all current AAA settings.
Syntax — display aaa
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. In Version 4.0, Web Portal
secion added to indicate the state of the WebAAA feature.
Examples — To display all current AAA settings, type the following
command:

WX4400# display aaa
Default Values
authport=1812 acctport=1813 timeout=5 acct-timeout=5
retrans=3 deadtime=0 key=(null) author-pass=(null)
Radius Servers
Server
Addr
Ports
T/o Tries Dead State
-------------------------------------------------------------------rs-3
198.162.1.1
1821 1813 5
3
0
UP
rs-4
198.168.1.2
1821 1813 77
11
2
UP
rs-5
198.162.1.3
1821 1813 42
23
0
UP
Server groups
sg1: rs-3
sg2: rs-4
sg3: rs-5
Web Portal
enabled

218

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set

authentication admin Jose sg3
authentication console * none
authentication mac ssid mycorp * local
authentication dot1x ssid mycorp Geetha eap-tls
authentication dot1x ssid mycorp * peap-mschapv2 sg1 sg2 sg3
authentication dot1x ssid any ** peap-mschapv2 sg1 sg2 sg3
accounting dot1x Nin ssid mycorp stop-only sg2
accounting admin Natasha start-stop local
authentication last-resort ssid guestssid local

user Nin
Password = 082c6c64060b (encrypted)
Filter-Id = acl-999.in
Filter-Id = acl-999.out
user last-resort-guestssid
Vlan-Name = k2
user last-resort-any
Vlan-Name = foo
mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06
usergroup eastcoasters
session-timeout = 99

Table 45 describes the fields that can appear in display aaa output.
Table 45 display aaa Output
Field

Description

Default Values

RADIUS default values for all parameters.

authport

UDP port on the WX switch for transmission of RADIUS
authorization and authentication messages. The default
port is 1812.

acctport

UDP port on the WX switch for transmission of RADIUS
accounting records. The default is port 1813.

timeout

Number of seconds the WX switch waits for a RADIUS
server to respond before retransmitting. The default is
5 seconds.

acct-timeout

Number of seconds the WX switch waits for a RADIUS
server to respond to an accounting request before
retransmitting. The default is 5 seconds.

retrans

Number of times the WX switch retransmits a message
before determining a RADIUS server unresponsive. The
default is 3 times.

display aaa

219

Table 45 display aaa Output (continued)
deadtime

Number of minutes the WX switch waits after determining
a RADIUS server is unresponsive before trying to reconnect
with this server. During the dead time, the RADIUS server
is ignored by the WX switch. The default is 0 minutes.

key

Shared secret key, or password, used to authenticate to a
RADIUS server. The default is no key.

author-pass

Password used for outbound authentication to a RADIUS
server, used in conjunction with a last-resort username. By
default, a MAC user’s MAC address is also used as that
user’s password, and no global password is set.

Radius Servers

Information about active RADIUS servers.

Server

Name of each RADIUS server currently active.

Addr

IP address of each RADIUS server currently active.

Ports

UDP ports that the WX switch uses for authentication
messages and for accounting records.

T/o

Setting of timeouts on each RADIUS server currently active.

Tries

Number of retransmissions configured for each RADIUS
server currently active. The default is 3 times.

Dead

Length of time until the server is considered responsive
again.

State

Current state of each RADIUS server currently active:
„

UP (operating)

„

DOWN (unavailable)

Server groups

Names of RADIUS server groups and member servers
configured on the WX switch.

Web Portal

State of the WebAAA feature:
„

enabled

„

disabled

set commands

List of commands used to configure AAA on the WX
switch.

user and user group
profiles

List of user and user group profiles stored in the local
database on the WX switch.

See Also
„

set accounting {admin | console} on page 223

„

set authentication admin on page 226

„

set authentication console on page 228

„

set authentication dot1x on page 230

220

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

display accounting
statistics

„

set authentication last-resort on page 234

„

set authentication mac on page 236

„

set authentication web on page 239

Displays the AAA accounting records for wireless users. The records are
stored in the local database on the WX switch.
(To display RADIUS accounting records, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — display accounting statistics
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display the locally stored accounting records, type the
following command:
WX4400# display accounting statistics
Sep 26 11:01:48 Acct-Status-Type=START Acct-Authentic=2
User-Name=geetha AAA_TTY_ATTR=2 Event-Timestamp=1064599308
Sept 26 12:50:21 Acct-Status-Type=STOP Acct-Authentic=2
User-Name=geetha AAA_TTY_ATTR=2 Acct-Session-Time=6513
Event-Timestamp=1064605821 Acct-Output-Octets=332
Acct-Input-Octets=61
Sep 26 12:50:33 Acct-Status-Type=START Acct-Authentic=2
User-Name=geetha AAA_TTY_ATTR=2 Event-Timestamp=1064605833

Table 46 describes the fields that can appear in display accounting
statistics output.
Table 46 display accounting statistics Output
Field

Description

Date and time

Date and time of the accounting record.

display accounting statistics

221

Table 46 display accounting statistics Output (continued)
Acct-Status-Type

Acct-Authentic

User-Name

Type of accounting record:
„

START

„

STOP

„

UPDATE

Location where the user was authenticated (if
authentication took place) for the session:
„

1 — RADIUS server

„

2 — Local WX database

Username of a user with a password.

Acct-Multi-Session-Id Unique accounting ID for multiple related sessions in a log
file.
AAA_TTY_ATTR

For sessions conducted through a console or
administrative Telnet connection, the Telnet terminal
number.

Event-Timestamp

Time (in seconds since January 1, 1970) at which the event
was triggered. (See RFC 2869 for more information.)

Acct-Session-Time

Number of seconds that the session has been online.

Acct-Output-Octets

Number of octets the WX switch has sent during the
session.

Acct-Input-Octets

Number of octets the WX switch has received during the
session.

Acct-Output-Packets Number of packets the WX switch has sent during the
session.
Acct-Input-Packets

Number of packets the WX switch has received during the
session.

Vlan-Name

Name of the client’s VLAN.

Calling-Station-Id

MAC address of the supplicant (client).

Nas-Port-Id

Number of the port and radio on the MAP access point
through which the session was conducted.

Called-Station-Id

MAC address of the MAP access point through which the
client reached the network.

See Also
„

clear accounting on page 201

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set accounting {admin | console} on page 223

222

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

display location
policy

Displays the list of location policy rules that make up the location policy
on an WX switch.
Syntax — display location policy
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the list of location policy
rules in the location policy on an WX switch:

WX4400 display location policy
Id Clauses
---------------------------------------------------------------1) deny if user eq *.theirfirm.com
2) permit vlan guest_1 if vlan neq *.wodefirm.com
3) permit vlan bld4.tac inacl tac_24.in if user eq *.ny.wodefirm.com

See Also

display
mobility-profile

„

clear location policy on page 208

„

set location policy on page 241

Displays the named Mobility Profile. If you do not specify a Mobility
Profile name, this command shows all Mobility Profile names and port
lists on the WX.
Syntax — display mobility-profile [name]
„

name — Name of an existing Mobility Profile.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the Mobility Profile
magnolia:
WX1200# display mobility-profile magnolia

set accounting {admin | console}

223

Mobility Profiles
Name
Ports
=========================
magnolia
AP 2

See Also

set accounting
{admin | console}

„

clear mobility-profile on page 213

„

set mobility-profile on page 253

Sets up accounting services for specified wireless users with
administrative access, and defines the accounting records and where they
are sent.
Syntax — set accounting {admin | console} {user-glob}
{start-stop | stop-only} method1 [method2] [method3]
[method4]
„

admin — Users with administrative access to the WX switch through

Telnet or Web Manager.
„

console — Users with administrative access to the WX switch

through a console connection.
„

„

user-glob — Single user or set of users with administrative access or
network access.

Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)

This option does not apply if mac is specified. For mac, specify a
mac-addr-glob. (See “MAC Address Globs” on page 27.)
„

start-stop — Sends accounting records at the start and end of a

network session.
„

stop-only — Sends accounting records only at the end of a network

session.
„

method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four

methods that MSS uses to process accounting records. Specify one or
more of the following methods in priority order. If the first method
does not succeed, MSS tries the second method, and so on.

224

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

A method can be one of the following:
„

local — Stores accounting records in the local database on the

WX switch. When the local accounting storage space is full, MSS
overwrites older records with new ones.
„

server-group-name — Stores accounting records on one or more

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers. You
can also enter the names of existing RADIUS server groups as
methods.
Defaults — Accounting is disabled for all users by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — For network users with start-stop accounting whose records
are sent to a RADIUS server, MSS sends interim updates to the RADIUS
server when the user roams.
Examples — The following command issues start-and-stop accounting
records at the local WX database for administrator Natasha, when she
accesses the switch using Telnet or Web Manager:
WX4400# set accounting admin Natasha start-stop local
success: change accepted.

See Also

set accounting
{dot1x | mac | web}

„

clear accounting on page 201

„

display accounting statistics on page 220

Sets up accounting services for specified wireless users with network
access, and defines the accounting records and where they are sent.
Syntax — set accounting {dot1x | mac | web} {ssid ssid-name |
wired} {user-glob | mac-addr-glob} {start-stop | stop-only}
method1 [method2] [method3] [method4]
„

dot1x — Users with network access through the WX switch who are

authenticated by 802.1X.
„

mac — Users with network access through the WX switch who are

authenticated by MAC authentication

set accounting {dot1x | mac | web}

„

„

„

225

web — Users with network access through the WX switch who are
authenticated by WebAAA
ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this accounting rule applies.
To apply the rule to all SSIDs, type any.
wired — Applies this accounting rule specifically to users who are

authenticated on a wired authentication port.
„

user-glob — Single user or set of users with administrative access or
network access.

Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character — either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
This option does not apply if mac is specified. For mac, specify a
mac-addr-glob. (See “MAC Address Globs” on page 27.)
„

mac-addr-glob — A single user or set of users with access via a MAC
address. Specify a MAC address, or use the wildcard (*) character to
specify a set of MAC addresses. (For details, see “MAC Address
Globs” on page 27.)

This option applies only when mac is specified.
„

„

„

start-stop — Sends accounting records at the start and end of a
network session.
stop-only — Sends accounting records only at the end of a network
session.
method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four

methods that MSS uses to process accounting records. Specify one or
more of the following methods in priority order. If the first method
does not succeed, MSS tries the second method, and so on.
A method can be one of the following:
„

local — Stores accounting records in the local database on the

WX switch. When the local accounting storage space is full, MSS
overwrites older records with new ones.
„

server-group-name — Stores accounting records on one or more

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers. You
can also enter the names of existing RADIUS server groups as
methods.

226

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

Defaults — Accounting is disabled for all users by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — For network users with start-stop accounting whose records
are sent to a RADIUS server, MSS sends interim updates to the RADIUS
server when the user roams.
Examples — The following command issues stop-only records to the
RADIUS server group sg2 for network user Nin, who is authenticated by
802.1X:
WX4400# set accounting dot1x Nin stop-only sg2
success: change accepted.

See Also

set authentication
admin

„

clear accounting on page 201

„

display accounting statistics on page 220

Configures authentication and defines where it is performed for specified
users with administrative access through Telnet or Web Manager.
Syntax — set authentication admin
user-glob method1 [method2] [method3] [method4]
„

user-glob — Single user or set of users with administrative access

over the network through Telnet or Web Manager.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
„

method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four

methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.
A method can be one of the following:
„

local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups

on the WX switch for authentication.

set authentication admin

„

227

server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers

for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
„

none — For users with administrative access only, MSS performs no

authentication, but prompts for a username and password and
accepts any combination of entries, including blanks.
The authentication method none you can specify for administrative
access is different from the fallthru authentication type none, which
applies only to network access. The authentication method none allows
access to the WX switch by an administrator. The fallthru authentication
type none denies access to a network user. (See “set service-profile
auth-fallthru” on page 352.)
For more information, see “Usage.”
Defaults — By default, authentication is deactivated for all admin users.
The default authentication method in an admin authentication rule is
local. MSS checks the local WX database for authentication.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
The syntax descriptions for the set authentication commands have been
separated for clarity. However, the options and behavior for the set
authentication admin command are the same as in previous releases.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of users. (For details, see “User Globs, MAC Address
Globs, and VLAN Globs” on page 26.)
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
console command, MSS applies them in the order in which they appear
in the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method, and
so on.
However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
ignores any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the RADIUS server group.

228

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

If a AAA rule specifies local as a secondary AAA method, to be used if the
RADIUS servers are unavailable, and MSS authenticates a client with the
local method, MSS starts again at the beginning of the method list when
attempting to authorize the client. This can cause unexpected delays
during client processing and can cause the client to time out before
completing logon.
Examples — The following command configures administrator Jose,
who connects via Telnet, for authentication on RADIUS server group sg3:
WX4400# set authentication admin Jose sg3
success: change accepted.

See Also

set authentication
console

„

clear authentication admin on page 202

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication console on page 228

„

set authentication dot1x on page 230

„

set authentication last-resort on page 234

„

set authentication mac on page 236

„

set authentication web on page 239

Configures authentication and defines where it is performed for specified
users with administrative access through a console connection.
Syntax — set authentication console
user-glob method1 [method2] [method3] [method4]
„

user-glob — Single user or set of users with administrative access

through the switch’s console.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
„

method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four

methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.

set authentication console

229

A method can be one of the following:
„

local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups

on the WX switch for authentication.
„

server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers

for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
„

none — For users with administrative access only, MSS performs

no authentication, but prompts for a username and password and
accepts any combination of entries, including blanks.
The authentication method none you can specify for administrative
access is different from the fallthru authentication type none, which
applies only to network access. The authentication method none allows
access to the WX switch by an administrator. The fallthru authentication
type none denies access to a network user. (See “set service-profile
auth-fallthru” on page 352.)
For more information, see “Usage.”
Defaults — By default, authentication is deactivated for all console
users, and the default authentication method in a console authentication
rule is none. MSS requires no username or password, by default. These
users can press Enter at the prompts for administrative access.
3Com recommends that you change the default setting unless the WX
switch is in a secure physical location.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of users. (For details, see “User Globs, MAC Address
Globs, and VLAN Globs” on page 26.)
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
console command, MSS applies them in the order in which they appear
in the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method, and
so on.

230

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
ignores any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the RADIUS server group.
Examples — To set the console port so that it does not enforce
username-password authentication for administrators, type the following
command:
WX4400# set authentication console * none
success: change accepted.

See Also

set authentication
dot1x

„

clear authentication console on page 203

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication admin on page 226

„

set authentication dot1x on page 230

„

set authentication last-resort on page 234

„

set authentication mac on page 236

„

set authentication web on page 239

Configures authentication and defines how and where it is performed for
specified wireless or wired authentication clients who use an IEEE 802.1X
authentication protocol to access the network through the WX switch.
Syntax — set authentication dot1x {ssid ssid-name | wired}
user-glob [bonded] protocol method1 [method2] [method3]
[method4]
„

„

ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies. To apply the rule to all SSIDs, type any.
wired — Applies this authentication rule specifically to users

connected to a wired authentication port.
„

user-glob — A single user or a set of users with 802.1X network

access.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character — either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)

set authentication dot1x

„

„

231

bonded — Enables Bonded Auth™ (bonded authentication). When
this feature is enabled, MSS authenticates the user only if the machine
the user is on has already been authenticated.
protocol — Protocol used for authentication. Specify one of the

following:
„

eap-md5 — Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) with
message-digest algorithm 5. For wired authentication clients:

Uses challenge-response to compare hashes
Provides no encryption or integrity checking for the connection
„

eap-tls — EAP with Transport Layer Security (TLS):

Provides mutual authentication, integrity-protected negotiation,
and key exchange
Requires X.509 public key certificates on both sides of the
connection
Provides encryption and integrity checking for the connection
Cannot be used with RADIUS server authentication
„

peap-mschapv2 — Protected EAP (PEAP) with Microsoft Challenge
Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 (MS-CHAP-V2). For
wireless clients:

Uses TLS for encryption and data integrity checking and server-side
authentication
Provides MS-CHAP-V2 mutual authentication
Only the server side of the connection needs a certificate.
The wireless client authenticates using TLS to set up an encrypted
session. Then MS-CHAP-V2 performs mutual authentication using
the specified AAA method.
„

pass-through — MSS sends all the EAP protocol processing to a

RADIUS server.
EAP-MD5 does not work with Microsoft wired authentication clients.
„

method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one and up to four

methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.

232

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

A method can be one of the following:
„

local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups on

the WX switch for authentication.
„

server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers

for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
RADIUS servers cannot be used with the EAP-TLS protocol.
For more information, see “Usage.”
Defaults — By default, authentication is unconfigured for all clients with
network access through MAP ports or wired authentication ports on the
WX switch. Connection, authorization, and accounting are also disabled
for these users.
Bonded authentication is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of users by “globbing.” (For details, see “User Globs” on
page 26.)
You can configure a rule either for wireless access to an SSID, or for wired
access through a WX switch’s wired authentication port. If the rule is for
wireless access to an SSID, specify the SSID name or specify any to match
on all SSID names. If the rule is for wired access, specify wired instead of
an SSID name.
You cannot configure client authentication that uses both the EAP-TLS
protocol and one or more RADIUS servers. EAP-TLS authentication is
supported only on the local WX database.
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
dot1x command, MSS applies them in the order in which they appear in
the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method, and
so on.

set authentication dot1x

233

However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
overrides any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the server group.
If the user does not support 802.1X, MSS attempts to perform MAC
authentication for the user. In this case, if the switch’s configuration
contains a set authentication mac command that matches the SSID the
user is attempting to access and the user’s MAC address, MSS uses the
method specified by the command. Otherwise, MSS uses local MAC
authentication by default.
If the username does not match an authentication rule for the SSID the
user is attempting to access, MSS uses the fallthru authentication type
configured for the SSID, which can be last-resort, web (for WebAAA),
or none.
Examples — The following command configures EAP-TLS authentication
in the local WX database for SSID mycorp and 802.1X client Geetha:
WX4400# set authentication dot1x ssid mycorp Geetha eap-tls
local
success: change accepted.

The following command configures PEAP-MS-CHAP-V2 authentication at
RADIUS server groups sg1 through sg3 for all 802.1X clients at
example.com who want to access SSID examplecorp:
WX4400# set authentication dot1x ssid examplecorp
*@example.com peap-mschapv2 sg1 sg2 sg3
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear authentication dot1x on page 204

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication admin on page 226

„

set authentication console on page 228

„

set authentication last-resort on page 234

„

set authentication mac on page 236

„

set authentication web on page 239

„

set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352

234

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

set authentication
last-resort

Configures an authentication rule to grant network access to a user who
is not otherwise granted or denied access by 802.1X, or granted access
by MAC authentication.
Syntax — set authentication last-resort
{ssid ssid-name | wired} method1 [method2] [method3]
[method4]
„

„

ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies. To apply the rule to all SSIDs, type any.
wired — Applies this authentication rule specifically to users

connected to a wired authentication port.
„

method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four

methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.
A method can be one of the following:
„

local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups on

the WX switch for authentication.
„

server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers

for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
For more information, see “Usage.”
Defaults — By default, authentication is unconfigured for all clients with
network access through MAP ports or wired authentication ports on the
WX switch. Connection, authorization, and accounting are also disabled
for these users. When using RADIUS for authentication, a last-resort
user’s default authorization password is 3Com.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of users by “globbing.” (For details, see “User Globs” on
page 26.)

set authentication last-resort

235

You can configure a rule either for wireless access to an SSID, or for wired
access through a WX switch’s wired authentication port. If the rule is for
wireless access to an SSID, specify the SSID name or specify any to match
on all SSID names. If the rule is for wired access, specify wired instead of
an SSID name.
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
last-resort command, MSS applies them in the order in which they
appear in the command, with these results:
„
„

If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method,
and so on.

However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
overrides any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the server group.
MSS uses a last-resort authentication rule under the following conditions:
„

The client is not denied access by 802.1X or does not support 802.1X.

„

The client’s MAC address does not match a MAC authentication rule.

„

The fallthru method is last-resort. (For a wireless authentication rule,
the fallthru method is specified by the set service-profile
auth-fallthru command. For a wired authentication rule, the fallthru
method is specified by the auth-fall-thru option of the set port type
wired-auth command.)

For wireless access, MSS appends the requested SSID name to the user
name last-resort. For example, if the requested SSID is mycorp, MSS
attempts to authenticate the user last-resort-mycorp. If the RADIUS server
or local database used as the authentication method has the user
last-resort-mycorp, access is granted. Otherwise, access is denied.
If the SSID specified in the last-resort authentication rule is any, MSS
searches for user last-resort-any. The any in the username is not a
wildcard. The username must be last-resort-any, exactly as spelled here.
Examples — The following command configures a last-resort
authentication rule in the local WX database for SSID mycorp:
WX4400# set authentication last-resort ssid mycorp local
success: change accepted.

236

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

See Also

set authentication
mac

„

clear authentication last-resort on page 205

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication admin on page 226

„

set authentication console on page 228

„

set authentication dot1x on page 230

„

set authentication mac on page 236

„

set authentication web on page 239

Configures authentication and defines where it is performed for specified
non-802.1X users with network access through a media access control
(MAC) address.
Syntax — set authentication mac
{ssid ssid-name | wired} mac-addr-glob method1
[method2] [method3] [method4]
„

„

ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies. To apply the rule to all SSIDs, type any.
wired — Applies this authentication rule specifically to users

connected to a wired authentication port.
„

„

mac-addr-glob — A single user or set of users with access via a MAC
address. Specify a MAC address, or use the wildcard (*) character to
specify a set of MAC addresses. (For details, see “MAC Address
Globs” on page 27.)
method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four

methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.
A method can be one of the following:
„

local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups on

the WX switch for authentication.
„

server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers

for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
For more information, see “Usage.”

set authentication mac

237

Defaults — By default, authentication is deactivated for all MAC users,
which means MAC address authentication fails by default. When using
RADIUS for authentication, a MAC user’s MAC address is also used as the
authorization password for that user, and no global authorization
password is set.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of MAC addresses by “globbing.” (For details, see “User
Globs, MAC Address Globs, and VLAN Globs” on page 26.)
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
mac command, MSS applies them in the order in which they appear in
the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method, and
so on.
However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
ignores any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the RADIUS server group.
If the switch’s configuration contains a set authentication mac
command that matches the SSID the user is attempting to access and the
user’s MAC address, MSS uses the method specified by the command.
Otherwise, MSS uses local MAC authentication by default.
If the username does not match an authentication rule for the SSID the
user is attempting to access, MSS uses the fallthru authentication type
configured for the SSID, which can be last-resort, web (for WebAAA),
or none.
Examples — To use the local WX database to authenticate all users who
access the mycorp2 SSID by their MAC address, type the following
command:
WX4400# set authentication ssid mycorp2 mac ** local
success: change accepted.

238

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

See Also

set authentication
proxy

„

clear authentication mac on page 205

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication admin on page 226

„

set authentication console on page 228

„

set authentication dot1x on page 230

„

set authentication last-resort on page 234

„

set authentication web on page 239

Configures a proxy authentication rule for a third-party AP’s wireless
users.
Syntax — set authentication proxy ssid ssid-name user-glob
radius-server-group
„

ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule applies.

„

user-glob — A single user or a set of users.

Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
„

radius-server-group — A group of RADIUS servers used for

authentication.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — AAA for third-party AP users has additional configuration
requirements. See the “Configuring AAA for Users of Third-Party APs”
section in the “Configuring AAA for Network Users” chapter of the
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.

set authentication web

239

Examples — The following command configures a proxy authentication
rule that matches on all usernames associated with SSID mycorp. MSS
uses RADIUS server group srvrgrp1 to proxy RADIUS requests and hence
to authenticate and authorize the users.
WX-1200# set authentication proxy ssid mycorp ** srvrgrp1

See Also
clear authentication proxy on page 206
set radius proxy client on page 470
set radius proxy port on page 471

set authentication
web

Configures an authentication rule to allow a user to log in to the network
using a web page served by the WX switch. The rule can be activated if
the user is not otherwise granted or denied access by 802.1X, or granted
access by MAC authentication.
Syntax — set authentication web {ssid ssid-name | wired}
user-glob method1 [method2] [method3] [method4]
„

user-glob — A single user or a set of users.

Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
„

„

ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies. To apply the rule to all SSIDs, type any.
wired — Applies this authentication rule specifically to users

connected to a wired authentication port.
„

method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one and up to four

methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.
A method can be one of the following:
„

local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups on

the WX switch for authentication.

240

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

„

server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers

for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
RADIUS servers cannot be used with the EAP-TLS protocol.
For more information, see “Usage.”
Defaults — By default, authentication is unconfigured for all clients with
network access through MAP ports or wired authentication ports on the
WX switch. Connection, authorization, and accounting are also disabled
for these users.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of users by “globbing.” (For details, see “User Globs” on
page 26.)
You can configure a rule either for wireless access to an SSID, or for wired
access through a WX switch’s wired authentication port. If the rule is for
wireless access to an SSID, specify the SSID name or specify any to match
on all SSID names. If the rule is for wired access, specify wired instead of
an SSID name.
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
web command, MSS applies them in the order in which they appear in
the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method, and
so on.
However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
overrides any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the server group.
MSS uses a WebAAA rule only under the following conditions:
The client is not denied access by 802.1X or does not support 802.1X.
The client’s MAC address does not match a MAC authentication rule.

set location policy

241

The fallthru method is web. (For a wireless authentication rule, the
fallthru method is specified by the set service-profile auth-fallthru
command. For a wired authentication rule, the fallthru method is
specified by the auth-fall-thru option of the set port type wired-auth
command.)
Examples — The following command configures a WebAAA rule in the
local WX database for SSID ourcorp and userglob rnd*:
WX4400# set authentication web ssid ourcorp rnd* local
success: change accepted.

See Also

set location policy

„

clear authentication web on page 207

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication admin on page 226

„

set authentication console on page 228

„

set authentication dot1x on page 230

„

set authentication last-resort on page 234

Creates and enables a location policy on an WX switch. A location policy
enables you to locally set or change authorization attributes for a user
afer the user is authorized by AAA, without making changes to the AAA
server.
Syntax — set location policy deny if {ssid operator ssid-name |
vlan operator vlan-glob | user operator user-glob |
port port-list | dap dap-num}
[before rule-number | modify rule-number ]

Syntax — set location policy permit {vlan vlan-name |
inacl inacl-name | outacl outacl-name}
if {ssid operator ssid-name | vlan operator vlan-glob |
user operator user-glob | port port-list | dap dap-num}
[before rule-number | modify rule-number]
„

deny — Denies access to the network to users with characteristics that

match the location policy rule.

242

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

„

permit — Allows access to the network or to a specified VLAN,
and/or assigns a particular security ACL to users with characteristics
that match the location policy rule.

Action options — For a permit rule, MSS changes the attributes
assigned to the user to the values specified by the following options:
„

„

vlan vlan-name — Name of an existing VLAN to assign to users with
characteristics that match the location policy rule.
inacl inacl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to apply to
packets sent to the WX switch with characteristics that match the
location policy rule.

Optionally, you can add the suffix .in to the name.
„

outacl outacl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to apply to

packets sent from the WX switch with characteristics that match the
location policy rule.
Optionally, you can add the suffix .out to the name.
Condition options — MSS takes the action specified by the rule if all
conditions in the rule are met. You can specify one or more of the
following conditions:
„

ssid operator ssid-name — SSID with which the user is associated.

The operator must be eq, which applies the location policy rule to all
users associated with the SSID. Asterisks (wildcards) are not supported
in SSID names. You must specify the complete SSID name.
„

vlan operator vlan-glob — VLAN-Name attribute assigned by AAA
and condition by which to determine if the location policy rule applies.
Replace operator with one of the following operands:
„

„

eq — Applies the location policy rule to all users assigned VLAN
names matching vlan-glob.
neq — Applies the location policy rule to all users assigned VLAN
names not matching vlan-glob.

For vlan-glob, specify a VLAN name, use the double-asterisk wildcard
character (**) to specify all VLAN names, or use the single-asterisk
wildcard character (*) to specify a set of VLAN names up to or
following the first delimiter character, either an at sign (@) or a period
(.). (For details, see “VLAN Globs” on page 28.)

set location policy

„

243

user operator user-glob — Username and condition by which to

determine if the location policy rule applies. Replace operator with
one of the following operands:
„

„

eq — Applies the location policy rule to all usernames matching
user-glob.
neq — Applies the location policy rule to all usernames not
matching user-glob.

For user-glob, specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard
character (**) to specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk
wildcard character (*) to specify a set of usernames up to or following
the first delimiter character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For
details, see “User Globs” on page 26.)
„

before rule-number — Inserts the new location policy rule in front of

another rule in the location policy. Specify the number of the existing
location policy rule. (To determine the number, use the display
location policy command.)
„

modify rule-number — Replaces the rule in the location policy with

the new rule. Specify the number of the existing location policy rule.
(To determine the number, use the display location policy
command.)
„

port port-list — List of physical port(s) by which to determine if the
location policy rule applies.

Defaults — By default, users are permitted VLAN access and assigned
security ACLs according to the VLAN-Name and Filter-Id attributes
applied to the users during normal authentication and authorization.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. SSID option added in MSS
Version 3.2.
Usage — Only a single location policy is allowed per WX switch. Once
configured, the location policy becomes effective immediately. To disable
location policy operation, use the clear location policy command.

244

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

Conditions within a rule are ANDed. All conditions in the rule must match
for MSS to take the specified action. If the location policy contains
multiple rules, MSS compares the user information to the rules one at a
time, in the order the rules appear in the switch’s configuration file,
beginning with the rule at the top of the list. MSS continues comparing
until a user matches all conditions in a rule or until there are no more
rules.
The order of rules in the location policy is important to ensure users are
properly granted or denied access. To position rules within the location
policy, use before rule-number and modify rule-number in the set
location policy command, and the clear location policy rule-number
command.
When applying security ACLs:
Use inacl inacl-name to filter traffic that enters the switch from users via
an MAP access port or wired authentication port, or from the network via
a network port.
Use outacl outacl-name to filter traffic sent from the switch to users via
an MAP access port or wired authentication port, or from the network via
a network port.
You can optionally add the suffixes .in and .out to inacl-name and
outacl-name so that they match the names of security ACLs stored in the
local WX database.
Examples — The following command denies network access to all users
at *.theirfirm.com, causing them to fail authorization:
WX4400# set location policy deny if user eq *.theirfirm.com

The following command authorizes access to the guest_1 VLAN for all
users who are not at *.wodefirm.com:
WX4400# set location policy permit vlan guest_1 if user neq
*.wodefirm.com

The following command authorizes users at *.ny.ourfirm.com to access
the bld4.tac VLAN instead, and applies the security ACL tac_24 to the
traffic they receive:
WX4400# set location policy permit vlan bld4.tac
outacl tac_24 if user eq *.ny.ourfirm.com

set mac-user

245

The following command authorizes access to users on VLANs with names
matching bld4.* and applies security ACLs svcs_2 to the traffic they send
and svcs_3 to the traffic they receive:
WX4400# set location policy permit inacl svcs_2 outacl svcs_3
if vlan eq bldg4.*

The following command authorizes users entering the network on WX
ports 1 and 2 to use the floor2 VLAN, overriding any settings from AAA:
WX4400# set location policy permit vlan floor2 if port 1-2

The following command places all users who are authorized for SSID
tempvendor_a into VLAN kiosk_1:
WX1200# set location policy permit vlan kiosk_1 iff ssid eq
tempvendor_a

success: change accepted
See Also

set mac-user

„

clear location policy on page 208

„

display location policy on page 222

Configures a user profile in the local database on the WX switch for a
user who can be authenticated by a MAC address, and optionally adds
the user to a MAC user group.
(To configure a MAC user profile in RADIUS, see the documentation for
your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set mac-user mac-addr [group group-name]
„

„

mac-addr — MAC address of the user, in hexadecimal numbers
separated by colons (:). You can omit leading zeros.
group-name — Name of an existing MAC user group.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS does not require MAC users to belong to user groups.

246

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

Users authenticated by MAC address can be authenticated only for
network access through the WX switch. MSS does not support passwords
for MAC users.
Examples — The following command creates a user profile for a user at
MAC address 01:02:03:04:05:06 and assigns the user to the eastcoasters
user group:
WX4400# set mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06 group eastcoasters
success: change accepted.

See Also

set mac-user attr

„

clear mac-user on page 209

„

display aaa on page 217

Assigns an authorization attribute in the local database on the WX switch
to a user who is authenticated by a MAC address.
(To assign authorization attributes through RADIUS, see the
documentation for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set mac-user mac-addr attr attribute-name value
„

„

mac-addr — MAC address of the user, in hexadecimal numbers
separated by colons (:). You can omit leading zeros.
attribute-name value — Name and value of an attribute you are
using to authorize the MAC user for a particular service or session
characteristic. For a list of authorization attributes and values that you
can assign to local users, see Table 47.

set mac-user attr

247

Table 47 Authentication Attributes for Local Users
Attribute

Description

Valid Value(s)

encryption-type

Type of encryption
One of the following numbers that
required for access by
identifies an encryption algorithm:
the client. Clients who
„
1—AES_CCM (Advanced
attempt to use an
Encryption Standard using Counter
unauthorized encryption
with CBC-MAC)
method are rejected.
„
2—Reserved
„

4—TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol)

„

8—WEP_104 (the default)
(Wired-Equivalent Privacy protocol
using 104 bits of key strength)

„

16—WEP_40 (Wired-Equivalent
Privacy protocol using 40 bits of
key strength)

„

32—NONE (no encryption)

„

64—Static WEP

In addition to these values, you can
specify a sum of them for a
combination of allowed encryption
types. For example, to specify
WEP_104 and WEP_40, use 24.
end-date

Date and time after
Date and time, in the following
which the user is no
format:
longer allowed to be on
YY/MM/DD-HH:MM
the network.
You can use end-date alone or with
start-date. You also can use
start-date, end-date, or both in
conjunction with time-of-day.

248

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

Table 47 Authentication Attributes for Local Users (continued)
filter-id

Inbound or outbound
ACL to apply to the
user.

If configured in the WX switch’s local
database, this attribute can be an
access control list (ACL) to filter
outbound or inbound traffic. Use the
following format:
filter-id inboundacl.in
or
filter-id outboundacl.out
If you are configuring the attribute on
a RADIUS server, the value field of
filter-id can specify up to two ACLs.
Any of the following are valid:
filter-id = "Profile=acl1"
filter-id = "OutboundACL=acl2"
filter-id = "Profile=acl1
OutboundACL=acl2"
(Each example goes on a single line on
the server.) The format in which to
specify the values depends on the
RADIUS server.
Regardless of whether the attributes
are defined locally or on a RADIUS
server, the ACLs must already be
configured on the WX switch.

idle-timeout

This option is not implemented in the current MSS version.

mobility-profile

Mobility Profile attribute
for the user. (For more
information, see set
mobility-profile on
page 253.)

(network access
mode only)

Name of an existing Mobility Profile,
which can be up to 32 alphanumeric
characters, with no tabs or spaces.
If the Mobility Profile feature is
enabled, and a user is assigned the
name of a Mobility Profile that does
not exist on the WX switch, the user is
denied access.

set mac-user attr

249

Table 47 Authentication Attributes for Local Users (continued)
service-type

Type of access the user
is requesting.

One of the following numbers:
2—Framed; for network user access
6—Administrative; for administrative
access to the WX switch, with
authorization to access the enabled
(configuration) mode. The user must
enter the enable command to access
the enabled mode.
7—NAS-Prompt; for administrative
access to the nonenabled mode only.
In this mode, the enable command is
not available and the user cannot log
in to the enabled mode.
For administrative sessions, the WX
switch will send 7 (NAS-Prompt) unless
the service-type attribute has been
configured for the user.
The RADIUS server can reply with one
of the values listed above.
If the service-type is not set on the
RADIUS server, administrative users
receive NAS-Prompt access, and
network users receive Framed access.

session-timeout
(network access
mode only)
ssid
(network access
mode only)

start-date

Maximum number of
seconds for the user’s
session.

Number between 0 and
4,294,967,296 seconds
(approximately 136.2 years).

SSID the user is allowed
to access after
authentication.

Name of the SSID you want the user to
use. The SSID must be configured in a
service profile, and the service profile
must be used by a radio profile
assigned to MAP radios in the Mobility
Domain.

Date and time at which
the user becomes
eligible to access the
network.

Date and time, in the following
format:
YY/MM/DD-HH:MM

You can use start-date alone or with
MSS does not
end-date. You also can use
authenticate the user
start-date, end-date, or both in
unless the attempt to
conjunction with time-of-day.
access the network
occurs at or after the
specified date and time,
but before the end-date
(if specified).

250

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

Table 47 Authentication Attributes for Local Users (continued)
time-of-day
(network access
mode only)

Day(s) and time(s)
One of the following:
during which the user is
„
never—Access is always denied.
permitted to log into the
network.
„
any—Access is always allowed.
After authorization, the
user’s session can last
until either the
Time-Of-Day range or
the Session-Timeout
duration (if set) expires,
whichever is shorter.

„

al—Access is always allowed.

„

One or more ranges of values that
consist of one of the following day
designations (required), and a time
range in hhmm-hhmm 4-digit
24-hour format (optional):
mo—Monday
tu—Tuesday
we—Wednesday
th—Thursday
fr—Friday
sa—Saturday
su—Sunday
wk—Any day between Monday
and Friday

Separate values or a series of ranges
(except time ranges) with commas (,)
or a vertical bar (|). Do not use spaces.
The maximum number of characters is
253.
You can use time-of-day in
conjunction with start-date,
end-date, or both.

set mac-user attr

251

Table 47 Authentication Attributes for Local Users (continued)
url
(network access
mode only)

URL to which the user is Web URL, in standard format. For
redirected after
example:
successful WebAAA.
http://www.example.com
You must include the http:// portion.
You can dynamically include any of
the variables in hte URL string:
„

$u—Username

„

$v—VLAN

„

$s—SSID

„

$p—Service profile name

To use the literal character $ or ?, use
the following:

vlan-name
(network access
mode only)

Virtual LAN (VLAN)
assignment.
On some RADIUS
servers, you might need
to use the standard
RADIUS attribute
Tunnel-Pvt-Group-ID,
instead of VLAN-Name.

„

$$

„

$q

Name of a VLAN that you want the
user to use. The VLAN must be
configured on an WX switch within
the Mobility Domain to which this WX
switch belongs.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To change the value of an attribute, enter set mac-user attr
with the new value. To delete an attribute, use clear mac-user attr.
You cannot set the Filter-ID attribute in the local database.
Examples — The following command assigns input access control list
(ACL) acl-03 to filter the packets from a user at MAC address
01:02:03:04:05:06:
WX4400# set mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06 attr filter-id
acl-03.in
success: change accepted.

252

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

The following command restricts a user at MAC address
06:05:04:03:02:01 to network access between 7 p.m. on Mondays and
Wednesdays and 7 a.m. on Tuesdays and Thursdays:
WX4400# set mac-user 06:05:04:03:02:01 attr time-of-day
mo1900-1159,tu0000-0700,we1900-1159,th0000-0700
success: change accepted.

See Also

set mac-usergroup
attr

„

clear mac-user attr on page 209

„

display aaa on page 217

Creates a user group in the local database on the WX switch for users
who are authenticated by a MAC address, and assigns authorization
attributes for the group.
(To configure a user group and assign authorization attributes through
RADIUS, see the documentation for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set mac-usergroup
group-name attr attribute-name value
„

group-name — Name of a MAC user group. Specify a name of up to

32 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
„

attribute-name value — Name and value of an attribute you are
using to authorize all MAC users in the group for a particular service
or session characteristic. (For a list of authorization attributes, see
Table 47 on page 247.)

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To change the value of an attribute, enter set mac-usergroup
attr with the new value. To delete an attribute, use clear
mac-usergroup attr.

set mobility-profile

253

Examples — The following command creates the MAC user group
eastcoasters and assigns the group members to VLAN orange:
WX4400# set mac-usergroup eastcoasters attr vlan-name orange
success: change accepted.

See Also

set mobility-profile

„

clear mac-usergroup attr on page 212

„

display aaa on page 217

Creates a Mobility Profile and specifies the MAP access point and/or
wired authentication ports on the WX switch through which any user
assigned to the profile is allowed access.
Syntax — set mobility-profile name name {port {none | all |
port-list}} | {dap {none | all | dap-num}}
„

name — Name of the Mobility Profile. Specify up to 32 alphanumeric

characters, with no spaces.
„

„

„

none — Prevents any user to whom this profile is assigned from
accessing any MAP access point or wired authentication port on the
WX switch.
all — Allows any user to whom this profile is assigned to access all
MAP access ports and wired authentication port on the WX switch.
port-list — List of MAP access ports or wired authentication ports

through which any user assigned this profile is allowed access. The
same port can be used in multiple Mobility Profile port lists.
„

dap-num — List of Distributed MAP connections through which any
user assigned this profile is allowed access. The same Distributed MAP
can be used in multiple Mobility Profile port lists.

Defaults — No default Mobility Profile exists on the WX switch. If you do
not assign Mobility Profile attributes, all users have access through all
ports, unless denied access by other AAA servers or by access control lists
(ACLs).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

254

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

Usage — To assign a Mobility Profile to a user or group, specify it as an
authorization attribute in one of the following commands:
set
set
set
set

user attr mobility-profile name
usergroup attr mobility-profile name
mac-user attr mobility-profile name
mac-usergroup attr mobility-profile name

To enable the use of the Mobility Profile feature on the WX switch, use
the set mobility-profile mode command.
CAUTION: When the Mobility Profile feature is enabled, a user is denied
access if assigned a Mobility-Profile attribute in the local WX switch
database or RADIUS server when no Mobility Profile of that name exists
on the WX switch.
To change the ports in a profile, use set mobility-profile again with the
updated port list.
Examples — The following commands create the Mobility Profile
magnolia, which restricts user access to port 2; enable the Mobility Profile
feature on the WX switch; and assign the magnolia Mobility Profile to
user Jose.
WX1200# set mobility-profile name magnolia port 2
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set mobility-profile mode enable
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set user Jose attr mobility-profile magnolia
success: change accepted.

The following command adds port 3 to the magnolia Mobility Profile
(which is already assigned to port 2):
WX1200# set mobility-profile name magnolia port 3
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear mobility-profile on page 213

„

display mobility-profile on page 222

„

set mac-user attr on page 246

„

set mac-usergroup attr on page 252

„

set mobility-profile mode on page 255

set mobility-profile mode

set mobility-profile
mode

„

set user attr on page 257

„

set usergroup on page 259

255

Enables or disables the Mobility Profile feature on the WX switch.
CAUTION: When the Mobility Profile feature is enabled, a user is denied
access if assigned a Mobility-Profile attribute in the local WX switch
database or RADIUS server when no Mobility Profile of that name exists
on the WX switch.
Syntax — set mobility-profile mode {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables the use of the Mobility Profile feature on the WX

switch.
„

disable — Specifies that all Mobility Profile attributes are ignored by
the WX switch.

Defaults — The Mobility Profile feature is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To enable the use of the Mobility Profile feature, type the
following command:
WX1200# set mobility-profile mode enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear mobility-profile on page 213

„

display mobility-profile on page 222

„

set mobility-profile on page 253

256

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

set user

Configures a user profile in the local database on the WX switch for a
user with a password.
(To configure a user profile in RADIUS, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set user username password string (encrypted)
„
„

username — Username of a user with a password.
password string — Password of up to 32 alphanumeric characters,

with no spaces.
„

encrypted — Indicates that the password string you entered is

already in its encrypted form. If you use this option, MSS does not
encrypt the displayed form of the password string, and instead
displays the string exactly as you entered it. If you omit this option,
MSS does encrypt the displayed form of the string
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The display config command shows the encrypted option
with this command, even when you omit the option. The encrypted
option appears in the configuration because MSS automatically encrypts
the password when you create the user (unless you use the encrypted
option when you enter the password)
Although MSS allows you to configure a user password for the special
“last-resort” guest user, the password has no effect. Last-resort users can
never access a WX in administrative mode and never require a password.
Examples — The following command creates a user profile for user Nin
in the local database, and assigns the password goody:
WX4400# set user Nin password goody
success: User Nin created

The following command assigns the password chey3nne to the admin
user:
WX4400# set user admin password chey3nne

set user attr

257

success: User admin created

The following command changes Nin’s password from goody to
29Jan04:
WX4400# set user Nin password 29Jan04

See Also

set user attr

„

clear user on page 213

„

display aaa on page 217

Configures an authorization attribute in the local database on the WX
switch for a user with a password.
(To assign authorization attributes in RADIUS, see the documentation for
your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set user username attr attribute-name value
„
„

username — Username of a user with a password.
attribute-name value — Name and value of an attribute you are
using to authorize the user for a particular service or session
characteristic. For a list of authorization attributes and values that you
can assign to network users, see Table 47 on page 247.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To change the value of an attribute, enter set user attr with
the new value. To delete an attribute, use clear user attr.
Examples — The following command assigns user Tamara to VLAN
orange:
WX4400# set user Tamara attr vlan-name orange
success: change accepted.

258

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

The following command assigns Tamara to the Mobility Profile tulip.
WX4400# set user Tamara attr mobility-profile tulip
success: change accepted.

See Also

set user group

„

clear user attr on page 214

„

display aaa on page 217

Adds a user to a user group. The user must have a password and a profile
that exists in the local database on the WX switch.
(To configure a user in RADIUS, see the documentation for your RADIUS
server.)
Syntax — set user username group group-name
„

username — Username of a user with a password.

„

group-name — Name of an existing user group for password users.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS does not require users to belong to user groups.
To create a user group, user the command set usergroup.
Examples — The following command adds user Hosni to the cardiology
user group:
WX4400# set user Hosni group cardiology
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear user group on page 215

„

display aaa on page 217

set usergroup

set usergroup

259

Creates a user group in the local database on the WX switch for users
and assigns authorization attributes for the group.
(To create user groups and assign authorization attributes in RADIUS, see
the documentation for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set usergroup group-name attr attribute-name value
„

group-name — Name of a group for password users. Specify a name

of up to 32 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
„

attribute-name value — Name and value of an attribute you are
using to authorize all users in the group for a particular service or
session characteristic. For a list of authorization attributes and values
that you can assign to users, see Table 47 on page 247.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To change the value of an attribute, enter set usergroup attr
with the new value. To delete an attribute, use clear usergroup attr.
To add a user to a group, user the command set user group.
Examples — The following command adds the user group cardiology to
the local database and assigns all the group members to VLAN crimson:
WX4400# set usergroup cardiology vlan-name crimson
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear usergroup on page 215

„

clear usergroup attr on page 216

„

display aaa on page 217

260

CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS

set web-aaa

Globally enables or disables WebAAA on an WX switch.
Syntax — set web-aaa {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables WebAAA on the switch.

„

disable — Disables WebAAA on the switch.

Defaults — Enabled.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command disables or reenables support for WebAAA.
However, WebAAA has additional configuration requirements. For
information, see the “Configuring AAA for Network Users” chapter in
the Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.
Examples — To disable WebAAA, type the following command:
WX4400# set web-aaa disable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear authentication web on page 207

„

set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352

„

set user on page 256

8

MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS

Use Mobility Domain commands to configure and manage Mobility
Domain groups.
A Mobility Domain is a system of WX switches and MAP access points
working together to support a roaming user (client). One WX switch acts
as a seed switch, which maintains and distributes a list of IP addresses of
the domain members.
3Com recommends that you run the same MSS version on all the WX
switches in a Mobility Domain.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents Mobility Domain commands alphabetically. Use
Table 48 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 48 Mobility Domain Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Mobility Domain

set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name on
page 267
set mobility-domain member on page 265
set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip on page 266
display mobility-domain status on page 263
display mobility-domain config on page 263
clear mobility-domain member on page 262
clear mobility-domain on page 262

262

CHAPTER 8: MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS

clear
mobility-domain

Clears all Mobility Domain configuration and information from a WX
switch, regardless of whether the WX switch is a seed or a member of a
Mobility Domain.
Syntax — clear mobility-domain
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command has no effect if the WX switch is not configured
as part of a Mobility Domain.
Examples — To clear a Mobility Domain from a WX switch within the
domain, type the following command:
WX1200# clear mobility-domain
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear
mobility-domain
member

„

clear mobility-domain member on page 262

„

set mobility-domain member on page 265

„

set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip on page 266

„

set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name on page 267

On the seed WX switch, removes the identified member from the
Mobility Domain.
Syntax — clear mobility-domain member ip-addr
„

ip-addr — IP address of the Mobility Domain member, in dotted
decimal notation.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

display mobility-domain config

263

Usage — This command has no effect if the WX switch member is not
configured as part of a Mobility Domain or the current WX switch is not
the seed.
Examples — The following command clears a Mobility Domain member
with the IP address 192.168.0.1:
WX1200# clear mobility-domain member 192.168.0.1

See Also
„

display
mobility-domain
config

set mobility-domain member on page 265

Displays the configuration of the Mobility Domain.
Syntax — display mobility-domain config
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the Mobility Domain
configuration:
WX4400# display mobility-domain config
This WX is a member, with seed 192.168.14.6

See Also

display
mobility-domain
status

„

clear mobility-domain on page 262

„

set mobility-domain member on page 265

„

display mobility-domain status on page 263

On the seed WX, displays the Mobility Domain status and members.
Syntax — display mobility-domain status
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

264

CHAPTER 8: MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display Mobility Domain status, type the following
command:
WX4400# display mobility-domain status
Mobility Domain name: Pleasanton
Member
State
Status
---------------------------------------192.168.253.11
STATE_UP
MEMBER
192.168.253.12
STATE_DOWN
MEMBER
192.168.253.14
STATE_UP
SEED

Table 49 describes the fields in the display.
Table 49 display mobility-domain Output
Field

Description

Mobility Domain
name

Name of the Mobility Domain

Member

IP addresses of the seed WX switch and members in the
Mobility Domain

State

State of the WX switch in the Mobility Domain:

Status

„

STATE_UP

„

STATE_DOWN

Role of the WX switch in the Mobility Domain:
„

MEMBER

„

SEED

See Also
„

clear mobility-domain on page 262

„

set mobility-domain member on page 265

„

set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip on page 266

set mobility-domain member

set
mobility-domain
member

265

On the seed WX switch, adds a member to the list of Mobility Domain
members. If the current WX switch is not configured as a seed, this
command is rejected.
Syntax — set mobility-domain member ip-addr
„

ip-addr — IP address of the Mobility Domain member in dotted
decimal notation.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command must be entered from the seed WX switch.
Examples — The following commands add three WX switches with the
IP addresses 192.168.1.8, 192.168.1.9, and 192.168.1.10 as members of
a Mobility Domain whose seed is the current WX switch:
WX4400# set mobility-domain member 192.168.1.8
success: change accepted.
WX4400# set mobility-domain member 192.168.1.9
success: change accepted.
WX4400# set mobility-domain member 192.168.1.10
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear mobility-domain member on page 262

„

display mobility-domain config on page 263

„

set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name on page 267

266

CHAPTER 8: MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS

set
mobility-domain
mode member
seed-ip

On a nonseed WX switch, sets the IP address of the seed WX switch. This
command is used on a member WX to configure it as a member. If the
WX switch is currently part of another Mobility Domain or using another
seed, this command overwrites that configuration.
Syntax — set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip ip-addr
„

ip-addr — IP address of the Mobility Domain member, in dotted
decimal notation.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command sets the current WX switch as a
nonseed member of the Mobility Domain whose seed has the IP address
192.168.1.8:
WX4400# set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip 192.168.1.8
mode is: member
seed IP is: 192.168.1.8

See Also
„

clear mobility-domain on page 262

„

display mobility-domain config on page 263

set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name

set
mobility-domain
mode seed
domain-name

267

Creates a Mobility Domain by setting the current WX switch as the seed
device and naming the Mobility Domain.
Syntax — set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name
mob-domain-name
„

mob-domain-name — Name of the Mobility Domain. Specify between
1 and 16 characters with no spaces.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Before you use this command, the current WX switch must
have its IP address set with the set system ip-address command. After
you enter this command, all Mobility Domain traffic is sent and received
from the specified IP address.
You must explicitly configure only one WX switch per domain as the
seed. All other WX switches in the domain receive their Mobility Domain
information from the seed.
Examples — The following command creates a Mobility Domain named
Pleasanton with the current WX switch as the seed:
WX4400# set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name Pleasanton
mode is: seed
domain name is: Pleasanton

See Also
„

clear mobility-domain member on page 262

„

display mobility-domain status on page 263

268

CHAPTER 8: MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS

9

MANAGED ACCESS POINT
COMMANDS

Use MAP access point commands to configure and manage MAP access
points. Be sure to do the following before using the commands:
„

„

„

Define the country-specific IEEE 802.11 regulations on the WX switch.
(See set system countrycode on page 54.)
Install the MAP access point and connect it to a port on the WX
switch.
Configure a MAP access port (for a directly connected MAP) or a
Distributed MAP. (See set port type ap on page 87 and set dap on
page 77.)

CAUTION: Changing the system country code after MAP configuration
disables MAP access points and deletes their configuration. If you change
the country code on a WX switch, you must reconfigure all MAP access
points.

MAP Access Point
Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents MAP access point commands alphabetically. Use
Table 50 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 50 Map Access Point Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Automatic
Configuration of
Distributed MAPs

set dap auto on page 306

set dap auto mode on page 308
set {ap | dap} bias on page 310
set {ap | dap} blink on page 311
set {ap | dap} group on page 313

270

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Table 50 Map Access Point Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on
page 318
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate on
page 321
set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set dap auto radiotype on page 309
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware on page 328

External Antenna

set {ap | dap} radio antennatype on page 315

Radio Profile
Assignment

set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set radio-profile mode on page 342
clear radio-profile on page 274
set radio-profile service-profile on page 346
display radio-profile on page 298

SSID Assignment

set service-profile ssid-name on page 363
set service-profile ssid-type on page 364
set service-profile beacon on page 355

Radio Properties

set radio-profile 11g-only on page 329
set radio-profile beacon-interval on page 336
set radio-profile rts-threshold on page 346
set radio-profile frag-threshold on page 339
set radio-profile short-retry on page 350
set radio-profile long-retry on page 339
set radio-profile max-rx-lifetime on page 340
set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime on page 341
set radio-profile preamble-length on page 345
set radio-profile countermeasures on page 337
set radio-profile active-scan on page 330
set radio-profile wmm on page 350

Authentication and set service-profile auth-dot1x on page 351
Encryption

set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352

MAP Access Point Commands by Usage

271

Table 50 Map Access Point Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command
set service-profile web-aaa-form on page 366
set service-profile auth-psk on page 354
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
set service-profile rsn-ie on page 362
set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356
set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357
set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358
set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359
set service-profile psk-phrase on page 360
set service-profile psk-raw on page 361
set service-profile tkip-mc-time on page 365
set service-profile wep active-multicast- index on
page 367
set service-profile wep active-unicast- index on
page 368
set service-profile wep key-index on page 369
set service-profile shared-key-auth on page 363
display service-profile on page 302
clear service-profile on page 275

RF Auto-Tuning

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on
page 331
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on
page 332
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on
page 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on
page 335
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on
page 318
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate on
page 321

272

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Table 50 Map Access Point Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command
display auto-tune neighbors on page 292
display auto-tune attributes on page 290

MAP-WX security

set dap fingerprint on page 312

set dap security on page 326
Radio State

set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323

Dual Homing

set {ap | dap} bias on page 310

Load Balancing

set {ap | dap} group on page 313
display {ap | dap} group on page 285

MAP
set {ap | dap} name on page 315
Administration and
set {ap | dap} blink on page 311
Maintenance
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware on page 328
reset {ap | dap} on page 305
set {ap | dap} radio channel on page 320
set {ap | dap} radio tx-power on page 325
clear {ap | dap} radio on page 272
display {ap | dap} group on page 285
display {ap | dap} status on page 287
display {ap | dap} counters on page 280
display dap global on page 295
display dap connection on page 294
display dap unconfigured on page 297
display {ap | dap} qos-stats on page 282
display {ap | dap} etherstats on page 284

clear {ap | dap}
radio

Disables a MAP radio and resets it to its factory default settings.
Syntax — clear {ap port-list | dap dap-num } radio {1 | 2 |
all}
„

„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) on
which to reset a radio.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to reset a

radio.

clear {ap | dap} radio

„
„

„

273

radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
radio all — All radios on the MAP.

Defaults — The clear ap radio command resets the radio to the default
settings listed in Table 51 and in Table 66 on page 342.
Table 51 Radio-Specific Parameters
Parameter

Default Value

channel

„

802.11b — 6

„

802.11a — Lowest
valid channel number
for the country of
operation

Description
Number of the channel in
which a radio transmits and
receives traffic

tx-power

Highest setting allowed for Transmit power of a radio, in
the country of operation
decibels referred to
or highest setting
1 milliwatt (dBm)
supported on the
hardware, whichever is
lower.

antennatype

internal
(The default for model
MAP-262 is ANT1060.)

External antenna model
Note: This parameter applies
only to MAPs that support
external antennas.

Access — Enabled
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When you clear a radio, MSS performs the following actions:
„

„

Clears the transmit power, channel, and external antenna setting from
the radio.
Removes the radio from its radio profile and places the radio in the
default radio profile.

This command does not affect the PoE setting.
Examples — The following command disables and resets radio 2 on the
MAP access point connected to port 3:
WX1200# clear ap 3 radio 2

274

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

See Also

clear radio-profile

„

set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323

„

set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324

„

set port type ap on page 87

Removes a radio profile or resets one of the profile’s parameters to its
default value.
Syntax — clear radio-profile name [parameter]
„

name — Radio profile name.

„

parameter — Radio profile parameter:
„

beacon-interval

„

dtim-interval

„

frag-threshold

„

long-retry

„

max-rx-lifetime

„

max-tx-lifetime

„

preamble-length

„

rts-threshold

„

service-profile

„

short-retry

(For information about these parameters, see the set radio-profile
commands that use them.)
Defaults — If you reset an individual parameter, the parameter is
returned to the default value listed in Table 66 on page 342.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you specify a parameter, the setting for the parameter is
reset to its default value. The settings of the other parameters are
unchanged and the radio profile remains in the configuration. If you do
not specify a parameter, the entire radio profile is deleted from the
configuration. All radios that use this profile must be disabled before you
can delete the profile.

clear service-profile

275

Examples — The following commands disable the radios that are using
radio profile rp1 and reset the beaconed-interval parameter to its
default value:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 mode disable
WX4400# clear radio-profile rp1 beacon-interval
success: change accepted.

The following commands disable the radios that are using radio profile
rptest and remove the profile:
WX4400# set radio-profile rptest mode disable
WX4400# clear radio-profile rptest
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear service-profile

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

Removes a service profile or resets one of the profile’s parameters to its
default value.
Syntax — clear service-profile name
„

name — Service profile name.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If the service profile is mapped to a radio profile, you must
remove it from the radio profile first. (After disabling all radios that use
the radio profile, use the clear radio-profile name service-profile name
command.)
Examples — The following commands disable the radios that are using
radio profile rp6, remove service-profile svcprof6 from rp6, then clear
svcprof6 from the configuration.
WX4400# set radio-profile rp6 mode disable
WX4400# clear radio-profile rp6 service-profile svcprof6

276

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

success: change accepted.
WX4400# clear service-profile svcprof6
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear service-profile

„

clear radio-profile on page 274

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

Removes a service profile or resets one of the profile’s parameters to its
default value.
Syntax — clear service-profile name
„

name — Service profile name.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 3.0.
Usage — If the service profile is mapped to a radio profile, you must
remove it from the radio profile first. (After disabling all radios that use
the radio profile, use the clear radio-profile name service-profile name
command.)
Examples — The following commands disable the radios that are using
radio profile rp6, remove service-profile svcprof6 from rp6, then clear
svcprof6 from the configuration.
WX1200# set radio-profile rp6 mode disable
WX1200# clear radio-profile rp6 service-profile svcprof6
success: change accepted.
WX1200# clear service-profile svcprof6
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear radio-profile on page 274

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

display {ap | dap} config

display {ap | dap}
config

277

Displays global and radio-specific settings for an MAP access point.
Syntax — display ap config [port-list [radio {1 | 2}]]
Syntax — display dap config [dap-num [radio {1 | 2}]]
„

port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) for

which to display configuration settings.
„

dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
configuration settings.

„

radio 1 — Shows configuration information for radio 1.

„

radio 2 — Shows configuration information for radio 2. (This option

does not apply to single-radio models.)
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS lists information separately for each MAP access point.
Examples — The following example shows configuration information for
an MAP access point on WX port 2:
WX1200# display ap config 2
Port 1: AP model: AP2750, POE: enable, bias: high, name: MAP01
boot-download-enable: YES
load balancing group: none
Radio 1: type: 802.11g, mode: enabled, channel: dynamic
tx pwr: dynamic, profile: default
auto-tune max-power: default, min-client-rate: 5.5, max-retransmissions: 10

The following example shows configuration information for a Distributed
MAP access point configured on connection 1:
WX4400# display dap config 1
Dap 1: Serial-Id: M9DE48B012F00, MAP model: AP2750, bias: high, name: DAP1
boot-download-enable: YES
Radio 1: type: 802.11a, mode: disabled, channel: dynamic
tx pwr: 11, profile: default
auto-tune max-power: default, min-client-rate: 24, max-retransmissions: 10

Table 52 describes the fields in this display.

278

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Table 52 Output for display ap config
Field

Description

Port

WX port number.
Note: This field is applicable only if the MAP is directly
connected to the WX switch and the WX switch’s port is
configured as a MAP access port.

DAP

Connection ID for the Distributed MAP.
Note: This field is applicable only if the MAP is configured on
the WX switch as a Distributed MAP.

Serial-Id

Serial ID of the MAP access point.
Note: This field is displayed only for Distributed MAPs.

AP model

MAP access point model number.

POE

PoE state on the WX port:

bias

„

Enable

„

Disable

Bias of the WX connection to the MAP:
„

High

„

Low

name

MAP access point name.

fingerprint

Hexadecimal fingerprint of the MAP’s public encryption key.
This field is displayed only for Distributed MAPs. If the field is
blank, the key has not been verified yet by an administrator.

boot-downloadenable

State of the firmware upgrade option:
„

YES (automatic upgrades are enabled)

„

NO (automatic upgrades are disabled)

load balancing group Names of the MAP load-balancing groups to which the MAP
access point belongs. If the value is None, the access point
does not belong to any load balancing groups.
Note: This field is displayed only if the MAP is a member of a
group.
Radio

Radio number. The information listed below this field applies
specifically to the radio.

type

Radio type:
„

802.11a

„

802.11b

„

802.11g

display {ap | dap} config

279

Table 52 Output for display ap config (continued)
Field

Description

mode

Radio state:
„

Enabled

„

Disabled

channel

Channel number.

antennatype

External antenna model, if applicable.

tx pwr

Transmit power, in dBm.

profile

Radio profile that manages the radio. Until you assign the
radio to a radio profile, MSS assigns the radio to the default
radio profile.

auto-tune
max-power

Maximum power level the RF Auto-Tuning feature can set on
the radio.
„

The value default means RF Auto-Tuning can set the
power up to the maximum level allowed for the country
of operation.

„

A specific numeric value means you or another
administrator set the maximum value.

auto-tune
min-client-rate

Minimum data rate the radio must maintain for associated
clients. When RF Auto-Tuning is enabled, the radio can
temporarily increase its power to maintain the data rate with
an associated client.

auto-tune
max-retransmissions

Maximum percentage of packets that can be retransmitted
by a client before RF Auto-Tuning increases power.
Note: Only packets that are received twice by the MAP are
counted as retransmissions. If a client retransmits a packet
but the MAP receives only a single copy of the packet, the
packet is not counted as a retransmission.

See Also
„

display dap connection on page 294

„

display dap global on page 295

„

display dap unconfigured on page 297

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set dap on page 77

„

set port type ap on page 87

„

set {ap | dap} bias on page 310

280

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

display {ap | dap}
counters

„

set {ap | dap} group on page 313

„

set {ap | dap} name on page 315

„

set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware on page 328

„

set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323

„

set {ap | dap} radio antennatype on page 315

„

set {ap | dap} radio channel on page 320

„

set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324

„

set {ap | dap} radio tx-power on page 325

Displays MAP access point and radio statistics counters.
Syntax — display ap counters [port-list [radio {1 | 2}]]
Syntax — display dap counters [dap-num [radio {1 | 2}]]
„

„

port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) for
which to display statistics counters.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
statistics counters.

„

radio 1 — Shows statistics counters for radio 1.

„

radio 2 — Shows statistics counters for radio 2. (This option does not

apply to single-radio models.)
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To display statistics counters and other information for
individual user sessions, use the display sessions network command.
Examples — The following command shows statistics counters for an
MAP access point on port 6:
WX1200# display ap counters 6
Port: 6
radio: 1
=================================
LastPktXferRate
2
PktTxCount

91594255

display {ap | dap} counters

NumCntInPwrSave
LastPktRxSigStrength
LastPktSigNoiseRatio
TKIP Pkt Transfer Ct
TKIP Pkt Replays
CCMP Pkt Decrypt Err
CCMP Pkt Transfer Ct

4294966683MultiPktDrop
-54
MultiBytDrop
40
User Sessions
0
MIC Error Ct
0
TKIP Decrypt Err
0
CCMP Pkt Replays
0
RadioResets

TxUniPkt
TxUniByte
RxPkt
TxMultiPkt
TxMultiByte

281

0
0
5
0
0
0
0

RxByte

1.0: 164492
0 9631741
0 405041
2.0:
603
0
248716
0 191103
5.5: 370594 52742 27616521 4445625
2427
11.0:
8016
0 2590353
0 85479
TOTL: 543705 52742 40087331 4445625 684050

UndcrptPkt
UndcrptByte
PhyError
8913512
0
0 13963
4608065
0
0 30547
133217
0
0
723
3897587
0
0 1195
17552381
0
0 46441

Table 53 describes the fields in this display.
Table 53 Output for display ap counters
Field

Description

Port

WX port number.

radio

Radio number.

LastPktXferRate

Data transmit rate, in Mbps, of the last packet received by
the MAP access point.

NumCntInPwrSave

Number of clients currently in power save mode.

LastPktRxSigStrength Signal strength, in dBm, of the last packet received by the
MAP access point.
LastPktSigNoiseRatio

Signal-to-noise ratio, in decibels (dB), of the last packet
received by the MAP access point.

TKIP Pkt Transfer Ct

Total number of TKIP packets sent and received by the radio.

TKIP Pkt Replays

Number of packets dropped because they were detected as
TKIP replays. TKIP replays are packets received outside the
TKIP sequence counter window.

CCMP Pkt Decrypt
Err

Number of times a decryption error occurred with a packet
encrypted with CCMP.

CCMP Pkt Transfer
Ct

Total number of CCMP packets sent and received by the
radio.

PktTxCount

Number of packets transmitted by the radio.

282

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Table 53 Output for display ap counters (continued)
Field

Description

MultiPktDrop

Number of multicast packets dropped by the radio.

MultiBytDrop

Number of multicast bytes dropped by the radio.

User Sessions

Number of users currently associated with the radio.

MIC Error Ct

Number of times the radio received a TKIP-encrypted frame
with an invalid MIC.

TKIP Decrypt Err

Number of times a decryption error occurred with a packet
encrypted with TKIP.

CCMP Pkt Replays

Number of packets dropped because they were detected as
CCMP replays. CCMP replays are packets received outside
the CCMP sequence counter window.

RadioResets

Number of times the radio has been reset.

TxUniPkt

Number of unicast packets transmitted by the radio.
Note: This and the following statistics are listed separately
for each data rate.

TxMultiPkt

Number of multicast packets transmitted by the radio.

TxUniByte

Number of unicast bytes transmitted by the radio.

TxMultiByte

Number of multicast bytes transmitted by the radio.

RxPkt

Number of packets received by the radio.

RxByte

Number of bytes received by the radio.

UndcrptPkt

Number of undecryptable packets received by the radio.

UndcrptByte

Number of undecryptable bytes received by the radio.

PhyError

Number of packets received by the radio that contained
Physical layer (PHY) errors.

See Also
„

display {ap | dap}
qos-stats

display sessions network on page 503

Displays statistics for MAP forwarding queues.
Syntax — display dap qos-stats [dap-num]
Syntax — display ap qos-stats [port-list]
„

dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display QoS
statistics counters.

display {ap | dap} qos-stats

„

283

port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) for
which to display QoS statistics counters.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command shows statistics for the MAP
forwarding queues on a Distributed MAP:
WX-1200# display dap qos-stats 4
CoS
Queue
Tx
===========================
DAP: 4 radio: 1
1,2
Background
19
0,3
BestEffort
437
4,5
Video
3034
6,7
Voice
3068
CoS
Queue
Tx
===========================
DAP: 4 radio: 2
1,2
Background
11
0,3
BestEffort
221
4,5
Video
3631
6,7
Voice
7892

Table 54 describes the fields in this display.
Table 54 Output for display {ap | dap} qos-stats
Field

Description

CoS

CoS value associated with the forwarding queues.

Queue

Forwarding queue.

DAP

Distributed MAP number or MAP port number.

or
Port
radio

Radio number.

Tx

Number of packets transmitted to the air from the
queue.

284

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

display {ap | dap}
etherstats

Displays Ethernet statistics for a MAP’s Ethernet ports.
Syntax — display {ap | dap} etherstats [port-list | dap-num]
„

„

port-list — List of WX switch ports directly connected to the MAPs
for which to display counters.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
counters.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays Ethernet statistics for the
Ethernet ports on Distributed MAP 1:
WX4400# display dap etherstats 1
DAP: 1
ether: 1
=================================
RxUnicast:
75432
TxGoodFrames:
RxMulticast:
18789
TxSingleColl:
RxBroadcast:
8
TxLateColl:
RxGoodFrames:
94229
TxMaxColl:
RxAlignErrs:
0
TxMultiColl:
RxShortFrames:
0
TxUnderruns:
RxCrcErrors:
0
TxCarrierLoss:
RxOverruns:
0
TxDeferred:
RxDiscards:
0

55210
32
0
0
47
0
0
150

Table 55 describes the fields in this display.
Table 55 Output of display ap etherstats
Field

Description

RxUnicast

Number of unicast frames received.

RxMulticast

Number of multicast frames received.

RxBroadcast

Number of broadcast frames received.

RxGoodFrames

Number of frames received properly from the link.

RxAlignErrs

Number of received frames that were both misaligned and
contained a CRC error.

display {ap | dap} group

285

Table 55 Output of display ap etherstats (continued)

display {ap | dap}
group

Field

Description

RxShortFrames

Number of received frames that were shorter than the
minimum frame length.

RxCrcErrors

Number of received frames that were discarded due to
CRC errors.

RxOverruns

Number of frames known to be lost due to a temporary
lack of hardware resources.

RxDiscards

Number of frames known to be lost due to a temporary
lack of software resources.

TxGoodFrames

Number of frames transmitted properly on the link.

TxSingleColl

Number of transmitted frames that encountered a single
collision.

TxLateColl

Number of frames that were not transmitted because they
encountered a collision outside the normal collision
window.

TxMaxColl

Number of frames that were not transmitted because they
encountered the maximum allowed number of collisions.
Typically, this occurs only during periods of heavy traffic on
the network.

TxMultiColl

Number of transmitted frames that encountered more
than one collision.

TxUnderruns

Number of frames that were not transmitted or
retransmitted due to temporary lack of hardware
resources.

TxCarrierLoss

Number of frames transmitted despite the detection of a
deassertion of CRS during the transmission.

TxDeferred

Number of frames deferred before transmission due to
activity on the link.

Displays configuration information and load-balancing status for MAP
access point groups.
Syntax — display {ap | dap} group [name]
„

name — Name of an MAP group or Distributed MAP group.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

286

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Examples — The following command displays information for MAP
access point group loadbalance1:
WX1200# display ap group loadbalance1
Load Balance Grp Port Clients
---------------- ---- ------loadbalance1
1
1
loadbalance1
6
6

Status
Refused
--------- ------Accepting
0
Refusing
2

Table 56 describes the fields in this display.
Table 56 Output for display ap group
Field

Description

Load Balance Grp

Name of the MAP access point group.

Port

WX port number.

Clients

Number of active client sessions on the MAP access point.

Status

Association status of the MAP access point:

Refused

„

Accepting — The MAP access point is accepting new
associations.

„

Refusing — The MAP access point is refusing new
associations.

Number of association requests refused by the MAP access
point due to load balancing. MSS resets this counter to 0
when the WX switch is restarted, MSS is reloaded, or the
access point is removed from the group.

See Also
„

“set {ap | dap} group” on page 313

display {ap | dap} status

display {ap | dap}
status

287

Displays MAP access point and radio status information.
Syntax — display ap status [terse] [port-list | all [radio
{1 | 2}]]

Syntax — display dap status [terse] [dap-num [radio {1 |
2}]]
„

terse — Displays a brief line of essential status information for each

MAP.
„

port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) for

which to display status.
„
„

„
„

dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display status.
all — Shows status information for all directly attached MAP access
points and all Distributed MAP access points configured on the switch.
radio 1 — Shows status information for radio 1.
radio 2 — Shows status information for radio 2. (This option does
not apply to single-radio models.)

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. True base MAC addresses of
radios are displayed in MSS Version 3.2. Previously, the base MAC
address displayed for a radio was the true base MAC address plus 2. Note
that a radio’s base MAC address is also used as the BSSID of the first SSID
configured on the radio. In Version 4.0, added terse, display dap status:
all, new field for fingerprint, and added MAP-WX security status to State
field. Note: the fingerprint field and security state apply to the display for
Distributed MAPs only.
Examples — The following command displays the status of a Distributed
MAP:
WX4400# display dap status 1
Dap: 1, IP-addr: 10.2.34.56 (vlan 'default'), MAP model: AP2750,
manufacturer: 3Com, name: DAP1
fingerprint: b4:f9:2a52:37:58:f4:d0:10:75:43:2f:45:c9:52:c3
====================================================
State:
operational (not encrypted)
CPU info: IBM:PPC speed=266666664 Hz version=405GPr

288

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Uptime:

id=0x28f10158a47f0408 ram=33554432
s/n=0332600444 hw_rev=A3
21 hours, 27 minutes, 51 seconds

Radio 1 type: 802.11a, state: configure succeed [Enabled]
operational channel: 64 operational power: 14
base mac: 00:0b:0e:00:d2:c1
bssid1: 00:0b:0e:00:d2:94, ssid: private

The following command displays the status of a directly connected MAP:
WX1200# display ap status 1
Port: 1, AP model: AP2750, manufacturer 3Com, name: MAP01
====================================================
State:
operational
CPU info: IBM:PPC speed=266666664 Hz version=405GPr
id=0x28b08a1e047f1d0f ram=33554432
s/n=0333000288 hw_rev=A3
Uptime:
3 hours, 44 minutes, 28 seconds
Radio 1 type: 802.11g, state: configure succeed [Enabled] (802.11b protect)
operational channel: 1 operational power: 15
base mac: 00:0b:0e:00:d1:00
bssid1: 00:0b:0e:00:d1:00, ssid: public
bssid2: 00:0b:0e:00:d1:02, ssid: employee-net
bssid3: 00:0b:0e:00:d1:04, ssid: mycorp-tkip

Table 57 describes the fields in this display.
Table 57 Output for display ap status
Field

Description

DAP

Connection ID for the Distributed MAP.
Note: This field is applicable only if the MAP is configured on
the WX switch as a Distributed MAP.

Port

WX port number.
Note: This field is applicable only if the MAP is directly
connected to the WX switch and the WX switch’s port is
configured as an MAP access port.

IP-addr

IP address of the MAP. The address is assigned to the MAP
by a DHCP server.
Note: This field is applicable only if the MAP is configured on
the WX switch as a Distributed MAP.

display {ap | dap} status

289

Table 57 Output for display ap status (continued)
Field

Description

AP model

MAP access point model number.

manufacturer

Company that made the MAP access point.

name

MAP access point name.

Link

Status of this link with the MAP access point and the MAP
port at the other end of the link. The status can be up or
down.

MAP port

MAP port number connected to this WX port.

State

State of the MAP:
„

init — The MAP has been recognized by the WX but has
not yet begun booting.

„

booting — The MAP has asked the WX for a boot
image.

„

image downloading — The MAP is receiving a boot
image from the WX.

„

image downloaded — The MAP has received a boot
image from the WX and is booting.

„

configuring — The MAP has booted and is ready to
receive or is already receiving configuration parameters
from the WX.

„

operational — The MAP has received configuration
parameters for one or more radios and is ready to accept
client connections.

„

configure failure — One or more of the radio
parameters received from the WX is invalid.
For Distributed MAPs, this field also indicates whether the
MAP’s management traffic with the WX is encrypted, and
whether the MAP’s fingerprint has been verified on the
WX:

„

not encrypted—The management session is not
encrypted.

„

encrypted but fingerprint not verified—The MAP’s
management traffic is encrypted, but the MAP’s
fingerprint has not been verified in MSS.

„

encrypted and verified—The MAP’s management
traffic is encrypted and the MAP’s fingerprint has been
verified in MSS.

290

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Table 57 Output for display ap status (continued)
Field

Description

CPU info

Specifications and identification of the CPU.
For MAP models MAP-352, MAP-341, and MAP-52, the ID
portion of this field is not applicable.

Uptime

Amount of time since the MAP last rebooted using this link.
Note: This field is displayed only when this link is the MAP
access point’s primary link.

display auto-tune
attributes

Radio 1 type

802.11 type and configuration state of the radio.

Radio 2 type

„

The configure succeed state indicates that the MAP has
received configuration parameters for the radio and the
radio is ready to accept client connections.

„

For 802.11b/g radios, 802.11b protect indicates that the
radio is in 802.11b protection mode and is therefore
operating only at 802.11b rates.

„

Sweep Mode indicates that a disabled radio is
nonetheless participating in rogue detection scans. Even
though this message appears only for disabled radios, all
radios, enabled or disabled, participate in rogue
detection.

„

Countermeasures Enabled indicates that the radio is
sending countermeasures packets to combat a rogue.

operational channel

The channel on which the radio is currently operating.

operational power

The power level at which the radio is currently operating.

base mac

Base MAC address of the radio.

bssid, ssid

SSIDs configured on the radio and their BSSIDs.

Displays the current values of the RF attributes RF Auto-Tuning uses to
decide whether to change channel or power settings.
Syntax — display auto-tune attributes
[ap map-num [radio {1 | 2 | all}]]

Syntax — display auto-tune attributes
[dap dap-num [radio {1 | 2 | all}]]
„

map-num — MAP port connected to the MAP access point for which to

display RF attributes.
„

dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display RF
attributes.

display auto-tune attributes

„
„

„

291

radio 1 — Shows RF attribute information for radio 1.
radio 2 — Shows RF attribute information for radio 2. (This option
does not apply to single-radio models.)
radio all — Shows RF attribute information for both radios.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays RF attribute information
for radio 1 on the directly connected MAP access point on port 2:
WX1200# display auto-tune attributes ap 2 radio 1
Auto-tune attributes for port 2 radio 1:
Noise:
-92 Packet Retransmission Count:
Utilization:
0 Phy Errors Count:
CRC Errors count:
122

0
0

Table 58 describes the fields in this display.
Table 58 Output for display auto-tune attributes
Field

Description

Noise

Noise threshold on the active channel. RF Auto-Tuning
prefers channels with low noise levels over channels with
higher noise levels.

Utilization

Number of multicast packets per second that a radio can
send on a channel while continuously sending fixed size
frames over a period of time. The number of packets that are
successfully transmitted indicates how busy the channel is.

CRC Errors count

Number of frames received by the radio on that active
channel that had CRC errors. A high CRC error count can
indicate a hidden node or co-channel interference.

Packet
Retransmission
Count

Number of retransmitted packets sent from the client to the
radio on the active channel. Retransmissions can indicate
that the client is not receiving ACKs from the MAP radio.

Phy Errors Count

Number of frames received by the MAP radio that had
physical layer errors on the active channel. Phy errors can
indicate interference from a non-802.11 device.

See Also
„

display auto-tune neighbors on page 292

292

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

display auto-tune
neighbors

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on page 331

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on page 332

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335

Displays the other 3Com radios and third-party 802.11 radios that a
3Com radio can hear.
Syntax — display auto-tune neighbors
[ap map-num [radio {1 | 2| all}]]

Syntax — display auto-tune neighbors
[dap dap-num [radio {1 | 2| all}]]
„

„

map-num — MAP port connected to the MAP access point for which to
display neighbors.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display

neighbors.
„
„

„

radio 1 — Shows neighbor information for radio 1.
radio 2 — Shows neighbor information for radio 2. (This option does
not apply to single-radio models.)
radio all — Shows neighbor information for both radios.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

display auto-tune neighbors

293

Usage — For simplicity, this command displays a single entry for each
3Com radio, even if the radio is supporting multiple BSSIDs. However,
BSSIDs for third-party 802.11 radios are listed separately, even if a radio is
supporting more than one BSSID.
Information is displayed for a radio if the radio sends beacon frames or
responds to probe requests. Even if a radio’s SSIDs are unadvertised,
3Com radios detect the empty beacon frames (beacon frames without
SSIDs) sent by the radio, and include the radio in the neighbor list.
Examples — The following command displays neighbor information for
radio 1 on the directly connected MAP access point on port 2:
WX1200# display auto-tune neighbors ap 2 radio 1
Total number of entries for port 2 radio 1: 5
Channel Neighbor BSS/MAC RSSI
------- ----------------- ---1 00:0b:85:06:e3:60 -46
1 00:0b:0e:00:0a:80 -78
1 00:0b:0e:00:d2:c0 -74
1 00:0b:85:06:dd:00 -50
1 00:0b:0e:00:05:c1 -72

Table 59 describes the fields in this display.
Table 59 Output for display auto-tune neighbors
Field

Description

Channel

Channel on which the BSSID is detected.

Neighbor BSS/MAC

BSSID detected by the radio.

RSSI

Received signal strength indication (RSSI), in decibels referred
to 1 milliwatt (dBm). A higher value indicates a stronger
signal.

See Also
„

display auto-tune attributes on page 290

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on page 331

294

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

display dap
connection

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on page 332

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335

Displays the system IP address of the WX switch that has the active data
connection for a Distributed MAP.
Syntax — display dap connection
[dap-num | serial-id serial-ID]
„

„

dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
information about its active connection.
serial-id serial-ID — MAP access point serial ID.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The serial-id parameter displays the active connection for the
specified Distributed MAP even if that MAP is not configured on this WX
switch. If you instead use the command with the dap-num parameter or
without a parameter, connection information is displayed only for
Distributed MAPs that are configured on this WX switch.
If a Distributed MAP is configured on this WX switch (or another WX
switch in the same Mobility Domain) but does not have an active
connection, the command does not display information for the MAP. To
show configured Distributed MAPs regardless of connection status, use
the display dap global command.
Examples — The following command displays information for all Distributed
MAPs configured on this WX switch that have active connections:
WX1200# display dap connection
Total number of entries: 2
DAP Serial Id
DAP IP Address
--- ------------------------2
M9DE48B012F00 10.10.2.27
4
M9DE48B123400 10.10.3.34

WX IP Address
--------------10.3.8.111
10.3.8.111

display dap global

295

The following command displays connection information specifically for a
Distributed MAP with serial ID M9DE48B6EAD00:
WX1200# display dap connection serial-id M9DE48B6EAD00
Total number of entries: 1
DAP Serial Id
DAP IP Address WX IP Address
--- ------------------------- --------------9
M9DE48B6EAD00 10.10.4.88
10.9.9.11

Table 60 describes the fields in this display.
Table 60 Output of display dap connection
Field

Description

DAP

Connection ID you assigned to the Distributed MAP.
If the connection is configured on another WX switch, this
field contains a hyphen ( - ).

Serial Id

Serial ID of the Distributed MAP.

DAP IP Address

IP address assigned by DHCP to the Distributed MAP.

WX IP Address

System IP address of the WX switch on which the MAP has
an active connection. This is the switch that the MAP used
for booting and configuration and is using for data transfer.

See Also

display dap global

„

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

„

display dap global on page 295

„

display dap unconfigured on page 297

Displays configuration information for Distributed MAPs configured on
WX switches in the Mobility Domain.
Syntax — display dap global [dap-num | serial-id serial-ID]
„

„

dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
configuration settings.
serial-id serial-ID — MAP access point serial ID.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

296

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Usage — To show information only for Distributed MAPs that have
active connections, use the display dap connection command.
Examples — The following command displays configuration information
for all Distributed MAPs configured on WX switches in the Mobility
Domain:
WX4400# display dap global
Total number of entries: 8
DAP Serial Id
WX IP Address
--- ------------------------1
M9DE48B012F00 10.3.8.111
M9DE48B012F00 10.4.3.2
2
M9DE48B123400 10.3.8.111
M9DE48B123400 10.4.3.2
17 M9DE48B123600 10.3.8.111
M9DE48B123600 10.4.3.2
18 M9DE48B123700 10.3.8.111
M9DE48B123700 10.4.3.2

Bias
---HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH

Table 61 describes the fields in this display.
Table 61 Output for display dap global
Field

Description

DAP

Connection ID you assigned to the Distributed MAP.
Note: DAP numbers are listed only for Distributed MAPs
configured on this WX switch. If the field contains a
hyphen ( - ), the Distributed MAP configuration displayed in
the row of output is on another WX switch.

Serial Id

Serial ID of the Distributed MAP.

WX IP Address

System IP address of the WX switch on which the Distributed
MAP is configured. A separate row of output is displayed for
each WX switch on which the Distributed MAP is configured.

Bias

Bias of the WX switch for the Distributed MAP:
„

High

„

Low

display dap unconfigured

297

See Also

display dap
unconfigured

„

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

„

display dap connection on page 294

„

display dap unconfigured on page 297

„

set dap on page 77

„

set {ap | dap} bias on page 310

Displays Distributed MAPs that are physically connected to the network
but that are not configured on any WX switches.
Syntax — display dap unconfigured
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command also displays an MAP that is directly connected
to an WX switch, if the WX port to which the MAP is connected is
configured as a network port instead of a MAP access port, and if the
network port is a member of a VLAN.
If a Distributed MAP is configured on an WX switch in another Mobility
Domain, the MAP can appear in the output until the MAP is able to
establish a connection with an WX switch in its Mobility Domain. After
the MAP establishes a connection, the entry for the MAP ages out and no
longer appears in the command’s output.
Entries in the command output’s table age out after two minutes.
Examples — The following command displays information for two
Distributed MAPs that are not configured:
WX1200# display dap unconfigured
Total number of entries: 2
Serial Id
Model IP Address
------------- ------ --------------M9DE48B012F00 AP2750 10.3.8.54
M9DE48B123400 AP2750 10.3.8.57

Port
---5
6

Vlan
-------default
vlan-eng

298

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Table 62 describes the fields in this display.
Table 62 Output for display dap unconfigured
Field

Description

Serial Id

Serial ID of the Distributed MAP.

Model

MAP model number.

IP Address

IP address of the MAP. This is the address that the MAP
receives from a DHCP server. The MAP uses this address to
send a Find WX message to request configuration
information from WX switches. However, the MAP cannot
use the address to establish a connection unless the MAP
first receives a configuration from an WX switch.

Port

Port number on which this WX switch received the MAP’s
Find WX message.

VLAN

VLAN on which this WX switch received the MAP’s Find
WX message.

See Also

display
radio-profile

„

display dap connection on page 294

„

display dap global on page 295

Displays radio profile information.
Syntax — display radio-profile {name | ?}
„

name — Displays information about the named radio profile.

„

? — Displays a list of radio profiles.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS contains a default radio profile. 3Com recommends that
you do not change this profile but instead keep the profile for reference.
Examples — The following command shows radio profile information
for the default radio profile:

display radio-profile

WX4400# display radio-profile default
Beacon Interval:
100
DTIM Interval:
Max Tx Lifetime:
2000
Max Rx Lifetime:
RTS Threshold:
2346
Frag Threshold:
Short Retry Limit:
5
Long Retry Limit:
Long Preamble:
NO
Allow 802.11g clients only:
Tune Channel:
no
Tune Power:
Tune Channel Interval:
3600
Tune Power Interval:
Client Backoff Timer:
10
Channel Holddown:
Service profiles: default-dot1x, default-clear

299

1
2000
2346
5
NO
no
600
300

Table 63 describes the fields in this display.
Table 63 Output for display radio-profile
Field

Description

Beacon Interval

Rate (in milliseconds) at which each MAP radio in the profile
advertises the beaconed SSID.

DTIM Interval

Number of times after every beacon that each MAP radio in
the radio profile sends a delivery traffic indication map
(DTIM).

Max Tx Lifetime

Number of milliseconds that a frame received by a radio in
the radio profile can remain in buffer memory.

Max Rx Lifetime

Number of milliseconds that a frame scheduled to be
transmitted by a radio in the radio profile can remain in
buffer memory.

RTS Threshold

Minimum length (in bytes) a frame can be for a radio in the
radio profile to use the RTS/CTS method to send the frame.
The RTS/CTS method clears the air of other traffic to avoid
corruption of the frame due to a collision with another
frame.

Frag Threshold

Maximum length (in bytes) a frame is allowed to be without
being fragmented into multiple frames before transmission
by a radio in the radio profile.

Short Retry Limit

Number of times a radio in the radio profile can send a short
unicast frame without receiving an acknowledgment.

Long Retry Limit

Number of times a radio in the radio profile can send a long
unicast frame without receiving an acknowledgment. A long
unicast frame is a frame that is equal to or longer than the
RTS threshold.

300

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Table 63 Output for display radio-profile (continued)
Field

Description

Long Preamble

Indicates whether an 802.11b radio that uses this radio
profile advertises support for frames with long preambles
only:

Allow 802.11g
clients only

„

YES — Advertises support for long preambles only.

„

NO — Advertises support for long and short preambles.

Indicates whether the 802.11b/g radios in the radio profile
restrict associations to 802.11g clients only:
„

No — 802.11b/g radios allow associations with both
802.11b and 802.11g clients.

„

No — 802.11b/g radios allow associations with 802.11g
clients only.

Note: This field applies only to 802.11b/g radios.
Tune Channel

Indicates whether RF Auto-Tuning is enabled for dynamically
setting and tuning channels.

Tune Power

Indicates whether RF Auto-Tuning is enabled for dynamically
setting and tuning power levels.

Tune Channel
Interval

Interval, in seconds, at which RF Auto-Tuning decides
whether to change the channels on radios in a radio profile.
At the end of each interval, MSS processes the results of the
RF scans performed during the previous interval, and
changes radio channels if needed.

Tune Power Interval

Interval, in seconds, at which RF Auto-Tuning decides
whether to change the power level on radios in a radio
profile. At the end of each interval, MSS processes the results
of the RF scans performed during the previous interval, and
changes radio power levels if needed.

Client Backoff Timer

Interval, in minutes, at which radios in a radio profile reduce
power after temporarily increasing the power to maintain
the minimum data rate for an associated client. At the end of
each power-backoff interval, radios that temporarily
increased their power reduce it by 1 dBm. The power
backoff continues in 1 dBm increments after each interval
until the power returns to expected setting.

Channel Holddown

Minimum number of seconds a radio in a radio profile must
remain at its current channel assignment before
RF Auto-Tuning can change the channel.

display radio-profile

301

Table 63 Output for display radio-profile (continued)
Field

Description

Service profiles

Service profiles mapped to this radio profile. Each service
profile contains an SSID and encryption information for that
SSID.
Note: When you upgrade from 2.x, MSS creates a
default-dot1x service profile for encrypted SSIDs and a
default-clear service profile for unencrypted SSIDs. These
default service profiles contain the default encryption
settings for crypto SSIDs and clear SSIDs, respectively.

See Also
„

set radio-profile 11g-only on page 329

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on page 331

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on page 332

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335

„

set radio-profile beacon-interval on page 336

„

set radio-profile dtim-interval on page 338

„

set radio-profile frag-threshold on page 339

„

set radio-profile long-retry on page 339

„

set radio-profile max-rx-lifetime on page 340

„

set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime on page 341

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

„

set radio-profile preamble-length on page 345

„

set radio-profile rts-threshold on page 346

„

set radio-profile service-profile on page 346

„

set radio-profile short-retry on page 350

302

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

display
service-profile

Displays service profile information.
Syntax — display service-profile {name | ?}
„

name — Displays information about the named service profile.

„

? — Displays a list of service profiles.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays information for service
profile wpa_clients:
WX4400# display service-profile wpa_clients
ssid-name:
private
ssid-type:
crypto
beacon:
yes
auth-fallthru:
web-portal
WEP Key 1 value:

WEP Key 2 value:

WEP Key 3 value:

WEP Key 4 value:

WEP Unicast Index:
1
WEP Multicast Index:
1
Shared Key Auth:
NO
WPA enabled:
ciphers: cipher-tkip
authentication: 802.1X
TKIP countermeasures time: 60000ms

Table 64 describes the fields in this display.
Table 64 Output for display service-profile
Field

Description

ssid-name

Service set identifier (SSID) managed by this service profile.

ssid-type

SSID type:

beacon

„

crypto — Wireless traffic for the SSID is encrypted.

„

clear — Wireless traffic for the SSID is unencrypted.

Indicates whether the radio sends beacons, to advertise the
SSID:
„

no

„

yes

display service-profile

303

Table 64 Output for display service-profile (continued)
Field

Description

auth-fallthru

Secondary (fallthru) encryption type when a user tries to
authenticate but the WX switch managing the radio does
not have an authentication rule with a userglob that matches
the username.

WEP Key 1 value

„

last-resort — Automatically authenticates the user and
allows access to the SSID requested by the user, without
requiring a username and password.

„

none—Denies authentication and prohibits the user from
accessing the SSID.

„

web-portal — Redirects the user to a web page for login
to the SSID.

State of static WEP key number 1. Radios can use this key to
encrypt traffic with static Wired-Equivalent Privacy (WEP):
„

none —T he key is not configured.

„

preset — The key is configured.

Note: The WEP parameters apply to traffic only on the
encrypted SSID.
WEP Key 2 value

WEP Key 3 value

WEP Key 4 value

State of static WEP key number 2:
„

none — The key is not configured.

„

preset — The key is configured.

State of static WEP key number 3:
„

none — The key is not configured.

„

preset — The key is configured.

State of static WEP key number 4:
„

none — The key is not configured.

„

preset — The key is configured.

WEP Unicast Index

Index of the static WEP key used to encrypt unicast traffic on
an encrypted SSID.

WEP Multicast Index

Index of the static WEP key used to encrypt multicast traffic
on an encrypted SSID.

Shared Key Auth

Indicates whether shared-key authentication is enabled.

304

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Table 64 Output for display service-profile (continued)
Field

Description

WPA enabled

Indicates that the Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) information
element (IE) is enabled. Additional fields display the settings
of other WPA parameters:
„

ciphers — Lists the WPA cipher suites advertised by
radios in the radio profile mapped to this service profile.

„

authentication — Lists the authentication methods
supported for WPA clients:
802.1X — dynamic authentication
PSK — preshared key authentication

„

TKIP countermeasures time — Indicates the amount of
time (in ms) MSS enforces countermeasures following a
second message integrity code (MIC) failure within a
60-second period.

Note: The WPA fields are displayed only when the WPA IE is
enabled.

See Also
„

set service-profile auth-dot1x on page 351

„

set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352

„

set service-profile auth-psk on page 354

„

set service-profile beacon on page 355

„

set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356

„

set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357

„

set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358

„

set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359

„

set service-profile psk-phrase on page 360

„

set service-profile psk-raw on page 361

„

set service-profile rsn-ie on page 362

„

set service-profile shared-key-auth on page 363

„

set service-profile ssid-name on page 363

„

set service-profile ssid-type on page 364

„

set service-profile tkip-mc-time on page 365

„

set service-profile web-aaa-form on page 366

reset {ap | dap}

reset {ap | dap}

„

set service-profile wep active-multicast- index on page 367

„

set service-profile wep active-unicast- index on page 368

„

set service-profile wep key-index on page 369

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

305

Restarts an MAP access point.
Syntax — reset {ap port-list | dap dap-num}
„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points to

restart.
„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP to reset.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When you enter this command, the MAP access point drops all
sessions and reboots.
CAUTION: Restarting an MAP access point can cause data loss for users
who are currently associated with the MAP.
Examples — The following command resets the MAP access point on
port 6:
WX1200# reset ap 6
This will reset specified AP devices.
Would you like to continue? (y/n)y
success: rebooting ap attached to port 6

306

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set dap auto

Creates a template for automatic configuration of Distributed MAPs.
Syntax — set dap auto
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — Table 65 lists the configurable template parameters and their
defaults. The only parameter that requires configuration is the template
mode. The template is disabled by default. To use the template to
configure Distributed MAPs, you must enable the template using the set
dap auto mode enable command.
The template uses the default radio profile by default. You can change
the profile using the set dap auto radio radio-profile command. You
can use set dap auto commands to change settings for the parameters
listed in Table 65. (The commands are listed in the “See Also” section.)

Table 65 Configurable Template Parameters for Distributed MAPs
Parameter

Default Value

MAP Parameters
mode

disabled

bias

high

upgrade-firmware
(boot-download-enable)

enable (YES)

group (load balancing group)

none

blink

disable

(Not shown in display dap config
output)
Radio Parameters
radiotype (type)

11g

(Applies only to single-radio MAP
models)

(or 11b for country codes where
802.11g is not allowed)

mode

enabled

set dap auto

307

Table 65 Configurable Template Parameters for Distributed MAPs (continued)
Parameter

Default Value

tx-pwr

Highest setting allowed for the
country of operation

radio-profile (profile)

default

max-power

default

min-client-rate

5.5 for 802.11b/g
24 for 802.11a

max-retransmissions

10

Examples — The following command creates a template for automatic
Distributed MAP configuration:
WX1200# set dap auto
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set dap auto mode on page 308

„

set dap auto radiotype on page 309

„

set {ap | dap} bias on page 310

„

set {ap | dap} blink on page 311

„

set {ap | dap} group on page 313

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate on page 321

„

set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323

„

set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324

„

set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware on page 328

308

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set dap auto mode

Enables an WX switch’s template for automatic Distributed MAP
configuration.
Syntax — set dap auto mode {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables the MAP configuration template.

„

disable — Disables the MAP configuration template.

Defaults — The MAP configuration template is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — You must use the set dap auto command to create the
template before you can enable it.
Examples — The following command enables the template for
automatic Distributed MAP configuration:
WX1200# set dap auto mode enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set dap auto on page 306

„

set dap auto radiotype on page 309

„

set {ap | dap} bias on page 310

„

set {ap | dap} blink on page 311

„

set {ap | dap} group on page 313

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate on page 321

„

set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323

„

set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324

„

set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware on page 328

set dap auto radiotype

set dap auto
radiotype

309

Sets the radio type for single-MAP radios that use the MAP configuration
template.
Syntax — set dap auto [radiotype {11a | 11b| 11g}]
radiotype {11a | 11b| 11g
„

Radio type:
„

11a—802.11a

„

11b—802.11b

„

11g—802.11g

This option applies only to single-radio models. The value 11g does not
apply to model MAP-101.
Defaults — The default radio type for model MAP-101 is 802.11b. The
default radio type for model AP2750, MAP-241, and MAP-341, and for
the 802.11b/g radios in models AP3750, AP8750, MAP-52, MAP-252,
MAP-262, MAP-352, and MAP-372 is 802.11g in regulatory domains
that support 802.11g, or 802.11b in regulatory domains that do not
support 802.11g.
MAP radios configured for 802.11g also allow associations from 802.11b
clients by default. To disable support for 802.11b associations, use the
set radio-profile 11g-only command on the radio profile that contains
the radio.
Examples — The following command sets the radio type to 802.11b:
WX12000# set dap auto radiotype 11b
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set dap auto on page 306

310

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set {ap | dap} bias

Changes the bias for a MAP. Bias is the priority of one WX switch over
other WX switches for booting and configuring the MAP.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto)} bias
{high | low}
„

ap port-list — List of ports on which to change the bias for directly

connected MAPs.
„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to change

the bias.
„

dap auto — Configures bias for the MAP configuration template. (See
set dap auto on page 306.)

„

high — High bias.

„

low — Low bias.

Defaults — The default bias is high.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Option auto added for
configuration of the MAP configuration template, MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — High bias is preferred over low bias. Bias applies only to WX
switches that are indirectly attached to the MAP through an intermediate
Layer 2 or Layer 3 network. A MAP always attempts to boot on MAP
port 1 first, and if an WX switch is directly attached on MAP port 1, the
MAP always boots from it.
If MAP port 1 is indirectly connected to WX switches through the
network, the MAP boots from the switch with the high bias for the MAP.
If the bias for all connections is the same, the MAP selects the switch that
has the greatest capacity to add more active MAPs. For example, if a MAP
is dual homed to two WX4400 wireless LAN switches, and one of the
switches has 50 active MAPs while the other switch has 60 active MAPs,
the new MAP selects the switch that has only 50 active MAPs.
If the boot request on MAP port 1 fails, the MAP attempts to boot over its
port 2, using the same process described above.

set {ap | dap} blink

311

MAP selection of an WX switch is sticky. After a MAP selects an WX
switch to boot from, the MAP continues to use that switch for its active
data link even if another switch configured with high bias for the MAP
becomes available.
Examples — The following command changes the bias for a Distributed
MAP to low:
WX4400# set dap 1 bias low
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set {ap | dap} blink

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

Enables or disables LED blink mode on a MAP access point to make it
easy to identify.
When blink mode is enabled on an AP2750, the 11a LED blinks on and
off.
When blink mode is enabled on an AP3750, the health and radio LEDs
alternately blink green and amber.
When blink mode is enabled on an AP7250, the Radio LED flashes red
and the Power LED flashes green/orange. The Ethernet LED does not
change.
When blink mode is enabled on an AP8250, the Radio LED flashes red
and the Power LED flashes green/orange. The Ethernet LED does not
change.
When blink mode is enabled on an AP8750, both Radio LEDs flash red
and the Power LED flashes green/orange. The Ethernet LED does not
change.
When blink mode is enabled on other models (MAP-xxx), the health and
radio LEDs alternately blink green and amber. By default, blink mode is
disabled.

312

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto)}
blink {enable | disable}
„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on

which to turn blink mode on or off.
„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to turn blink

mode on or off.
„

dap auto —Configures blink mode for the MAP configuration
template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)

„

enable — Enables blink mode.

„

disable — Disables blink mode.

Defaults — LED blink mode is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Option auto added for
configuration of the MAP configuration template in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — Changing the LED blink mode does not alter operation of the
MAP access point. Only the behavior of the LEDs is affected.
Examples — The following command enables LED blink mode on the
MAP access points connected to ports 3 and 4:
WX1200# set ap 3-4 blink enable
success: change accepted.

set dap fingerprint

Verifies a MAP’s fingerprint on an WX switch. If MAP-WX security is
required by a WX switch, a MAP can establish a management session
with the switch only if you have verified the MAP’s identity by verifying its
fingerprint on the switch.
Syntax — set dap num fingerprint hex
dap dap-num — Number of the Distributed MAP whose fingerprint you

are verifying.
hex — The 16-digit hexadecimal number of the fingerprint. Use a colon
between each digit. Make sure the fingerprint you enter matches the
fingerprint used by the MAP.

set {ap | dap} group

313

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — MAPs are configured with an encryption key pair at the
factory. The fingerprint for the public key is displayed on a label on the
back of the MAP, in the following format:
RSA
aaaa:aaaa:aaaa:aaaa:
aaaa:aaaa:aaaa:aaaa

If a MAP is already installed and operating, you can use the display dap
status command to display the fingerprint. The display dap config
command lists a MAP’s fingerprint only if the fingerprint has been verified
in MSS. If the fingerprint has not been verified, the fingerprint
information in the command output is blank.
Examples — The following example verifies the fingerprint for
Distributed MAP 8:
WX-1200# set dap 8 fingerprint
b4:f9:2a:52:37:58:f4:d0:10:75:43:2f:45:c9:52:c3
success: change accepted.

See Also

set {ap | dap} group

„

set dap security on page 326

„

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

„

display {ap | dap} status on page 287

Configures a named group of MAP access points. MSS automatically load
balances sessions among the access points in a group. To balance the
sessions, MSS rejects an association request for an access point’s radio if
that radio has at least four more active sessions than the radio of the
same type with the least number of active sessions within the group.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto)} group name
„

ap port-list — List of MAP access ports to add to the group.

314

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

„
„

„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP to add to the group.
dap auto —Configures blink mode for the MAP configuration
template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
name — MAP access point group name of up to 16 alphanumeric

characters, with no spaces.
Defaults — MAP access points are not grouped by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. MSS Version 4.0 added auto
option for configuration of the MAP configuration template.
Usage — You can assign any subset or all of the MAP access points
connected to an WX switch to a group on that switch. All access points in
a group must be connected to the same WX switch.
If you use the name none, spelled in any combination of capital or
lowercase letters, the specified MAP access point is cleared from all MAP
access point groups.
Examples — The following command configures an MAP access point
group named loadbalance1 that contains the MAP access points on ports
1, 3, and 5:
WX1200# set ap 1,3,5 group loadbalance1
success: change accepted.

The following command removes the MAP access point on port 4 from all
MAP access point groups:
WX1200# set ap 4 group none
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

„

display {ap | dap} group on page 285

set {ap | dap} name

set {ap | dap} name

315

Changes an MAP name.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap dap-num} name name
„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point to

rename.
„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP to rename.

„

name — Alphanumeric string of up to 16 characters, with no spaces.

Defaults — The default name of a directly attached MAP is based on the
port number of the MAP access port attached to the MAP. For example,
the default name for a MAP on MAP access port 1 is MAP01. The default
name of a Distributed MAP is based on the number you assign to it when
you configure the connection. For example, the default name for
Distributed MAP 1 is DMP01.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the name of the MAP
access point on port 1 to techpubs:
WX1200# set ap 1 name techpubs
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set {ap | dap} radio
antennatype

“display {ap | dap} config” on page 277

Sets the model number for an external antenna.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap dap-num} radio
{1 antennatype ANT1060 | ANT1120 | ANT1180 | internal}
{2 antennatype ANT5060 | ANT5120 | ANT5180 | internal}
{ {1|2} antennatype ANT3C591 | ANT3C592 | ANT3C597 | ANT3C598
| internal}
„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on

which to set the channel.
„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the

channel.

316

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

„
„

„

radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models or to the AP8750.)
antennatype {ANT1060 | ANT1120 | ANT1180 | internal} —

802.11b/g external antenna models:

„

„

ANT1060 — 60° 802.11b/g antenna

„

ANT1120 — 120° 802.11b/g antenna

„

ANT1180 — 180° 802.11b/g antenna

„

internal — uses the internal antenna instead

antennatype {ANT5060 | ANT5120 | ANT5180 | internal} —

802.11a external antenna models:

„

„

ANT5060 — 60° 802.11a antenna

„

ANT5120 — 120° 802.11a antenna

„

ANT5180 — 180° 802.11a antenna

„

internal — uses the internal antenna instead

antennatype {ANT3C591 | ANT3C592 | ANT3C597 | ANT3C598 |
internal} — 802.11a/b/g dual-mode external antenna models:
„

ANT3C591 — High gain omni 802.11a/b/g antenna

„

ANT3C592 — Ceiling 802.11a/b/g antenna

„

ANT3C597 — Hallway 802.11a/b/g antenna

„

ANT3C598 — Panel 802.11a/b/g antenna

„

internal — uses the internal antenna instead

All radios use the internal antenna by default. (The MAP-262 802.11b/g
radio does not have an internal antenna, and uses model ANT1060 by
default.)
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Model numbers added for
802.11a external antennas, and the default changed to internal (except
for the MAP-262) in MSS Version 3.2.

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power

317

Usage — This command applies only to MAP models that support
external antennas. External 802.11b/g antennas are supported on
MAP-372, MAP-341, MAP-352, and MAP-262. External 802.11a
antennas are supported only on model MAP-372. External dual-mode
antennas are supported on AP2750, AP3750, AP7250, AP8250 and
AP8750.
Examples — The following command configures the 802.11b/g radio on
Distributed MAP 1 to use antenna model ANT1060:
WX4400# set dap 1 radio 1 antennatype ANT1060
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set {ap | dap} radio
auto-tune
max-power

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

Sets the maximum power that RF Auto-Tuning can set on a radio.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto)}
radio {1 | 2} auto-tune max-power power-level
„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on

which to set the maximum power.
„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the

maximum power.
„

„
„

„

dap auto — Sets the maximum power for radios configured by the
MAP configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
power-level — Maximum power setting RF Auto-Tuning can assign

to the radio, expressed as the number of decibels in relation to 1
milliwatt (dBm). You can specify a value from 1 up to the maximum
value allowed for the country of operation.
The power-level can be a value from 1 to 20.
Defaults — The default maximum power setting that RF Auto-Tuning
can set on a radio is the highest setting allowed for the country of
operation or highest setting supported on the hardware, whichever is
lower.

318

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. MSS Version 4.0 added auto
option for configuration of the MAP configuration template.
Examples — The following command sets the maximum power that
RF Auto-Tuning can set on radio 1 on the MAP access point on port 6 to
12 dBm.
WX1200# set ap 6 radio 1 auto-tune max-power 12
success: change accepted.

See Also

set {ap | dap} radio
auto-tune maxretransmissions

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335

Sets the maximum percentage of client retransmissions a radio can
experience before RF Auto-Tuning considers changing the channel on the
radio. A high percentage of retransmissions is a symptom of interference
on the channel.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto)}
radio {1 | 2} auto-tune max-retransmissions retransmissions
„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on

which to set the maximum retransmissions.
„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the

maximum retransmissions.
„

„
„

„

dap auto — Sets the maximum retransmissions for radios configured
by the MAP configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
retransmissions — Percentage of packets that can result in

retransmissions without resulting in a channel change. You can
specify from 1 to 100.

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions

319

Defaults — The default is 10 percent.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. MSS Version 4.0 added auto
option for configuration of the MAP configuration template.
Usage — A retransmission is a packet sent from a client to a MAP radio
that the radio receives more than once. This can occur when the client
does not receive an 802.11 acknowledgement for a packet sent to the
radio.
If the radio receives only a single copy of a packet that is transmitted
multiple times by a client, the packet is not counted by the radio as a
retransmission. For example, if a packet is corrupted and the radio does
not receive it, but the second copy of the packet does reach the radio,
the radio does not count the packet as a retransmission since the radio
received only one recognizable copy of the packet.
The interval is 1000 packets. If more than the specified percentage of
packets within a group of 1000 packets received by the radio are
retransmissions, the radio increases power.
When the percentage of retransmissions exceeds the max-retransmissions
threshold, the radio does not immediately increase power. Instead, if the
data rate at which the radio is sending packets to the client is above the
minimum data rate allowed, the radio lowers the data rate by one
setting. If the retransmissions still exceed the maximum allowed, the
radio continues to lower the data rate, one setting at a time, until either
the retransmissions fall within the allowed percentile or the minimum
allowed data rate is reached.
If the retransmissions still exceed the threshold after the minimum
allowed data rate is reached, the radio increases power by 1 dBm. The
radio continues increasing the power in 1 dBm increments until the
retransmissions fall below the threshold.
After the retransmissions fall below the threshold, the radio reduces
power by 1 dBm. As long as retransmissions remain below the threshold,
the radio continues reducing power in 1 dBm increments until it returns
to its default power level.

320

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

A radio also can increase power, in 1 dBm increments, if a client falls
below the minimum allowed data rate. After a radio increases power, all
clients must be at the minimum data rate or higher and the maximum
retransmissions must be within the allowed percentile, before the radio
begins reducing power again.
Examples — The following command changes the max-retransmissions
value to 20:
WX1200# set ap 6 radio 1 auto-tune max-retransmissions 20
success: change accepted.

See Also

set {ap | dap} radio
channel

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335

Sets an MAP radio’s channel.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap dap-num} radio {1 | 2}
channel channel-number
„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on

which to set the channel.
„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the

channel.
„
„

„

radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
channel channel-number — Channel number. The valid channel
numbers depend on the country of operation.

Defaults — The default channel depends on the radio type:
„
„

The default channel number for 802.11b/g is 6.
The default channel number for 802.11a is the lowest valid channel
number for the country of operation.

Access — Enabled.

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate

321

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure a radio’s transmit power on the same
command line. Use the tx-power option.
This command is not valid if dynamic channel tuning (RF Auto-Tuning) is
enabled.
Examples — The following command configures the channel on the
802.11a radio on the MAP access point connected to port 5:
WX1200# set ap 5 radio 1 channel 36
success: change accepted.

The following command configures the channel and transmit power on
the 802.11b/g radio on the MAP access point connected to port 1:
WX1200# set ap 1 radio 1 channel 1 tx-power 10
success: change accepted.

See Also

set {ap | dap} radio
auto-tune
min-client-rate

„

“display {ap | dap} config” on page 277

„

set {ap | dap} radio tx-power on page 325

Sets the minimum rate at which a radio is allowed to transmit traffic to
clients. The radio automatically increases its transmit power when
necessary to maintain at least the minimum rate with an associated client.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto}
radio {1 | 2} auto-tune min-client-rate rate
„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on

which to set the minimum data rate.
„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the

minimum data rate.
„

„
„

dap auto — Sets the maximum power for radios configured by the
MAP configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)

322

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

„

rate — Minimum data rate, in megabits per second (Mbps). The valid

values depend on the radio type:
„

For 802.11g radios—54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 11, 9, 6, 5.5, 2, or 1

„

For 802.11b radios—11, 5.5, 2, or 1

„

For 802.11a radios—54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, or 6

Defaults — The default minimum data transmit rate depends on the
radio type:
„

„

The default minimum data rate for 802.11b/g and 802.11b radios is
5.5 Mbps.
The default minimum data rate for 802.11a radios is 24 Mbps.

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. MSS Version 4.0 added auto
option for configuration of the MAP configuration template.
Usage — If the data rate for traffic sent by a radio to an associated client
falls below the default minimum rate, the radio increases power, in
1 dBm increments, until all clients are at or above the minimum rate.
After all clients are at or above the minimum data transmit rate, the radio
reduces power by 1 dBm. As long as the radio continues to transmit at
the minimum data rate or higher for all clients, the radio continues
reducing power in 1 dBm increments until it returns to its normal power
level.
A radio also can increase power, in 1 dBm increments, if more than the
allowed percentage of packets received by the radio from a client are
retransmissions. After a radio increases power, all clients must be at the
minimum data rate or higher and the maximum retransmissions must be
within the allowed percentile, before the radio begins reducing power
again.
Examples —
set ap 6 radio 1 min-client-rate 11

See Also
„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334

set {ap | dap} radio mode

set {ap | dap} radio
mode

323

Enables or disables a radio on an MAP access point.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap {dap-num | auto}}
radio {1 | 2} mode {enable | disable}
„

„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) on
which to turn a radio on or off.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to turn a

radio on or off.
„

„
„

dap auto — Sets the radio mode for radios configured by the MAP
configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)

„

mode enable — Enables a radio.

„

mode disable — Disables a radio.

Defaults — MAP access point radios are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. MSS Version 4.0 added auto
option for configuration of the MAP configuration template.
Usage — To enable or disable one or more radios to which a profile is
assigned, use the set ap radio radio-profile command. To enable or
disable all radios that use a specific radio profile, use the set
radio-profile command.
Examples — The following command enables radio 1 on the MAP access
points connected to ports 1 through 5:
WX1200# set ap 1-5 radio 1 mode enable
success: change accepted.

The following command enables radio 2 on ports 1 through 3:
WX1200# set ap 1-3 radio 2 mode enable
success: change accepted.

324

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

See Also

set {ap | dap} radio
radio-profile

„

clear {ap | dap} radio on page 272

„

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

„

set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

Assigns a radio profile to a MAP radio and enables or disables the radio.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap {dap-num | auto}} radio {1
| 2} radio-profile name mode {enable | disable}
„

ap port-list — List of ports.

„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP.

„

„
„

„

dap auto — Sets the radio profile for radios configured by the MAP
configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
radio-profile name — Radio profile name of up to 16 alphanumeric

characters, with no spaces.
„

mode enable — Enables radios on the specified ports with the

parameter settings in the specified radio profile.
„

mode disable — Disables radios on the specified ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Option auto added for
configuration of the MAP configuration template in MSS Version 4.0 .
Usage — When you create a new profile, the radio parameters in the
profile are set to their factory default values.
To enable or disable all radios that use a specific radio profile, use set
radio-profile.

set {ap | dap} radio tx-power

325

Examples — The following command enables radio 1 on ports 3
through 6 assigned to radio profile rp1:
WX1200# set ap 3-6 radio 1 radio-profile rp1 mode enable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set {ap | dap} radio
tx-power

„

clear {ap | dap} radio on page 272

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

Sets an MAP radio’s transmit power.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap dap-num} radio {1 | 2}
tx-power power-level
„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on

which to set the transmit power.
„

dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the

transmit power.
„
„

„

radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
tx-power power-level — Number of decibels in relation to
1 milliwatt (dBm). The valid values depend on the country of
operation.

The maximum transmit power you can configure on any 3Com radio
is the maximum allowed for the country in which you plan to operate
the radio or one of the following values if that value is less than the
country maximum: on an 802.11a radio, 11 dBm for channel numbers
less than or equal to 64, or 10 dBm for channel numbers greater than
64; on an 802.11b/g radio, 16 dBm for all valid channel numbers for
802.11b, or 14 dBm for all valid channel numbers for 802.11g.
Defaults — The default transmit power on all MAP radio types is the
highest setting allowed for the country of operation or highest setting
supported on the hardware, whichever is lower.

326

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You also can configure a radio’s channel on the same
command line. Use the channel option.
This command is not valid if dynamic power tuning (RF Auto-Tuning) is
enabled.
Examples — The following command configures the transmit power on
the 802.11a radio on the MAP access point connected to port 5:
WX1200# set ap 5 radio 1 tx-power 10
success: change accepted.

The following command configures the channel and transmit power on
the 802.11b/g radio on the MAP access point connected to port 1:
WX1200# set ap 1 radio 1 channel 1 tx-power 10
success: change accepted.

See Also

set dap security

„

“display {ap | dap} config” on page 277

„

set {ap | dap} radio channel on page 320

Sets security requirements for management sessions between an WX
switch and its Distributed MAPs.
This feature applies to Distributed MAPs only, not to directly connected
MAPs configured on MAP access ports. In addition, MAP models AP7250,
AP8250, AP8750, MAP-101 and MAP-122 do not have encryption keys
and do not support this feature regardless of how they are connected to
the WX switch.
The maximum transmission unit (MTU) for encrypted MAP management
traffic is 1498 bytes, whereas the MTU for unencrypted management
traffic is 1474 bytes. Make sure the devices in the intermediate network
between the WX switch and Distributed MAP can support the higher
MTU.
Syntax — set dap security {require | none | optional}

set dap security

„

327

require — Require all Distributed MAPs to have encryption keys that

have been verified in the CLI by an administrator. If a MAP does not
have an encryption key or the key has not been verified, the WX does
not establish a management session with the MAP.
„

„

optional — Allows MAPs to be managed by the switch even if they
do not have encryption keys or their keys have not been verified by an
administrator. Encryption is used for MAPs that support it.
none — Encryption is not used, even for MAPs that support it.

Defaults — The default setting is none.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — This parameter applies to all Distributed MAPs managed by the
switch. If you change the setting to required, the switch requires
Distributed MAPs to have encryption keys. The switch also requires their
fingerprints to be verified in MSS. When MAP security is required, a MAP
can establish a management session with the WX only if its fingerprint
has been verified by you in MSS.
A change to MAP security support does not affect management sessions
that are already established. To apply the new setting to an MAP, restart
the MAP.
Examples — The following command configures an WX to require
Distributed MAPs to have encryption keys:
WX-1200# set dap security require

See Also
„

set dap fingerprint on page 312

„

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

„

display {ap | dap} status on page 287

328

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set {ap | dap}
upgrade-firmware

Disables or reenables automatic upgrade of an MAP access point’s boot
firmware.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap {dap-num | auto}}
upgrade-firmware {enable | disable}
„

„

ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) on
which to allow automatic firmware upgrades.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to allow

automatic firmware upgrades.
„

dap auto — Configures firmware upgrades for the MAP
configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)

„

enable — Enables automatic firmware upgrades.

„

disable — Disables automatic firmware upgrades.

Defaults — Automatic firmware upgrades of MAP access points are
enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Option auto to configure the
MAP configuration template added in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — When the feature is enabled on an WX port, an MAP access
point connected to that port upgrades its boot firmware to the latest
version stored on the WX switch while booting.
Examples — The following command disables automatic firmware
upgrades on the MAP access point connected to port 6:
WX1200# set ap 6 upgrade-firmware disable

See Also
„

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

set radio-profile 11g-only

set radio-profile
11g-only

329

Configures each 802.11b/g radio in a radio profile to allow associations
with 802.11g clients only.
Syntax — set radio-profile name 11g-only {enable | disable}
„
„

„

name — Radio profile name.
enable — Configures radios to allow associations with 802.11g
clients only.
disable — Configures radios to allow associations with 802.11g
clients and 802.11b clients.

Defaults — The default setting is disable. 3Com 802.11b/g radios allow
associations with 802.11g and 802.11b clients by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command.
Even when association of 802.11b clients is disabled, if an 802.11b/g
radio detects a beacon from an 802.11b network, the radio enters
protection mode to guard against interference.
The set radio-profile 11g-only command does not affect the radio
support configured with the set port type ap command. For example, if
you configure a radio to be 802.11b only when you set the port type, the
set radio-profile 11g-only enable command does not enable 802.11g
support on the radio.
Examples — The following command configures the 802.11b/g radios in
radio profile rp1 to allow associations from 802.11g clients only:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 11g-only enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set port type ap on page 87

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

330

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set radio-profile
active-scan

Disables or reenables active RF detection scanning on the MAP radios
managed by a radio profile. When active scanning is enabled, MAP radios
look for rogue devices by sending probe any requests (probe requests
with a null SSID name), to solicit probe responses from other access
points.
Passive scanning is always enabled and cannot be disabled. During
passive scanning, radios look for rogues by listening for beacons and
probe responses.
Syntax — set radio-profile name active-scan {enable |
disable}
„

name — Radio profile name.

„

enable — Configures radios to actively scan for rogues.

„

disable — Configures radios to scan only passively for rogues by
listening for beacons and probe responses.

Defaults — Active scanning is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — You can enter this command on any WX switch in the Mobility
Domain. The command takes effect only on that switch.
Examples — The following command disables active scan in radio profile
radprof3:
WX-1200# set radio-profile radprof3 active-scan disable
success: change accepted.

set radio-profile
auto-tune
channel-config

Disables or reenables dynamic channel tuning (RF Auto-Tuning) for the
MAP radios in a radio profile.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune channel-config
{enable | disable}
„

name — Radio profile name.

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown

„

„

331

enable — Configures radios to dynamically select their channels
when the radios are started.
disable — Configures radios to use their statically assigned channels,
or the default channels if unassigned, when the radios are started.

Defaults — Dynamic channel assignment is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you disable RF Auto-Tuning for channels, MSS does not
dynamically set the channels when radios are first enabled and also does
not tune the channels during operation.
If RF Auto-Tuning for channels is enabled, MSS does not allow you to
manually change channels.
Examples — The following command disables dynamic channel tuning
for radios in the rp2 radio profile:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune channel-config
disable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
auto-tune
channel-holddown

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on page 331

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on page 332

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334

Sets the minimum number of seconds a radio in a radio profile must
remain at its current channel assignment before RF Auto-Tuning can
change the channel. The channel holddown provides additional stability
to the network by preventing the radio from changing channels too
rapidly in response to spurious RF anomalies such as short-duration
channel interference.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune channel-holddown
holddown
„

name — Radio profile name.

332

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

„

holddown — Minimum number of seconds a radio must remain on its
current channel setting before RF Auto-Tuning is allowed to change
the channel. You can specify from 0 to 65535 seconds.

Defaults — The default RF Auto-Tuning channel holddown is 900
seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The channel holddown applies even if RF anomalies occur that
normally cause an immediate channel change.
Examples — The following command changes the channel holddown
for radios in radio profile rp2 to 600 seconds:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune channel-holddown 600
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
auto-tune
channel-interval

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on page 332

Sets the interval at which RF Auto-Tuning decides whether to change the
channels on radios in a radio profile. At the end of each interval, MSS
processes the results of the RF scans performed during the previous
interval, and changes radio channels if needed.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune channel-interval
seconds
„
„

name — Radio profile name.
seconds — Number of seconds RF Auto-Tuning waits before
changing radio channels to adjust to RF changes, if needed. You can
specify from 0 to 65535 seconds.

Defaults — The default channel interval is 3600 seconds (one hour).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer

333

Usage — 3Com recommends that you use an interval of at least 300
seconds (5 minutes).
RF Auto-Tuning can change a radio’s channel before the channel interval
expires in response to RF anomalies. Even in this case, channel changes
cannot occur more frequently than the channel holddown interval.
If you set the interval to 0, RF Auto-Tuning does not reevaluate the
channel at regular intervals. However, RF Auto-Tuning can still change
the channel in response to RF anomalies.
Examples — The following command sets the channel interval for radios
in radio profile rp2 to 2700 seconds (45 minutes):
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune channel-interval 2700
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
auto-tune
power-backofftimer

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on page 331

Sets the interval at which radios in a radio profile reduce power after
temporarily increasing the power to maintain the minimum data rate for
an associated client. At the end of each power-backoff interval, radios
that temporarily increased their power reduce it by 1 dBm. The power
backoff continues in 1 dBm increments after each interval until the power
returns to expected setting.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune power-backoff-timer
seconds
„
„

name — Radio profile name.
seconds — Number of seconds radios wait before lowering the power
by 1 dBm. You can specify from 0 to 65535 seconds.

Defaults — The default power-backoff interval is 10 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

334

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

A radio can increase power again if required to preserve the minimum
data rate for an associated client.
Examples — The following command changes the power-backoff
interval for radios in radio profile rp2 to 15 seconds:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune
power-backoff-timer 15
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
auto-tune
power-config

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335

Enables or disables dynamic power tuning (RF Auto-Tuning) for the MAP
radios in a radio profile.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune power-config
{enable | disable}
„
„

„

name — Radio profile name.
enable — Configures radios to dynamically set their power levels
when the MAPs are started.
disable — Configures radios to use their statically assigned power
levels, or the default power levels if unassigned, when the radios are
started.

Defaults — Dynamic power assignment is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When RF Auto-Tuning for power is disabled, MSS does not
dynamically set the power levels when radios are first enabled and also
does not tune power during operation with associated clients.
When RF Auto-Tuning for power is enabled, MSS does not allow you to
manually change the power level.

set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval

335

Examples — The following command enables dynamic power tuning for
radios in the rp2 radio profile:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune power-config enable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
auto-tune
power-interval

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318

„

set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335

Sets the interval at which RF Auto-Tuning decides whether to change the
power level on radios in a radio profile. At the end of each interval, MSS
processes the results of the RF scans performed during the previous
interval, and changes radio power levels if needed.
Syntax — set radio-profile

name auto-tune

power-interval seconds
„
„

name — Radio profile name.
seconds — Number of seconds MSS waits before changing radio
power levels to adjust to RF changes, if needed. You can specify from
1 to 65535 seconds.

Defaults — The default power tuning interval is 300 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — RF Auto-Tuning also can temporarily increase a radio’s power
level to preserve the minimum data rate for an associated client. In this
case, the radio reduces its power in 1 dBm increments until the power
returns to the expected level.

336

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Examples — The following command sets the power interval for radios
in radio profile rp2 to 240 seconds:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune power-interval 240
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
beacon-interval

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317

„

set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333

„

set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334

Changes the rate at which each MAP radio in a radio profile advertises its
service set identifier (SSID).
Syntax — set radio-profile name beacon-interval interval
„
„

name — Radio profile name.
interval — Number of milliseconds (ms) between beacons. You can
specify from 25 ms to 8191 ms.

Defaults — The beacon interval for MAP radios is 100 ms by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command.
Examples — The following command changes the beacon interval for
radio profile rp1 to 200 ms:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 beacon-interval 200
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

set radio-profile countermeasures

set
radio-profile
countermeasures

337

CAUTION: Countermeasures affect wireless service on a radio. When a
MAP radio is sending countermeasures, the radio is disabled for use by
network traffic, until the radio finishes sending the countermeasures.
Enables or disables countermeasures for on the MAP radios managed by
a radio profile. Countermeasures are packets sent by a radio to prevent
clients from being able to use rogue access points.
MAP radios can also issue countermeasures against interfering devices.
An interfering device is not part of the network but also is not a rogue.
No client connected to the device has been detected communicating with
any network entity listed in the forwarding database (FDD) of any WX
switch in the Mobility Domain. Although the interfering device is not
connected to your network, the device might be causing RF interference
with MAP radios.
Syntax — set radio-profile name countermeasures { all | rogue }
„

name — Radio profile name.

„

all — Configures radios to attack rogues and interfering devices.

„

rogue — Configures radios to attack rogues only.

Defaults — Countermeasures are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command enables countermeasures in radio
profile radprof3 for rogues only:
WX-1200# set radio-profile radprof3 countermeasures rogue
success: change accepted.

The following command disables countermeasures in radio profile
radprof3:
WX-1200# clear radio-profile radprof3 countermeasures
success: change accepted.

338

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set radio-profile
dtim-interval

Changes the number of times after every beacon that each MAP radio in
a radio profile sends a delivery traffic indication map (DTIM). An MAP
access point sends the multicast and broadcast frames stored in its
buffers to clients who request them in response to the DTIM.
The DTIM interval applies to both the beaconed SSID and the
nonbeaconed SSID.
Syntax — set radio-profile name dtim-interval interval
„
„

name — Radio profile name.
interval — Number of times the DTIM is transmitted after every
beacon. You can enter a value from 1 through 31.

Defaults — By default, MAP access points send the DTIM once after
each beacon.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command.
The DTIM interval does not apply to unicast frames.
Examples — The following command changes the DTIM interval for
radio profile rp1 to 2:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 dtim-interval 2
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

set radio-profile frag-threshold

set radio-profile
frag-threshold

339

Changes the fragmentation threshold for the MAP radios in a radio
profile. The fragmentation threshold specifies the maximum length a
frame is allowed to be without being broken into multiple frames before
transmission.
Syntax — set radio-profile name frag-threshold threshold
„
„

name — Radio profile name.
threshold — Maximum frame length, in bytes. You can enter a value
from 256 through 2346.

Defaults — The default fragmentation threshold for MAP radios is 2346
bytes.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command.
Examples — The following command changes the fragmentation
threshold for radio profile rp1 to 1500 bytes:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 frag-threshold 1500
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
long-retry

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

Changes the long retry threshold for the MAP radios in a radio profile.
The long retry threshold specifies the number of times a radio can send a
long unicast frame without receiving an acknowledgment. A long unicast
frame is a frame that is equal to or longer than the Request-to-Send (RTS)
threshold.
Syntax — set radio-profile name long-retry threshold
„

name — Radio profile name.

340

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

„

threshold — Number of times the radio can send the same long
unicast frame. You can enter a value from 1 through 15.

Defaults — The default long unicast retry threshold for MAP radios is 5
attempts.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command.
Examples — The following command changes the long retry threshold
for radio profile rp1 to 8:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 long-retry 8
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
max-rx-lifetime

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

„

set radio-profile short-retry on page 350

Changes the maximum receive threshold for the MAP radios in a radio
profile. The maximum receive threshold specifies the number of
milliseconds that a frame received by a radio can remain in buffer
memory.
Syntax — set radio-profile name max-rx-lifetime time
„

name — Radio profile name.

„

time — Number of milliseconds. You can enter a value from 500

(0.5 second) through 250,000 (250 seconds).
Defaults — The default maximum receive threshold for MAP radios is
2000 ms (2 seconds).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime

341

Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command.
Examples — The following command changes the maximum receive
threshold for radio profile rp1 to 4000 ms:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 max-rx-lifetime 4000
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
max-tx-lifetime

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

„

set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime on page 341

„

display radio-profile on page 298

Changes the maximum transmit threshold for the MAP radios in a radio
profile. The maximum transmit threshold specifies the number of
milliseconds that a frame scheduled to be transmitted by a radio can
remain in buffer memory.
Syntax — set radio-profile name max-tx-lifetime time
„

name — Radio profile name.

„

time — Number of milliseconds. You can enter a value from 500

(0.5 second) through 250,000 (250 seconds).
Defaults — The default maximum transmit threshold for MAP radios is
2000 ms (2 seconds).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command.
Examples — The following command changes the maximum transmit
threshold for radio profile rp1 to 4000 ms:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 max-tx-lifetime 4000
success: change accepted.

342

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

See Also

set radio-profile
mode

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

„

set radio-profile max-rx-lifetime on page 340

Creates a new radio profile, or disables or reenables all MAP radios that
are using a specific profile.
Syntax — set radio-profile name [mode {enable | disable}]
„

radio-profile name — Radio profile name of up to 16 alphanumeric

characters, with no spaces.
Use this command without the mode enable or mode disable
option to create a new profile.
„

mode enable — Enables the radios that use this profile.

„

mode disable — Disables the radios that use this profile.

Defaults — Each radio profile that you create has a set of properties with
factory default values that you can change with the other set
radio-profile commands in this chapter. Table 66 lists the parameters
controlled by a radio profile and their default values.
Table 66 Defaults for Radio Profile Parameters
Parameter

Radio Behavior When Parameter Set to
Default Value Default Value

11g-only

disable

Allows associations with 802.11g and
802.11b clients.
Note: This parameter applies only to
802.11b/g radios.

active-scan

enable

Sends probe any requests (probe requests
with a null SSID name) to solicit probe
responses from other access points.

auto-tune

enable

Allows dynamic configuration of channel
and power settings by MSS.

beacon-interval

100

Waits 100 ms between beacons.

countermeasures

Not configured Does not issue countermeasures against
any device.

set radio-profile mode

343

Table 66 Defaults for Radio Profile Parameters (continued)
Parameter

Radio Behavior When Parameter Set to
Default Value Default Value

dtim-interval

1

Sends the delivery traffic indication map
(DTIM) after every beacon.

frag-threshold

2346

Transmits frames up to 2346 bytes long
without fragmentation.

long-retry

5

Sends a long unicast frame up to five times
without acknowledgment.

max-rx-lifetime

2000

Allows a received frame to stay in the
buffer for up to 2000 ms (2 seconds).

max-tx-lifetime

2000

Allows a frame that is scheduled for
transmission to stay in the buffer for up to
2000 ms (2 seconds).

preamble-length

short

Advertises support for short 802.11b
preambles, accepts either short or long
802.11b preambles, and generates unicast
frames with the preamble length specified
by the client.
Note: This parameter applies only to
802.11b/g radios.

rts-threshold

2346

Transmits frames longer than 2346 bytes
by means of the
Request-to-Send/Clear-to-Send (RTS/CTS)
method.

service-profile

No service
profiles
defined

Default settings for all service profile
parameters, including encryption
parameters, are used.

short-retry

5

Sends a short unicast frame up to five times
without acknowledgment.

wmm

enable

Prioritizes traffic based on the Wi-Fi
Multimedia (WMM) standard.

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use the command without any optional parameters to create
new profile. If the radio profile does not already exist, MSS creates a new
radio profile. Use the enable or disable option to enable or disable all
the radios using a profile. To assign the profile to one or more radios, use
the set ap radio radio-profile command.

344

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

To change a parameter in a radio profile, you must first disable all the
radios in the profile. After you complete the change, you can reenable
the radios.
To enable or disable specific radios without disabling all of them, use the
set ap radio command.
Examples — The following command configures a new radio profile
named rp1:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1
success: change accepted.

The following command enables the radios that use radio profile rp1:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 mode enable

The following commands disable the radios that use radio profile rp1,
change the beacon interval, then reenable the radios:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 mode disable
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 beacon-interval 200
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 mode enable

The following command enables the WPA IE on MAP radios in radio
profile rp2:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 wpa-ie enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display {ap | dap} config on page 277

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323

„

set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324

set radio-profile preamble-length

set radio-profile
preamble-length

345

Changes the preamble length for which an 802.11b/g MAP radio
advertises support. This command does not apply to 802.11a.
Syntax — set radio-profile

name
preamble-length {long | short}

„

name — Radio profile name.

„

long — Advertises support for long preambles.

„

short — Advertises support for short preambles.

Defaults — The default is short.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Changing the preamble length value affects only the support
advertised by the radio. Regardless of the preamble length setting (short
or long), an 802.11b/g radio accepts and can generate 802.11b/g frames
with either short or long preambles.
If a client associated with an 802.11b/g radio uses long preambles for
unicast traffic, the MAP access point still accepts frames with short
preambles but does not transmit frames with short preambles. This
change also occurs if the access point overhears a beacon from an
802.11b/g radio on another access point that indicates the radio has
clients that require long preambles.
You must disable all radios that use a radio profile before you can change
parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile mode command.
Examples — The following command configures 802.11b/g radios that
use the radio profile rp_long to advertise support for long preambles
instead of short preambles:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp_long preamble-length long
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

346

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set radio-profile
rts-threshold

Changes the RTS threshold for the MAP radios in a radio profile. The RTS
threshold specifies the maximum length a frame can be before the radio
uses the RTS/CTS method to send the frame. The RTS/CTS method clears
the air of other traffic to avoid corruption of the frame due to a collision
with another frame.
Syntax — set radio-profile name rts-threshold threshold
„

name — Radio profile name.

„

threshold — Maximum frame length, in bytes. You can enter a value

from 256 through 3000.
Defaults — The default RTS threshold for an MAP radio is 2346 bytes.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command.
Examples — The following command changes the RTS threshold for
radio profile rp1 to 1500 bytes:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 rts-threshold 1500
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
service-profile

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

„

display radio-profile on page 298

Maps a service profile to a radio profile. All radios that use the radio
profile also use the parameter settings, including SSID and encryption
settings, in the service profile.
Syntax — set radio-profile name service-profile name
„

radio-profile name — Radio profile name of up to 16 alphanumeric
characters, with no spaces.

set radio-profile service-profile

„

347

service-profile name — Service profile name of up to 16
alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.

Defaults — A radio profile does not have a service profile associated
with it by default. In this case, the radios in the radio profile use the
default settings for parameters controlled by the service profile. Table 67
lists the parameters controlled by a service profile and their default
values.
Table 67 Defaults for Service Profile Parameters
Parameter

Radio Behavior When Parameter Set
Default Value to Default Value

auth-dot1x

enable

When the Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
information element (IE) is enabled, uses
802.1X to authenticate WPA clients.

auth-fallthru

web-portal

Uses WebAAA for users who do not
match an 802.1X or MAC authentication
rule for the SSID requested by the user.

auth-psk

disable

Does not support using a preshared key
(PSK) to authenticate WPA clients.

auth-fallthru

web-portal

Uses WebAAA for users who do not
match an 802.1X or MAC authentication
rule for the SSID requested by the user.

beacon

enable

Sends beacons to advertise the SSID
managed by the service profile.

cipher-ccmp

disable

Does not use Counter with Cipher Block
Chaining Message Authentication Code
Protocol (CCMP) to encrypt traffic sent to
WPA clients.

cipher-tkip

enable

When the WPA IE is enabled, uses
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) to
encrypt traffic sent to WPA clients.

cipher-wep104

disable

Does not use Wired Equivalent Privacy
(WEP) with 104-bit keys to encrypt traffic
sent to WPA clients.

cipher-wep40

disable

Does not use WEP with 40-bit keys to
encrypt traffic sent to WPA clients.

psk-phrase

No passphrase
defined

Uses dynamically generated keys rather
than statically configured keys to
authenticate WPA clients.

348

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Table 67 Defaults for Service Profile Parameters (continued)
Parameter

Radio Behavior When Parameter Set
Default Value to Default Value

psk-raw

No preshared
key defined

Uses dynamically generated keys rather
than statically configured keys to
authenticate WPA clients.

rsn-ie

disable

Does not use the RSN IE in transmitted
frames. (The RSN IE is required for
802.11i. RSN is sometimes called WPA2.)

shared-key-auth

disable

Does not use shared-key authentication.
This parameter does not enable PSK
authentication for WPA. To enable PSK
encryption for WPA, use the
set radio-profile auth-psk command.

ssid-name

private

Uses the SSID name private.

ssid-type

crypto

Encrypts wireless traffic for the SSID.

tkip-mc-time

60000

Uses Michael countermeasures for 60,000
ms (60 seconds) following detection of a
second MIC failure within 60 seconds.

web-aaa-form

Not configured For WebAAA users, serves the default
login web page or, if configured, the
SSID-specific login web page.

wep key-index

No keys
defined

Uses dynamic WEP rather than static WEP.

wep activemulticast-index

1

Uses WEP key 1 for static WEP encryption
of multicast traffic if WEP encryption is
enabled and keys are defined.

wep active-unicastindex

1

Uses WEP key 1 for static WEP encryption
of unicast traffic if WEP encryption is
enabled and keys are defined.

wpa-ie

disable

Does not use the WPA IE in transmitted
frames.

If you configure a WEP key for static WEP,
MSS continues to also support dynamic
WEP.

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must configure the service profile before you can map it to
a radio profile. You can map the same service profile to more than one
radio profile.

set radio-profile service-profile

349

You must disable all radios that use a radio profile before you can change
parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile mode command.
Examples — The following command maps service-profile wpa_clients
to radio profile rp2:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 service-profile wpa_clients
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display service-profile on page 302

„

set service-profile auth-dot1x on page 351

„

set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352

„

set service-profile auth-psk on page 354

„

set service-profile beacon on page 355

„

set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356

„

set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357

„

set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358

„

set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359

„

set service-profile psk-phrase on page 360

„

set service-profile psk-raw on page 361

„

set service-profile rsn-ie on page 362

„

set service-profile shared-key-auth on page 363

„

set service-profile ssid-name on page 363

„

set service-profile ssid-type on page 364

„

set service-profile tkip-mc-time on page 365

„

set service-profile web-aaa-form on page 366

„

set service-profile wep active-multicast- index on page 367

„

set service-profile wep active-unicast- index on page 368

„

set service-profile wep key-index on page 369

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

350

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set radio-profile
short-retry

Changes the short retry threshold for the MAP radios in a radio profile.
The short retry threshold specifies the number of times a radio can send a
short unicast frame without receiving an acknowledgment.
Syntax — set radio-profile name short-retry threshold
„
„

name — Radio profile name.
threshold — Number of times the radio can send the same short
unicast frame. You can enter a value from 1 through 15.

Defaults — The default short unicast retry threshold for MAP radios is 5
attempts.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command.
Examples — The following command changes the short retry threshold
for radio profile rp1 to 3:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 short-retry 3
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radio-profile
wmm

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

„

set radio-profile long-retry on page 339

Disables or reenables Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) on the MAP radios in a
radio profile.
Syntax — set radio-profile name wmm {enable | disable}
„

name — Radio profile name.

„

enable — Enables WMM.

„

disable — Disables WMM.

set service-profile auth-dot1x

351

Defaults — WMM is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — When WMM is disabled, MAP forwarding prioritization is
optimized for SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP) instead of WMM, and the
MAP does not tag packets it sends to the WX. Otherwise, classification
and tagging remain in effect. (For information, see the “Wi-Fi
Multimedia” chapter of the Wireless LAN Switch and Controller
Configuration Guide.)
If you plan to use SVP or another non-WMM type of prioritization, you
must configure ACLs to tag the packets. (See the “Enabling Prioritization
for Legacy Voice over IP” section in the “Configuring and Managing
Security ACLs” chapter of the Wireless LAN Switch and Controller
Configuration Guide..)
Examples — The following command disables WMM in radio profile
radprofsvp:
WX1200# set radio-profile radprofsvp wmm disable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set service-profile
auth-dot1x

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

„

display radio-profile on page 298

Disables or reenables 802.1X authentication of Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA) clients by MAP radios, when the WPA information element (IE) is
enabled in the service profile that is mapped to the radio profile that the
radios are using.
Syntax — set service-profile
name auth-dot1x {enable | disable}
„

name — Service profile name.

„

enable — Enables 802.1X authentication of WPA clients.

„

disable — Disables 802.1X authentication of WPA clients.

352

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Defaults — When the WPA IE is enabled, 802.1X authentication of WPA
clients is enabled by default. If the WPA IE is disabled, the auth-dot1x
setting has no effect.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command does not disable dynamic WEP for non-WPA
clients. To disable dynamic WEP for non-WPA clients, enable the WPA IE
(if not already enabled) and disable the 40-bit WEP and 104-bit WEP
cipher suites in the WPA IE, if they are not already disabled.
To use 802.1X authentication for WPA clients, you also must enable the
WPA IE.
If you disable 802.1X authentication of WPA clients, the only method
available for authenticating the clients is preshared key (PSK)
authentication. To use this, you must enable PSK support and configure a
passphrase or key.
Examples — The following command disables 802.1X authentication for
WPA clients that use service profile wpa_clients:
WX4400# set service-profile wpa_clients auth-dot1x disable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set service-profile
auth-fallthru

„

display service-profile on page 302

„

set service-profile auth-psk on page 354

„

set service-profile psk-phrase on page 360

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

Specifies the authentication type for users who do not match an 802.1X
or MAC authentication rule for an SSID managed by the service profile.
When a user tries to associate with an SSID, MSS checks the
authentication rules for that SSID for a userglob that matches the
username. If the SSID does not have an authentication rule that matches
the username, authentication for the user falls through to the fallthru
method.

set service-profile auth-fallthru

353

The fallthru method is a service profile parameter, and applies to all
radios within the radio profiles that are mapped to the service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name auth-fallthru
{last-resort | none | web-portal}
„

last-resort — Automatically authenticates the user and allows

access to the SSID requested by the user, without requiring a
username and password.
„

none — Denies authentication and prohibits the user from accessing

the SSID.
The authentication method none you can specify for administrative
access is different from the fallthru authentication type none, which
applies only to network access. The authentication method none allows
access to the WX switch by an administrator. The fallthru authentication
type none denies access to a network user. (See “set service-profile
auth-fallthru” on page 352.)
„

web-portal — Serves the user a web page from the WX switch’s

nonvolatile storage for secure login to the network.
Defaults — The default fallthru authentication type is web-portal.
If a username does not match a userglob in an authentication rule for the
SSID requested by the user, the WX switch that is managing the radio the
user is connected to redirects the user to a web page located on the WX
switch. The user must type a valid username and password on the web
page to access the SSID.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Option web-portal renamed
to web-portal in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The last-resort fallthru authentication type allows any user to
access any SSID managed by the service profile. This method does not
require the user to provide a username or password. Use the last-resort
method only if none of the SSIDs managed by the service profile require
secure access.

354

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

The web-portal authentication type requires additional configuration
items. (See the “Configuring AAA for Network Users” chapter of the
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.)
Examples — The following command sets the fallthru authentication for
SSIDS managed by the service profile rnd_lab to none:
WX4400# set service-profile rnd_lab auth-fallthru none
success: change accepted.

See Also

set service-profile
auth-psk

„

display service-profile on page 302

„

set web-aaa on page 260

„

set service-profile web-aaa-form on page 366

Enables preshared key (PSK) authentication of Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA) clients by MAP radios in a radio profile, when the WPA
information element (IE) is enabled in the service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name auth-psk {enable | disable}
„

name — Service profile name.

„

enable — Enables PSK authentication of WPA clients.

„

disable — Disables PSK authentication of WPA clients.

Defaults — When the WPA IE is enabled, PSK authentication of WPA
clients is enabled by default. If the WPA IE is disabled, the auth-psk
setting has no effect.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command affects authentication of WPA clients only.
To use PSK authentication, you also must configure a passphrase or key.
In addition, you must enable the WPA IE.

set service-profile beacon

355

The WebAAA fallthru authentication type is not supported in conjunction
with WPA encryption using preshared keys (PSK) for the same SSID. These
options are configurable together but are not compatible. WebAAA
traffic is not encrypted, whereas the PSK four-way handshake requires a
client to already be authenticated and for encryption to be in place.
Examples — The following command enables PSK authentication for
service profile wpa_clients:
WX4400# set service-profile wpa_clients auth-psk enable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set service-profile
beacon

„

display service-profile on page 302

„

set service-profile auth-dot1x on page 351

„

set service-profile psk-raw on page 361

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

Disables or reenables beaconing of the SSID managed by the service
profile.
A MAP radio responds to an 802.11 probe any request with only the
beaconed SSID(s). For a nonbeaconed SSID, radios respond only to
directed 802.11 probe requests that match the nonbeaconed SSID’s SSID
string.
When you disable beaconing for an SSID, the radio still sends beacon
frames, but the SSID name in the frames is blank.
Syntax — set service-profile name beaconed {enable | disable}
„
„

name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables beaconing of the SSID managed by the service

profile.
„

disable — Disables beaconing of the SSID managed by the service

profile.
Defaults — Beaconing is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.

356

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command disables beaconing of the SSID
managed by service profile sp2:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 beacon disable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set service-profile
cipher-ccmp

„

display service-profile on page 302

„

set radio-profile beacon-interval on page 336

„

set service-profile ssid-name on page 363

„

set service-profile ssid-type on page 364

Enables Counter with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication
Code Protocol (CCMP) encryption with WPA clients, for a service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name cipher-ccmp
{enable | disable}
„

name — Service profile name.

„

enable — Enables CCMP encryption for WPA clients.

„

disable — Disables CCMP encryption for WPA clients.

Defaults — CCMP encryption is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use CCMP, you must also enable the WPA IE.
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp2 to
use CCMP encryption:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 cipher-ccmp enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357

„

set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358

set service-profile cipher-tkip

set service-profile
cipher-tkip

„

set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

357

Disables or reenables Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) encryption in
a service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile
name cipher-tkip {enable | disable}
„

name — Service profile name.

„

enable — Enables TKIP encryption for WPA clients.

„

disable — Disables TKIP encryption for WPA clients.

Defaults — When the WPA IE is enabled, TKIP encryption is enabled by
default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use TKIP, you must also enable the WPA IE.
Examples — The following command disables TKIP encryption in service
profile sp2:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 cipher-tkip disable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356

„

set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358

„

set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359

„

set service-profile tkip-mc-time on page 365

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

358

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set service-profile
cipher-wep104

Enables dynamic Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) with 104-bit keys, in a
service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name cipher-wep104 {enable |
disable}
„

name — Service profile name.

„

enable — Enables 104-bit WEP encryption for WPA clients.

„

disable — Disables 104-bit WEP encryption for WPA clients.

Defaults — 104-bit WEP encryption is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use 104-bit WEP with WPA clients, you must also enable the
WPA IE.
When 104-bit WEP in WPA is enabled in the service profile, radios
managed by a radio profile that is mapped to the service profile can also
support non-WPA clients that use dynamic WEP.
To support WPA clients that use 40-bit dynamic WEP, you must enable
WEP with 40-bit keys. Use the set service-profile cipher-wep40
command.
Microsoft Windows XP does not support WEP with WPA. To configure a
service profile to provide dynamic WEP for XP clients, leave WPA disabled
and use the set service-profile wep commands.
To support non-WPA clients that use static WEP, you must configure
static WEP keys. Use the set service-profile wep key-index command.
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp2 to
use 104-bit WEP encryption:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 cipher-wep104 enable
success: change accepted.

set service-profile cipher-wep40

359

See Also

set service-profile
cipher-wep40

„

set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356

„

set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357

„

set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359

„

set service-profile wep key-index on page 369

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

Enables dynamic Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) with 40-bit keys, in a
service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name cipher-wep40 {enable |
disable}
„

name — Service profile name.

„

enable — Enables 40-bit WEP encryption for WPA clients.

„

disable — Disables 40-bit WEP encryption for WPA clients.

Defaults — 40-bit WEP encryption is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use 40-bit WEP with WPA clients, you must also enable the
WPA IE.
When 40-bit WEP in WPA is enabled in the service profile, radios
managed by a radio profile that is mapped to the service profile can also
support non-WPA clients that use dynamic WEP.
To support WPA clients that use 104-bit dynamic WEP, you must enable
WEP with 104-bit keys in the service profile. Use the set service-profile
cipher-wep104 command.
Microsoft Windows XP does not support WEP with WPA. To configure a
service profile to provide dynamic WEP for XP clients, leave WPA disabled
and use the set service-profile wep commands.
To support non-WPA clients that use static WEP, you must configure
static WEP keys. Use the set service-profile wep key-index command.

360

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Examples — The following command configures service profile sp2 to
use 40-bit WEP encryption:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 cipher-wep40 enable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set service-profile
psk-phrase

„

set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356

„

set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357

„

set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358

„

set service-profile wep key-index on page 369

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

Configures a passphrase for preshared key (PSK) authentication to use for
authenticating WPA clients, in a service profile. Radios use the PSK as a
pairwise master key (PMK) to derive unique pairwise session keys for
individual WPA clients.
Syntax — set service-profile name psk-phrase passphrase
„

name — Service profile name.

„

passphrase — An ASCII string up to 63 characters long. The string

can contain blanks if you use quotation marks at the beginning and
end of the string.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS converts the passphrase into a 256-bit binary number for
system use and a raw hexadecimal key to store in the WX switch's
configuration. Neither the binary number nor the passphrase itself is ever
displayed in the configuration.
To use PSK authentication, you must enable it and you also must enable
the WPA IE.

set service-profile psk-raw

361

Examples — The following command configures service profile sp3 to
use passphrase “1234567890123<>?=+&% The quick brown fox jumps
over the lazy sl”:
WX4400# set service-profile sp3 psk-phrase "1234567890123<>
?=+&% The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy sl"
success: change accepted.

See Also

set service-profile
psk-raw

„

set mac-user attr on page 246

„

set service-profile auth-psk on page 354

„

set service-profile psk-raw on page 361

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

Configures a raw hexadecimal preshared key (PSK) to use for
authenticating WPA clients, in a service profile. Radios use the PSK as a
pairwise master key (PMK) to derive unique pairwise session keys for
individual WPA clients.
Syntax — set service-profile name psk-raw hex
„

name — Service profile name.

„

hex — A 64-bit ASCII string representing a 32-digit hexadecimal

number. Enter the two-character ASCII form of each hexadecimal
number.
Defaults — None.
Examples — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS converts the hexadecimal number into a 256-bit binary
number for system use. MSS also stores the hexadecimal key in the WX
switch's configuration. The binary number is never displayed in the
configuration.
To use PSK authentication, you must enable it and you also must enable
the WPA IE.

362

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Examples — The following command configures service profile sp3 to
use a raw PSK with PSK clients:
WX4400# set service-profile sp3 psk-raw c25d3fe4483e867
d1df96eaacdf8b02451fa0836162e758100f5f6b87965e59d
success: change accepted.

See Also

set service-profile
rsn-ie

„

set mac-user attr on page 246

„

set service-profile auth-psk on page 354

„

set service-profile psk-phrase on page 360

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

Enables the Robust Security Network (RSN) Information Element (IE). The
RSN IE advertises the RSN authentication methods and cipher suites
supported by radios in the radio profile mapped to the service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name rsn-ie {enable | disable}
„

name — Service profile name.

„

enable — Enables the RSN IE.

„

disable — Disables the RSN IE.

Defaults — The RSN IE is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command enables the RSN IE in service
profile sprsn:
WX4400# set service-profile sprsn rsn-ie enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356

set service-profile shared-key-auth

set service-profile
shared-key-auth

363

Enables shared-key authentication, in a service profile.
Use this command only if advised to do so by 3Com. This command does
not enable preshared key (PSK) authentication for Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA). To enable PSK encryption for WPA, use the
set service-profile auth-psk command.
Syntax — set service-profile name shared-key-auth {enable |
disable}
„

name — Service profile name.

„

enable — Enables shared-key authentication.

„

disable — Disables shared-key authentication.

Defaults — Shared-key authentication is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command enables shared-key authentication
in service profile sp4:
WX4400# set service-profile sp4 shared-key-auth enable
success: change accepted.

See Also

set service-profile
ssid-name

„

display radio-profile on page 298

„

set radio-profile mode on page 342

Configures the SSID name in a service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name ssid-name ssid-name
„
„

name — Service profile name.
ssid-name — Name of up to 32 alphanumeric characters. You can
include blank spaces in the name, if you delimit the name with single
or double quotation marks. You must use the same type of quotation
mark (either single or double) on both ends of the string

Defaults — The default SSID name is private.

364

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Support added for blank
spaces in the SSID name in Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command applies the name guest to the
SSID managed by service profile clear_wlan:
WX4400# set service-profile clear_wlan ssid-name guest
success: change accepted.

The following command applies the name corporate users to the SSID
managed by service profile mycorp_srvcprf:
WX4400# set service-profile mycorp_srvcprf ssid-name
“corporate users”
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set service-profile
ssid-type

set service-profile ssid-type on page 364

Specifies whether the SSID managed by a service profile is encrypted or
unencrypted.
Syntax — set service-profile name ssid-type [clear | crypto]
„

name — Service profile name.

„

clear — Wireless traffic for the service profile’s SSID is not encrypted.

„

crypto — Wireless traffic for the service profile’s SSID is encrypted.

Defaults — The default SSID type is crypto.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the SSID type for service
profile clear_wlan to clear:
WX4400# set service-profile clear_wlan ssid-type clear
success: change accepted.

set service-profile tkip-mc-time

365

See Also
„

set service-profile
tkip-mc-time

set service-profile ssid-name on page 363

Changes the length of time that MAP radios use countermeasures if two
message integrity code (MIC) failures occur within 60 seconds. When
countermeasures are in effect, MAP radios dissociate all TKIP and WPA
WEP clients and refuse all association and reassociation requests until the
countermeasures end.
Syntax — set service-profile name tkip-mc-time wait-time
„
„

name — Service profile name.
wait-time — Number of milliseconds (ms) countermeasures remain
in effect. You can specify from 0 to 60,000.

Defaults — The default countermeasures wait time is 60,000 ms (60
seconds).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Countermeasures apply only to TKIP and WEP clients. This
includes WPA WEP clients and non-WPA WEP clients. CCMP clients are
not affected.
The TKIP cipher suite must be enabled. The WPA IE also must be enabled.
Examples — The following command changes the countermeasures
wait time for service profile sp3 to 30,000 ms (30 seconds):
WX4400# set service-profile sp3 tkip-mc-time 30000
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357

„

set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370

366

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set service-profile
web-aaa-form

Specifies a custom login page to serve to WebAAA users who request the
SSID managed by the service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name web-aaa-form url
„

name — Service profile name.

„

url — WX subdirectory name and HTML page name of the login

page. Specify the full path. For example, corpa-ssid/corpa.html.
Defaults — The 3Com Web login page is served by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — 3Com recommends that you create a subdirectory for the
custom page and place all the page’s files in that subdirectory. Do not
place the custom page in the root directory of the switch’s user file area.
If the custom login page includes gif or jpg images, their path names are
interpreted relative to the directory from which the page is served.
To use WebAAA, the fallthru authentication type in the service profile
that manages the SSID must be set to web. To use WebAAA for a wired
authentication port, edit the port configuration with the set port type
wired-auth command.
Examples — The following commands create a subdirectory named
corpa-ssid, copy a custom login page named corpa-login.html and a jpg
image named corpa-logo.jpg into that subdirectory, and set the Web
login page for service profile to corpa-login.html:
WX4400# mkdir corpa-ssid
success: change accepted.
WX4400# copy tftp://10.1.1.1/corpa-login.html corpa-ssid/corpa-login.html
success: received 637 bytes in 0.253 seconds [ 2517 bytes/sec]
WX4400# copy tftp://10.1.1.1/corpa-logo.jpg corpa-ssid/corpa-logo.jpg
success: received 1202 bytes in 0.402 seconds [ 2112 bytes/sec]
WX4400# dir corpa-ssid
===============================================================================
file:
Filename
Size
Created
file:corpa-login.html
637 bytes
Aug 12 2004, 15:42:26
file:corpa-logo.jpg
1202 bytes
Aug 12 2004, 15:57:11

set service-profile wep active-multicast- index

367

Total:
1839 bytes used, 206577 Kbytes free
WX4400# set service-profile corpa-service web-aaa-form corpa-ssid/
corpa-login.html
success: change accepted.

See Also

set service-profile
wep
active-multicastindex

„

copy on page 542

„

dir on page 598

„

display service-profile on page 302

„

mkdir on page 553

„

set port type wired-auth on page 91

„

set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352

„

set web-aaa on page 260

Specifies the static Wired-Equivalent Privacy (WEP) key (one of four) to
use for encrypting multicast frames.
Syntax — set service-profile
name wep active-multicast-index num
„

name — Service profile name.

„

num — WEP key number. You can enter a value from 1 through 4.

Defaults — If WEP encryption is enabled and WEP keys are defined,
MAP radios use WEP key 1 to encrypt multicast frames, by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Before using this command, you must configure values for the
WEP keys you plan to use. Use the set service-profile wep key-index
command.
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp2 to
use WEP key 2 for encrypting multicast traffic:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 wep active-multicast-index 2
success: change accepted.

368

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

See Also

set service-profile
wep active-unicastindex

„

set service-profile wep active-unicast- index on page 368

„

set service-profile wep key-index on page 369

Specifies the static Wired-Equivalent Privacy (WEP) key (one of four) to
use for encrypting unicast frames.
Syntax — set service-profile
name wep active-unicast-index num
„

name — Service profile name.

„

num — WEP key number. You can enter a value from 1 through 4.

Defaults — If WEP encryption is enabled and WEP keys are defined,
MAP radios use WEP key 1 to encrypt unicast frames, by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Before using this command, you must configure values for the
WEP keys you plan to use. Use the set service-profile wep key-index
command.
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp2 to
use WEP key 4 for encrypting unicast traffic:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 wep active-unicast-index 4
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set service-profile wep active-multicast- index on page 367

„

set service-profile wep key-index on page 369

set service-profile wep key-index

set service-profile
wep key-index

369

Sets the value of one of four static Wired-Equivalent Privacy (WEP) keys
for static WEP encryption.
Syntax — set service-profile name wep key-index num key value
„
„

name — Service profile name.
key-index num — WEP key index. You can enter a value from 1

through 4.
„

key value — Hexadecimal value of the key. You can enter a
10-character ASCII string representing a 5-digit hexadecimal number
or a 26-character ASCII string representing a 13-digit hexadecimal
number. You can use numbers or letters. ASCII characters in the
following ranges are supported:
„

0 to 9

„

A to F

„

a to f

Defaults — By default, no static WEP keys are defined.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS automatically enables static WEP when you define a WEP
key. MSS continues to support dynamic WEP.
If you plan to use static WEP, do not map more than 8 service profiles
that contain static WEP keys to the same radio profile.
Examples — The following command configures WEP key index 1 for
service profile sp2 to aabbccddee:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 wep key-index 1 key
aabbccddee
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set service-profile wep active-multicast- index on page 367

„

set service-profile wep active-unicast- index on page 368

370

CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS

set service-profile
wpa-ie

Enables the WPA information element (IE) in wireless frames. The WPA IE
advertises the WPA authentication methods and cipher suites supported
by radios in the radio profile mapped to the service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name wpa-ie {enable | disable}
„

name — Service profile name.

„

enable — Enables the WPA IE.

„

disable — Disables the WPA IE.

Defaults — The WPA IE is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When the WPA IE is enabled, the default authentication
method is 802.1X. There is no default cipher suite. You must enable the
cipher suites you want the radios to support.
Examples — The following command enables the WPA IE in service
profile sp2:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 wpa-ie enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set service-profile auth-dot1x on page 351

„

set service-profile auth-psk on page 354

„

set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356

„

set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357

„

set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358

„

set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359

10

STP COMMANDS

Use Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands to configure and manage
spanning trees on the virtual LANs (VLANs) configured on a wireless LAN
switch or controller, to maintain a loop-free network.

STP Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents STP commands alphabetically. Use the following
table to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 68 STP Commands by Usage
Type

Command

STP State

set spantree on page 388
display spantree on page 376
display spantree blockedports on page 379

Bridge Priority

set spantree priority on page 397

Port Cost

set spantree portcost on page 392
set spantree portvlancost on page 395
display spantree portvlancost on page 381
clear spantree portcost on page 372
clear spantree portvlancost on page 373

Port Priority

set spantree portpri on page 394
set spantree portvlanpri on page 396
clear spantree portpri on page 373
clear spantree portvlanpri on page 374

Timers

set spantree fwddelay on page 390
set spantree hello on page 390
set spantree maxage on page 391

Fast Convergence set spantree portfast on page 393
display spantree portfast on page 380

372

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

Table 68 STP Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command

Fast
Convergence,
cont.

set spantree backbonefast on page 389
display spantree backbonefast on
page 378
set spantree uplinkfast on page 397
display spantree uplinkfast on page 387

Statistics

display spantree statistics on page 381
clear spantree statistics on page 375

clear spantree
portcost

Resets to the default value the cost of a network port or ports on paths to
the STP root bridge in all VLANs on a WX switch.
Syntax — clear spantree portcost port-list
„

port-list — List of ports. The port cost is reset on the specified ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command resets the cost in all VLANs. To reset the cost for
only specific VLANs, use the clear spantree portvlancost command.
Examples — The following command resets the STP port cost on ports 5
and 6 to the default value:
WX1200# clear spantree portcost 5-6
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear spantree portvlancost on page 373

„

display spantree on page 376

„

display spantree portvlancost on page 381

„

set spantree portcost on page 392

„

set spantree portvlancost on page 395

clear spantree portpri

clear spantree
portpri

373

Resets to the default value the priority of a network port or ports for
selection as part of the path to the STP root bridge in all VLANs on a
wireless LAN switch or controller.
Syntax — clear spantree portpri port-list
„

port-list — List of ports. The port priority is reset to 32 (the default)

on the specified ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command resets the priority in all VLANs. To reset the
priority for only specific VLANs, use the clear spantree portvlanpri
command.
Examples — The following command resets the STP priority on port 6 to
the default:
WX1200# clear spantree portpri 6
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear spantree
portvlancost

„

clear spantree portvlanpri on page 374

„

display spantree on page 376

„

set spantree portpri on page 394

„

set spantree portvlanpri on page 396

Resets to the default value the cost of a network port or ports on paths to
the STP root bridge for a specific VLAN on a wireless LAN switch, or for all
VLANs.
Syntax — clear spantree portvlancost port-list {all | vlan
vlan-id}
„

port-list — List of ports. The port cost is reset on the specified

ports.
„

all — Resets the cost for all VLANs.

374

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS resets the cost for only
the specified VLAN.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS does not change a port’s cost for VLANs other than the
one(s) you specify.
Examples — The following command resets the STP cost for port 2 in
VLAN sunflower:
WX4400# clear spantree portvlancost 2 vlan sunflower
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear spantree
portvlanpri

„

clear spantree portcost on page 372

„

display spantree on page 376

„

display spantree portvlancost on page 381

„

set spantree portcost on page 392

„

set spantree portvlancost on page 395

Resets to the default value the priority of a network port or ports for
selection as part of the path to the STP root bridge, on one VLAN or all
VLANs.
Syntax — clear spantree portvlanpri port-list {all | vlan
vlan-id}
„

port-list — List of ports. The port priority is reset to 32 (the default)

on the specified ports.
„

all — Resets the priority for all VLANs.

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS resets the priority for

only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

clear spantree statistics

375

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS does not change a port’s priority for VLANs other than the
one(s) you specify.
Examples — The following command resets the STP priority for port 2 in
VLAN avocado:
WX4400# clear spantree portvlanpri 2 vlan avocado
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear spantree
statistics

„

clear spantree portpri on page 373

„

display spantree on page 376

„

set spantree portpri on page 394

„

set spantree portvlanpri on page 396

Clears STP statistics counters for a network port or ports and resets them
to 0.
Syntax — clear spantree statistics port-list [vlan vlan-id]
„

„

port-list — List of ports. Statistics counters are reset on the
specified ports.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS resets statistics
counters for only the specified VLAN.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears STP statistics counters for
ports 1, 3, and 5 through 8, for all VLANs:
WX1200# clear spantree statistics 1,3,5-8
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display spantree statistics on page 381

376

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

display spantree

Displays STP configuration and port-state information.
Syntax — display spantree
[port-list | vlan vlan-id] [active]
„

„

„

port-list — List of ports. If you do not specify any ports, MSS
displays STP information for all ports.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a VLAN,
MSS displays STP information for all VLANs.
active — Displays information for only the active (forwarding) ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays STP information for VLAN
default:
WX1200# display spantree vlan default
VLAN
1
Spanning tree mode
PVST+
Spanning tree type
IEEE
Spanning tree enabled
Designated Root
00-02-4a-70-49-f7
Designated Root Priority
32768
Designated Root Path Cost
19
Designated Root Port
1
Root Max Age
20 sec
Hello Time 2 sec
Forward Delay 15 sec
Bridge ID MAC ADDR
00-0b-0e-02-76-f7
Bridge ID Priority
32768
Bridge Max Age 20 sec
Hello Time 2 sec
Forward Delay 15 sec
Port
Vlan
Port-State
Cost
Prio
Portfast
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------1
1
Forwarding
19
128
Disabled
2
1
Disabled
19
128
Disabled
3
1
Disabled
19
128
Disabled
4
1
Disabled
19
128
Disabled
5
1
Disabled
19
128
Disabled
6
1
Forwarding
19
128
Disabled

display spantree

7
8

1
1

Disabled
Disabled

19
19

128
128

377

Disabled
Disabled

Table 69 describes the fields in this display.
Table 69 Output for display spantree
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN number.

Spanning tree mode

In the current software version, the mode is always PVST+,
which means Per VLAN Spanning Tree+.

Spanning tree type

In the current software version, the type is always IEEE,
which means MSS STP is 802.1D-compatible.

Spanning tree
enabled

State of STP on the VLAN.

Designated Root

MAC address of the spanning tree’s root bridge.

Designated Root
Priority

Bridge priority of the root bridge.

Designated Root Path Cumulative cost from this bridge to the root bridge. If this
Cost
WX switch is the root bridge, then the root cost is 0.
Designated Root Port Port through which this WX switch reaches the root bridge.
If this WX switch is the root bridge, this field says We are
the root.
Root Max Age

Maximum acceptable age for hello packets on the root
bridge.

Root Hello Time

Hello interval on the root bridge.

Root Forward Delay

Forwarding delay value on the root bridge.

Bridge ID MAC ADDR This WX switch’s MAC address.
Bridge ID Priority

This WX switch’s bridge priority.

Bridge Max Age

This WX switch’s maximum acceptable age for hello
packets.

Bridge Hello Time

This WX switch’s hello interval.

Bridge Forward Delay This WX switch’s forwarding delay value.
Port

Port number.
Only network ports are listed. STP does not apply to 3Com
Wireless LAN Managed Access Point AP2750 ports or wired
authentication ports.

Vlan

VLAN ID.

378

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

Table 69 Output for display spantree (continued)
Field

Description

Port-State

STP state of the port:
„

Blocking — The port is not forwarding Layer 2 traffic
but is listening to and forwarding STP control traffic.

„

Disabled — The port is not forwarding any traffic,
including STP control traffic. The port might be
administratively disabled or the link might be
disconnected.

„

Forwarding — The port is forwarding Layer 2 traffic.

„

Learning — The port is learning the locations of other
WX switches in the spanning tree before changing state
to forwarding.

„

Listening — The port is comparing its own STP
information with information in STP control packets
received by the port to compute the spanning tree and
change state to blocking or forwarding.

Cost

STP cost of the port.

Prio

STP priority of the port.

Portfast

State of the uplink fast convergence feature:
„

Enabled

„

Disabled

See Also
„

display spantree
backbonefast

display spantree blockedports on page 379

Indicates whether the STP backbone fast convergence feature is enabled
or disabled.
Syntax — display spantree backbonefast
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

display spantree blockedports

379

Examples — The following example shows the command output on a
WX switch with backbone fast convergence enabled:
WX4400# display spantree backbonefast

Backbonefast is enabled

See Also
„

display spantree
blockedports

set spantree backbonefast on page 389

Lists information about wireless LAN switch ports that STP has blocked on
one or all of its VLANs.
Syntax — display spantree blockedports [vlan vlan-id]
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a VLAN,
MSS displays information for blocked ports on all VLANs.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The command lists information separately for each VLAN.
Examples — The following command shows information about blocked
ports on a WX switch for the default VLAN (VLAN 1):
WX4400# display spantree blockedports vlan default
Port
Vlan
Port-State
Cost
Prio
Portfast
-----------------------------------------------------------------------2
190
Blocking
4
128
Disabled
Number of blocked ports (segments) in VLAN 1 : 1

The port information is the same as the information displayed by the
display spantree command. See Table 69 on page 377.
See Also
„

display spantree on page 376

380

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

display spantree
portfast

Displays STP uplink fast convergence information for all network ports or
for one or more network ports.
Syntax — display spantree portfast [port-list]
„

port-list — List of ports. If you do not specify any ports, MSS
displays uplink fast convergence information for all ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command shows uplink fast convergence
information for all ports:
WX1200# display spantree portfast
Port
Vlan
Portfast
------------------------- ------------1
1
disable
2
1
disable
3
1
disable
4
1
enable
5
1
disable
6
1
disable
7
1
disable
8
1
disable

Table 70 describes the fields in this display.
Table 70 Output for display spantree portfast
Field

Description

Port

Port number.

VLAN

VLAN number.

Portfast

State of the uplink fast convergence feature:
„

Enable

„

Disable

See Also
„

set spantree portfast on page 393

display spantree portvlancost

display spantree
portvlancost

381

Shows the cost of a port on a path to the STP root bridge, for each of the
port’s VLANs.
Syntax — display spantree portvlancost port-list
„

port-list — List of ports.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command shows the STP port cost of port 1:
WX4400# display spantree portvlancost 1
port 1 VLAN 1 have path cost 19

See Also

display spantree
statistics

„

clear spantree portcost on page 372

„

clear spantree portvlancost on page 373

„

display spantree on page 376

„

set spantree portcost on page 392

„

set spantree portvlancost on page 395

Displays STP statistics for one or more WX network ports.
Syntax — display spantree statistics
[port-list [vlan vlan-id]]
„

„

port-list — List of ports. If you do not specify any ports, MSS
displays STP statistics for all ports.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a VLAN,

MSS displays STP statistics for all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

382

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

Usage — The command displays statistics separately for each port.
Examples — The following command shows STP statistics for port 1:
WX4400# display spantree statistics 1
BPDU related parameters

Port 1
VLAN 1
spanning tree enabled for VLAN = 1
port spanning tree
state
port_id
port_number
path cost
message age (port/VLAN)
designated_root
designated cost
designated_bridge
designated_port
top_change_ack
config_pending
port_inconsistency

enabled
Forwarding
0x8015
0x5
0x4
0(20)
00-0b-0e-00-04-30
0x0
00-0b-0e-00-04-30
38
FALSE
FALSE
none

Port based information statistics
config BPDU's xmitted(port/VLAN)
config BPDU's received(port/VLAN)
tcn BPDU's xmitted(port/VLAN)
tcn BPDU's received(port/VLAN)
forward transition count (port/VLAN)
scp failure count
root inc trans count (port/VLAN)
inhibit loopguard
loop inc trans count

0 (1)
21825 (43649)
0 (0)
2 (2)
1 (1)
0
1 (1)
FALSE
0 (0)

Status of Port Timers
forward delay timer
forward delay timer value
message age timer
message age timer value
topology change timer

INACTIVE
15
ACTIVE
0
INACTIVE

display spantree statistics

topology change timer value
hold timer
hold timer value
delay root port timer
delay root port timer value
delay root port timer restarted is

0
INACTIVE
0
INACTIVE
0
FALSE

VLAN based information & statistics
spanning tree type
spanning tree multicast address
bridge priority
bridge MAC address
bridge hello time
bridge forward delay
topology change initiator:
last topology change occured:
topology change
topology change time
topology change detected
topology change count
topology change last recvd. from

ieee
01-00-0c-cc-cc-cd
32768
00-0b-0e-12-34-56
2
15
0
Tue Jul 01 2003 22:33:36.
FALSE
35
FALSE
1
00-0b-0e-02-76-f6

Other port specific info
dynamic max age transition
port BPDU ok count
msg age expiry count
link loading
BPDU in processing
num of similar BPDU's to process
received_inferior_bpdu
next state
src MAC count
total src MAC count
curr_src_mac
next_src_mac

0
21825
0
0
FALSE
0
FALSE
0
21807
21825
00-0b-0e-00-04-30
00-0b-0e-02-76-f6

Table 71 describes the fields in this display.

383

384

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

Table 71 Output for display spantree statistics
Field

Description

Port

Port number.

VLAN

VLAN ID.

Spanning Tree enabled State of the STP feature on the VLAN.
for vlan
port spanning tree

State of the STP feature on the port.

state

STP state of the port:
„

Blocking — The port is not forwarding Layer 2 traffic
but is listening to and forwarding STP control traffic.

„

Disabled — The port is not forwarding any traffic,
including STP control traffic. The port might be
administratively disabled or the link might be
disconnected.

„

Forwarding — The port is forwarding Layer 2 traffic.

„

Learning — The port is learning the locations of other
WX switches in the spanning tree before changing
state to forwarding.

„

Listening — The port is comparing its own STP
information with information in STP control packets
received by the port to compute the spanning tree and
change state to blocking or forwarding.

port_id

STP port ID.

port_number

STP port number.

path cost

Cost to use this port to reach the root bridge. This is part
of the total path cost (designated cost).

message age

Age of the protocol information for a port and the value of
the maximum age parameter (shown in parenthesis)
recorded by the switch.

designated_root

MAC address of the root bridge.

designated cost

Total path cost to reach the root bridge.

designated_bridge

Bridge to which this switch forwards traffic away from the
root bridge.

designated_port

STP port through which this switch forwards traffic away
from the root bridge.

top_change_ack

Value of the topology change acknowledgment flag in the
next configured bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) to be
transmitted on the associated port. The flag is set in reply
to a topology change notification BPDU.

display spantree statistics

385

Table 71 Output for display spantree statistics (continued)
Field

Description

config_pending

Indicates whether a configured BPDU is to be transmitted
on expiration of the hold timer for the port.

port_inconsistency

Indicates whether the port is in an inconsistent state.

config BPDU’s xmitted

Number of BPDUs transmitted from the port. A number in
parentheses indicates the number of configured BPDUs
transmitted by the WX switch for this VLAN’s spanning
tree.

config BPDU’s received Number of BPDUs received by this port. A number in
parentheses indicates the number of configured BPDUs
received by the WX switch for this VLAN’s spanning tree.
tcn BPDU’s xmitted

Number of topology change notification (TCN) BDPUs
transmitted on this port.

tcn BPDU’s received

Number of TCN BPDUs received on this port.

forward transition
count

Number of times the port state transitioned to the
forwarding state.

scp failure count

Number of service control point (SCP) failures.

root inc trans count

Number of times the root bridge changed.

inhibit loopguard

State of the loop guard. In the current release, the state is
always FALSE.

loop inc trans count

Number of loops that have occurred.

forward delay timer

Status of the forwarding delay timer. This timer monitors
the time spent by a port in the listening and learning
states.

forward delay timer
value

Current value of the forwarding delay timer, in seconds.

message age timer

Status of the message age timer. This timer measures the
age of the received protocol information recorded for a
port.

message age timer
value

Current value of the message age timer, in seconds.

topology change timer Status of the topology change timer. This timer determines
the time period during which configured BPDUs are
transmitted with the topology change flag set by this WX
switch when it is the root bridge, after detection of a
topology change.
topology change timer Current value of the topology change timer, in seconds.
value

386

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

Table 71 Output for display spantree statistics (continued)
Field

Description

hold timer

Status of the hold timer. This timer ensures that
configured BPDUs are not transmitted too frequently
through any bridge port.

hold timer value

Current value of the hold timer, in seconds.

delay root port timer

Status of the delay root port timer, which enables fast
convergence when uplink fast convergence is enabled.

delay root port timer
value

Current value of the delay root port timer.

delay root port timer
restarted is

Whether the delay root port timer has been restarted.

spanning tree type

Type of spanning tree. The type is always IEEE.

spanning tree multicast Destination address used to send out configured BPDUs on
address
a bridge port.
bridge priority

STP priority of this WX switch.

bridge MAC address

MAC address of this WX switch.

bridge hello time

Value of the hello timer interval, in seconds, when this WX
switch is the root or is attempting to become the root.

bridge forward delay

Value of the forwarding delay interval, in seconds, when
this WX switch is the root or is attempting to become the
root.

topology change
initiator

Port number that initiated the most recent topology
change.

last topology change
occurred

System time when the most recent topology change
occurred.

topology change

Value of the topology change flag in configuration BPDUs
to be transmitted by this WX switch on VLANs for which
the switch is the designated bridge.

topology change time

Time period, in seconds, during which BPDUs are
transmitted with the topology change flag set by this WX
switch when it is the root bridge, after detection of a
topology change. It is equal to the sum of the switch’s
maximum age and forwarding delay parameters.

topology change
detected

Indicates whether a topology change has been detected
by the switch.

topology change count Number of times the topology change has occurred.
topology change last
recvd. from

MAC address of the bridge from which the WX switch last
received a topology change.

display spantree uplinkfast

387

Table 71 Output for display spantree statistics (continued)
Field

Description

dynamic max age
transition

Number of times the maximum age parameter was
changed dynamically.

port BPDU ok count

Number of valid port BPDUs received.

msg age expiry count

Number of expired messages.

link loading

Indicates whether the link is oversubscribed.

BPDU in processing

Indicates whether BPDUs are currently being processed.

num of similar BPDU’s
to process

Number of similar BPDUs received on a port that need to
be processed.

received_inferior_bpdu Indicates whether the port has received an inferior BPDU
or a response to a Root Link Query (RLQ) BPDU.
next state

Port state before it is set by STP.

src MAC count

Number of BPDUs with the same source MAC address.

total src MAC count

Number of BPDUs with all the source MAC addresses.

curr_src_mac

Source MAC address of the current received BPDU.

next_src_mac

Other source MAC address from a different source.

See Also
„

display spantree
uplinkfast

clear spantree statistics on page 375

Shows uplink fast convergence information for one VLAN or all VLANs.
Syntax — display spantree uplinkfast [vlan vlan-id]
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a VLAN,

MSS displays STP statistics for all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

388

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

Examples — The following command shows uplink fast convergence
information for all VLANs:
WX4400# display spantree uplinkfast
VLAN
port
list
-----------------------------------------------------------------------1
1(fwd),2,3

Table 72 describes the fields in this display.
Table 72 Output for display spantree uplinkfast
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN number.

port list

Ports in the uplink group. The port that is forwarding
traffic is indicated by fwd. The other ports are blocking
traffic.

See Also
„

set spantree

set spantree uplinkfast on page 397

Enables or disables STP on one VLAN or all VLANs configured on a WX
switch.
Syntax — set spantree {enable | disable }
[{all | vlan vlan-id | port port-list vlan-id}]
„

enable — Enables STP.

„

disable — Disables STP.

„

all — Enables or disables STP on all VLANs.

„

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS enables or disables STP
on only the specified VLAN, on all ports within the VLAN.
port port-list vlan-id — Port number or list and the VLAN the

ports are in. MSS enables or disables STP on only the specified ports,
within the specified VLAN.
Defaults — Disabled.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set spantree backbonefast

389

Examples — The following command enables STP on all VLANs
configured on a WX switch:
WX4400# set spantree enable
success: change accepted.

The following command disables STP on VLAN burgundy:
WX4400# set spantree disable vlan burgundy
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set spantree
backbonefast

display spantree on page 376

Enables or disables STP backbone fast convergence on a wireless LAN
switch. This feature accelerates a port’s recovery following the failure of
an indirect link.
CAUTION: The backbone fast convergence feature is not compatible
with switches that are running standard IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree
implementations. This includes switches running Rapid Spanning Tree or
Multiple Spanning Tree.
Syntax — set spantree backbonefast {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables backbone fast convergence.

„

disable — Disables backbone fast convergence.

Defaults — STP backbone fast path convergence is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you plan to use the backbone fast convergence feature, you
must enable it on all the bridges in the spanning tree.
Examples — The following command enables backbone fast
convergence:
WX4400# set spantree backbonefast enable
success: change accepted.

390

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

See Also
„

set spantree
fwddelay

display spantree backbonefast on page 378

Changes the period of time after a topology change that a WX switch
which is not the root bridge waits to begin forwarding Layer 2 traffic on
one or all of its configured VLANs. (The root bridge always forwards
traffic.)
Syntax — set spantree fwddelay delay {all | vlan vlan-id}
„

delay — Delay value. You can specify from 4 through 30 seconds.

„

all — Changes the forwarding delay on all VLANs.

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the forwarding
delay on only the specified VLAN.

Defaults — The default forwarding delay is 15 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the forwarding delay on
VLAN pink to 20 seconds:
WX4400# set spantree fwddelay 20 vlan pink
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set spantree hello

display spantree on page 376

Changes the interval between STP hello messages sent by a wireless LAN
switch when operating as the root bridge, on one or all of its configured
VLANs.
Syntax — set spantree hello interval {all | vlan vlan-id}
„

interval — Interval value. You can specify from 1 through 10

seconds.
„

all — Changes the interval on all VLANs.

set spantree maxage

„

391

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the interval on

only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — The default hello timer interval is 2 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the hello interval for all
VLANs to 4 seconds:
WX4400# set spantree hello 4 all
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set spantree
maxage

display spantree on page 376

Changes the maximum age for an STP root bridge hello packet that is
acceptable to a wireless LAN switch acting as a designated bridge on one
or all of its VLANs. After waiting this period of time for a new hello
packet, the WX switch determines that the root bridge is unavailable and
issues a topology change message.
Syntax — set spantree maxage aging-time {all | vlan vlan-id}
„

aging-time — Maximum age value. You can specify from 6 through

40 seconds.
„

all — Changes the maximum age on all VLANs.

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the maximum

age on only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — The default maximum age for root bridge hello packets is 20
seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

392

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

Examples — The following command changes the maximum acceptable
age for root bridge hello packets on all VLANs to 15 seconds:
WX4400# set spantree maxage 15 all
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set spantree
portcost

display spantree on page 376

Changes the cost that transmission through a network port or ports in
the default VLAN on a wireless LAN switch adds to the total cost of a
path to the STP root bridge.
Syntax — set spantree portcost port-list cost cost
„

„

port-list — List of ports. MSS applies the cost change to all the
specified ports.
cost cost — Numeric value. You can specify a value from 1 through

65,535. STP selects lower-cost paths over higher-cost paths.
Defaults — The default port cost depends on the port speed and link
type. Table 73 lists the defaults for STP port path cost.
Table 73 STP Port Path Cost Defaults
Port Speed

Link Type

Default Port Path Cost

1000 Mbps

Full Duplex Aggregate
Link (Port Group)

3

1000 Mbps

Full Duplex

4

100 Mbps

Full Duplex Aggregate
Link (Port Group)

15

100 Mbps

Full Duplex

18

100 Mbps

Half Duplex

19

10 Mbps

Full Duplex Aggregate
Link (Port Group)

90

10 Mbps

Full Duplex

95

10 Mbps

Half Duplex

100

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set spantree portfast

393

Usage — This command applies only to the default VLAN (VLAN 1). To
change the cost of a port in another VLAN, use the set spantree
portvlancost command.
Examples — The following command changes the cost on ports 3 and 4
to 20:
WX1200# set spantree portcost 3,4 cost 20
success: change accepted.

See Also

set spantree
portfast

„

clear spantree portcost on page 372

„

clear spantree portvlancost on page 373

„

display spantree on page 376

„

display spantree portvlancost on page 381

„

set spantree portvlancost on page 395

Enables or disables STP port fast convergence on one or more ports on a
wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set spantree portfast port port-list {enable | disable}
„

port port-list — List of ports. MSS enables the feature on the

specified ports.
„

enable — Enables port fast convergence.

„

disable — Disables port fast convergence.

Defaults — STP port fast convergence is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use port fast convergence on ports that are directly connected
to servers, hosts, or other MAC stations.
Examples — The following command enables port fast convergence on
ports 2, 5, and 7:
WX1200# set spantree portfast port 2,4,7 enable
success: change accepted.

394

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

See Also
„

set spantree portpri

display spantree portfast on page 380

Changes the STP priority of a network port or ports for selection as part
of the path to the STP root bridge in the default VLAN on a wireless LAN
switch.
Syntax — set spantree portpri port-list priority value
„

port-list — List of ports. MSS changes the priority on the specified

ports.
„

priority value — Priority value. You can specify a value from 0

(highest priority) through 255 (lowest priority).
Defaults — The default STP priority for all network ports is 128.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command applies only to the default VLAN (VLAN 1). To
change the priority of a port in another VLAN, use the set spantree
portvlanpri command.
Examples — The following command sets the priority of ports 3 and 4 to
48:
WX1200# set spantree portpri 3-4 priority 48
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear spantree portpri on page 373

„

clear spantree portvlanpri on page 374

„

display spantree on page 376

„

set spantree portvlanpri on page 396

set spantree portvlancost

set spantree
portvlancost

395

Changes the cost of a network port or ports on paths to the STP root
bridge for a specific VLAN on a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set spantree portvlancost port-list cost cost {all |
vlan vlan-id}
„

„

port-list — List of ports. MSS applies the cost change to all the
specified ports.
cost cost — Numeric value. You can specify a value from 1 through

65,535. STP selects lower-cost paths over higher-cost paths.
„
„

all — Changes the cost on all VLANs.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the cost on
only the specified VLAN.

Defaults — The default port cost depends on the port speed and link
type. (See Table 68 on page 371.)
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the cost on ports 3 and 4
to 20 in VLAN mauve:
WX1200# set spantree portvlancost 3,4 cost 20 vlan mauve
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear spantree portcost on page 372

„

clear spantree portvlancost on page 373

„

display spantree on page 376

„

display spantree portvlancost on page 381

„

set spantree portcost on page 392

396

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

set spantree
portvlanpri

Changes the priority of a network port or ports for selection as part of
the path to the STP root bridge, on one VLAN or all VLANs.
Syntax — set spantree portvlanpri
port-list priority value {all | vlan vlan-id}
„

port-list — List of ports. MSS changes the priority on the specified

ports.
„

priority value — Priority value. You can specify a value from 0

(highest priority) through 255 (lowest priority).
„

all — Changes the priority on all VLANs.

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the priority on

only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — The default STP priority for all network ports is 128.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command sets the priority of ports 3 and 4 to
48 on VLAN mauve:
WX1200# set spantree portvlanpri 3-4 priority 48 vlan mauve
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear spantree portpri on page 373

„

clear spantree portvlanpri on page 374

„

display spantree on page 376

„

set spantree portpri on page 394

set spantree priority

set spantree
priority

397

Changes the STP root bridge priority of a wireless LAN switch on one or
all of its VLANs.
Syntax — set spantree priority value {all | vlan vlan-id}
„

priority value — Priority value. You can specify a value from 0

through 65,535. The bridge with the lowest priority value is elected to
be the root bridge for the spanning tree.
„
„

all — Changes the bridge priority on all VLANs.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the bridge
priority on only the specified VLAN.

Defaults — The default root bridge priority for the switch on all VLANs is
32,768 for the WX4400 and 49,152 for the WX1200 and WXR100.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command sets the bridge priority of VLAN
pink to 69:
WX4400# set spantree priority 69 vlan pink
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set spantree
uplinkfast

display spantree on page 376

Enables or disables STP uplink fast convergence on a wireless LAN switch.
This feature enables a WX switch with redundant links to the network
backbone to immediately switch to the backup link to the root bridge if
the primary link fails.
Syntax — set spantree uplinkfast {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables uplink fast convergence.

„

disable — Disables uplink fast convergence.

Defaults — Disabled.
Access — Enabled.

398

CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The uplink fast convergence feature is applicable to bridges
that are acting as access switches to the network core (distribution layer)
but are not in the core themselves. Do not enable the feature on WX
switches that are in the network core.
Examples — The following command enables uplink fast convergence:
WX4400# set spantree uplinkfast enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display spantree uplinkfast on page 387

11

IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

Use Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping commands
to configure and manage multicast traffic reduction on a WX.

Commands by
usage

This chapter presents IGMP snooping commands alphabetically. Use the
Table 74 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 74 IGMP Commands by Usage
Type

Command

IGMP Snooping State set igmp on page 411
display igmp on page 400
Proxy Reporting

set igmp proxy-report on page 416

Pseudo-querier

set igmp querier on page 419
display igmp querier on page 405

Timers

set igmp qi on page 417
set igmp oqi on page 415
set igmp qri on page 418
set igmp lmqi on page 412
set igmp rv on page 420

Router Solicitation

set igmp mrsol on page 414
set igmp mrsol mrsi on page 414

Multicast Routers

set igmp mrouter on page 413
display igmp mrouter on page 404

Multicast Receivers

set igmp receiver on page 419
display igmp receiver-table on
page 407

Statistics

display igmp statistics on page 409
clear igmp statistics on page 400

400

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

clear igmp statistics

Clears IGMP statistics counters on one VLAN or all VLANs on a wireless
LAN switch and resets them to 0.
Syntax — clear igmp statistics [vlan vlan-id]
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, IGMP statistics are cleared for all VLANs.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears IGMP statistics for all
VLANs:
WX1200# clear igmp statistics
IGMP statistics cleared for all vlans

See Also — display igmp statistics on page 409

display igmp

Displays IGMP configuration information and statistics.
Syntax — display igmp [vlan vlan-id]
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a

VLAN, MSS displays IGMP information for all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays IGMP information for
VLAN orange:
WX1200# display igmp vlan orange
VLAN: orange
IGMP is enabled
Proxy reporting is on
Mrouter solicitation is on
Querier functionality is off
Configuration values: qi: 125 oqi: 300 qri: 100 lmqi: 10 rvalue: 2 Multicast

display igmp

router information:
Port Mrouter-IPaddr Mrouter-MAC
Type TTL
---- --------------- ----------------- ----- ----1
192.28.7.5 00:01:02:03:04:05 dvmrp
17
Group
Port Receiver-IP
Receiver-MAC
TTL
--------------- ---- --------------- ----------------- ----224.0.0.2 none
none
none undef
237.255.255.255
5
10.10.10.11 00:02:04:06:08:0b
258
237.255.255.255
5
10.10.10.13 00:02:04:06:08:0d
258
237.255.255.255
5
10.10.10.14 00:02:04:06:08:0e
258
237.255.255.255
5
10.10.10.12 00:02:04:06:08:0c
258
237.255.255.255
5
10.10.10.10 00:02:04:06:08:0a
258
Querier information:
Querier for vlan orange
Port Querier-IP
Querier-MAC
TTL
---- --------------- ----------------- ----1 193.122.135.178 00:0b:cc:d2:e9:b4
23
IGMP vlan member ports: 1, 2, 3
IGMP static ports: none
IGMP statistics for vlan orange:
IGMP message type Received Transmitted Dropped
----------------- -------- ----------- ------General-Queries
0
0
0
GS-Queries
0
0
0
Report V1
0
0
0
Report V2
5
1
4
Leave
0
0
0
Mrouter-Adv
0
0
0
Mrouter-Term
0
0
0
Mrouter-Sol
50
101
0
DVMRP
4
4
0
PIM V1
0
0
0
PIM V2
0
0
0
Topology notifications: 0
Packets with unknown IGMP type: 0
Packets with bad length: 0
Packets with bad checksum: 0
Packets dropped: 4

Table 75 describes the fields in this display.

401

402

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

Table 75 Output for display igmp
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN name. MSS displays information separately for each
VLAN.

IGMP is enabled
(disabled)

IGMP state.

Proxy reporting

Proxy reporting state.

Mrouter solicitation

Multicast router solicitation state.

Querier functionality

Pseudo-querier state.

Configuration values
(qi)

Query interval.

Configuration values
(oqi)

Other-querier-present interval.

Configuration values
(qri)

Query response interval.

Configuration values
(lmqi)

Last member query interval.

Configuration values
(rvalue)

Robustness value.

Multicast router
information

List of multicast routers and active multicast groups. The
fields containing this information are described separately.
The display igmp mrouter command shows the same
information.

Port

Number of the physical port through which the WX can
reach the router.

Mrouter-IPaddr

IP address of the multicast router interface.

Mrouter-MAC

MAC address of the multicast router interface.

Type

How the WX learned that the port is a multicast router
port:
„

conf — Static multicast port configured by an
administrator

„

madv — Multicast advertisement

„

quer — IGMP query

„

dvmrp — Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
(DVMRP)

„

pimv1 — Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
version 1

„

pimv2 — PIM version 2

display igmp

403

Table 75 Output for display igmp (continued)
Field

Description

TTL

Number of seconds before this entry ages out if not
refreshed. For static multicast router entries, the
time-to-live (TTL) value is undef. Static multicast router
entries do not age out.

Group

IP address of a multicast group. The display igmp
receiver-table command shows the same information as
these receiver fields.

Port

Physical port through which the WX can reach the group’s
receiver.

Receiver-IP

IP address of the client receiving the group.

Receiver-MAC

MAC address of the client receiving the group.

TTL

Number of seconds before this entry ages out if the WX
does not receive a group membership message from the
receiver. For static multicast receiver entries, the TTL value
is undef. Static multicast receiver entries do not age out.

Querier information

Information about the subnet’s multicast querier. If the
querier is another WX switch, the fields described below
are applicable. If the querier is the WX itself, the output
indicates how many seconds remain until the next general
query message. If IGMP snooping does not detect a
querier, the output indicates this. The display igmp
querier command shows the same information.

Querier for vlan

VLAN containing the querier. Information is listed
separately for each VLAN.

Querier-IP

IP address of the querier.

Querier-MAC

MAC address of the querier.

TTL

Number of seconds before this entry ages out if the WX
does not receive a query message from the querier.

IGMP vlan member
ports

Physical ports in the VLAN. This list includes all network
ports configured to be in the VLAN and all ports MSS
dynamically assigns to the VLAN when a user assigned to
the VLAN becomes a receiver. For example, the list can
include a MAP access port that is not configured to be in
the VLAN when a user associated with the 3Com Wireless
LAN Managed Access Point AP2750 on that port becomes
a receiver for a group. When all receivers on a dynamically
added port age out, MSS removes the port from the list.

IGMP static ports

Static receiver ports.

IGMP statistics

Multicast message and packet statistics. These are the
same statistics displayed by the display igmp statistics
command.

404

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

Table 75 Output for display igmp (continued)
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN name. MSS displays information separately for each
VLAN.

IGMP is enabled
(disabled)

IGMP state.

See Also

display igmp
mrouter

„

display igmp mrouter on page 404

„

display igmp querier on page 405

„

display igmp receiver-table on page 407

„

display igmp statistics on page 409

Displays the multicast routers in a WX’s subnet, on one VLAN or all
VLANs. Routers are listed separately for each VLAN, according to the port
number through which the wireless LAN switch can reach the router.
Syntax — display igmp mrouter [vlan vlan-id]
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a

VLAN, MSS displays the multicast routers in all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the multicast routers in
VLAN orange:
WX1200# display igmp mrouter vlan orange
Multicast routers for vlan orange
Port Mrouter-IPaddr Mrouter-MAC
Type TTL
---- --------------- ----------------- ----- ----1
192.28.7.5 00:01:02:03:04:05 dvmrp
33

Table 76 describes the fields in this display.

display igmp querier

405

Table 76 Output for display igmp mrouter
Field

Description

Multicast routers for vlan VLAN containing the multicast routers. Ports are
listed separately for each VLAN.
Port

Number of the physical port through which the WX
can reach the router.

Mrouter-IPaddr

IP address of the multicast router.

Mrouter-MAC

MAC address of the multicast router.

Type

How the WX learned that the port is a multicast
router port:

TTL

„

conf — Static multicast port configured by an
administrator

„

madv — Multicast advertisement

„

quer — IGMP query

„

dvmrp — Distance Vector Multicast Routing
Protocol (DVMRP)

„

pimv1 — Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
version 1

„

pimv2 — PIM version 2

Number of seconds before this entry ages out if
unused. For static multicast router entries, the TTL
value is undef. Static multicast router entries do not
age out.

See Also

display igmp
querier

„

display igmp mrouter on page 404

„

set igmp mrouter on page 413

Shows information about the active multicast querier, on one VLAN or all
VLANs. Queriers are listed separately for each VLAN. Each VLAN can have
only one querier.
Syntax — display igmp querier [vlan vlan-id]
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a

VLAN, MSS displays querier information for all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

406

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays querier information for
VLAN orange:
WX1200# display igmp querier vlan orange
Querier for vlan orange
Port Querier-IP
Querier-MAC
TTL
---- --------------- ----------------- ----1 193.122.135.178 00:0b:cc:d2:e9:b4
23

The following command shows the information MSS displays when the
querier is the WX itself:
WX1200# display igmp querier vlan default
Querier for vlan default:
I am the querier for vlan default, time to next query is 20

The output indicates how many seconds remain before the
pseudo-querier on the WX switch broadcasts the next general query
report to IP address 224.0.0.1, the multicast all-systems group.
If IGMP snooping does not detect a querier, the output indicates this
finding, as shown in the following example:
WX1200# display igmp querier vlan red
Querier for vlan red:
There is no querier present on vlan red

This condition does not necessarily indicate a problem. For example,
election of the querier might be in progress.
Table 67 describes the fields in this display. Table 76 on page 405
describes the fields in the display when a querier other than the WX is
present.
Table 77 Output for display igmp mrouter
Field

Description

Querier for vlan VLAN containing the querier. Information is listed separately for
each VLAN.
Querier-IP

IP address of the querier interface.

Querier-MAC

MAC address of the querier interface.

TTL

Number of seconds before this entry ages out if the WX does
not receive a query message from the querier.

display igmp receiver-table

407

See Also
„

display igmp
receiver-table

set igmp querier on page 419

Displays the receivers to which a WX forwards multicast traffic. You can
display receivers for all VLANs, a single VLAN, or a group or groups
identified by group address and network mask.
Syntax — display igmp receiver-table [vlan vlan-id]
[group group-ip-addr/mask-length]
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a

VLAN, MSS displays the multicast receivers on all VLANs.
„

group group-ip-addr/mask-length — IP address and subnet mask
of a multicast group, in CIDR format (for example, 239.20.20.10/24).
If you do not specify a group address, MSS displays the multicast
receivers for all groups.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays all multicast receivers in
VLAN orange:
WX1200# display
VLAN: orange
Session
--------------224.0.0.2
237.255.255.255
237.255.255.255
237.255.255.255
237.255.255.255
237.255.255.255

igmp receiver-table vlan orange
Port Receiver-IP
Receiver-MAC
TTL
---- --------------- ----------------- ----none
none
none undef
5
10.10.10.11 00:02:04:06:08:0b
179
5
10.10.10.13 00:02:04:06:08:0d
179
5
10.10.10.14 00:02:04:06:08:0e
179
5
10.10.10.12 00:02:04:06:08:0c
179
5
10.10.10.10 00:02:04:06:08:0a
179

408

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

The following command lists all receivers for multicast groups
237.255.255.1 through 237.255.255.255, in all VLANs:
WX1200# display igmp receiver-table group 237.255.255.0/24
VLAN: red
Session
Port Receiver-IP
Receiver-MAC
TTL
--------------- ---- --------------- ----------------- ----237.255.255.2
2
10.10.20.19 00:02:04:06:09:0d
112
237.255.255.119
3
10.10.30.31 00:02:04:06:01:0b
112
VLAN: green
Session
Port Receiver-IP
Receiver-MAC
TTL
--------------- ---- --------------- ----------------- ----237.255.255.17
1
10.10.40.41 00:02:06:08:02:0c
12
237.255.255.255
6
10.10.60.61 00:05:09:0c:0a:01
111

Table 78 describes the fields in this display.
Table 78 Output for display igmp receiver-table
Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN that contains the multicast receiver ports. Ports are
listed separately for each VLAN.

Session

IP address of the multicast group being received.

Port

Physical port through which the WX can reach the
receiver.

Receiver-IP

IP address of the receiver.

Receiver-MAC

MAC address of the receiver.

TTL

Number of seconds before this entry ages out if the WX
does not receive a group membership message from the
receiver. For static multicast receiver entries, the TTL value
is undef. Static multicast receiver entries do not age out.

See Also
„

set igmp receiver on page 419

display igmp statistics

display igmp
statistics

409

Shows IGMP statistics.
Syntax — display igmp statistics [vlan vlan-id]
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, MSS displays IGMP statistics for all VLANs.

Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays IGMP statistics for VLAN
orange:
WX1200# display igmp statistics vlan orange
IGMP statistics for vlan orange:
IGMP message type Received Transmitted Dropped
----------------- -------- ----------- ------General-Queries
0
0
0
GS-Queries
0
0
0
Report V1
0
0
0
Report V2
5
1
4
Leave
0
0
0
Mrouter-Adv
0
0
0
Mrouter-Term
0
0
0
Mrouter-Sol
50
101
0
DVMRP
4
4
0
PIM V1
0
0
0
PIM V2
0
0
0
Topology notifications: 0
Packets with unknown IGMP type: 0
Packets with bad length: 0
Packets with bad checksum: 0
Packets dropped: 4

Table 79 describes the fields in this display.

410

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

Table 79 Output of display igmp statistics
Field

Description

IGMP statistics VLAN name. Statistics are listed separately for each VLAN.
for vlan
IGMP message Type of IGMP message:
type
„
General-Queries — General group membership queries sent by
the multicast querier (multicast router or pseudo-querier).
„

GS-Queries — Group-specific queries sent by the multicast
querier to determine whether there are receivers for a specific
group.

„

Report V1 — IGMP version 1 group membership reports sent
by clients who want to be receivers for the groups.

„

Report V2 — IGMP version 2 group membership reports sent
by clients who want to be receivers for the groups.

„

Leave — IGMP version 2 leave messages sent by clients who
want to stop receiving traffic for a group. Leave messages apply
only to IGMP version 2.

„

Mrouter-Adv — Multicast router advertisement packets. A
multicast router sends this type of packet to advertise the IP
address of the sending interface as a multicast router interface.

„

Mrouter-Term — Multicast router termination messages. A
multicast router sends this type of message when multicast
forwarding is disabled on the router interface, the router
interface is administratively disabled, or the router itself is
gracefully shutdown.

„

Mrouter-Sol — Multicast router solicitation messages. A
multicast client or a WX sends this type of message to
immediately solicit multicast router advertisement messages
from the multicast routers in the subnet.

„

DVMRP — Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP)
messages. Multicast routers running DVMRP exchange multicast
information with these messages.

„

PIM V1 — Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) version 1
messages. Multicast routers running PIMv1 exchange multicast
information with these messages.

„

PIM V2 — PIM version 2 messages.

Received

Number of packets received.

Transmitted

Number of packets transmitted. This number includes both
multicast packets originated by the WX and multicast packets
received and then forwarded by the WX.

Dropped

Number of IGMP packets dropped by the WX.

set igmp

411

Table 79 Output of display igmp statistics (continued)
Field

Description

Topology
notifications

Number of Layer 2 topology change notifications received by the
WX.
In the current software version, the value in this field is always 0.

Packets with
unknown
IGMP type

Number of multicast packets received with an unrecognized
multicast type.

Packets with
bad length

Number of packets with an invalid length.

Packets with
bad IGMP
checksum

Number of packets with an invalid IGMP checksum value.

Packets
dropped

Number of multicast packets dropped by the WX.

See Also
„

set igmp

clear igmp statistics on page 400

Disables or reenables IGMP snooping on one VLAN or all VLANs on a
wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set igmp {enable | disable} [vlan vlan-id]
„

enable — Enables IGMP snooping.

„

disable — Disables IGMP snooping.

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, IGMP snooping is disabled or reenabled on all VLANs.

History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command disables IGMP snooping on VLAN
orange:
WX1200# set igmp disable vlan orange
success: change accepted

See Also
„

set igmp rv on page 420

412

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

set igmp lmqi

Changes the IGMP last member query interval timer on one VLAN or all
VLANs on a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set igmp lmqi tenth-seconds [vlan vlan-id]
„

lmqi tenth-seconds — Amount of time (in tenths of a second) that

the WX waits for a response to a group-specific query after receiving a
leave message for that group, before removing the receiver that sent
the leave message from the list of receivers for the group. If there are
no more receivers for the group, the WX switch also sends a leave
message for the group to multicast routers. You can specify a value
from 1 through 65,535.
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, the timer change applies to all VLANs.

Defaults — The default last member query interval is 10 tenths of a
second (1 second).
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the last member query
interval on VLAN orange to 5 tenths of a second:
WX1200# set igmp lmqi 5 vlan orange
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set igmp oqi on page 415

„

set igmp qi on page 417

„

set igmp mrouter on page 413

set igmp mrouter

set igmp mrouter

413

Adds or removes a port in a WX’s list of ports on which it forwards traffic
to multicast routers. Static multicast ports are immediately added to or
removed from the list of router ports and do not age out.
Syntax — set igmp mrouter port port-list {enable | disable}
„

port port-list — Port list. MSS adds or removes the specified ports

in the list of static multicast router ports.
„
„

enable — Adds the port to the list of static multicast router ports.
disable — Removes the port from the list of static multicast router

ports.
Defaults — By default, no ports are static multicast router ports.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You cannot add MAP access ports or wired authentication
ports as static multicast ports. However, MSS can dynamically add these
port types to the list of multicast ports based on multicast traffic.
Examples — The following command adds port 6 as a static multicast
router port:
WX1200# set igmp mrouter port 6 enable
success: change accepted.

The following command removes port 6 from the static multicast router
port list:
WX1200# set igmp mrouter port 6 disable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display igmp statistics on page 409

414

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

set igmp mrsol

Enables or disables multicast router solicitation by a WX.
Syntax — set igmp mrsol {enable | disable} [vlan vlan-id]
„

enable — Enables multicast router solicitation.

„

disable — Disables multicast router solicitation.

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, multicast router solicitation is disabled or enabled on all VLANs.

Defaults — Multicast router solicitation is disabled on all VLANs by
default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command enables multicast router
solicitation on VLAN orange:
WX1200# set igmp mrsol enable vlan orange
success: change accepted

See Also
„

set igmp mrsol mrsi

set igmp mrsol mrsi on page 414

Changes the interval between multicast router solicitations by a WX on
one VLAN or all VLANs.
Syntax — set igmp mrsol mrsi seconds [vlan vlan-id]
„

„

seconds — Number of seconds between multicast router solicitations.
You can specify a value from 1 through 65,535.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, MSS changes the multicast router solicitation interval for all
VLANs.

Defaults — The interval between multicast router solicitations is 30
seconds by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set igmp oqi

415

Usage — You cannot add MAP access ports or wired authentication
ports as static multicast ports. However, MSS can dynamically add these
port types to the list of multicast ports based on multicast traffic.
Examples — The following example changes the multicast router
solicitation interval to 60 seconds:
WX1200# set igmp mrsol mrsi 60
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set igmp oqi

set igmp mrsol on page 414.

Changes the IGMP other-querier-present interval timer on one VLAN or
all VLANs on a WX.
Syntax — set igmp oqi seconds [vlan vlan-id]
„

oqi seconds — Number of seconds that the WX waits for a general

query to arrive before electing itself the querier. You can specify a
value from 1 through 65,535.
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, the timer change applies to all VLANs.

Defaults — The default other-querier-present interval is 255 seconds
(4.25 minutes).
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — A WX cannot become the querier unless the pseudo-querier
feature is enabled on the WX switch. When the feature is enabled, the
WX becomes the querier for a subnet so long as the WX does not receive
a query message from a router with a lower IP address than the IP
address of the WX in that subnet. To enable the pseudo-querier feature,
use set igmp querier.
Examples — The following command changes the other-querier-present
interval on VLAN orange to 200 seconds:
WX1200# set igmp oqi 200 vlan orange
success: change accepted.

416

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

See Also

set igmp
proxy-report

„

set igmp lmqi on page 412

„

set igmp qi on page 417

„

set igmp qri on page 418

„

set igmp querier on page 419

„

set igmp mrouter on page 413

„

set igmp rv on page 420

Disables or reenables proxy reporting by a WX on one VLAN or all VLANs.
Syntax — set igmp proxy-report {enable | disable}
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a

VLAN, proxy reporting is disabled or reenabled on all VLANs.
„

enable — Enables proxy reporting.

„

disable — Disables proxy reporting.

Defaults — Proxy reporting is enabled on all VLANs by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Proxy reporting reduces multicast overhead by sending only
one membership report for a group to the multicast routers and
discarding other membership reports for the same group. If you disable
proxy reporting, the WX sends all membership reports to the routers,
including multiple reports for the same group.
Examples — The following example disables proxy reporting on VLAN
orange:
WX1200# set igmp proxy-report disable vlan orange
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set igmp rv on page 420

set igmp qi

set igmp qi

417

Changes the IGMP query interval timer on one VLAN or all VLANs on a
WX.
Syntax — set igmp qi seconds [vlan vlan-id]
„

qi seconds — Number of seconds that elapse between general

queries sent by the WX when the WX switch is the querier for the
subnet. You can specify a value from 1 through 65,535.
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, the timer change applies to all VLANs.

Defaults — The default query interval is 125 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The query interval is applicable only when the WX is querier for
the subnet. For the WX switch to become the querier, the pseudo-querier
feature must be enabled on the WX and the WX must have the lowest IP
address among all the WX switches eligible to become a querier. To
enable the pseudo-querier feature, use the set igmp querier command.
Examples — The following command changes the query interval on
VLAN orange to 100 seconds:
WX1200# set igmp qi 100 vlan orange
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set igmp lmqi on page 412

„

set igmp oqi on page 415

„

set igmp qri on page 418

„

set igmp querier on page 419

„

set igmp mrouter on page 413

„

set igmp rv on page 420

418

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

set igmp qri

Changes the IGMP query response interval timer on one VLAN or all
VLANs on a WX.
Syntax — set igmp qri tenth-seconds [vlan vlan-id]
„

qri tenth-seconds — Amount of time (in tenths of a second) that

the WX waits for a receiver to respond to a group-specific query
message before removing the receiver from the receiver list for the
group. You can specify a value from 1 through 65,535.
„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a

VLAN, the timer change applies to all VLANs.
Defaults — The default query response interval is 100 tenths of a second
(10 seconds).
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The query response interval is applicable only when the WX is
querier for the subnet. For the WX to become the querier, the
pseudo-querier feature must be enabled on the WX and the WX must
have the lowest IP address among all the WX switches eligible to become
a querier. To enable the pseudo-querier feature, use set igmp querier.
Examples — The following command changes the query response
interval on VLAN orange to 50 tenths of a second (5 seconds):
WX1200# set igmp qri 50 vlan orange
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set igmp lmqi on page 412

„

set igmp oqi on page 415

„

set igmp qi on page 417

„

set igmp querier on page 419

„

set igmp rv on page 420

set igmp querier

set igmp querier

419

Enables or disables the IGMP pseudo-querier on a WX, on one VLAN or
all VLANs.
Syntax — set igmp querier {enable | disable} [vlan vlan-id]
„

enable — Enables the pseudo-querier.

„

disable — Disables the pseudo-querier.

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a

VLAN, the pseudo-querier is enabled or disabled on all VLANs.
Defaults — The pseudo-querier is disabled on all VLANs by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — 3Com recommends that you use the pseudo-querier only
when the VLAN contains local multicast traffic sources and no multicast
router is servicing the subnet.
Examples — The following example enables the pseudo-querier on the
orange VLAN:
WX1200# set igmp querier enable vlan orange
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set igmp receiver

display igmp querier on page 405

Adds or removes a network port in the list of ports on which a WX
forwards traffic to multicast receivers. Static multicast receiver ports are
immediately added to or removed from the list of receiver ports and do
not age out.
Syntax — set igmp receiver port port-list {enable | disable}
„

„
„

port port-list — Network port list. MSS adds the specified ports to
the list of static multicast receiver ports.
enable — Adds the port to the list of static multicast receiver ports.
disable — Removes the port from the list of static multicast receiver

ports.

420

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

Defaults — By default, no ports are static multicast receiver ports.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You cannot add MAP access ports or wired authentication
ports as static multicast ports. However, MSS can dynamically add these
port types to the list of multicast ports based on multicast traffic.
Examples — The following command adds port 7 as a static multicast
receiver port:
WX1200# set igmp receiver port 7 enable
success: change accepted.

The following command removes port 7 from the list of static multicast
receiver ports:
WX1200# set igmp receiver port 7 disable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set igmp rv

display igmp receiver-table on page 407

Changes the robustness value for one VLAN or all VLANs on a WX.
Robustness adjusts the IGMP timers to the amount of traffic loss that
occurs on the network.
Syntax — set igmp rv num [vlan vlan-id]
„

„

num — Robustness value. You can specify a value from 2 through 255.
Set the robustness value higher to adjust for more traffic loss.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a

VLAN, MSS changes the robustness value for all VLANs.
Defaults — The default robustness value for all VLANs is 2.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set igmp rv

See Also
„

set igmp oqi on page 415

„

set igmp qi on page 417

„

set igmp qri on page 418

421

422

CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS

12

SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

Use security ACL commands to configure and monitor security access
control lists (ACLs). Security ACLs filter packets to restrict or permit
network usage by certain users or traffic types, and can assign to packets
a class of service (CoS) to define the priority of treatment for packet
filtering.
(Security ACLs are different from the location policy on a WX switch,
which helps you locally control user access. For location policy
commands, see “AAA Commands” on page 199.)

Security ACL
Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents security ACL commands alphabetically. Use
Table 80 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 80 Security ACL Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Create Security ACLs

set security acl on page 439
display security acl dscp on page 428
display security acl on page 429
display security acl info on page 431
clear security acl on page 424

Commit Security ACLs commit security acl on page 427
rollback security acl on page 438
Map Security ACLs

set security acl map on page 444
display security acl map on page 432
clear security acl map on page 425

Monitor Security ACLs display security acl hits on page 430
hit-sample-rate on page 437
display security acl resource-usage on
page 433

424

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

clear security acl

Clears a specified security ACL, an access control entry (ACE), or all
security ACLs, from the edit buffer. When used with the command
commit security acl, clears the ACE from the running configuration.
Syntax — clear security acl {acl-name | all} [editbuffer-index]
„

acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to clear. ACL names
start with a letter and are case-insensitive.

„

all — Clears all security ACLs.

„

editbuffer-index — Number that indicates which access control

entry (ACE) in the security ACL to clear. If you do not specify an ACE,
all ACEs are cleared from the ACL.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command deletes security ACLs only in the edit buffer.
You must use the commit security acl command with this command to
delete the ACL or ACE from the running configuration and nonvolatile
storage.
The clear security acl command deletes a security ACL, but does not
stop its current filtering function if the ACL is mapped to any virtual LANs
(VLANs), ports, or virtual ports, or if the ACL is applied in a Filter-Id
attribute to an authenticated user or group of users with current sessions.
Examples — The following commands display the current security ACL
configuration, clear acl_133 in the edit buffer, commit the deletion to the
running configuration, and redisplay the ACL configuration to display
that it no longer contains acl_133:

clear security acl map

425

WX4400# display security acl info all
ACL information for all
set security acl ip acl_133 (hits #1 0)
--------------------------------------------------------1. deny IP source IP 192.168.1.6 0.0.0.0 destination IP any
set security acl ip acl_134 (hits #3 0)
--------------------------------------------------------1. permit IP source IP 192.168.0.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
set security acl ip acl_135 (hits #2 0)
--------------------------------------------------------1. deny IP source IP 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
WX4400# clear security acl acl_133
WX4400# commit security acl acl_133
configuration accepted
WX4400# display security acl info all
ACL information for all
set security acl ip acl_134 (hits #3 0)
--------------------------------------------------------1. permit IP source IP 192.168.0.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
set security acl ip acl_135 (hits #2 0)
--------------------------------------------------------1. deny IP source IP 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits

See Also

clear security acl
map

„

clear security acl map on page 425

„

commit security acl on page 427

„

display security acl info on page 431

„

set security acl on page 439

Deletes the mapping between a security ACL and a virtual LAN (VLAN),
one or more physical ports, or a virtual port. Or deletes all ACL maps to
VLANs, ports, and virtual ports on a WX switch.
Security ACLs are applied to users or groups dynamically via the Filter-Id
attribute. To delete a security ACL from a user or group in the local WX
database, use the command clear user attr, clear mac-user
attr, clear usergroup attr, or clear mac-usergroup attr. To delete a
security ACL from a user or group on an external RADIUS server, see the
documentation for your RADIUS server.

426

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

Syntax — clear security acl map {acl-name | all} {vlan vlan-id |
port port-list [tag tag-value] | dap dap-num} {in | out}
„

„

„

acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to clear. ACL names
start with a letter and are case-insensitive.
all — Removes security ACL mapping from all physical ports, virtual
ports, and VLANs on a WX switch.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS removes the security

ACL from the specified VLAN.
„

„

„

port port-list — Port list. MSS removes the security ACL from the
specified WX physical port or ports.
tag tag-value — Tag value that identifies a virtual port in a VLAN.
Specify a value from 1 through 4095. MSS removes the security ACL
from the specified virtual port.
dap dap-num — One or more Distributed MAPs, based on their

connection IDs. Specify a single connection ID, or specify a
comma-separated list of connection IDs, a hyphen-separated range, or
any combination, with no spaces. MSS removes the security ACL from
the specified Distributed MAPs.
„

in — Removes the security ACL from traffic coming into the WX

switch.
„

out — Removes the security ACL from traffic going out of the WX
switch.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To clear a security ACL map, type the name of the ACL with
the VLAN, physical port or ports, virtual port tag, or Distributed MAP and
the direction of the packets to stop filtering. This command deletes the
ACL mapping, but not the ACL.
Examples — To clear the mapping of security ACL acljoe from port 4 for
incoming packets, type the following command:
WX4400# clear security acl map acljoe port 4 in
clear mapping accepted

commit security acl

427

To clear all physical ports, virtual ports, and VLANs on a WX switch of the
ACLs mapped for incoming and outgoing traffic, type the following
command:
WX4400# clear security acl map all
success: change accepted.

See Also

commit security acl

„

clear security acl on page 424

„

display security acl map on page 432

„

set security acl map on page 444

Saves a security ACL, or all security ACLs, in the edit buffer to the running
configuration and nonvolatile storage on the WX switch. Or, when used
with the clear security acl command, commit security acl deletes a
security ACL, or all security ACLs, from the running configuration and
nonvolatile storage.
Syntax — commit security acl {acl-name | all}
„

acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to commit. ACL names

must start with a letter and are case-insensitive.
„

all — Commits all security ACLs in the edit buffer.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use the commit security acl command to save security ACLs
into, or delete them from, the permanent configuration. Until you
commit the creation or deletion of a security ACL, it is stored in an edit
buffer and is not enforced. After you commit a security ACL, it is removed
from the edit buffer.
A single commit security acl all command commits the creation and/or
deletion of whatever display security acl info all editbuffer shows to
be currently stored in the edit buffer.

428

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

Examples — The following commands commit all the security ACLs in
the edit buffer to the configuration, display a summary of the committed
ACLs, and show that the edit buffer has been cleared:
WX4400# commit security acl all
configuration accepted
WX4400# display security acl
ACL table
ACL
Type Class
Mapping
----------------------- ---- ------ ------acl_123
IP
Static
acl_124
IP
Static
WX4400# display security acl info all editbuffer
acl editbuffer information for all

See Also

display security acl
dscp

„

clear security acl on page 424

„

display security acl on page 429

„

display security acl info on page 431

„

rollback security acl on page 438

„

set security acl on page 439

Displays a table that maps Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
values to their equivalent combinations of IP precedence values and IP
ToS values.
Use the table to look up the values to use with the precedence and tos
options in an ACE when you want the ACE to match on their equivalent
DSCP value.
Syntax — display security acl dscp
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.

display security acl

429

The IP precedence and ToS fields use 7 bits, while the DSCP field uses
only 6 bits. Following the DSCP field is a 2-bit ECN field that can be set by
other devices based on network congestion. If you are filtering based on
DSCP value, you need two ACEs to ensure that the ACL matches
regardless of the value of the seventh bit. Use the first ACE to match on
the precedence and ToS values corresponding to the DSCP value. Use the
second ACE to match on the same precedence value but on the ToS value
plus 1. (For an example, see the “Using ACLs to Change CoS” section of
the “Configuring and Managing Security ACLs” chapter in the Wireless
LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.
Examples — The following command displays the table:
WX-1200# display security acl dscp
DSCP
TOS
precedence
tos
dec hex
dec hex
----------------------------------------------0 0x00
0 0x00
0
0
1 0x01
4 0x04
0
2
2 0x02
8 0x08
0
4
...
63 0x3f
252 0xfc
7
14

See Also
„

display security acl

set security acl on page 439

Displays a summary of security ACLs that are committed — saved in the
running configuration and nonvolatile storage — or a summary of ACLs
in the edit buffer.
Syntax — display security acl [editbuffer]
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

430

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

Examples — To display a summary of the committed security ACLs on a
WX switch, type the following command:
WX4400# display security acl
ACL table
ACL
---------------------------acl_123
acl_133
acl_124

Type
---IP
IP
IP

Class
-----Static
Static
Static

Mapping
------Port 2 In
Port 4 In

To view a summary of the security ACLs in the edit buffer, type the
following command:
WX4400# display security acl
ACL edit-buffer table
ACL
---------------------------acl_122
acl_132
acl-144

editbuffer
Type
---IP
IP
IP

Status
-------------Not committed
Not committed
Not committed

See Also

display security acl
hits

„

clear security acl on page 424

„

display security acl info on page 431

„

set security acl on page 439

Displays the number of packets filtered by security ACLs (“hits”) on the
WX switch. Each time a packet is filtered by a security ACL, the hit
counter increments.
Syntax — display security acl hits
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — For MSS to count hits for a security ACL, you must specify hits
in the set security acl commands that define ACE rules for the ACL.

display security acl info

431

Examples — To display the security ACL hits on a WX switch, type the
following command:
WX4400# display security acl hits
ACL hit-counters
Index Counter
ACL-name
----- -------------------- -------1
0 acl_2
2
0 acl_175
3
916 acl_123

See Also

display security acl
info

„

hit-sample-rate on page 437

„

set security acl on page 439

Displays the contents of a specified security ACL or all security ACLs that
are committed — saved in the running configuration and nonvolatile
storage — or the contents of security ACLs in the edit buffer before they
are committed.
Syntax — display security acl info {acl-name | all}
[editbuffer]
„

acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to display. ACL names
must start with a letter and are case-insensitive.

„

all — Displays the contents of all security ACLs.

„

editbuffer — Displays the contents of the specified security ACL or

all security ACLs that are stored in the edit buffer after being created
with set security acl. If you do not use this parameter, only
committed ACLs are shown.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

432

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

Examples — To display the contents of all security ACLs committed on a
WX switch, type the following command:
WX4400# display security acl info all
ACL information for all
set security acl ip acl_123 (hits #5 462)
--------------------------------------------------------1. permit IP source IP 192.168.1.11 0.0.0.255 destination IP any enable-hits
2. deny IP source IP 192.168.2.11 0.0.0.0 destination IP any
set security acl ip acl_134 (hits #3 0)
--------------------------------------------------------1. permit IP source IP 192.168.0.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
set security acl ip acl_135 (hits #2 0)
--------------------------------------------------------1. deny IP source IP 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits

The following command displays the contents of acl_123 in the edit
buffer, including the committed ACE rules 1 and 2 and the uncommitted
rule 3:
WX4400# display security acl info acl_123 editbuffer
ACL edit-buffer information for acl_123
set security acl ip acl_123 (ACEs 3, add 3, del 0, modified 0)
--------------------------------------------------------1. permit IP source IP 192.168.1.11 0.0.0.255 destination IP any enable-hits
2. deny IP source IP 192.168.2.11 0.0.0.0 destination IP any
3. deny SRC source IP 192.168.1.234 255.255.255.255 enable-hits

See Also

display security acl
map

„

clear security acl on page 424

„

commit security acl on page 427

„

set security acl on page 439

Displays the VLANs, ports, and virtual ports on the WX switch to which a
security ACL is assigned.
Syntax — display security acl map acl-name
„

acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL for which to show
static mapping. ACL names must start with a letter and are
case-insensitive.

Defaults — None.

display security acl resource-usage

433

Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the port to which security
ACL acl_111 is mapped:
WX4400# display security acl map acl_111
ACL acl_111 is mapped to:
Port 4 in

See Also

display security acl
resource-usage

„

clear security acl map on page 425

„

display security acl map on page 432

„

set security acl map on page 444

Displays statistics about the resources used by security ACL filtering on
the WX switch.
Syntax — display security acl resource-usage
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use this command with the help of 3Com to diagnose an ACL
resource problem. (To obtain 3Com Technical Support, see “Obtaining
Support for your Product” on page 607.)

434

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

Examples — To display security ACL resource usage, type the following
command:
WX4400# display security acl resource-usage
ACL resources
Classifier tree counters
-----------------------Number of rules
: 2
Number of leaf nodes
: 1
Stored rule count
: 2
Leaf chain count
: 1
Longest leaf chain
: 2
Number of non-leaf nodes : 0
Uncompressed Rule Count
: 2
Maximum node depth
: 1
Sub-chain count
: 0
PSCBs in primary memory
: 0 (max: 512)
PSCBs in secondary memory : 0 (max: 9728)
Leaves in primary
: 2 (max: 151)
Leaves in secondary
: 0 (max 12096)
Sum node depth
: 1
Information on Network Processor status
--------------------------------------Fragmentation control
: 0
UC switchdest
: 0
ACL resources
Port number
: 0
Number of action types
: 2
LUdef in use
: 5
Default action pointer
: c8007dc
L4 global
: True
No rules
: False
Non-IP rules
: False
Root in first
: True
Static default action
: False
No per-user (MAC) mapping : True
Out mapping
: False
In mapping
: True
No VLAN or PORT mapping
: False
No VPORT mapping
: True

Table 81 explains the fields in the display security acl resource-usage
output.

display security acl resource-usage

435

Table 81 Output of display security acl resource-usage
Field

Description

Number of rules

Number of security ACEs currently mapped to ports or
VLANs.

Number of leaf nodes Number of security ACL data entries stored in the rule tree.
Stored rule count

Number of security ACEs stored in the rule tree.

Leaf chain count

Number of chained security ACL data entries stored in the
rule tree.

Longest leaf chain

Longest chain of security ACL data entries stored in the rule
tree.

Number of non-leaf
nodes

Number of nodes with no data entries stored in the rule tree.

Uncompressed Rule
Count

Number of security ACEs stored in the rule tree, including
duplicates—ACEs in ACLs applied to multiple ports, virtual
ports, or VLANs.

Maximum node
depth

Number of data elements in the rule tree, from the root to
the furthest data entry (leaf).

Sub-chain count

Sum of action types represented in all security ACL data
entries.

PSCBs in primary
memory

Number of pattern search control blocks (PSCBs) stored in
primary node memory.

PSCBs in secondary
memory

Number of PSCBs stored in secondary node memory.

Leaves in primary

Number of security ACL data entries stored in primary leaf
memory.

Leaves in secondary

Number of ACL data entries stored in secondary leaf
memory.

Sum node depth

Total number of security ACL data entries.

Fragmentation
control

Control value for handling fragmented IP packets.

UC switchdest

Control value for handling fragmented IP packets.

Note: The current MSS version filters only the first packet of
a fragmented IP packet and passes the remaining fragments.
Note: The current MSS version filters only the first packet of
a fragmented IP packet and passes the remaining fragments.

Port number

Control value for handling fragmented IP packets.
Note: The current MSS version filters only the first packet of
a fragmented IP packet and passes the remaining fragments.

Number of action
types

Number of actions that can be performed by ACLs. This
value is always 2, because ACLs can either permit or deny.

436

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

Table 81 Output of display security acl resource-usage (continued)
Field

Description

LUdef in use

Number of the lookup definition (LUdef) table currently in
use for packet handling.

Default action
pointer

Memory address used for packet handling, from which
default action data is obtained when necessary.

L4 global

Security ACL mapping on the WX switch:

No rules

Non-IP rules

„

True — Security ACLs are mapped.

„

False — No security ACLs are mapped.

Security ACE rule mapping on the WX switch:
„

True — No security ACEs are mapped.

„

False — Security ACEs are mapped.

Non-IP security ACE mapping on the WX switch:
„

True — Non-IP security ACEs are mapped.

„

False — Only IP security ACEs are mapped.

Note: The current MSS version supports security ACEs for IP
only.
Root in first

Static default action

No per-user (MAC)
mapping

Out mapping

Leaf buffer allocation:
„

True — Enough primary leaf buffers are allocated in
nonvolatile memory to accommodate all leaves.

„

False — Insufficient primary leaf buffers are allocated in
nonvolatile memory to accommodate all leaves.

Definition of a default action:
„

True — A default action types is defined.

„

False — No default action type is defined.

Per-user application of a security ACL with the Filter-Id
attribute, on the WX switch:
„

True — No security ACLs are applied to users.

„

False — Security ACLs are applied to users.

Application of security ACLs to outgoing traffic on the WX
switch:
„

True — Security ACLs are mapped to outgoing traffic.

„

False — No security ACLs are mapped to outgoing
traffic.

hit-sample-rate

437

Table 81 Output of display security acl resource-usage (continued)
Field

Description

In mapping

Application of security ACLs to incoming traffic on the WX
switch:

No VLAN or PORT
mapping

No VPORT mapping

hit-sample-rate

„

True — Security ACLs are mapped to incoming traffic.

„

False — No security ACLs are mapped to incoming
traffic.

Application of security ACLs to WX VLANs or ports on the
WX switch:
„

True — No security ACLs are mapped to VLANs or ports.

„

False — Security ACLs are mapped to VLANs or ports.

Application of security ACLs to WX virtual ports on the WX
switch:
„

True — No security ACLs are mapped to virtual ports.

„

False — Security ACLs are mapped to virtual ports.

Specifies the time interval, in seconds, at which the packet counter for
each security ACL is sampled for display. The counter counts the number
of packets filtered by the security ACL — or “hits.”
Syntax — hit-sample-rate seconds
„

seconds — Number of seconds between samples. A sample rate of 0
(zero) disables the sample process.

Defaults — By default, the hits are not sampled.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To view counter results for a particular ACL, use the display
security acl info acl-name command. To view the hits for all security
ACLs, use the display security acl hits command.

438

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

Examples — The first command sets MSS to sample ACL hits every
15 seconds. The second and third commands display the results. The
results show that 916 packets matching security acl_153 were sent since
the ACL was mapped.
WX4400# hit-sample-rate 15
WX4400# display security acl info acl_153
ACL information for acl_153
set security acl ip acl_153 (hits #3 916)
--------------------------------------------------------1. permit IP source IP 20.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
WX4400# display security acl hits
ACL hit counters
Index Counter
ACL-name
----- -------------------- ----------1
0 acl_2
2
0 acl_175
3
916 acl_153

See Also

rollback security acl

„

display security acl hits on page 430

„

display security acl info on page 431

Clears changes made to the security ACL edit buffer since it was last
saved. The ACL is rolled back to its state after the last commit security
acl command was entered. All uncommitted ACLs in the edit buffer are
cleared.
Syntax — rollback security acl {acl-name | all}
„

acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to roll back. ACL names

must start with a letter and are case-insensitive.
„

all — Rolls back all security ACLs in the edit buffer, clearing all
uncommitted ACEs.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set security acl

439

Examples — The following commands show the edit buffer before a
rollback, clear any changes in the edit buffer to security acl_122, and
show the edit buffer after the rollback:
WX4400# display security acl info all editbuffer
ACL edit-buffer information for all
set security acl ip acl_122 (ACEs 3, add 3, del 0, modified 0)
--------------------------------------------------------1. permit IP source IP 20.0.1.11 0.0.0.255 destination IP any enable-hits
2. deny IP source IP 20.0.2.11 0.0.0.0 destination IP any
3. deny SRC source IP 192.168.1.234 255.255.255.255 enable-hits
WX4400# rollback security acl acl_122
WX4400# display security acl info all editbuffer
ACL edit-buffer information for all

See Also
„

set security acl

display security acl on page 429

In the edit buffer, creates a security access control list (ACL), adds one
access control entry (ACE) to a security ACL, and/or reorders ACEs in the
ACL. The ACEs in an ACL filter IP packets by source IP address, a Layer 4
protocol, or IP, ICMP, TCP, or UDP packet information.
By source address
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] | deny}
source-ip-addr mask [before editbuffer-index | modify
editbuffer-index] [hits]

By Layer 4 protocol
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] | deny}
protocol-number {source-ip-addr mask destination-ip-addr
mask} [precedence precedence] [tos tos] [before
editbuffer-index | modify editbuffer-index] [hits]

By IP packets
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] | deny}
ip {source-ip-addr mask destination-ip-addr mask} [precedence
precedence] [tos tos] [before editbuffer-index | modify
editbuffer-index] [hits]

440

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

By ICMP packets
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] |
deny} icmp {source-ip-addr mask destination-ip-addr mask [type
icmp-type] [code icmp-code] [precedence precedence ] [tos tos]
[before editbuffer-index | modify editbuffer-index] [hits]

By TCP packets
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] |deny}
tcp {source-ip-addr mask [operator port [port2]]
destination-ip-addr mask [operator port [port2]]} [precedence
precedence] [tos tos] [established] [before editbuffer-index |
modify editbuffer-index] [hits]
By UDP packets
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] | deny}
udp {source-ip-addr mask [operator port [port2]]
destination-ip-addr mask [operator port [port2]]} [precedence
precedence] [tos tos] [before editbuffer-index | modify
editbuffer-index] [hits]
„

acl-name — Security ACL name. ACL names must be unique within
the WX switch, must start with a letter, and are case-insensitive.
Specify an ACL name of up to 32 of the following characters:
„

Letters a through z and A through Z

„

Numbers 0 through 9

„

Hyphen (-), underscore (_), and period (.)

3Com recommends that you do not use the same name with different
capitalizations for ACLs. For example, do not configure two separate
ACLs with the names acl_123 and ACL_123.
In an ACL name, do not include the term all, default-action, map,
help, or editbuffer.
„

permit — Allows traffic that matches the conditions in the ACE.

„

cos cos — For permitted packets, a class-of-service (CoS) level for

packet handling. Specify a value from 0 through 7:
„

1 or 2—Background. Packets are queued in MAP forwarding
queue 4.

set security acl

„

„

441

0 or 3—Best effort. Packets are queued in MAP forwarding
queue 3.
4 or 5—Video. Packets are queued in MAP forwarding queue 2.
Use CoS level 4 or 5 for voice over IP (VoIP) packets other than
SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP).

„

6 or 7—Voice. Packets are queued in MAP forwarding queue 1.
In MSS Version 3.0, use 6 or 7 only for VoIP phones that use SVP,
not for other types of traffic.

„

deny — Blocks traffic that matches the conditions in the ACE.

„

protocol — IP protocol by which to filter packets:
„

ip

„

tcp

„

udp

„

icmp

„

A protocol number between 0 and 255.

(For a complete list of IP protocol names and numbers, see
www.iana.org/assignments/protocol-numbers.)
„

„

source-ip-addr mask — IP address and wildcard mask of the
network or host from which the packet is being sent. Specify both
address and mask in dotted decimal notation. For more information,
see “Wildcard Masks” on page 26.
operator port [port2] — Operand and port number(s) for matching

TCP or UDP packets to the number of the source or destination port
on source-ip-addr or destination-ip-addr. Specify one of the following
operands and the associated port:
„
„

„

eq — Packets are filtered for only port number.
gt — Packets are filtered for all ports that are greater than port
number.
lt — Packets are filtered for all ports that are less than port

number.
„

neq — Packets are filtered for all ports except port number.

„

range — Packets are filtered for ports in the range between port

and port2. To specify a port range, enter two port numbers. Enter
the lower port number first, followed by the higher port number.

442

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

(For a complete list of TCP and UDP port numbers, see
www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers.)
„

destination-ip-addr mask — IP address and wildcard mask of the

network or host to which the packet is being sent. Specify both
address and mask in dotted decimal notation. For more information,
see “Wildcard Masks” on page 26.
„

„

type icmp-type — Filters ICMP messages by type. Specify a value
from 0 through 255. (For a list of ICMP message type and code
numbers, see www.iana.org/assignments/icmp-parameters.)
code icmp-code — For ICMP messages filtered by type, additionally

filters ICMP messages by code. Specify a value from 0 through 255.
(For a list of ICMP message type and code numbers, see
www.iana.org/assignments/icmp-parameters.)
„

„

„

precedence precedence — Filters packets by precedence level.
Specify a value from 0 through 7:
„

0 — routine precedence

„

1 — priority precedence

„

2 — immediate precedence

„

3 — flash precedence

„

4 — flash override precedence

„

5 — critical precedence

„

6 — internetwork control precedence

„

7 — network control precedence

tos tos — Filters packets by type of service (TOS) level. Specify one of
the following values, or any sum of these values up to 15. For
example, a tos value of 9 filters packets with the TOS levels minimum
delay (8) and minimum monetary cost (1).
„

8 — minimum delay

„

4 — maximum throughput

„

2 — maximum reliability

„

1 — minimum monetary cost

„

0 — normal

established — For TCP packets only, applies the ACE only to

established TCP sessions and not to new TCP sessions.

set security acl

„

„

„

443

before editbuffer-index — Inserts the new ACE in front of another
ACE in the security ACL. Specify the number of the existing ACE in the
edit buffer. Index numbers start at 1. (To display the edit buffer, use
display security acl editbuffer.)

modify editbuffer-index — Replaces an ACE in the security ACL
with the new ACE. Specify the number of the existing ACE in the edit
buffer. Index numbers start at 1. (To display the edit buffer, use
display security acl editbuffer.)
hits — Tracks the number of packets that are filtered based on a

security ACL, for all mappings.
Defaults — Permitted packets are assigned to class-of-service (CoS)
class 0 by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The WX switch does not apply security ACLs until you activate
them with the commit security acl command and map them to a VLAN,
port, or virtual port, or to a user. If the WX switch is reset or restarted,
any ACLs in the edit buffer are lost.
You cannot perform ACL functions that include permitting, denying, or
marking with a Class of Service (CoS) level on packets with a multicast or
broadcast destination address.
The order of security ACEs in a security ACL is important. Once an ACL is
active, its ACEs are checked according to their order in the ACL. If an ACE
criterion is met, its action takes place and any ACEs that follow are
ignored.
ACEs are listed in the order in which you create them, unless you move
them. To position security ACEs within a security ACL, use before
editbuffer-index and modify editbuffer-index.
Examples — The following command adds an ACE to security acl_123
that permits packets from IP address 192.168.1.11/24 and counts the
hits:
WX4400# set security acl ip acl_123 permit
192.168.1.11 0.0.0.255 hits

444

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

The following command adds an ACE to acl_123 that denies packets
from IP address 192.168.2.11:
WX4400# set security acl ip acl_123 deny 192.168.2.11
0.0.0.0

The following command creates acl_125 by defining an ACE that denies
TCP packets from source IP address 192.168.0.1 to destination IP address
192.168.0.2 for established sessions only, and counts the hits:
WX4400# set security acl ip acl_125 deny tcp
192.168.0.1 0.0.0.0 192.168.0.2 0.0.0.0 established hits

The following command adds an ACE to acl_125 that denies TCP packets
from source IP address 192.168.1.1 to destination IP address
192.168.1.2, on destination port 80 only, and counts the hits:
WX4400# set security acl ip acl_125 deny tcp
192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.2 0.0.0.0 eq 80 hits

Finally, the following command commits the security ACLs in the edit
buffer to the configuration:
WX4400# commit security acl all
configuration accepted

See Also

set security acl map

„

clear security acl on page 424

„

commit security acl on page 427

„

display security acl on page 429

Assigns a committed security ACL to a VLAN, physical port or ports,
virtual port, or Distributed MAP on the WX switch.
To assign a security ACL to a user or group in the local WX database, use
the command set user attr, set mac-user attr, set usergroup attr, or
set mac-usergroup attr with the Filter-Id attribute. To assign a security
ACL to a user or group with Filter-Id on a RADIUS server, see the
documentation for your RADIUS server.

set security acl map

445

Syntax — set security acl map acl-name {vlan vlan-id |
port port-list [tag tag-list] | dap dap-num} {in | out}
„

acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to map. ACL names

start with a letter and are case-insensitive.
„

„

„

vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS assigns the security
ACL to the specified VLAN.
port port-list — Port list. MSS assigns the security ACL to the
specified physical WX port or ports.
tag tag-list — One or more values that identify a virtual port in a

VLAN. Specify a single tag value from 1 through 4095. Or specify a
comma-separated list of values, a hyphen-separated range, or any
combination, with no spaces. MSS assigns the security ACL to the
specified virtual port or ports.
„

dap dap-num — One or more Distributed MAPs, based on their

connection IDs. Specify a single connection ID, or specify a
comma-separated list of connection IDs, a hyphen-separated range, or
any combination, with no spaces. MSS assigns the security ACL to the
specified Distributed MAPs.
„

in — Assigns the security ACL to traffic coming into the WX switch.

„

out — Assigns the security ACL to traffic coming from the WX switch.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Before you can map a security ACL, you must use the
commit security acl command to save the ACL in the running
configuration and nonvolatile storage.
For best results, map only one input security ACL and one output security
ACL to each VLAN, physical port, virtual port, or Distributed MAP to filter
a flow of packets. If more than one security ACL filters the same traffic,
MSS applies only the first ACL match and ignores any other matches.
Examples — The following command maps security ACL acl_133 to
port 4 for incoming packets:
WX4400 set security acl map acl_133 port 4 in
success: change accepted.

446

CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS

See Also
„

clear security acl map on page 425

„

commit security acl on page 427

„

set mac-user attr on page 246

„

set mac-usergroup attr on page 252

„

set security acl on page 439

„

set user attr on page 257

„

set user group on page 258

„

display security acl map on page 432

13

CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS

Use cryptography commands to configure and manage certificates and
public-private key pairs for system authentication. Depending on your
network configuration, you must create keys and certificates to
authenticate the WX switch to IEEE 802.1X wireless clients for which the
WX switch performs authentication, and to 3Com wireless switch
manager (3WXM) and Web Manager.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents cryptography commands alphabetically. Use
Table 82 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 82 Cryptography Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Encryption Keys

crypto generate key on page 451
display crypto key ssh on page 461

PKCS #7 Certificates

crypto generate request on page 452
crypto ca-certificate on page 448
display crypto ca-certificate on
page 459
crypto certificate on page 449
display crypto certificate on page 460

PKCS #12 Certificate

crypto otp on page 456
crypto pkcs12 on page 457

Self-Signed Certificate crypto generate self-signed on
page 454

448

CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS

crypto ca-certificate

Installs a certificate authority’s own PKCS #7 certificate into the WX
certificate and key storage area.
Syntax — crypto ca-certificate {admin | eap | webaaa}
PEM-formatted certificate
„

admin — Stores the certificate authority’s certificate that signed the

administrative certificate for the WX switch.
The administrative certificate authenticates the WX to 3Com wireless
switch manager (3XWM) or Web Manager.
„

eap — Stores the certificate authority’s certificate that signed the
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) certificate for the WX switch.

The EAP certificate authenticates the WX to 802.1X supplicants
(clients).
„

webaaa — Stores the certificate authority’s certificate that signed the
WebAAA certificate for the WX switch.

The Web certificate authenticates the WX to clients who use
WebAAA.
„

PEM-formatted certificate — ASCII text representation of the

certificate authority PKCS #7 certificate, consisting of up to
4096 characters that you have obtained from the certificate authority.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The Privacy-Enhanced Mail protocol (PEM) format is used for
representing a PKCS #7 certificate in ASCII text. PEM uses base64
encoding to convert the certificate to ASCII text, then puts the encoded
text between the following delimiters:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE---------END CERTIFICATE-----

crypto certificate

449

To use this command, you must already have obtained a copy of the
certificate authority’s certificate as a PKCS #7 object file. Then do the
following:
1 Open the PKCS #7 object file with an ASCII text editor such as Notepad
or vi.
2 Enter the crypto ca-certificate command on the CLI command line.
3 When MSS prompts you for the PEM-formatted certificate, paste the
PKCS #7 object file onto the command line.
Examples — The following command adds the certificate authority’s
certificate to WX certificate and key storage:
WX4400# crypto ca-certificate admin
Enter PEM-encoded certificate
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----MIIDwDCCA2qgAwIBAgIQL2jvuu4PO5FAQCyewU3ojANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQUFADCB
mzerMClaweVQQTTooewi\wpoer0QWNFNkj90044mbdrl1277SWQ8G7DiwYUtrqoQplKJvxz
.....
Lm8wmVYxP56M;CUAm908C2foYgOY40=
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

See Also
„

crypto certificate

display crypto ca-certificate on page 459

Installs one of the WX switch’s PKCS #7 certificates into the certificate
and key storage area on the WX switch. The certificate, which is issued
and signed by a certificate authority, authenticates the WX switch either
to 3WXM or Web Manager, or to 802.1X supplicants (clients).
Syntax — crypto certificate
PEM-formatted certificate
„

{admin | eap | webaaa }

admin — Stores the certificate authority’s administrative certificate,

which authenticates the WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
„

„

eap — Stores the certificate authority’s Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP) certificate, which authenticates the WX switch to
802.1X supplicants (clients).
webaaa — Stores the certificate authority’s WebAAA certificate, which

authenticates the WX to clients who use WebAAA.

450

CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS

„

PEM-formatted certificate — ASCII text representation of the

PKCS #7 certificate, consisting of up to 4096 characters, that you
have obtained from the certificate authority.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use this command, you must already have generated a
certificate request with the crypto generate request command, sent
the request to the certificate authority, and obtained a signed copy of the
WX switch certificate as a PKCS #7 object file. Then do the following:
1 Open the PKCS #7 object file with an ASCII text editor such as Notepad
or vi.
2 Enter the crypto certificate command on the CLI command line.
3 When MSS prompts you for the PEM-formatted certificate, paste the
PKCS #7 object file onto the command line.
The WX switch verifies the validity of the public key associated with this
certificate before installing it, to prevent a mismatch between the WX
switch’s private key and the public key in the installed certificate.
Examples — The following command installs a certificate:
WX4400# crypto certificate admin
Enter PEM-encoded certificate
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----MIIBdTCP3wIBADA2MQswCQYDVQQGEwJVUzELMAkGA1UECBMCQOExGjAYBgNVBAMU
EXR1Y2hwdWJzQHRycHouY29tMIGfMAOGCSqGSIb3DQEBAQAA4GNADCBiQKBgQC4
.....
2L8Q9tk+G2As84QYLm8wmVY>xP56M;CUAm908C2foYgOY40=
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

See Also
„

crypto generate request on page 452

„

crypto generate self-signed on page 454

crypto generate key

crypto generate key

451

Generates an RSA public-private encryption key pair that is required for a
Certificate Signing Request (CSR) or a self-signed certificate. For SSH, the
command generates an SSH authentication key.
Syntax — crypto generate key {admin | eap | ssh | webaaa }
{512 | 1024 | 2048}
„

admin — Generates an administrative key pair for authenticating the

WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
„

„

eap — Generates an EAP key pair for authenticating the WX switch to
802.1X supplicants (clients).
ssh — Generates a key pair for authenticating the WX switch to

Secure Shell (SSH) clients.
„

„

webaaa — Generates an administrative key pair for authenticating the
WX switch to WebAAA clients.
512 | 1024 | 2048 — Length of the key pair in bits.

The minimum key size for SSH is 1024.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can overwrite a key by generating another key of the same
type.
Examples — To generate an administrative key for use with 3WXM, type
the following command:
WX4400# crypto generate key admin 1024
key pair generated

See Also display crypto key ssh on page 461

452

CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS

crypto generate
request

Generates a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). This command outputs a
PEM-formatted PKCS #10 text string that you can cut and paste to
another location for delivery to a certificate authority.
This command generates either an administrative CSR for use with
3WXM and Web Manager, or an EAP CSR for use with 802.1X clients.
Syntax — crypto generate request {admin | eap | webaaa}
„

admin — Generates a request for an administrative certificate to

authenticate the WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
„

„

eap — Generates a request for an EAP certificate to authenticate the
WX switch to 802.1X supplicants (clients).
webaaa — Generates a request for a WebAAA certificate to
authenticate the WX switch to WebAAA clients.

After you type the command, you are prompted for the following
variables:
„

„

Country Name string — (Optional) Specify the abbreviation for the
country in which the WX switch is operating, in 2 alphanumeric
characters with no spaces.
State Name string — (Optional) Specify the abbreviation for the

name of the state, in 2 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
„

Locality Name string — (Optional) Specify the name of the locality,

in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
„

Organizational Name string — (Optional) Specify the name of the

organization, in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
„

Organizational Unit string — (Optional) Specify the name of the

organizational unit, in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no
spaces.
„

Common Name string — Specify a unique name for the WX switch, in

up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces. Use a fully qualified
name if such names are supported on your network. This field is
required.
„

Email Address string — (Optional) Specify your email address, in

up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
„

Unstructured Name string — (Optional) Specify any name, in up to

80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.

crypto generate request

453

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use this command, you must already have generated a
public-private encryption key pair with the crypto generate key
command.
Enter crypto generate request admin, crypto generate request eap,
or crypto generate request webaaa and press Enter. When you are
prompted, type the identifying values in the fields, or press Enter if the
field is optional. You must enter a common name for the WX switch.
This command outputs a PKCS #10 text string in Privacy-Enhanced Mail
protocol (PEM) format that you paste to another location for submission
to the certificate authority. You then send the request to the certificate
authority to obtain a signed copy of the WX switch certificate as a
PKCS #7 object file.
Examples — To request an administrative certificate from a certificate
authority, type the following command:
WX4400# crypto generate request admin
Country Name: US
State Name: CA
Locality Name: Pleasanton
Organizational Name: MyCorp
Organizational Unit: ENG
Common Name: ENG
Email Address: admin@example.com
Unstructured Name: admin
CSR for admin is
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST----MIIBuzCCASQCAQAwezELMAkGA1UEBhMCdXMxCzAJBgNVBAgTAmNhMQswCQYDVQQH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-----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----

454

CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS

See Also

crypto generate
self-signed

„

crypto certificate on page 449

„

crypto generate key on page 451

Generates a self-signed certificate for either an administrative certificate
for use with 3WXM or an EAP certificate for use with 802.1X wireless
users.
Syntax — crypto generate self-signed {admin | eap | webaaa}
„

admin — Generates an administrative certificate to authenticate the

WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
„

eap — Generates an EAP certificate to authenticate the WX switch to

802.1X supplicants (clients).
„

webaaa — Generates a WebAAA certificate to authenticate the WX
switch to WebAAA clients.

After you type the command, you are prompted for the following
variables:
„

Country Name string — (Optional) Specify the abbreviation for the

country in which the WX switch is operating, in 2 alphanumeric
characters with no spaces.
„

State Name string — (Optional) Specify the abbreviation for the

name of the state, in 2 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
„

„

Locality Name string — (Optional) Specify the name of the locality,
in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Organizational Name string — (Optional) Specify the name of the

organization, in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
„

Organizational Unit string — (Optional) Specify the name of the

organizational unit, in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no
spaces.
„

Common Name string — Specify a unique name for the WX switch, in

up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces. Use a fully qualified
name if such names are supported on your network. This field is
required.

crypto generate self-signed

455

Note: If you are generating a WebAAA (webaaa) certificate, use a
common name that looks like a domain name (two or more strings
connected by dots, with no spaces). For example, use common.name
instead of common name. The string is not required to be an actual
domain name. It simply needs to be formatted like one.
„

Email Address string — (Optional) Specify your email address, in up

to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
„

Unstructured Name string — (Optional) Specify any name, in up to

80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use this command, you must already have generated a
public-private encryption key pair with the crypto generate key
command.
To generate a self-signed administrative certificate, type the following
command:
WX4400# crypto generate self-signed admin
Country Name:
State Name:
Locality Name:
Organizational Name:
Organizational Unit:
Common Name: wx1@example.com
Email Address:
Unstructured Name:
CSR for admin is
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----MIICzzCCAjigAwIBAgICA+cwDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEEBQAwdDELMAkGA1UEBhMCY2Ex
CzAJBgNVBAgTAmNhMQswCQYDVQQHEwJjYTELMAkGA1UEChMCY2ExCzAJBgNVBAsT
AmNhMQswCQYDVQQDEwJjYTERMA8GCSqGSIb3DQEJARYCY2ExETAPBgkqhkiG9w0B
CQITAmNhMB4XDTAwMDMwNTIwMjUxN1oXDTAxMDMwNTIwMjUxN1owdDELMAkGA1UE
BhMCY2ExCzAJBgNVBAgTAmNhMQswCQYDVQQHEwJjYTELMAkGA1UEChMCY2ExCzAJ
BgNVBAsTAmNhMQswCQYDVQQDEwJjYTERMA8GCSqGSIb3DQEJARYCY2ExETAPBgkq
hkiG9w0BCQITAmNhMIGfMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBAQUAA4GNADCBiQKBgQDXNq2lhK06
McxrRAmZYd5k88UZD2QESKYko8ZvOcWMALvzQZxm2ck8aqcyc4qP/g12SeidPo10
J3Z8F0Zu4QUY0w2BkxgoZxXYki4zfZK+lIQ4Scxi6J2QTOotCiXrbW+HrtEzUpMw
QIzq4IEFE6rpc3KkgefWC2uukv8uHIZNZQIDAQABo3AwbjARBglghkgBhvhCAQEE

456

CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS

BAMCBkAwSAYJYIZIAYb4QgENBDsWOXRoaXMgY2VydGlmaWNhdGUgaXMgY29tcGxl
dGVseSB1bnRydXN0d29ydGh5LiBJcyB0aGF0IE9LPzAPBgNVHRMBAf8EBTADAQH/
MA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBAUAA4GBAHUOhMG/Zbgojvxb+hopdNzWmjAL8Cr8lX4/g2W2
clyq55Y3SF+L6CmGxUmlLR5ZsM9KuEIZLPtKsCurIhiPft4g52fkCC/EdibxXlUb
kw8IUADwGiE1T21OM8vmm4EIKM7tyyEF0b94dqFxZQfSsJp+Up6d8LBnBRYDxzPd
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

See Also

crypto otp

„

crypto certificate on page 449

„

crypto generate key on page 451

Sets a one-time password (OTP) for use with the crypto pkcs12
command.
Syntax — crypto otp {admin | eap | webaaa} one-time-password
„

admin — Creates a one-time password for installing a PKCS #12

object file for an administrative certificate and key pair—and
optionally the certificate authority’s own certificate—to authenticate
the WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
„

eap — Creates a one-time password for installing a PKCS #12 object

file for an EAP certificate and key pair—and optionally the certificate
authority’s own certificate—to authenticate the WX switch to 802.1X
supplicants (clients).
„

„

webaaa — Creates a one-time password for installing a PKCS #12
object file for a WebAAA certificate and key pair—and optionally the
certificate authority’s own certificate—to authenticate the WX switch
to WebAAA clients.
one-time-password — Password of at least 1 alphanumeric

character, with no spaces, for clients other than Microsoft Windows
clients. The password must be the same as the password protecting
the PKCS #12 object file.
Note: On an WX switch that handles communications to and from
Microsoft Windows clients, use a one-time password of 31 characters
or fewer.
The following characters cannot be used as part of the one-time
password of a PKCS #12 file:
„

Quotation marks (“ ”)

crypto pkcs12

„

Question mark (?)

„

Ampersand (&)

457

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The password allows the public-private key pair and certificate
to be installed together from the same PKCS #12 object file. MSS erases
the one-time password after processing the crypto pkcs12 command or
when you reboot the WX switch.
3Com recommends that you create a password that is memorable to you
but is not subject to easy guesses or a dictionary attack. For best results,
create a password of alphanumeric uppercase and lowercase characters.
Examples — The following command creates the one-time password
hap9iN#ss for installing an EAP certificate and key pair:
WX4400# crypto generate otp eap hap9iN#ss
OTP set

See Also
„

crypto pkcs12

crypto pkcs12 on page 457

Unpacks a PKCS #12 object file into the certificate and key storage area
on the WX switch. This object file contains a public-private key pair, an
WX certificate signed by a certificate authority, and the certificate
authority’s certificate.
Syntax — crypto pkcs12 {admin | eap | webaaa} file-location-url
„

admin — Unpacks a PKCS #12 object file for an administrative

certificate and key pair — and optionally the certificate authority’s
own certificate — for authenticating the WX switch to 3WXM or Web
Manager.
„

eap — Unpacks a PKCS #12 object file for an EAP certificate and key

pair — and optionally the certificate authority’s own certificate — for
authenticating the WX switch to 802.1X supplicants (clients).

458

CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS

„

„

webaaa — Unpacks a PKCS #12 object file for a WebAAA certificate
and key pair — and optionally the certificate authority’s own
certificate — for authenticating the WX switch to WebAAA clients.
file-location-url — Location of the PKCS #12 object file to be

installed. Specify a location of between 1 and 128 alphanumeric
characters, with no spaces.
Defaults — The password you enter with the crypto otp command
must be the same as the one protecting the PKCS #12 file.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use this command, you must have already created a
one-time password with the crypto otp command.
You must also have the PKCS #12 object file available. You can download
a PKCS #12 object file via TFTP from a remote location to the local
nonvolatile storage system on the WX switch.
Examples — The following commands copy a PKCS #12 object file for
an EAP certificate and key pair—and optionally the certificate authority’s
own certificate—from a TFTP server to nonvolatile storage on the WX
switch, create the one-time password hap9iN#ss, and unpack the
PKCS #12 file:
WX4400# copy tftp://192.168.253.1/2048full.p12 2048full.p12
success: received 637 bytes in 0.253 seconds [ 2517
bytes/sec]
WX4400# crypto otp eap hap9iN#ss
OTP set
WX4400# crypto pkcs12 eap 2048full.p12
Unwrapped from PKCS12 file:
keypair
device certificate
CA certificate

See Also
„

crypto otp on page 456

display crypto ca-certificate

display crypto
ca-certificate

459

Displays information about the certificate authority’s PEM-encoded
PKCS #7 certificate.
Syntax — display crypto ca-certificate {admin | eap | webaaa}
„

admin — Displays information about the certificate authority’s

certificate that signed the administrative certificate for the WX switch.
The administrative certificate authenticates the WX to 3WXM or Web
Manager.
„

eap — Displays information about the certificate authority’s certificate
that signed the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) certificate for
the WX switch.

The EAP certificate authenticates the WX switch to 802.1X supplicants
(clients).
„

webaaa — Displays information about the certificate authority’s
certificate that signed the WebAAA certificate for the WX switch.

The WebAAA certificate authenticates the WX switch to WebAAA
clients.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display information about the certificate of a certificate
authority, type the following command:
WX4400# display crypto ca-certificate

Table 83 describes the fields in the display.
Table 83 display crypto ca-certificate Output
Fields

Description

Version

Version of the X.509 certificate.

Serial Number

A unique identifier for the certificate or signature.

Subject

Name of the certificate owner.

Signature Algorithm

Algorithm that created the signature, such as RSA MD5 or
RSA SHA.

460

CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS

Table 83 display crypto ca-certificate Output (continued)
Issuer

Certificate authority that issued the certificate or
signature.

Validity

Time period for which the certificate is valid.

See Also

display crypto
certificate

„

crypto ca-certificate on page 448

„

display crypto certificate on page 460

Displays information about one of the cryptographic certificates installed
on the WX switch.
Syntax — display crypto certificate {admin | eap | webaaa}
„

admin — Displays information about the administrative certificate that

authenticates the WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
„

„

eap — Displays information about the EAP certificate that
authenticates the WX switch to 802.1X supplicants (clients).
webaaa — Displays information about the WebAAA certificate that

authenticates the WX switch to WebAAA clients.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must have generated a self-signed certificate or obtained a
certificate from a certificate authority before displaying information about
the certificate.
Examples — To display information about a cryptographic certificate,
type the following command:
WX4400# display crypto certificate eap

Table 84 describes the fields of the display.

display crypto key ssh

461

Table 84 crypto certificate Output
Fields

Description

Version

Version of the X.509 certificate.

Serial Number

A unique identifier for the certificate or signature.

Subject

Name of the certificate owner.

Signature Algorithm

Algorithm that created the signature, such as RSA MD5 or
RSA SHA.

Issuer

Certificate authority that issued the certificate or
signature.

Validity

Time period for which the certificate is valid.

See Also

display crypto key
ssh

„

crypto generate self-signed on page 454

„

display crypto ca-certificate on page 459

Displays SSH authentication key information. This command displays the
checksum (also called a fingerprint) of the public SSH authentication key.
When you connect to the WX switch with an SSH client, you can
compare the SSH key checksum displayed by the WX switch with the one
displayed by the client to verify that you really are connected to the WX
switch and not another device. Generally, SSH clients remember the
encryption key after the first connection, so you need to check the key
only once.
Syntax — display crypto key ssh
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display SSH key information, type the following
command:
WX4400# display crypto key ssh
ec:6f:56:7f:d1:fd:c0:28:93:ae:a4:f9:7c:f5:13:04

See Also crypto generate key on page 451

462

CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS

14

RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP
COMMANDS

Use RADIUS commands to set up communication between an WX switch
and groups of up to four RADIUS servers for remote authentication,
authorization, and accounting (AAA) of administrators and network
users.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents RADIUS commands alphabetically. Use Table 85 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their uses.
Table 85 RADIUS Commands by Usage
Type

Command

RADIUS Client

set radius client system-ip on page 469
clear radius client system-ip on page 465

RADIUS Servers set radius on page 468
set radius server on page 472
clear radius on page 464
clear radius server on page 467
Server Groups

set server group on page 474
set server group load-balance on
page 475
clear server group on page 467

RADIUS Proxy

set radius proxy client on page 470
set radius proxy port on page 471
clear radius proxy client on page 466
clear radius proxy port on page 466

(For information about RADIUS attributes, see the RADIUS appendix in
the Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.)

464

CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS

clear radius

Resets parameters that were globally configured for RADIUS servers to
their default values.
Syntax — clear radius {deadtime | key | retransmit |
timeout }
„

„

deadtime — Number of minutes to wait after declaring an
unresponsive RADIUS server unavailable before retrying the RADIUS
server.
key — Password (shared secret key) used to authenticate to the

RADIUS server.
„

retransmit — Number of transmission attempts made before

declaring an unresponsive RADIUS server unavailable.
„

timeout — Number of seconds to wait for the RADIUS server to

respond before retransmitting.
Defaults — Global RADIUS parameters have the following default
values:
„

„
„

„

deadtime—0 (zero) minutes (The WX switch does not designate
unresponsive RADIUS servers as unavailable.)
key—No key
retransmit—3 (the total number of attempts, including the first
attempt)
timeout—5 seconds

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To override the globally set values on a particular RADIUS
server, use the set radius server command.
Examples — To reset all global RADIUS parameters to their factory
defaults, type the following commands:
WX4400# clear radius deadtime
success: change accepted.
WX4400# clear radius key
success: change accepted.
WX4400# clear radius retransmit
success: change accepted.

clear radius client system-ip

465

WX4400# clear radius timeout
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear radius client
system-ip

„

set radius on page 468

„

set radius server on page 472

„

display aaa on page 217

Removes the WX switch’s system IP address from use as the permanent
source address in RADIUS client requests from the switch to its RADIUS
server(s).
Syntax — clear radius client system-ip
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The clear radius client system-ip command causes the WX
switch to use the IP address of the interface through which it sends a
RADIUS client request as the source IP address. The WX switch selects a
source interface address based on information in its routing table as the
source address for RADIUS packets leaving the switch.
Examples — To clear the system IP address as the permanent source
address for RADIUS client requests, type the following command:
WX4400# clear radius client system-ip
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display aaa on page 217

„

set radius client system-ip on page 469

466

CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS

clear radius proxy
client

Removes a RADIUS proxy client entry for a third-party AP.
Syntax — clear radius proxy client all
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears all RADIUS proxy client
entries from the switch:
WX-1200# clear radius proxy client all
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear radius proxy
port

set radius proxy client on page 470

Removes a RADIUS proxy port configured for a third-party AP.
Syntax — clear radius proxy port all
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears all RADIUS proxy port
entries from the switch:
WX-1200# clear radius proxy port all
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set radius proxy port on page 471

clear radius server

clear radius server

467

Removes the named RADIUS server from the WX configuration.
Syntax — clear radius server server-name
„

server-name — Name of a RADIUS server configured to perform
remote AAA services for the WX switch.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the RADIUS server rs42
from a list of remote AAA servers:
WX4400# clear radius server rs42
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear server group

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set radius server on page 472

Removes a RADIUS server group from the configuration, or disables load
balancing for the group.
Syntax — clear server group group-name [load-balance]
„

group-name — Name of a RADIUS server group configured to perform

remote AAA services for WX switches.
„

load-balance — Ability of group members to share demand for

services among servers.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Deleting a server group removes the server group from the
configuration. However, the members of the server group remain.

468

CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS

Examples — To remove the server group sg-77 type the following
command:
WX4400# clear server group sg-77
success: change accepted.

To disable load balancing in a server group shorebirds, type the following
command:
WX4400# set server group shorebirds load-balance disable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

set radius

set server group on page 474

Configures global defaults for RADIUS servers that do not explicitly set
these values themselves. By default, the WX switch automatically sets all
these values except the password (key).
Syntax — set radius {deadtime minutes | key string |
retransmit number | timeout seconds}
„

deadtime minutes — Number of minutes the WX switch waits after

declaring an unresponsive RADIUS server unavailable before retrying
the RADIUS server. You can specify from 0 to 1440 minutes.
„

key string — Password (shared secret key) used to authenticate to

the RADIUS server. You must provide the same password that is
defined on the RADIUS server. The password can be 1 to 32
characters long, with no spaces or tabs.
„

retransmit number — Number of transmission attempts the WX

switch makes before declaring an unresponsive RADIUS server
unavailable. You can specify from 1 to 100 retries.
„

timeout seconds — Number of seconds the WX switch waits for the

RADIUS server to respond before retransmitting. You can specify from
1 to 65,535.
Defaults — Global RADIUS parameters have the following default
values:
„

„

deadtime — 0 (zero) minutes (The WX switch does not designate
unresponsive RADIUS servers as unavailable.)
key — No key

set radius client system-ip

„

„

469

retransmit — 3 (the total number of attempts, including the first
attempt)
timeout — 5 seconds

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can specify only one parameter per command line.
Examples — The following commands sets the dead time to 5 minutes,
the RADIUS key to goody, the number of retransmissions to 1, and the
timeout to 21 seconds on all RADIUS servers connected to the WX
switch:
WX1200# set radius deadtime 5
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set radius key goody
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set radius retransmit 1
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set radius timeout 21
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radius client
system-ip

„

clear radius server on page 467

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set radius server on page 472

Causes all RADIUS requests to be sourced from the IP address specified by
the set system ip-address command, providing a permanent source IP
address for RADIUS packets sent from the WX switch.
Syntax — set radius client system-ip
Defaults — None. If you do not use this command, RADIUS packets
leaving the WX have the source IP address of the outbound interface,
which can change as routing conditions change.
Examples — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

470

CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS

Usage — The WX system IP address must be set before you use this
command.
Examples — The following command sets the WX system IP address as
the address of the RADIUS client:
WX4400# set radius client system-ip
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radius proxy
client

„

clear radius client system-ip on page 465

„

set system ip-address on page 57

Adds a RADIUS proxy entry for a third-party AP. The proxy entry specifies
the IP address of the AP and the UDP port on which the WX switch listens
for RADIUS traffic from the AP.
Syntax — set radius proxy client address ip-address
[port udp-port-number] key string
„

address ip-address — IP address of the third-party AP. Enter the

address in dotted decimal notation.
„

„

port udp-port-number — UDP port on which the WX switch listens
for RADIUS traffic from the AP.
key string — Password (shared secret key) the WX switch uses to

authenticate and encrypt RADIUS communication.
Defaults — The default UDP port number is 1812.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — AAA for third-party AP users has additional configuration
requirements. See the “Configuring AAA for Users of Third-Party APs”
section in the “Configuring AAA for Network Users” chapter of the
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.
Examples — The following command configures a RADIUS proxy entry
for a third-party AP RADIUS client at 10.20.20.9, sending RADIUS traffic
to the default UDP port 1812 on the WX:

set radius proxy port

471

WX-1200# set radius proxy client address 10.20.20.9 key
radkey1
success: change accepted.

See Also

set radius proxy
port

„

clear radius proxy client on page 466

„

set authentication proxy on page 238

„

set radius proxy port on page 471

Configures the WX port connected to a third-party AP as a RADIUS proxy
for the SSID supported by the AP.
Syntax — set radius proxy port port-list [tag tag-value]
ssid ssid-name
„
„

„

port-list — WX port(s) connected to the third-party AP.
tag tag-value — 802.1Q tag value in packets sent by the
third-party AP for the SSID.
ssid ssid-name — SSID supported by the third-party AP.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — AAA for third-party AP users has additional configuration
requirements. See the “Configuring AAA for Users of Third-Party APs”
section in the “Configuring AAA for Network Users” chapter of the
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.
Enter a separate command for each SSID, and its tag value, you want the
WX to support.
Examples — The following command maps SSID mycorp to packets
received on port 3 or 4, using 802.1Q tag value 104:
WX-1200# set radius proxy port 3-4 tag 104 ssid mycorp
success: change accepted.

472

CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS

See Also

set radius server

„

clear radius proxy port on page 466

„

set authentication proxy on page 238

„

set radius proxy client on page 470

Configures RADIUS servers and their parameters. By default, the WX
switch automatically sets all these values except the password (key).
Syntax — set radius server server-name
[address ip-address] [auth-port port-number] [acct-port
port-number] [timeout seconds] [retransmit number] [deadtime
minutes] [key string] [author-password password]
„

server-name — Unique name for this RADIUS server. Enter an

alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters, with no blanks.
„

address ip-address — IP address of the RADIUS server. Enter the

address in dotted decimal notation.
„

„

auth-port port-number — UDP port that the WX switch uses for
authentication and authorization.
acct-port port-number — UDP port that the WX switch uses for

accounting.
„

timeout seconds — Number of seconds the WX switch waits for the

RADIUS server to respond before retransmitting. You can specify from
1 to 65,535 seconds.
„

retransmit number — Number of transmission attempts made

before declaring an unresponsive RADIUS server unavailable. You can
specify from 1 to 100 retries.
„

deadtime minutes — Number of minutes the WX switch waits after

declaring an unresponsive RADIUS server unavailable before retrying
that RADIUS server. Specify between 0 (zero) and 1440 minutes
(24 hours). A zero value causes the switch to identify unresponsive
servers as available.
„

key string — Password (shared secret key) the WX switch uses to

authenticate to the RADIUS server. You must provide the same
password that is defined on the RADIUS server. The password can be
1 to 32 characters long, with no spaces or tabs.

set radius server

„

473

author-password password — Password used for authorization to a

RADIUS server for MAC users. Specify a password of up to
32 alphanumeric characters with no spaces or tabs.
Defaults — Default values are listed below:
„

auth-port — UDP port 1812

„

acct-port — UDP port 1813

„

timeout — 5 seconds

„

„

„
„

retransmit — 3 (the total number of attempts, including the first
attempt)
deadtime — 0 (zero) minutes (The WX switch does not designate
unresponsive RADIUS servers as unavailable.)
key — No key
author-password — When using RADIUS for authentication, a MAC
user’s MAC address is also used as the default authorization password
for that user, and no global authorization password is set. A last-resort
user’s default authorization password is 3Com.

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — For a given RADIUS server, the first instance of this command
must set both the server name and the IP address and can include any or
all of the other optional parameters. Subsequent instances of this
command can be used to set optional parameters for a given RADIUS
server.
To configure the server as a remote authenticator for the WX switch, you
must add it to a server group with the set server group command.
Do not use the same name for a RADIUS server and a RADIUS server
group.
Examples — To set a RADIUS server named RS42 with IP address
198.162.1.1 to use the default accounting and authorization ports with a
timeout interval of 30 seconds, two transmit attempts, 5 minutes of dead
time, and a key string of keys4u, type the following command:
WX1200# set radius server RS42 address 198.162.1.1 timeout 30
retransmit 2 deadtime 5 key keys4U

474

CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS

See Also

set server group

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set authentication admin on page 226

„

set authentication console on page 228

„

set authentication dot1x on page 230

„

set authentication last-resort on page 234

„

set authentication mac on page 236

„

set authentication web on page 239

„

set radius on page 468

„

set server group on page 474

Configures a group of one to four RADIUS servers.
Syntax — set server group group-name members server-name1
[server-name2] [server-name3] [server-name4]
„

group-name — Server group name of up to 32 characters, with no

spaces or tabs.
„

members server-name1, server-name2, server-name3,
server-name4 — The names of one or more configured RADIUS

servers. You can enter up to four server names.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must assign all group members simultaneously, as shown
in the example. To enable load balancing, use set server group
load-balance enable.
Do not use the same name for a RADIUS server and a RADIUS server
group.
Examples — To set server group shorebirds with members heron, egret,
and sandpiper, type the following command:
WX1200# set server group shorebirds members heron egret

set server group load-balance

475

sandpiper
success: change accepted.

See Also

set server group
load-balance

„

clear server group on page 467

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set server group load-balance on page 475

Enables or disables load balancing among the RADIUS servers in a server
group.
Syntax — set server group group-name load-balance
{enable | disable}
„

group-name — Server group name of up to 32 characters.

„

load-balance enable | disable — Enables or disables load

balancing of authentication requests among the servers in the group.
Defaults — Load balancing is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can optionally enable load balancing after assigning the
server group members. If you configure load balancing, MSS sends each
AAA request to a separate server, starting with the first one on the list
and skipping unresponsive servers. If no server in the group responds,
MSS moves to the next method configured with set authentication and
set accounting.
In contrast, if load balancing is not configured, MSS always begins with
the first server in the list and sends unfulfilled requests to each
subsequent server in the group before moving on to the next configured
AAA method.
Examples — To enable load balancing between the members of server
group shorebirds, type the following command:
WX1200# set server group shorebirds load-balance enable
success: change accepted.

476

CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS

To disable load balancing between shorebirds server group members,
type the following command:
WX1200# set server group shorebirds load-balance disable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear server group on page 467

„

clear radius server on page 467

„

display aaa on page 217

„

set server group on page 474

15

802.1X MANAGEMENT
COMMANDS

Use 802. IEEE X management commands to modify the default settings
for IEEE 802.1X sessions on an WX switch. For best results, change the
settings only if you are aware of a problem with the WX switch’s 802.1X
performance.
CAUTION: 802.1X parameter settings are global for all SSIDs configured
on the switch.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents 802.1X commands alphabetically. Use Table 86 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their use. For information
about configuring 802.1X commands for user authentication, see “AAA
Commands” on page 199.
Table 86 802.1X Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Wired Authentication Port
Control

set dot1x port-control on page 490
clear dot1x port-control on page 479
set dot1x authcontrol on page 486

Keys

set dot1x key-tx on page 488
set dot1x tx-period on page 494
clear dot1x tx-period on page 483
set dot1x wep-rekey on page 495
set dot1x wep-rekey-period on page 496

Bonded Authentication

clear dot1x bonded-period on page 478
set dot1x bonded-period on page 487

Reauthentication

set dot1x reauth on page 491
set dot1x reauth-max on page 492

478

CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Table 86 802.1X Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command

Reauthentication, cont.

clear dot1x reauth-max on page 481
set dot1x reauth-period on page 493
clear dot1x reauth-period on page 481

Retransmission

set dot1x max-req on page 489
clear dot1x max-req on page 479

Quiet Period and Timeouts

set dot1x quiet-period on page 491
clear dot1x quiet-period on page 480
set dot1x timeout auth-server on page 493
clear dot1x timeout auth-server on
page 482
set dot1x timeout supplicant on page 494
clear dot1x timeout supplicant on page 482

Settings, Active Clients, and
Statistics

clear dot1x
bonded-period

display dot1x on page 483

Resets the Bonded Auth period to its default value.
Syntax — clear dot1x bonded-period
Defaults — The default bonded authentication period is 0 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To reset the Bonded period to its default, type the following
command:
WX4400# clear dot1x bonded-period
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x bonded-period on page 487

clear dot1x max-req

clear dot1x max-req

479

Resets to the default setting the number of Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP) requests that the WX switch retransmits to a supplicant
(client).
Syntax — clear dot1x max-req
Defaults — The default number is 20.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To reset the number of 802.1X requests the WX can send
to the default setting, type the following command:
WX4400# clear dot1x max-req
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear dot1x
port-control

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x max-req on page 489

Resets all wired authentication ports on the WX switch to default 802.1X
authentication.
Syntax — clear dot1x port-control
By default, all wired authentication ports are set to auto and they process
authentication requests as determined by the set authentication dot1X
command.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command is overridden by the set dot1x authcontrol
command. The clear dot1x port-control command returns port control
to the method configured. This command applies only to wired
authentication ports.

480

CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Examples — Type the following command to reset the wired
authentication port control:
WX4400# clear dot1x port-control
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear dot1x
quiet-period

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x port-control on page 490

Resets the quiet period after a failed authentication to the default setting.
Syntax — clear dot1x quiet-period
Defaults — The default is 60 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to reset the 802.1X quiet
period to the default:
WX4400# clear dot1x quiet-period
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x quiet-period on page 491

clear dot1x reauth-max

clear dot1x
reauth-max

Resets the maximum number of reauthorization attempts to the default
setting.
Syntax — clear dot1x reauth-max
Defaults — The default is 2 attempts.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to reset the maximum
number of reauthorization attempts to the default:
WX4400# clear dot1x reauth-max
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear dot1x
reauth-period

481

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x reauth-max on page 492

Resets the time period that must elapse before a reauthentication
attempt, to the default time period.
Syntax — clear dot1x reauth-period
Defaults — The default is 3600 seconds (1 hour).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to reset the default
reauthentication time period:
WX4400# clear dot1x reauth-period
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x reauth-period on page 493

482

CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

clear dot1x timeout
auth-server

Resets to the default setting the number of seconds that must elapse
before the WX times out a request to a RADIUS server.
Syntax — clear dot1x timeout auth-server
Defaults — The default is 30 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To reset the default timeout for requests to an
authentication server, type the following command:
WX4400# clear dot1x timeout auth-server
success: change accepted.

See Also

clear dot1x timeout
supplicant

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x timeout auth-server on page 493

Resets to the default setting the number of seconds that must elapse before
the WX switch times out an authentication session with a supplicant (client).
Syntax — clear dot1x timeout supplicant
Defaults — The default for the authentication timeout sessions is
30 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to reset the timeout period
for an authentication session:
WX4400# clear dot1x timeout supplicant
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x timeout supplicant on page 494

clear dot1x tx-period

clear dot1x
tx-period

483

Resets to the default setting the number of seconds that must elapse
before the WX switch retransmits an EAP over LAN (EAPoL) packet.
Syntax — clear dot1x tx-period
Defaults — The default is 5 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to reset the EAPoL
retransmission time:
WX4400# clear dot1x tx-period
success: change accepted.

See Also

display dot1x

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x tx-period on page 494

Displays 802.1X client information for statistics and configuration
settings.
Syntax — display dot1x {clients | stats | config}
„

„

clients — Displays information about active 802.1X clients,
including client name, MAC address, and state.
stats — Displays global 802.1X statistics associated with connecting

and authenticating.
„

config — Displays a summary of the current configuration.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

484

CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Format of 802.1X
authentication rule information in display dot1x config output
changed in MSS Version 3.2. The rules are still listed at the top of the
display, but more information is shown for each rule.
Examples — Type the following command to display the 802.1X clients:
WX4400# display dot1x clients
MAC Address
State
------------------00:20:a6:48:01:1f
Connecting
00:05:3c:07:6d:7c
Authenticated
00:05:5d:7e:94:83
Authenticated
00:02:2d:86:bd:38
Authenticated
00:05:5d:7e:97:b4
Authenticated
00:05:5d:7e:98:1a
Authenticated
00:0b:be:a9:dc:4e
Authenticated
00:05:5d:7e:96:e3
Authenticated
00:02:2d:6f:44:77
Authenticated
00:05:5d:7e:94:89
Authenticated
00:06:80:00:5c:02
Authenticated
00:02:2d:6a:de:f2
Authenticated
00:02:2d:5e:5b:76
Authenticated
00:02:2d:80:b6:e1
Authenticated
00:30:65:16:8d:69
Authenticated
00:02:2d:64:8e:1b
Authenticated

Vlan
-----(unknown)
vlan-it
vlan-eng
vlan-eng
vlan-eng
vlan-eng
vlan-pm
vlan-eng
vlan-eng
vlan-eng
vlan-eng
vlan-pm
vlan-pm
vlan-cs
vlan-wep
vlan-eng

Identity
---------EXAMPLE\jose
EXAMPLE\singh
bard@xmple.com
EXAMPLE\havel
EXAMPLE\nash
xalik@xmple.com
EXAMPLE\mishan
EXAMPLE\ethan
EXAMPLE\fmarshall
EXAMPLE\bmccarthy
neailey@xmple.com
EXAMPLE\tamara
dmc@xmple.com
MAC authenticated
EXAMPLE\wong

Type the following command to display the 802.1X configuration:
WX1200# display dot1x config
802.1X user policy
---------------------'host/bob-laptop.mycorp.com' on ssid 'mycorp' doing PASSTHRU
'bob.mycorp.com' on ssid 'mycorp' doing PASSTHRU (bonded)

display dot1x

802.1X parameter
---------------supplicant timeout
auth-server timeout
quiet period
transmit period
reauthentication period
maximum requests
key transmission
reauthentication
authentication control
WEP rekey period
WEP rekey
Bonded period
port
port
port
port

5,
6,
7,
8,

authcontrol:
authcontrol:
authcontrol:
authcontrol:

auto,
auto,
auto,
auto,

setting
------30
30
5
5
3600
2
enabled
enabled
enabled
1800
enabled
60
max-sessions:
max-sessions:
max-sessions:
max-sessions:

16
1
1
1

Type the following command to display 802.1X statistics:
WX4400# display dot1x stats
802.1X statistic
---------------Enters Connecting:
Logoffs While Connecting:
Enters Authenticating:
Success While Authenticating:
Timeouts While Authenticating:
Failures While Authenticating:
Reauths While Authenticating:
Starts While Authenticating:
Logoffs While Authenticating:
Starts While Authenticated:
Logoffs While Authenticated:
Bad Packets Received:

value
----709
112
467
0
52
0
0
31
0
85
1
0

Table 87 explains the counters in the display dot1x stats output.

485

486

CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Table 87 display dot1x stats Output
Field

Description

Enters Connecting

Number of times that the WX switch state transitions to the
CONNECTING state from any other state.

Logoffs While
Connecting

Number of times that the WX switch state transitions from
CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an
EAPoL-Logoff message.

Enters Authenticating Number of times that the state wildcard transitions.
Success While
Authenticating

Number of times the WX switch state transitions from
AUTHENTICATING from AUTHENTICATED, as a result of an
EAP-Response/Identity message being received from the
supplicant (client).

Timeouts While
Authenticating

Number of times that the WX switch state wildcard
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING.

Failures While
Authenticating

Number of times that the WX switch state wildcard
transitions from AUTHENTICATION to HELD.

Reauths While
Authenticating

Number of times that the WX switch state wildcard
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result
of a reauthentication request (reAuthenticate = TRUE).

Starts While
Authenticating

Number of times that the WX switch state wildcard
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result
of an EAPoL-Start message being received from the
Supplicant (client).

Logoffs While
Authenticating

Number of times that the WX switch state wildcard
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result
of an EAPoL-logoff message being received from the
Supplicant (client).

Bad Packets Received Number of EAPoL packets received that have an invalid
version or type.

set dot1x
authcontrol

Provides a global override mechanism for 802.1X authentication
configuration on wired authentication ports.
Syntax — set dot1x authcontrol {enable | disable}
„

„

enable — Allows all wired authentication ports running 802.1X to
use the authentication specified per port by the set dot1X
port-control command.
disable — Forces all wired authentication ports running 802.1X to

unconditionally accept all 802.1X authentication attempts with an
EAP Success message (ForceAuth).

set dot1x bonded-period

487

Defaults — By default, authentication control for individual wired
authentication is enabled.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command applies only to wired authentication ports.
Examples — To enable per-port 802.1X authentication on wired
authentication ports, type the following command:
WX4400# set dot1x authcontrol enable
success: dot1x authcontrol enabled.

See Also

set dot1x
bonded-period

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x port-control on page 490

Changes the Bonded Auth™ (bonded authentication) period, which is
the number of seconds MSS retains session information for an
authenticated machine while waiting for the 802.1X client on the
machine to start (re)authentication for the user.
You must set the bonded period to longer than 0 seconds to enable
bonded authentication.
Syntax — set dot1x bonded-period seconds
„

seconds — Number of seconds MSS retains session information for an

authenticated machine while waiting for a client to (re)authenticate
on the same machine. You can change the bonded authentication
period to a value from 1 to 300 seconds.
Defaults — The default bonded period is 0 seconds, which disables the
feature.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

488

CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Usage — Normally, the Bonded Auth period needs to be set only if the
network has Bonded Auth clients that use dynamic WEP, or use WEP-40
or WEP-104 encryption with WPA or RSN. These clients can be affected
by the 802.1X reauthentication parameter or the RADIUS
Session-Timeout parameter.
3Com recommends that you try 60 seconds, and change the period to a
longer value only if clients are unable to authenticate within 60 seconds.
The bonded authentication period applies only to 802.1X authentication
rules that contain the bonded option.
Examples — To set the bonded authentication period to 60 seconds,
type the following command:
WX4400# set dot1x bonded-period 60
success: change accepted.

See Also

set dot1x key-tx

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

clear dot1x bonded-period on page 478

Enables or disables the transmission of encryption key information to the
supplicant (client) in EAP over LAN (EAPoL) key messages, after
authentication is successful.
Syntax — set dot1x key-tx {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables transmission of encryption key information to

clients.
„

disable — Disables transmission of encryption key information to

clients.
Defaults — Key transmission is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set dot1x max-req

489

Examples — Type the following command to enable key transmission:
WX4400# set dot1x key-tx enable
success: dot1x key transmission enabled.

See Also
„

set dot1x max-req

display dot1x on page 483

Sets the maximum number of times the WX retransmits an EAP request
to a supplicant (client) before ending the authentication session.
Syntax — set dot1x max-req number-of-retransmissions
„

number-of-retransmissions — Specify a value between 0 and 10.

Defaults — The default number of EAP retransmissions is 2.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To support SSIDs that have both 802.1X and static WEP clients,
MSS sends a maximum of two ID requests, even if this parameter is set to
a higher value. Setting the parameter to a higher value does affect all
other types of EAP messages.
Examples — Type the following command to set the maximum number
of EAP request retransmissions to three attempts:
WX4400# set dot1x max-req 3
success: dot1x max request set to 3.

See Also
„

clear dot1x max-req on page 479

„

display dot1x on page 483

490

CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

set dot1x
port-control

Determines the 802.1X authentication behavior on individual wired
authentication ports or groups of ports.
Syntax — set dot1x port-control
{forceauth | forceunauth | auto} port-list
„

„

forceauth — Forces the specified wired authentication port(s) to
unconditionally authorize all 802.1X authentication attempts, with an
EAP success message.
forceunauth — Forces the specified wired authentication port(s) to

unconditionally reject all 802.1X authentication attempts with an EAP
failure message.
„

auto — Allows the specified wired authentication ports to process

802.1X authentication normally as determined for the user by the set
authentication dot1X command.
„

port-list — One or more wired authentication ports for which to

set 802.1X port control.
Defaults — By default, wired authentication ports are set to auto.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command affects only wired authentication ports.
Examples — The following command forces port 1 to unconditionally
accept all 802.1X authentication attempts:
WX4400# set dot1x port-control forceauth 1
success: authcontrol for 1 is set to FORCE-AUTH.

See Also
„

display port status on page 70

„

display dot1x on page 483

set dot1x quiet-period

set dot1x
quiet-period

491

Sets the number of seconds an WX remains quiet and does not respond
to a supplicant after a failed authentication.
Syntax — set dot1x quiet-period seconds
„

seconds — Specify a value between 0 and 65,535.

Defaults — The default is 60 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to set the quiet period to
90 seconds:
WX4400# set dot1x quiet-period 90
success: dot1x quiet period set to 90.

See Also

set dot1x reauth

„

clear dot1x quiet-period on page 480

„

set dot1x wep-rekey-period on page 496

Determines whether the WX switch allows the reauthentication of
supplicants (clients).
Syntax — set dot1x reauth {enable | disable}
„

enable — Permits reauthentication.

„

disable — Denies reauthentication.

Defaults — Reauthentication is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to enable reauthentication of
supplicants (clients):
WX4400# set dot1x reauth enable
success: dot1x reauthentication enabled.

492

CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

See Also

set dot1x
reauth-max

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x reauth-max on page 492

„

set dot1x reauth-period on page 493

Sets the number of reauthentication attempts that the WX switch makes
before the supplicant (client) becomes unauthorized.
Syntax — set dot1x reauth-max number-of-attempts
„

number-of-attempts — Specify a value between 1 and 10.

Defaults — The default number of reauthentication attempts is 2.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If the number of reauthentications for a wired authentication
client is greater than the maximum number of reauthentications allowed,
MSS sends an EAP failure packet to the client and removes the client from
the network. However, MSS does not remove a wireless client from the
network under these circumstances.
Examples — Type the following command to set the number of
authentication attempts to 8:
WX4400# set dot1x reauth-max 8
success: dot1x max reauth set to 8.

See Also
„

display dot1x on page 483

„

clear dot1x reauth-max on page 481

set dot1x reauth-period

set dot1x
reauth-period

493

Sets the number of seconds that must elapse before the WX switch
attempts reauthentication.
Syntax — set dot1x reauth-period seconds
„

seconds — Specify a value between 60 (1 minute) and 1,641,600
(19 days).

Defaults — The default is 3600 seconds (1 hour).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to set the number of seconds
to 100 before reauthentication is attempted:
WX4400# set dot1x reauth-period 100
success: dot1x auth-server timeout set to 100.

See Also

set dot1x timeout
auth-server

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

clear dot1x reauth-period on page 481

Sets the number of seconds that must elapse before the WX switch times
out a request to a RADIUS authentication server.
Syntax — set dot1x timeout auth-server seconds
„

seconds — Specify a value between 1 and 65,535.

Defaults — The default is 30 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to set the authentication
server timeout to 60 seconds:
WX4400# set dot1x timeout auth-server 60
success: dot1x auth-server timeout set to 60.

494

CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

See Also

set dot1x timeout
supplicant

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

clear dot1x timeout auth-server on page 482

Sets the number of seconds that must elapse before the WX switch times
out an authentication session with a supplicant (client).
Syntax — set dot1x timeout supplicant seconds
„

seconds — Specify a value between 1 and 65,535.

Defaults — The default is 30 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to set the number of seconds
for authentication session timeout to 300:
WX4400# set dot1x timeout supplicant 300
success: dot1x supplicant timeout set to 300.

See Also

set dot1x tx-period

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

clear dot1x timeout auth-server on page 482

Sets the number of seconds that must elapse before the WX switch
retransmits an EAPoL packet.
Syntax — set dot1x tx-period seconds
„

seconds — Specify a value between 1 and 65,535.

Defaults — The default is 5 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set dot1x wep-rekey

495

Examples — Type the following command to set the number of seconds
before the WX switch retransmits an EAPoL packet to 300:
WX4400# set dot1x tx-period 300
success: dot1x tx-period set to 300.

See Also

set dot1x
wep-rekey

„

display dot1x on page 483

„

clear dot1x tx-period on page 483

Enables or disables Wired Equivalency Privacy (WEP) rekeying for
broadcast and multicast encryption keys.
Syntax — set dot1X wep-rekey {enable | disable}
„

„

enable — Causes the broadcast and multicast keys for WEP to be
rotated at an interval set by the set dot1x wep-rekey-period for
each radio, associated VLAN, and encryption type. The WX generates
the new broadcast and multicast keys and pushes the keys to the
clients via EAPoL key messages.
disable — WEP broadcast and multicast keys are never rotated.

Defaults — WEP key rotation is enabled, by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Reauthentication is not required for WEP key rotation to take
place. Broadcast and multicast keys are always rotated at the same time,
so all members of a given radio, VLAN, or encryption type receive the
new keys at the same time.
Examples — Type the following command to disable WEP key rotation:
WX4400# set dot1x wep-rekey disable
success: wep rekeying disabled

See Also
„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x wep-rekey-period on page 496

496

CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

set dot1x
wep-rekey-period

Sets the interval for rotating the WEP broadcast and multicast keys.
Syntax — set dot1x wep-rekey-period seconds
„

seconds — Specify a value between 30 and 1,641,600 (19 days).

Defaults — The default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to set the WEP-rekey period
to 300 seconds:
WX4400# set dot1x wep-rekey-period 300
success: dot1x wep-rekey-period set to 300

See Also
„

display dot1x on page 483

„

set dot1x wep-rekey on page 495

16

SESSION MANAGEMENT
COMMANDS

Use session management commands to display and clear
administrative and network user sessions.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents session management commands alphabetically. Use
Table 88 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 88 Session Management Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Administrative Sessions display sessions on page 500
clear sessions on page 497
Network Sessions

display sessions network on page 503
clear sessions network on page 498

clear sessions

Clears all administrative sessions, or clears administrative console or
Telnet sessions.
Syntax — clear sessions {admin | console |
telnet [client [session-id]]}
„

admin — Clears sessions for all users with administrative access to the

WX switch through a Telnet or SSH connection or a console plugged
into the switch.
„

„

„

console — Clears sessions for all users with administrative access to
the WX switch through a console plugged into the switch.
telnet — Clears sessions for all users with administrative access to
the WX switch through a Telnet connection.
telnet client [session-id] — Clears all Telnet client sessions from
the CLI to remote devices, or clears an individual session identified by
session ID.

498

CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To clear all administrator sessions type the following
command:
WX4400# clear sessions admin
This will terminate manager sessions,
do you wish to continue? (y|n) [n]y

To clear all administrative sessions through the console, type the
following command:
WX4400# clear sessions console
This will terminate manager sessions,
do you wish to continue? (y|n) [n]y

To clear all administrative Telnet sessions, type the following command:
WX4400# clear sessions telnet
This will terminate manager sessions,
do you wish to continue? (y|n) [n]y

To clear Telnet client session 0, type the following command:
WX4400# clear sessions telnet client 0

See Also
„

clear sessions
network

display sessions on page 500

Clears all network sessions for a specified username or set of usernames,
MAC address or set of MAC addresses, virtual LAN (VLAN) or set of
VLANs, or session ID.
Syntax — clear sessions network {user user-glob | mac-addr
mac-addr-glob | vlan vlan-glob | session-id local-session-id}
„

user user-glob — Clears all network sessions for a single user or set

of users.

clear sessions network

499

Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
„

mac-addr mac-addr-glob — Clears all network sessions for a MAC

address. Specify a MAC address in hexadecimal numbers separated by
colons (:), or use the wildcard character (*) to specify a set of MAC
addresses. (For details, see “MAC Address Globs” on page 27.)
„

vlan vlan-glob — Clears all network sessions on a single VLAN or a
set of VLANs.
Specify a VLAN name, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**)
to specify all VLAN names, or use the single-asterisk wildcard
character (*) to specify a set of VLAN names up to or following the
first delimiter character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For
details, see “VLAN Globs” on page 28.)

„

session-id local-session-id — Clears the specified 802.1X
network session. To find local session IDs, use the display sessions
command.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The clear sessions network command clears network
sessions by deauthenticating and, for wireless clients, disassociating
them.
Examples — To clear all sessions for MAC address 00:01:02:03:04:05,
type the following command:
WX4400# clear sessions network mac-addr 00:01:02:03:04:05

To clear session 9, type the following command:
WX1200# clear sessions network session-id 9
SM Apr 11 19:53:38 DEBUG SM-STATE: localid 9, mac 00:06:25:09:39:5d,
flags 0000012fh, to change state to KILLING
Localid 9, globalid SESSION-9-893249336 moved from ACTIVE to KILLING
(client=00:06:25:09:39:5d)

500

CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

To clear the session of user Natasha, type the following command:
WX1200# clear sessions network user Natasha

To clear the sessions of users whose name begins with the characters Jo,
type the following command:
WX1200# clear sessions network user Jo*

To clear the sessions of all users on VLAN red, type the following
command:
WX1200# clear sessions network vlan red

See Also

display sessions

„

display sessions on page 500

„

display sessions network on page 503

Displays session information and statistics for all users with administrative
access to the WX switch, or for administrative users with either console or
Telnet access.
Syntax — display sessions

{admin | console | telnet

[client]}
„

admin — Displays sessions for all users with administrative access to

the WX switch through a Telnet or SSH connection or a console
plugged into the switch.
„

„

console — Displays sessions for all users with administrative access to
the WX switch through a console plugged into the switch.
telnet — Displays sessions for all users with administrative access to

the WX switch through a Telnet connection.
„

telnet client — Displays Telnet sessions from the CLI to remote

devices.
Defaults — None.
Access — All, except for display sessions telnet client, which has
enabled access.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

display sessions

501

Examples — To view information about sessions of administrative users,
type the following command:
WX4400> display sessions admin
Tty
Username
-------------------------tty0
tty2
tech
tty3
sshadmin

Time (s)
-------3644
6
381

Type
---Console
Telnet
SSH

3 admin sessions

To view information about console users’ sessions, type the following
command:
WX4400> display sessions console
Tty
Username
-------------------------console
1 console session

Time (s)
-------8573

To view information about Telnet users sessions, type the following
command:
WX4400> display sessions telnet
Tty
Username
-------------------------tty2
sea

Time (s)
-------7395

To view information about Telnet client sessions, type the following
command:
WX4400# display sessions telnet client
Session
Server Address
Server Port
------------------------------0
192.168.1.81
23
1
10.10.1.22
23

Client Port
----------48000
48001

Table 89 describes the fields of the display sessions admin, display
sessions console, and display sessions telnet displays.

502

CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Table 89 display sessions admin, display sessions console, and display sessions
telnet Output
Field

Description

Tty

The Telnet terminal number, or console for administrative
users connected through the console port.

Username

Up to 30 characters of the name of an authenticated user.

Time (s)

Number of seconds the session has been active.

Type

Type of administrative session:
„

Console

„

SSH

„

Telnet

Table 90 describes the fields of the display sessions telnet client
display.
Table 90 display sessions telnet client Output
Field

Description

Session

Session number assigned by MSS when the client session is
established.

Server Address

IP address of the remote device.

Server Port

TCP port number of the remote device’s TCP server.

Client Port

TCP port number MSS is using for the client side of the
session.

See Also
„

clear sessions on page 497

display sessions network

display sessions
network

503

Displays summary or verbose information about all network sessions, or
network sessions for a specified username or set of usernames, MAC
address or set of MAC addresses, VLAN or set of VLANs, or session ID.
Syntax — display sessions network
[user user-glob | mac-addr mac-addr-glob | ssid ssid-name
vlan vlan-glob | session-id session-id | wired] [verbose]
„

user user-glob — Displays all network sessions for a single user or

set of users.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
„

mac-addr mac-addr-glob — Displays all network sessions for a MAC

address. Specify a MAC address in hexadecimal numbers separated by
colons (:).
Or use the wildcard character (*) to specify a set of MAC addresses.
(For details, see “MAC Address Globs” on page 27.)
„

ssid ssid-name — Displays all network sessions for an SSID.

„

vlan vlan-glob — Displays all network sessions on a single VLAN or a

set of VLANs.
Specify a VLAN name, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**)
to specify all VLAN names, or use the single-asterisk wildcard
character (*) to specify a set of VLAN names up to or following the
first delimiter character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For
details, see “VLAN Globs” on page 28.)
„

session-id local-session-id — Displays the specified network
session. To find local session IDs, use the display sessions command.
The verbose option is not available with this form of the display
sessions network command.

„

wired — Displays all network sessions on wired authentication ports.

„

verbose — Provides detailed output for all network sessions or ones

displayed by username, MAC address, or VLAN name.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.

504

CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS displays information about network sessions in three
types of displays. See the following tables for field descriptions.
„

Summary display — See Table 91 on page 506.

„

Verbose display — See Table 92 on page 506.

„

display sessions network session-id display — See Table 93 on
page 508.

Examples — To display summary information for all network sessions,
type display sessions network. For example:
WX1200# display sessions network
User
Sess
Name
ID
------------------------------ ---EXAMPLE\Natasha
4*
host/laptop11.exmpl.com
6*
nin@exmpl.com
539*
EXAMPLE\hosni
302*
563
jose@exmpl.com
380*
00:30:65:16:8d:69
443*
EXAMPLE\Geetha
459*
8 sessions total

IP or MAC
VLAN
Port/
Address
Name
Radio
----------------- --------------- ----10.10.40.17
vlan-eng
3/1
10.10.40.16
vlan-eng
3/2
10.10.40.17
vlan-eng
1/1
10.10.40.10
vlan-eng
3/1
00:0b:be:15:46:56 (none)
1/2
10.30.40.8
vlan-eng
1/1
10.10.40.19
vlan-wep
3/1
10.10.40.18
vlan-eng
3/2

The following command displays summary information about the
sessions for MAC address 00:05:5d:7e:98:1a:
WX1200# display sessions network mac-addr 00:05:5d:7e:98:1a
User
Sess IP or MAC
VLAN
Port/
Name
ID Address
Name
Radio
--------------------------- ---- --------------- ------------ ----EXAMPLE\Havel
13* 10.10.10.40
vlan-eng
1/2

The following command displays summary information about all the
sessions of users whose names begin with E:
WX1200# display sessions network user E*
User
Sess IP or MAC
Name
ID Address
--------------------------- ---- --------------EXAMPLE\Singh
12* 10.10.10.30
EXAMPLE\Havel
13* 10.10.10.40
2 sessions match criteria (of 3 total)

VLAN
Port/
Name
Radio
------------ ----vlan-eng
3/2
vlan-eng
1/2

display sessions network

505

(Table 91 on page 506 describes the summary displays of display
sessions network commands.)
The following command displays detailed (verbose) session information
about user nin@example.com:
WX1200# display sessions network user nin@example.com verbose
User
Sess IP or MAC
VLAN
Port/
Name
ID Address
Name
Radio
----------------------------- ---- ----------------- --------------- ----nin@example.com
5* 10.20.30.40
vlan-eng
1/1
Client MAC: 00:02:2d:6e:ab:a5
GID: SESS-5-000430-686792-d8b3c564
State: ACTIVE
(prev AUTHORIZED)
now on: WX 192.168.12.7, AP/radio 1/1, AP 00:0b:0e:00:05:fe, as of 00:23:32 ago
1 sessions match criteria (of 10 total)

The following command displays verbose output about the sessions of all
current network users:
WX1200# display sessions network verbose
User
Sess IP or MAC
VLAN
Name
ID Address
Name
------------------------------ ---- ----------------- --------------SHUTTLE2\exmpl
6* 10.3.8.55
default
Client MAC: 00:06:25:13:08:33
GID: SESS-4-000404-98441-c807c14b
State: ACTIVE
(prev AUTHORIZED)
now on: WX 10.3.8.103, AP/radio 3/1, AP 00:0b:0e:ff:00:3a, as of
00:00:24 ago
from: WX 10.3.8.103, AP/radio 6/1, AP 00:0b:0e:00:05:d7, as of
00:01:07 ago
from: WX 10.3.8.103, AP/radio 3/1, AP 00:0b:0e:ff:00:3a, as of
00:01:53 ago
1 sessions total

Port/
Radio
----3/1

(Table 92 on page 506 describes the additional fields of the verbose
output of display sessions network commands.)
The following command displays information about network session 27:
WX1200# display sessions network session-id 27
Global Id: SESS-27-000430-835586-58dfe5a
State: ACTIVE
Port/Radio: 3/1
MAC Address: 00:00:2d:6f:44:77
User Name: EXAMPLE Natasha
IP Address: 10.10.40.17
Vlan Name: vlan-eng

506

CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Tag: 1
Session Timeout: 1800
Authentication Method: PEAP, using server 10.10.70.20
Session statistics as updated from AP:
Unicast packets in: 653
Unicast bytes in: 46211
Unicast packets out: 450
Unicast bytes out: 50478
Multicast packets in: 317
Multicast bytes in: 10144
Number of packets with encryption errors: 0
Number of bytes with encryption errors: 0
Last packet data rate: 2
Last packet signal strength: -67 dBm
Last packet data S/N ratio: 55

Table 91 describes the output of this command. For descriptions of the
fields of display sessions network session-id output, see Table 93 on
page 508.
Table 91 display sessions network (summary) Output
Field

Description

User Name

Up to 30 characters of the name of the authenticated user
of this session.

Sess ID

Locally unique number that identifies this session. An asterisk
(*) next to the session ID indicates currently active sessions.

IP or MAC Address

IP address of the session user, or the user’s MAC address if
the user has not yet received an IP address.

VLAN Name

Name of the VLAN associated with the session.

Port/Radio

Number of the port and radio through which the user is
accessing this session.

Table 92 Additional display sessions network verbose Output
Field

Description

Client MAC MAC address of the session user.
GID

Global session ID, a unique session number within a Mobility Domain.

display sessions network

507

Table 92 Additional display sessions network verbose Output (continued)
Field

Description

State

Status of the session:
„

AUTH, ASSOC REQ — Client is being associated by the 802.1X
protocol.

„

AUTH AND ASSOC — Client is being associated by the 802.1X
protocol, and the user is being authenticated.

„

AUTHORIZING — User has been authenticated (for example, by
the 802.1X protocol and an AAA method), and is entering AAA
authorization.

„

AUTHORIZED — User has been authorized by an AAA method.

„

ACTIVE — User’s AAA attributes have been applied, and the user
is active on the network.

„

DEASSOCIATED — One of the following:
Wireless client has sent the WX switch a disassociate message.
User associated with one of the current WX switch’s MAP access
points has appeared at another WX switch in the Mobility Domain.

„

ROAMING AWAY — The W switch has been sent a request to
transfer the user, who is roaming, to another WX switch.

„

STATUS UPDATED — WX switch is receiving a final update from
an MAP access point about the user, who has roamed away.

„

WEB_AUTHING — User is being authenticated by WebAAA.

„

WIRED AUTH’ING — User is being authenticated by the 802.1X
protocol on a wired authentication port.

„

KILLING — User’s session is being cleared, because of 802.1X
authentication failure, entry of a clear command, or some other
event.

now on

IP address and port and radio numbers of the session’s current WX
switch, the MAC address of the MAP access point, and the last update
time.

from

IP address and port and radio numbers of the session’s previous WX
switch, the MAC address of the MAP access point, and the last update
time. Up to six roaming events are tracked in this display.

508

CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Table 93 display sessions network session-id Output
Field

Description

Global Id

A unique session identifier within the Mobility Domain.

State

Status of the session:
„

AUTH, ASSOC REQ — Client is being associated by the 802.1X
protocol.

„

AUTH AND ASSOC — Client is being associated by the 802.1X
protocol, and the user is being authenticated.

„

AUTHORIZING — User has been authenticated (for example,
by the 802.1X protocol and an AAA method), and is entering
AAA authorization.

„

AUTHORIZED — User has been authorized by an AAA method.

„

ACTIVE — User’s AAA attributes have been applied, and the
user is active on the network.

„

DEASSOCIATED — One of the following:
Wireless client has sent the WX switch a disassociate message.
User associated with one of the current WX switch’s MAP
access points has appeared at another WX switch in the
Mobility Domain.

„

ROAMING AWAY — The WX switch has been sent a request to
transfer the user, who is roaming, to another WX switch.

„

STATUS UPDATED — WX switch is receiving a final update
from an MAP access point about the user, who has roamed
away.

„

WEB_AUTHING — User is being authenticated by WebAAA.

„

WIRED AUTH’ING — User is being authenticated by the
802.1X protocol on a wired authentication port.

„

KILLING — User’s session is being cleared, because of 802.1X
authentication failure, entry of a clear command, or some other
event.

Port/Radio

Number of the port and radio through which the user is accessing
this session.

MAC address

MAC address of the session user.

User Name

Name of the authenticated user of this session

IP Address

IP address of the session user.

Vlan Name

Name of the VLAN associated with the session.

Tag

System-wide supported VLAN tag type.

display sessions network

509

Table 93 display sessions network session-id Output (continued)
Field

Description

Session
Timeout

Assigned session timeout in seconds.

Authentication Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) type used to authenticate
Method
the session user, and the IP address of the authentication server.
Session
statistics as
updated from
AP

Time the session statistics were last updated from the MAP access
point, in seconds since a fixed standard date and time.

Unicast packets Total number of unicast packets received from the user by the WX
in
(64-bit counter).
Unicast bytes
in

Total number of unicast bytes received from the user by the WX
(64-bit counter).

Unicast packets Total number of unicast packets sent by the WX to the user (64-bit
out
counter).
Unicast bytes
out

Total number of unicast bytes sent by the WX to the user (64-bit
counter).

Multicast
packets in

Total number of multicast packets received from the user by the
WX (64-bit counter).

Multicast bytes Total number of multicast bytes received from the user by the WX
in
(64-bit counter).
Number of
packets with
encryption
errors

Total number of decryption failures.

Number of
bytes with
encryption
errors

Total number of bytes with decryption errors.

Last packet
data rate

Data transmit rate, in megabits per second (Mbps), of the last
packet received by the MAP access point.

Last packet
Signal strength, in decibels referred to 1 milliwatt (dBm), of the last
signal strength packet received by the MAP access point.
Last packet
data S/N ratio

Signal-to-noise ratio of the last packet received by the MAP access
point.

See Also
„

clear sessions network on page 498

510

CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

17

RF DETECTION COMMANDS

MSS automatically performs RF detection scans on enabled and disabled
radios to detect rogue access points. A rogue access point is a BSSID
(MAC address associated with an SSID) that does not belong to a 3Com
switch and is not a member of the ignore list configured on the seed
switch of the Mobility Domain.
MSS can issue countermeasures against rogue devices to prevent clients
from being able to use them.
You can configure RF detection parameters on individual WX switches.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents RF detection commands alphabetically. Use
Table 94 to locate the commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 94 RF Detection Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Rogue Information display rfdetect clients on page 535
display rfdetect mobility-domain on page 521
display rfdetect data on page 518
display rfdetect visible on page 526
display rfdetect counters on page 515
Countermeasures

display rfdetect countermeasures on page 517

Permitted
Vendor List

set rfdetect vendor-list on page 533
display rfdetect vendor-list on page 525
clear rfdetect vendor-list on page 515

512

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Table 94 RF Detection Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command

Permitted SSID List set rfdetect ssid-list on page 532
display rfdetect ssid-list on page 525
clear rfdetect ssid-list on page 514
Client Black List

set rfdetect black-list on page 529
display rfdetect black-list on page 535
clear rfdetect black-list on page 513

Attack List

set rfdetect attack-list on page 528
display rfdetect attack-list on page 534
clear rfdetect attack-list on page 512

Ignore List

set rfdetect ignore on page 530
display rfdetect ignore on page 520
clear rfdetect ignore on page 513

MAP Signatures

set rfdetect signature on page 532

Log Messages

set rfdetect log on page 531

clear rfdetect

Deprecated in MSS Version 3.0. Rogue detection takes place automatically
in MSS Version 3.0. You do not need to configure RF detection scans.

clear rfdetect
attack-list

Removes a MAC address from the attack list.
Syntax — clear rfdetect attack-list mac-addr
„

mac-addr — MAC address you want to remove from the attack list.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears MAC address
11:22:33:44:55:66 from the attack list:
WX-1200# clear rfdetect attack-list 11:22:33:44:55:66
success: 11:22:33:44:55:66 is no longer in attacklist.

clear rfdetect black-list

513

See Also

clear rfdetect
black-list

„

set rfdetect attack-list on page 528

„

display rfdetect attack-list on page 534

Removes a MAC address from the client black list.
Syntax — clear rfdetect black-list mac-addr
„

mac-addr — MAC address you want to remove from the black list.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command removes MAC address
11:22:33:44:55:66 from the black list:
WX-1200# clear rfdetect black-list 11:22:33:44:55:66
success: 11:22:33:44:55:66 is no longer blacklisted.

See Also
„

set rfdetect black-list on page 529

„

display rfdetect black-list on page 535

clear rfdetect
countermeasures
mac

Deprecated in MSS Version 4.0.

clear rfdetect
ignore

Removes a device from the ignore list for RF scans. MSS does not
generate log messages or traps for the devices in the ignore list.
Syntax — clear rfdetect ignore mac-addr
„

mac-addr — Basic service set identifier (BSSID), which is a MAC
address, of the device to remove from the ignore list.

514

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes BSSID aa:bb:cc:11:22:33
from the ignore list for RF scans:
WX1200# clear rfdetect ignore aa:bb:cc:11:22:33
success: aa:bb:cc:11:22:33 is no longer ignored.

See Also

clear rfdetect
ssid-list

„

display rfdetect ignore on page 520

„

set rfdetect ignore on page 530

Removes an SSID from the permitted SSID list.
Syntax — clear rfdetect ssid-list ssid-name
„

ssid-name — SSID name you want to remove from the permitted

SSID list.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears SSID mycorp from the
permitted SSID list:
WX-1200# clear rfdetect ssid-list mycorp
success: mycorp is no longer in ssid-list.

See Also
„

set rfdetect ssid-list on page 532

„

display rfdetect ssid-list on page 525

clear rfdetect vendor-list

clear rfdetect
vendor-list

515

Removes an entry from the permitted vendor list.
Syntax — clear rfdetect vendor-list {client | ap} mac-addr |
all
„

client|ap — Specifies whether the entry is for an AP brand or a

client brand.
„

mac-addr|all — Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) to remove.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command removes client OUI
aa:bb:cc:00:00:00 from the permitted vendor list:
WX-1200# clear rfdetect vendor-list client aa:bb:cc:00:00:00
success: aa:bb:cc:00:00:00 is no longer in client
vendor-list.

See Also

display rfdetect
counters

„

set rfdetect vendor-list on page 533

„

display rfdetect vendor-list on page 525

Displays statistics for rogue and Intrusion Detection System (IDS) activity
detected by the MAPs managed by a WX switch.
Syntax — display rfdetect counters
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS 4.0.

516

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Examples — The following command shows counters for rogue activity
detected by a WX switch:
WX-1200# display rfdetect counters
Type
Current
Total
----------------- ----------- -----------Rogue access points
0
0
Interfering access points 139
1116
Rogue 802.11 clients
0
0
Interfering 802.11 clients 4
347
802.11 adhoc clients
0
1
Unknown 802.11 clients
20
965
Interfering 802.11 clients seen on wired network 0 0
802.11 probe request flood 0
0
802.11 authentication flood 0
0
802.11 null data flood
0
0
802.11 mgmt type 6 flood
0
0
802.11 mgmt type 7 flood
0
0
802.11 mgmt type d flood
0
0
802.11 mgmt type e flood
0
0
802.11 mgmt type f flood
0
0
802.11 association flood
0
0
802.11 reassociation flood 0
0
802.11 disassociation flood 0
0
Weak wep initialization vectors 0
0
Spoofed access point mac-address attacks 0
0
Spoofed client mac-address attacks 0
0
Ssid masquerade attacks
1
12
Spoofed deauthentication attacks 0
0
Spoofed disassociation attacks 0
0
Null probe responses
626
11380
Broadcast deauthentications0
0
FakeAP ssid attacks
0
0
FakeAP bssid attacks
0
0
Netstumbler clients
0
0
Wellenreiter clients
0
0
Trapeze active scans
1796
4383
Wireless bridge frames
196
196
Adhoc client frames
8
0
Access points present in attack-list 0
0
Access points not present in ssid-list 0
0
Access points not present in vendor-list 0
0
Clients not present in vendor-list 0
0
Clients added to automatic black-list 0
0

display rfdetect countermeasures

display rfdetect
countermeasures

517

Displays the current status of countermeasures against rogues in the
Mobility Domain.
Syntax — display rfdetect countermeasures
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. As of Version 4.0, output no
longer lists rogues for which countermeasures have not been started.
Usage — This command is valid only on the seed switch of the Mobility
Domain.
Examples — The following example displays countermeasures status for
the Mobility Domain:

WX1200# display rfdetect countermeasures
Total number of entries: 190
Rogue MAC
Type Countermeasures
Radio Mac
----------------- ----- -----------------00:0b:0e:00:71:c0 intfr 00:0b:0e:44:55:66
00:0b:0e:03:00:80 rogue 00:0b:0e:11:22:33
...

WX-IPaddr

Port/Radio
/Channel
--------------- ------------10.1.1.23
dap 4/1/6
10.1.1.23
dap 2/1/11

Table 95 describes the fields in this display.
Table 95 display rfdetect countermeasures Output
Field

Description

Rogue MAC

BSSID of the rogue.

Type

Classification of the rogue device:
„

rogue—Wireless device that is on the network but is not
supposed to be on the network.

„

intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your network
and is not a rogue, but might be causing RF interference
with MAP radios.

„

known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.

518

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Table 95 display rfdetect countermeasures Output (continued)
Field

Description

Countermeasures
Radio MAC

MAC address of the 3Com radio sending countermeasures
against the rogue.
If the field value is Not Started, MSS has not started
countermeasures against the rogue yet.

WX-IPaddr

System IP address of the WX switch that is managing the
MAP that is sending or will send countermeasures.

Port/Radio/Channel

Port number, radio number, and channel number of the
countermeasures radio. For a Distributed MAP, the
connection number is labeled dap. (This stands for
distributed ap.)

See Also

display rfdetect
data

„

clear rfdetect attack-list on page 512

„

set rf detect countermeasures on page 530

„

set rfdetect countermeasures mac on page 530

Displays information about the APs detected by a WX switch.
Syntax — display rfdetect data
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.Vendor, Type and Flags fields
added to MSS Version 4.0
Usage — You can enter this command on any WX switch in the Mobility
Domain. The output applies only to the switch on which you enter the
command. To display all devices that a specific 3Com radio has detected,
even if the radio is managed by another WX switch, use the display
rfdetect visible command.
To display rogue information for the entire Mobility Domain, use the
display rfdetect mobility-domain command on the seed switch.
Only one MAC address is listed for each 3Com radio, even if the radio is
beaconing multiple SSIDs.

display rfdetect data

519

Examples — The following command shows the devices detected by this
WX switch during the most recent RF detection scan:
WX1200# display rfdetect data
Total number of entries: 197
Flags: i = infrastructure, a = ad-hoc
c = CCMP, t = TKIP, 1 = 104-bit WEP, 4
BSSID
Vendor Type Port/Radio/Ch
----------------- ------- ----- ------------00:07:50:d5:cc:91
Cisco intfr
3/1/6
00:07:50:d5:dc:78
Cisco intfr
3/1/6
00:09:b7:7b:8a:54
Cisco intfr
3/1/2
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c0
3Com intfr
3/1/11
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c2
3Com intfr
3/1/11
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c4
3Com intfr
3/1/11
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c6
3Com intfr
3/1/11
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c8
3Com intfr
3/1/11
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:ca
3Com intfr
3/1/11
...

= 40-bit WEP, w
Flags RSSI Age
------ ---- --i----w -61
6
i----w -82
6
i----- -57
6
i----- -57
6
i-t1-- -86
6
ic---- -85
6
i-t--- -85
6
i----w -83
6
i----- -85
6

= WEP(non-WPA)
SSID
----------------r27-cisco1200-2
r116-cisco1200-2
public
3Comwlan
3ComWX-ccmp
3Com-tkip
3Com-voip
3Com-webaaa

Table 96 describes the fields in this display.
Table 96 display rfdetect data Output
Field

Description

BSSID

MAC address of the SSID used by the detected device.

Vendor

Company that manufactures or sells the rogue device.

Type

Classification of the rogue device:

Port/Radio/Channel

„

rogue—Wireless device that is not supposed to be on the
network. The device has an entry in an WX switch’s FDB
and is therefore on the network.

„

intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your network but
is not a rogue. The device does not have an entry in an
WX switch’s FDB and is not actually on the network, but
might be causing RF interference with MAP radios.

„

known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.

Port number, radio number, and channel number of the
radio that detected the rogue. For a Distributed MAP, the
connection number is labeled dap. (This stands for
distributed ap.)

520

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Table 96 display rfdetect data Output
Field

Description

Flags

Classification and encryption information for the rogue:
„

The i, a, or u flag indicates the classification.

„

The other flags indicate the encryption used by the rogue.

For flag definitions, see the key in the command output.

See Also

display rfdetect
ignore

„

display rfdetect mobility-domain on page 521

„

display rfdetect visible on page 526

Displays the BSSIDs of third-party devices that MSS ignores during RF
scans. MSS does not generate log messages or traps for the devices in the
ignore list.
Syntax — display rfdetect ignore
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following example displays the list of ignored devices:
WX4400# display rfdetect ignore
Total number of entries: 2
Ignore MAC
----------------aa:bb:cc:11:22:33
aa:bb:cc:44:55:66

See Also
„

clear rfdetect ignore on page 513

„

set rfdetect ignore on page 530

display rfdetect mobility-domain

display rfdetect
mobility-domain

521

Displays the rogues detected by all WX switches in the Mobility Domain
during RF detection scans.
Syntax — display rfdetect mobility-domain
[ssid ssid-name | bssid mac-addr]
„
„

ssid ssid-name — Displays rogues that are using the specified SSID.
bssid mac-addr — Displays rogues that are using the specified

BSSID.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. bssid and ssid options, Vendor,
Type, and Flags fields added in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — This command is valid only on the seed switch of the Mobility
Domain. To display rogue information for an individual switch, use the
display rfdetect data command on that switch.
Examples — The following example displays information for all SSIDs
detected in the Mobility Domain:
WS1200# display rfdetect mobility-domain
Total number of entries: 194
Flags: i = infrastructure, a = ad-hoc, u = unresolved
c = CCMP, t = TKIP, 1 = 104-bit WEP, 4 = 40-bit WEP, w = WEP(non-WPA)
BSSID
Vendor
Type Flags SSID
----------------- ------------ ----- ------ -------------------------------00:07:50:d5:cc:91
Cisco intfr i----w r27-cisco1200-2
00:07:50:d5:dc:78
Cisco intfr i----w r116-cisco1200-2
00:09:b7:7b:8a:54
Cisco intfr i----00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c0
3Com intfr i----- public
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c2
3Com intfr i----w 3Comwlan
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c4
3Com intfr ic---- 3Com-ccmp
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c6
3Com intfr i----w 3Com-tkip
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c8
3Com intfr i----w 3Com-voip
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:ca
3Com intfr i----- 3Com-webaaa

...

522

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

The lines in this display are compiled from data from multiple listeners
(MAP radios). If an item has the value unresolved, not all listeners agree
on the value for that item. Generally, an unresolved state occurs only
when an MAP or a Mobility Domain is still coming up, and lasts only
briefly.
The following command displays detailed information for rogues using
SSID 3Com-webaaa.
WS1200# display rfdetect mobility-domain ssid 3Com-webaaa
BSSID: 00:0a:5e:4b:4a:ca Vendor: 3Com SSID: 3Com-webaaa
Type: intfr Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
WX-IPaddress: 10.8.121.102 Port/Radio/Ch: 3/1/11 Mac:
00:0b:0e:00:0a:6a
Device-type: interfering Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
RSSI: -85 SSID: 3Com-webaaa
BSSID: 00:0b:0e:00:7a:8a Vendor: 3Com SSID: 3Com-webaaa
Type: intfr Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
WX-IPaddress: 10.8.121.102 Port/Radio/Ch: 3/1/1 Mac:
00:0b:0e:00:0a:6a
Device-type: interfering Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
RSSI: -75 SSID: 3Com-webaaa
WX-IPaddress: 10.3.8.103 Port/Radio/Ch: dap 1/1/1 Mac:
00:0b:0e:76:56:82
Device-type: interfering Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
RSSI: -76 SSID: 3Com-webaaa

Two types of information are shown. The lines that are not indented
show the BSSID, vendor, and information about the SSID. The indented
lines that follow this information indicate the listeners (MAP radios) that
detected the SSID. Each set of indented lines is for a separate MAP
listener.
In this example, two BSSIDs are mapped to the SSID. Separate sets of
information are shown for each of the BSSIDs, and information about the
listeners for each BSSID are shown.

display rfdetect mobility-domain

523

The following command displays detailed information for a BSSID.
WX1200# display rfdetect mobility-domain bssid
00:0b:0e:00:04:d1
BSSID: 00:0b:0e:00:04:d1 Vendor: Cisco SSID: notmycorp
Type: rogue Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
WX-IPaddress: 10.8.121.102 Port/Radio/Ch: 3/2/56 Mac:
00:0b:0e:00:0a:6b
Device-type: rogue Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
RSSI: -72 SSID: notmycorp
WX-IPaddress: 10.3.8.103 Port/Radio/Ch: dap 1/1/157 Mac:
00:0b:0e:76:56:82
Device-type: rogue Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
RSSI: -72 SSID: notmycorp

Table 97 and Table 98 describe the fields in these displays.
Table 97 display rfdetect mobility-domain Output
Field

Description

BSSID

MAC address of the SSID used by the detected device.

Vendor

Company that manufactures or sells the rogue device.

Type

Classification of the rogue device:

Flags

„

rogue—Wireless device that is not supposed to be
on the network. The device has an entry in a WX
switch’s FDB and is therefore on the network.

„

intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your
network but is not a rogue. The device does not
have an entry in a WX switch’s FDB and is not
actually on the network, but might be causing RF
interference with MAP radios.

„

known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.

Classification and encryption information for the rogue:
„

The i, a, or u flag indicates the classification.

„

The other flags indicate the encryption used by the
rogue.

For flag definitions, see the key in the command
output.
SSID

SSID used by the detected device.

524

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Table 98 display rfdetect mobility-domain ssid or bssid Output
Field

Description

BSSID

MAC address of the SSID used by the detected device.

Vendor

Company that manufactures or sells the rogue device.

SSID

SSID used by the detected device.

Type

Classification of the rogue device:
„

rogue—Wireless device that is on the network but is
not supposed to be on the network.

„

intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your
network and is not a rogue, but might be causing RF
interference with MAP radios.

„

known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.

Adhoc

Indicates whether the rogue is an infrastructure rogue
(is using an AP) or is operating in ad-hoc mode.

Crypto-Types

Encryption type:
„

clear (no encryption)

„

ccmp

„

tkip

„

wep104 (WPA 104-bit WEP)

„

wep40 (WPA 40-bit WEP)

„

wep (non-WPA WEP)

WX-IPaddress

System IP address of the WX switch that detected the
rogue.

Port/Radio/Channel

Port number, radio number, and channel number of the
radio that detected the rogue. For a Distributed MAP,
the connection number is labeled dap. (This stands for
distributed ap.)

Mac

MAC address of the radio that detected the rogue.

Device-type

Device type detected by the MAP radio.

Adhoc

Ad-hoc status (yes or no) detected by the MAP radio.

Crypto-Types

Encryption type detected by the MAP radio.

RSSI

Received signal strength indication (RSSI)—the strength
of the RF signal detected by the MAP radio, in decibels
referred to 1 milliwatt (dBm).

SSID

SSID mapped to the BSSID.

display rfdetect ssid-list

525

See Also

display rfdetect
ssid-list

„

display rfdetect data on page 518

„

display rfdetect visible on page 526

Displays the entries in the permitted SSID list.
Syntax — display rfdetect ssid-list
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following example shows the permitted SSID list on
WX switch:
WX1200# display rfdetect ssid-list
Total number of entries: 3
SSID
----------------mycorp
corporate
guest

See Also

display rfdetect
vendor-list

„

clear rfdetect ssid-list on page 514

„

set rfdetect ssid-list on page 532

Displays the entries in the permitted vendor list.
Syntax — display rfdetect vendor-list
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.

526

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Examples — The following example shows the permitted vendor list on
WX switch:
WX1200# display rfdetect vendor-list
Total number of entries: 1
OUI
Type
----------------- -----aa:bb:cc:00:00:00 client
11:22:33:00:00:00 ap

See Also

display rfdetect
visible

„

clear rfdetect vendor-list on page 515

„

set rfdetect vendor-list on page 533

Displays the BSSIDs discovered by a specific 3Com radio. The data
includes BSSIDs transmitted by other 3Com radios as well as by
third-party access points.
Syntax — display rfdetect visible mac-addr
Syntax — display rfdetect visible ap map-num [radio {1 | 2}]
Syntax — display rfdetect visible dap
dap-num [radio {1 | 2}]
„

mac-addr — Base MAC address of the 3Com radio.

To display the base MAC address of a 3Com radio, use the
display {ap | dap} status command.
„

„

map-num — Port connected to the MAP access point for which to
display neighboring BSSIDs.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display

neighboring BSSIDs.
„
„

radio 1 — Shows neighbor information for radio 1.
radio 2 — Shows neighbor information for radio 2. (This option does
not apply to single-radio models.)

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

display rfdetect visible

527

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Vendor, Type, and Flags fields
added in Version 4.0.
Usage — If a 3Com radio is supporting more than one SSID, each of the
corresponding BSSIDs is listed separately.
To display rogue information for the entire Mobility Domain, use the
display rfdetect mobility-domain command on the seed switch.
Examples — The following command displays information about the
rogues detected by radio 1 on MAP port 3:
WX1200# display rfdetect visible ap 3 radio 1
Total number of entries: 104
Flags: i = infrastructure, a = ad-hoc
c = CCMP, t = TKIP, 1 = 104-bit WEP, 4 =
Transmit MAC
Vendor Type Ch RSSI Flags
----------------- ------- ----- --- ---- -----00:07:50:d5:cc:91
Cisco intfr
6 -60 i----w
00:07:50:d5:dc:78
Cisco intfr
6 -82 i----w
00:09:b7:7b:8a:54
Cisco intfr
2 -54 i----00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c0
3Com intfr 11 -57 i----00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c2
3Com intfr 11 -86 i-t1-00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c4
3Com intfr 11 -85 ic---00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c6
3Com intfr 11 -85 i-t--00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c8
3Com intfr 11 -83 i----w
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:ca
3Com intfr 11 -85 i----...

40-bit WEP, w = WEP(non-WPA)
SSID
-------------------------------r27-cisco1200-2
r116-cisco1200-2
public
3Comwlan
3Com-ccmp
3Com-tkip
3Com-voip
3Com-webaaa

Table 99 describes the fields in this display.
Table 99 display rfdetect visible Output
Field

Description

Transmit MAC

MAC address the rogue device that sent the 802.11 packet
detected by the MAP radio.

Vendor

Company that manufactures or sells the rogue device.

528

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Table 99 display rfdetect visible Output (continued)
Field

Description

Type

Classification of the rogue device:
„

rogue—Wireless device that is on the network but is not
supposed to be on the network.

„

intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your network
and is not a rogue, but might be causing RF interference
with MAP radios.

„

known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.

Ch

Channel number on which the radio detected the rogue.

RSSI

Received signal strength indication (RSSI)—the strength of
the RF signal detected by the MAP radio, in decibels referred
to 1 milliwatt (dBm).

Flags

Classification and encryption information for the rogue:
„

The i, a, or u flag indicates the classification.

„

The other flags indicate the encryption used by the rogue.

For flag definitions, see the key in the command output.
SSID

SSID used by the detected device.

See Also
„

display rfdetect data on page 518

„

display rfdetect mobility-domain on page 521

set rfdetect
active-scan

Deprecated in MSS Version 4.0. You now can disable or reenable active
scan in individual radio profiles. See set radio-profile active-scan on
page 330.

set rfdetect
attack-list

Adds an entry to the attack list. The attack list specifies the MAC address
of devices that MSS should issue countermeasures against whenever the
devices are detected on the network. The attack list can contain the MAC
addresses of APs and clients.
Syntax — set rfdetect attack-list mac-addr
„

mac-addr — MAC address you want to attack.

Defaults — The attack list is empty by default.

set rfdetect black-list

529

Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The attack list applies only to the WX switch on which the list is
configured. WX switches do not share attack lists.
Examples — The following command adds MAC address
aa:bb:cc:44:55:66 to the attack list:
WX-1200# set rfdetect attack-list 11:22:33:44:55:66
success: MAC 11:22:33:44:55:66 is now in attacklist.

See Also

set rfdetect
black-list

„

clear rfdetect attack-list on page 512

„

display rfdetect attack-list on page 534

Adds an entry to the client black list. The client black list specifies clients
that are not allowed on the network. MSS drops all packets from the
clients on the black list.
Syntax — set rfdetect black-list mac-addr
„

mac-addr — MAC address you want to place on the black list.

Defaults — The client black list is empty by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — In addition to manually configured entries, the list can contain
entries added by MSS. MSS can place a client in the black list due to an
association, reassociation or disassociation flood from the client.
The client black list applies only to the WX switch on which the list is
configured. WX switches do not share client black lists.

530

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Examples — The following command adds client MAC address
11:22:33:44:55:66 to the black list:
WX-8# set rfdetect black-list 11:22:33:44:55:66
success: MAC 11:22:33:44:55:66 is now blacklisted.

See Also
„

set rfdetect black-list on page 529

„

display rfdetect black-list on page 535

set rf detect
countermeasures

Deprecated in MSS Version 4.0. You now can disable or reenable active
scan in individual radio profiles. See set radio-profile countermeasures
on page 337.

set rfdetect
countermeasures
mac

Deprecated in MSS Version 4.0.

set rfdetect ignore

Configures a list of known devices to ignore during an RF scan. MSS does
not generate log messages or traps for the devices in the ignore list.
Syntax — set rfdetect ignore mac-addr
„

mac-addr — BSSID (MAC address) of the device to ignore.

Defaults — MSS reports all unknown BSSIDs detected during an RF scan.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use this command to identify third-party APs and other devices
you are already aware of and do not want MSS to report following RF
scans.
If you try to initiate countermeasures against a device on the ignore list,
the ignore list takes precedence and MSS does not issue the
countermeasures. Countermeasures apply only to rogue devices.

set rfdetect log

531

Examples — The following command configures MSS to ignore BSSID
aa:bb:cc:11:22:33 during RF scans:
WX1200# set rfdetect ignore aa:bb:cc:11:22:33
success: MAC aa:bb:cc:11:22:33 is now ignored.

See Also

set rfdetect log

„

clear rfdetect ignore on page 513

„

display rfdetect ignore on page 520

Disables or reenables generation of log messages when rogues are
detected or when they disappear.
Syntax — set rfdetect log {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables logging of rogues.

„

disable — Disables logging of rogues.

Defaults — RF detection logging is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
The log messages for rogues are generated only on the seed and appear
only in the seed’s log message buffer. Use the display log buffer
command to display the messages in the seed switch’s log message
buffer.
Examples — The following command enables RF detection logging for
the Mobility Domain managed by this seed switch:
WX1200# set rfdetect log enable
success: rfdetect logging is enabled.

See Also
„

display log buffer on page 582

532

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

set rfdetect
signature

Enables MAP signatures. A MAP signature is a set of bits in a
management frame sent by a MAP that identifies that MAP to MSS. If
someone attempts to spoof management packets from a 3Com MAP,
MSS can detect the spoof attempt.
Syntax — set rfdetect signature {enable | disable}
„

enable — Enables MAP signatures.

„

disable — Disables MAP signatures.

Defaults — MAP signatures are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The command applies only to MAPs managed by the WX
switch on which you enter the command. To enable signatures on all
MAPs in a Mobility Domain, enter the command on each WX switch in
the Mobility Domain.
You must use the same MAP signature setting (enabled or disabled) on all
WX switches in a Mobility Domain.
Examples — The following command enables MAP signatures on an WX
switch:
WX1200# set rfdetect signature enable
success: signature is now enabled.

set rfdetect ssid-list

Adds an SSID to the permitted SSID list. The permitted SSID list specifies
the SSIDs that are allowed on the network. If MSS detects packets for an
SSID that is not on the list, the AP that sent the packets is classified as a
rogue. MSS issues countermeasures against the rogue if they are
enabled.
Syntax — set rfdetect ssid-list ssid-name
ssid-name — SSID name you want to add to the permitted SSID list.

set rfdetect vendor-list

533

Defaults — The permitted SSID list is empty by default and all SSIDs are
allowed. However, after you add an entry to the list, MSS allows traffic
only for the SSIDs that are on the list.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The permitted SSID list applies only to the WX switch on which
the list is configured. WX switches do not share permitted SSID lists.
Examples — The following command adds SSID mycorp to the list of
permitted SSIDs:
WX-1200# set rfdetect ssid-list mycorp
success: ssid mycorp is now in ssid-list.

See Also

set rfdetect
vendor-list

„

clear rfdetect ssid-list on page 514

„

display rfdetect ssid-list on page 525

Adds an entry to the permitted vendor list. The permitted vendor list
specifies the third-party AP or client vendors that are allowed on the
network. MSS does not list a device as a rogue or interfering device if the
device’s OUI is in the permitted vendor list.
Syntax — set rfdetect vendor-list {client | ap} mac-addr | all
„

client | ap — Specifies whether the entry is for an AP brand or a

client brand.
„

mac-addr | all — Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) to remove.

Defaults — The permitted vendor list is empty by default and all vendors
are allowed. However, after you add an entry to the list, MSS allows only
the devices whose OUIs are on the list.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.

534

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Usage — The permitted vendor list applies only to the WX switch on
which the list is configured. WX switches do not share permitted vendor
lists.
Examples — The following command adds an entry for clients whose
MAC addresses start with aa:bb:cc:
WX-1200# set rfdetect vendor-list client aa:bb:cc:00:00:00
success: MAC aa:bb:cc:00:00:00 is now in client vendor-list.

The trailing 00:00:00 value is required.
See Also

display rfdetect
attack-list

„

clear rfdetect vendor-list on page 515

„

display rfdetect vendor-list on page 525

Displays information about the MAC addresses in the attack list.
Syntax — display rfdetect attack-list
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following example shows the attack list on WX switch:
WX1200# display rfdetect attack-list
Total number of entries: 1
Attacklist MAC
Port/Radio/Chan
RSSI
SSID
----------------- ----------------- ------ -----------11:22:33:44:55:66 dap 2/1/11
-53
rogue-ssid

See Also
„

clear rfdetect attack-list on page 512

„

set rfdetect attack-list on page 528

display rfdetect black-list

display rfdetect
black-list

535

Displays information abut the clients in the client black list.
Syntax — display rfdetect black-list
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following example shows the client black list on WX
switch:
WX1200# display rfdetect black-list
Total number of entries: 1
Blacklist MAC
Type
Port
TTL
----------------- ----------------- ------- --11:22:33:44:55:66 configured
11:23:34:45:56:67 assoc req flood
3
25

See Also

display rfdetect
clients

„

clear rfdetect black-list on page 513

„

set rfdetect black-list on page 529

Displays the wireless clients detected by an WX switch.
Syntax — display rfdetect clients [mac mac-addr]

mac mac-addr
Displays detailed information for a specific client.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.

536

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Examples — The following command shows information about all
wireless clients detected by an WX switch’s MAPs:
WX1200# display rfdetect clients
Total number of entries: 30
Client MAC
Client
AP MAC
AP
Port/Radio
NoL Type Last
Vendor
Vendor
/Channel
seen
----------------- ------- ----------------- ------- ------------- --- ----- ---00:03:7f:bf:16:70 Unknown
00:04:23:77:e6:e5
Intel
00:05:5d:79:ce:0f D-Link
00:05:5d:7e:96:a7 D-Link
00:05:5d:7e:96:ce D-Link
00:05:5d:84:d1:c5 D-Link

Unknown
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown

dap
dap
dap
dap
dap
dap

1/1/6
1/1/2
1/1/149
1/1/149
1/1/157
1/1/1

1
1
1
1
1
1

intfr
intfr
intfr
intfr
intfr
intfr

207
155
87
117
162
52

The following command displays more details about a specific client:
WX1200# display rfdetect clients mac 00:0c:41:63:fd:6d
Client Mac Address: 00:0c:41:63:fd:6d, Vendor: Linksys
Port: dap 1, Radio: 1, Channel: 11, RSSI: -82, Rate: 2, Last Seen (secs ago): 84
Bssid: 00:0b:0e:01:02:00, Vendor: 3Com, Type: intfr, Dst: ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
Last Rogue Status Check (secs ago): 3

The first line lists information for the client. The other lines list
information about the most recent 802.11 packet detected from the
client.
Table 100 and Table 101 describe the fields in these displays.
Table 100 display rfdetect clients Output
Field

Description

Client MAC

MAC address of the client.

Client Vendor

Company that manufactures or sells the client.

AP MAC

MAC address of the radio with which the rogue client is
associated.

AP Vendor

Company that manufactures or sells the AP with which
the rogue client is associated.

Port/Radio/Channel

Port number, radio number, and channel number of the
radio that detected the rogue. For a Distributed MAP,
the connection number is labeled dap. (This stands for
distributed ap.)

display rfdetect clients

537

Table 100 display rfdetect clients Output (continued)
Field

Description

NoL

Number of listeners. This is the number of MAP radios
that detected the rogue client.

Type

Classification of the rogue device:

Last seen

„

rogue — Wireless device that is on the network but
is not supposed to be on the network.

„

intfr — Wireless device that is not part of your
network and is not a rogue, but might be causing RF
interference with MAP radios.

„

known — Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.

Number of seconds since an MAP radio last detected
802.11 packets from the device.

Table 101 display rfdetect clients mac Output
Field

Description

RSSI

Received signal strength indication (RSSI)—the strength
of the RF signal detected by the MAP radio, in decibels
referred to 1 milliwatt (dBm).

Rate

The data rate of the client.

Last Seen

Number of seconds since an MAP radio last detected
802.11 packets from the device.

BSSID

MAC address of the SSID with which the rogue client is
associated.

Vendor

Company that manufactures or sells the AP with which
the rogue client is associated.

Typ

Classification of the rogue device:

Dst

„

rogue—Wireless device that is on the network but is
not supposed to be on the network.

„

intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your
network and is not a rogue, but might be causing RF
interference with MAP radios.

„

known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.

MAC addressed to which the last 802.11 packet
detected from the client was addressed.

538

CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS

Table 101 display rfdetect clients mac Output (continued)
Field

Description

Last Rogue Status Check

Number of seconds since the WX switch looked on the
air for the AP with which the rogue client is associated.
The switch looks for the client’s AP by sending a packet
from the wired side of the network addressed to the
client, and watching the air for a wireless packet
containing the client’s MAC address.

18

FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Use file management commands to manage system files and to display
software and boot information.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents file management commands alphabetically. Use
Table 102 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 102 File Management Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Software Version

reset system on page 554
display version on page 549

Boot Settings

set boot partition on page 559
set boot configuration-file on page 558
display boot on page 547
clear boot config on page 541

File Management dir on page 545
copy on page 542
delete on page 544
mkdir on page 553
rmdir on page 556
Configuration File save config on page 557
load config on page 551
display config on page 548
System Backup
and Restore

backup on page 540
restore on page 555

540

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

backup

Creates an archive of WX system files and optionally, user file, in Unix
tape archive (tar) format.
Syntax backup system [tftp:/ip-addr/]filename [all |
critical]
„

[tftp:/ip-addr/]filename — Name of the archive file to create.

You can store the file locally in the switch’s nonvolatile storage or on a
TFTP server.
„

all — Backs up system files and all the files in the user files area.

The user files area contains the set of files listed in the file section of
dir command output.
„

critical — Backs up system files only, including the configuration
file used when booting, and certificate files. The size of an archive
created by this option is generally 1MB or less.

Defaults — All.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.2.
Usage — You can create an archive located on a TFTP server or in the
switch’s nonvolatile storage. If you specify a TFTP server as part of the
filename, the archive is copied directly to the TFTP server and not stored
locally on the switch.
Use the critical option if you want to back up or restore only the
system-critical files required to operate and communicate with the
switch. Use the all option if you also want to back up or restore WebAAA
pages, backup configuration files, image files, and any other files stored
in the user files area of nonvolatile storage.
Neither option archives image files or any other files listed in the Boot
section of dir command output. The all option archives image files only if
they are present in the user files area.
Archive files created by the all option are larger than files created by the
critical option. The file size depends on the files in the user area, and the
file can be quite large if the user area contains image files.

clear boot config

541

The backup command places the boot configuration file into the archive.
(The boot configuration file is the Configured boot configuration in the
display boot command’s output.) If the running configuration contains
changes that have not been saved, these changes are not in the boot
configuration file and are not archived. To make sure the archive contains
the configuration that is currently running on the switch, use the
save config command to save the running configuration to the boot
configuration file, before using the backup command.
Examples — The following command creates an archive of the
system-critical files and copies the archive directly to a TFTP server. The
filename in this example includes a TFTP server IP address, so the archive
is not stored locally on the switch.
WX1200# backup system tftp:/10.10.20.9/sysa_bak critical
success: sent 28263 bytes in 0.324 seconds [ 87231 bytes/sec]

See Also

clear boot config

„

dir on page 545

„

restore on page 555

Resets to the factory default the configuration that MSS loads during a
reboot.
Syntax — clear boot config
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following commands back up the configuration file on
an WX switch, reset the switch to its factory default configuration, and
reboot the switch:
WX4400# copy configuration tftp://10.1.1.1/backupcfg
success: sent 365 bytes in 0.401 seconds [ 910 bytes/sec]
WX4400# clear boot config
success: Reset boot config to factory defaults.
WX4400# reset system force
...... rebooting ......

542

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

See Also

copy

„

display config on page 548

„

reset system on page 554

Performs the following copy operations:
„
„

Copies a file from a TFTP server to nonvolatile storage.
Copies a file from nonvolatile storage or temporary storage to a TFTP
server.

„

Copies a file from one area in nonvolatile storage to another.

„

Copies a file to a new filename in nonvolatile storage.

Syntax — copy source-url destination-url
„

source-url — Name and location of the file to copy. The uniform

resource locator (URL) can be one of the following:
„

[subdirname/]filename

„

file:[subdirname/]filename

„

tftp://ip-addr/[subdirname/]filename

„

tmp:filename

For the filename, specify between 1 and 128 alphanumeric characters,
with no spaces. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation.
The subdirname/ option specifies a subdirectory.
„

destination-url — Name of the copy and the location where to
place the copy. The URL can be one of the following:
„

[subdirname/]filename

„

file:[subdirname/]filename

„

tftp://ip-addr/[subdirname/]filename

If you are copying a system image file into nonvolatile storage, the
filename must include the boot partition name. You can specify one of
the following:
„

boot0:/filename

„

boot1:/filename

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

copy

543

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The filename and file:filename URLs are equivalent. You can
use either URL to refer to a file in an WX switch’s nonvolatile memory. The
tftp://ip-addr/filename URL refers to a file on a TFTP server. If DNS is
configured on the WX switch, you can specify a TFTP server’s hostname as
an alternative to specifying the IP address.
The tmp:filename URL specifies a file in temporary storage. You can copy
a file out of temporary storage but you cannot copy a file into temporary
storage. Temporary storage is reserved for use by MSS.
If you are copying a system image file into nonvolatile storage, the
filename must be preceded by the boot partition name, which can be
boot0 or boot1. Enter the filename as boot0:/filename or
boot1:/filename. You must specify the boot partition that was not used
to load the currently running image.
Examples — The following command copies a file called floorwx from
nonvolatile storage to a TFTP server:
WX4400# copy floorwx tftp://10.1.1.1/floorwx
success: sent 365 bytes in 0.401 seconds [ 910 bytes/sec]

The following command copies a file called closetwx from a TFTP server to
nonvolatile storage:
WX4400# copy tftp://10.1.1.1/closetwx closetwx
success: received 637 bytes in 0.253 seconds [ 2517
bytes/sec]

The following command copies system image WXA03001.Rel from a TFTP
server to boot partition 1 in nonvolatile storage:
WX4400# copy tftp://10.1.1.107/WXA03001.Rel
boot1:WXA03001.Rel
............................................................
................................................success:
received 9163214 bytes in 105.939 seconds [ 86495 byt
es/sec]

The following commands rename test-config to new-config by copying it
from one name to the other in the same location, then deleting
test-config:
WX4400# copy test-config new-config

544

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

WX4400# delete test-config
success: file deleted.

The following command copies file corpa-login.html from a TFTP server
into subdirectory corpa in an WX switch’s nonvolatile storage:
WX4400# copy tftp://10.1.1.1/corpa-login.html corpa/corpa-login.html
success: received 637 bytes in 0.253 seconds [ 2517 bytes/sec]

See Also

delete

„

delete on page 544

„

dir on page 545

Deletes a file.
CAUTION: MSS does not prompt you to verify whether you want to
delete a file. When you press Enter after typing a delete command, MSS
immediately deletes the specified file.
MSS does not allow you to delete the currently running software image
file or the running configuration.
Syntax — delete url
„

url — Filename. Specify between 1 and 128 alphanumeric characters,

with no spaces.
If the file is in a subdirectory, specify the subdirectory name, followed
by a forward slash, in front of the filename. For example:
subdir_a/file_a.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You might want to copy the file to a TFTP server as a backup
before deleting the file.

dir

545

Examples — The following commands copy file testconfig to a TFTP
server and delete the file from nonvolatile storage:
WX4400# copy testconfig tftp://10.1.1.1/testconfig
success: sent 365 bytes in 0.401 seconds [ 910 bytes/sec]
WX4400# delete testconfig
success: file deleted.

The following commands delete file dang_doc from subdirectory dang:
WX4400# delete dang/dang_doc
success: file deleted.

See Also

dir

„

copy on page 542

„

dir on page 545

Displays a list of the files in nonvolatile storage and temporary files.
Syntax — dir [subdirname]
„

subdirname — Subdirectory name. If you specify a subdirectory name,
the command lists the files in that subdirectory. Otherwise, the
command lists the files in the root directory and also lists the
subdirectories.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the files in the root
directory:
WX4400# dir
===============================================================================
file:
Filename
Size
Created
file:configuration
17 KB
May 21 2004, 18:20:53
file:configuration.txt
379 bytes
May 09 2004, 18:55:17
file:dangcfg
13 KB
May 16 2004, 18:30:44
dangdir/
512 bytes
May 16 2004, 17:23:44
old/
512 bytes
Sep 23 2003, 21:58:48
Total:
32 Kbytes used, 207824 Kbytes free

546

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

===============================================================================
Boot:
Filename
Size
Created
*boot0:bload
746 KB
May 09 2004, 19:02:16
*boot0:WXA03002.Rel
8182 KB
May 09 2004, 18:58:16
boot1:WXA03001.Rel
8197 KB
May 21 2004, 18:01:02
Boot0: Total:
8928 Kbytes used, 3312 Kbytes free
Boot1: Total:
8197 Kbytes used, 4060 Kbytes free
===============================================================================
temporary files:
Filename
Size
Created
Total:
0 bytes used, 93537 Kbytes free
Total: 15 Kbytes used, 90941 Kbytes free

The following command displays the files in the old subdirectory:
WX4400# dir old
===============================================================================
file:
Filename
Size
Created
file:configuration.txt
3541 bytes
Sep 22 2003, 22:55:44
file:configuration.xml
24 KB
Sep 22 2003, 22:55:44
Total:
27 Kbytes used, 207824 Kbytes free

Table 103 describes the fields in the dir output.
Table 103 Output for dir
Field

Description

Filename Filename or subdirectory name.
For files, the directory name is shown in front of the filename (for
example, file:configuration). The file: directory is the root directory.
For subdirectories, a forward slash is shown at the end of the
subdirectory name (for example, old/ ).
In the boot partitions list (Boot:), an asterisk (*) indicates the boot partition
from which the currently running image was loaded and the image filename.
Size

Size in Kbytes or bytes.

Created

System time and date when the file was created or copied onto the
switch.

Total

Number of kilobytes in use to store files and the number that are still free.

See Also
„

copy on page 542

„

delete on page 544

display boot

display boot

547

Displays the system image and configuration filenames used after the last
reboot and configured for use after the next reboot.
Syntax — display boot
Defaults — None.
Access — Access.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command shows the boot information for a
WX switch:
WX1200# display boot
Configured boot image:
Configured boot configuration:
Booted version:
Booted image:
Booted configuration:
Product model:

boot0:WXB03002.Rel
file:newconfig
3.0.1
boot1:WXB03001.Rel
file:configuration
WX1200

Table 104 describes the fields in the display boot output.
Table 104 Output for display boot
Field

Description

Configured boot
image

Boot partition and image filename MSS will use to boot next
time the software is rebooted.

Configured boot
configuration

Configuration filename MSS will use to boot next time the
software is rebooted.

Booted version

Software version the switch is running.

Booted image

Boot partition and image filename MSS used the last time
the software was rebooted. MSS is running this software
image.

Booted configuration Configuration filename MSS used to load the configuration
the last time the software was rebooted.

See Also
„

display version on page 549

„

reset system on page 554

„

set boot configuration-file on page 558

548

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

display config

Displays the configuration running on the WX switch.
Syntax — display config [area area] [all]
„

area area — Configuration area. You can specify one of the

following:
„

aaa

„

acls

„

ap

„

arp

„

eapol

„

httpd

„

ip

„

ip-config

„

log

„

mobility-domain

„

ntp

„

portconfig

„

portgroup

„

radio-profile

„

rfdetect

„

service-profile

„

sm

„

snmp

„

snoop

„

spantree

„

system

„

trace

„

vlan

„

vlan-fdb

If you do not specify a configuration area, nondefault information for
all areas is displayed.
„

all — Includes configuration items that are set to their default values.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

display version

549

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. In MSS Version 4.0, option
snoop added for remote traffic monitoring, and rfdevice was changed to
rfdetect.
Usage — If you do not use one of the optional parameters, configuration
commands that set nondefault values are displayed for all configuration
areas. If you specify an area, commands are displayed for that area only. If
you use the all option, the display also includes commands for
configuration items that are set to their default values.
Examples — The following command shows configuration information
for VLANs:
WX4400# display config area vlan
# Configuration nvgen'd at 2004-5-21 19:36:48
# Image 3.0.0
# Model WX4400
# Last change occurred at 2004-5-21 18:20:50
set vlan 1 port 1

See Also

display version

„

load config on page 551

„

save config on page 557

Displays software and hardware version information for an WX switch
and, optionally, for any attached MAP access points.
Syntax — display version [details]
„

details — Includes additional software build information and
information about the MAP access points configured on the WX
switch.

Defaults — None
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

550

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Examples — The following command displays version information for a
WX switch:
WX1200# display version
Mobility System Software, Version: 3.0.1
Copyright (c) 2004 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved.
Build Information:
Model:
Hardware
Mainboard:
PoE board:
Serial number
Flash:
Kernel:
BootLoader:

(build#168) TOP 2004-09-23 08:35:00
WX1200
version 1 ; FPGA version 0
version 0 ; FPGA version 0
M8WE48BB8C7A0
3.0.0.549 - md0a
3.0.0#130: Thu Sep 23 05:45:24 PDT 2004
1.4 / 3.0.2

The following command displays additional software build information
and MAP access point information:
WX1200# display version details
Mobility System Software, Version: 3.0.1
Copyright (c) 2004 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved.
Build Information:
Label:
Build Suffix:
Model:
Hardware
Mainboard:
CPU Model:
PoE board:
Serial number
Flash:
Kernel:
BootLoader:

(build#168) TOP 2004-09-23 08:35:00
3.0.1_092304_WX1200
-d-O1-3com
WX1200
version 1 ; FPGA version 0
405EP (Revision 9.80)
version 0 ; FPGA version 0
M8WE48BB8C7A0
3.0.1 - md0a
3.0.1#130: Thu Sep 23 05:45:24 PDT 2004
1.4 / 3.0.2

Port/DAP AP Model
Serial #
Versions
-------- ---------- ---------------------------------/1
AP2750
M9DE48B012F00 H/W : A3
F/W1 : 4.2
F/W2 : N/A
S/W : 3.0.1_092304_WX1200
BOOT S/W : 3.0.1_090304
/2
AP2750
M9DE48B123400 H/W : 4

load config

F/W1
F/W2
S/W
BOOT S/W

:
:
:
:

551

4.2
4.2
3.0.1_092304_WX1200
3.0.1_082504

Table 105 describes the fields in the display version output.
Table 105 Output for display version
Field

Description

Build Information Factory timestamp of the image file.
Label

Software version and build date.

Build Suffix

Build suffix.

Model

Build model.

Hardware

Version information for the WX switch’s motherboard and
Power over Ethernet (PoE) board.

Serial number

Serial number of the WX switch.

Flash

Flash memory version.

Kernel

Kernel version.

BootLoader

Boot code version.

Port/DAP

Port number connected to an MAP access point.

AP Model

MAP model number.

Serial #

MAP serial number.

Versions

MAP hardware, firmware, and software versions.

See Also
„

load config

display boot on page 547

Loads configuration commands from a file and replaces the WX switch’s
running configuration with the commands in the loaded file.
CAUTION: This command completely removes the running configuration
and replaces it with the configuration contained in the file. 3Com
recommends that you save a copy of the current running configuration to
a backup configuration file before loading a new configuration.

552

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Syntax — load config [url]
„

url — Filename. Specify between 1 and 128 alphanumeric characters,

with no spaces.
If the file is in a subdirectory, specify the subdirectory name, followed
by a forward slash, in front of the filename. For example:
backup_configs/config_c.
Defaults — The default file location is nonvolatile storage.
The current version supports loading a configuration file only from the
switch’s nonvolatile storage. You cannot load a configuration file directly
from a TFTP server.
If you do not specify a filename, MSS uses the same configuration
filename that was used for the previous configuration load. For example,
if the WX switch used configuration for the most recent configuration
load, MSS uses configuration again unless you specify a different
filename. To display the filename of the configuration file MSS loaded
during the last reboot, use the display boot command.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command completely replaces the running configuration
with the configuration in the file.
Examples — The following command reloads the configuration from the
most recently loaded configuration file:
WX4400# load config
Reloading configuration may result in lost of connectivity,
do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
success: Configuration reloaded

The following command loads configuration file testconfig1:
WX4400# load config testconfig1
Reloading configuration may result in lost of connectivity,
do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
success: Configuration reloaded

mkdir

553

See Also

mkdir

„

display boot on page 547

„

display config on page 548

„

save config on page 557

Creates a new subdirectory in nonvolatile storage.
Syntax — mkdir [subdirname]
„

subdirname — Subdirectory name. Specify between 1 and 32

alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following commands create a subdirectory called corp2
and display the root directory to verify the result:
WX4400# mkdir corp2
success: change accepted.
WX4400# dir
===============================================================================
file:
Filename
Size
Created
file:configuration
17 KB
May 21 2004, 18:20:53
file:configuration.txt
379 bytes
May 09 2004, 18:55:17
corp2/
512 bytes
May 21 2004, 19:22:09
corp_a/
512 bytes
May 21 2004, 19:15:48
file:dangcfg
13 KB
May 16 2004, 18:30:44
dangdir/
512 bytes
May 16 2004, 17:23:44
old/
512 bytes
Sep 23 2003, 21:58:48
Total:
33 Kbytes used, 207822 Kbytes free
===============================================================================
Boot:
Filename
Size
Created
*boot0:bload
746 KB
May 09 2004, 19:02:16
*boot0:WXA03002.Rel
8182 KB
May 09 2004, 18:58:16
boot1:WXA03001.Rel
8197 KB
May 21 2004, 18:01:02
Boot0: Total:
8928 Kbytes used, 3312 Kbytes free
Boot1: Total:
8197 Kbytes used, 4060 Kbytes free

554

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

===============================================================================
temporary files:
Filename
Size
Created
Total:
0 bytes used, 93537 Kbytes free

See Also

reset system

„

dir on page 545

„

rmdir on page 556

Restarts an WX switch and reboots the software.
Syntax — reset system [force]
„

force — Immediately restarts the system and reboots, without

comparing the running configuration to the configuration file.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you do not use the force option, the command first
compares the running configuration to the configuration file. If the
running configuration and configuration file do not match, MSS does not
restart the WX switch but instead displays a message advising you to
either save the configuration changes or use the force option.
Examples — The following command restarts an WX switch that does
not have any unsaved configuration changes:
WX4400# reset system
This will reset the entire system. Are you sure (y/n)y

The following commands attempt to restart an WX switch with a running
configuration that has unsaved changes, and then force the switch to
restart:
WX4400# reset system
error: Cannot reset, due to unsaved configuration changes.
Use "reset system force" to override.
WX4400# reset system force
...... rebooting ......

restore

555

See Also

restore

„

display boot on page 547

„

display version on page 549

„

save config on page 557

Unzips a system archive created by the backup command and copies the
files from the archive onto the switch.
Syntax — restore system [tftp:/ip-addr/]filename [all |
critical]
„

„
„

„

[tftp:/ip-addr/]filename — Name of the archive file to load. The
archive can be located in the switch’s nonvolatile storage or on a TFTP
server.
all — Restores system files and the user files from the archive.
critical — Restores system files only, including the configuration file
used when booting, and certificate files.
force — Replaces files on the switch with those in the archive, even if

the switch is not the same as the one from which the archive was
created.
CAUTION: Do not use this option unless advised to do so by 3Com TAC.
If you restore one switch’s system files onto another switch, you must
generate new key pairs and certificates on the switch.
Defaults — Critical.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.2.
Usage — If a file in the archive has a counterpart on the switch, the archive
version of the file replaces the file on the switch. The restore command does
not delete files that do not have counterparts in the archive. For example, the
command does not completely replace the user files area. Instead, files in the
archive are added to the user files area. A file in the user area is replaced only
if the archive contains a file with the same name.

556

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

If the archive’s files cannot fit on the switch, the restore operation fails.
3Com recommends deleting unneeded image files before creating or
restoring an archive.
The backup command stores the MAC address of the switch in the
archive. By default, the restore command works only if the MAC address
in the archive matches the MAC address of the switch where the restore
command is entered. The force option overrides this restriction and
allows you to unpack one switch’s archive onto another switch.
CAUTION: Do not use the force option unless you are certain you want
to replace the switch’s files with files from another switch. If you restore
one switch’s system files onto another switch, you must generate new
key pairs and certificates on the switch.
If the configuration running on the switch is different from the one in the
archive or you renamed the configuration file, and you want to retain
changes that were made after the archive was created, see the
“Managing System Files” chapter of the Wireless LAN Switch and
Controller Configuration Guide.
Examples — The following command restores system-critical files on a
switch, from archive sysa_bak.
WX1200# restore system tftp:/10.10.20.9/sysa_bak
success: received 11908 bytes in 0.150 seconds [ 79386 bytes/sec]
success: restore complete.

See Also
„

rmdir

backup on page 540

Removes a subdirectory from nonvolatile storage.
Syntax — rmdir [subdirname]
„

subdirname — Subdirectory name. Specify between 1 and 32

alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.

save config

557

History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS does not allow the subdirectory to be removed unless it is
empty. Delete all files from the subdirectory before attempting to remove
it.
Examples — The following example removes subdirectory corp2:
WX4400# rmdir corp2
success: change accepted.

See Also

save config

„

dir on page 545

„

mkdir on page 553

Saves the running configuration to a configuration file.
Syntax — save config [filename]
„

filename — Name of the configuration file. Specify between 1 and
128 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.

To save the file in a subdirectory, specify the subdirectory name,
followed by a forward slash, in front of the filename. For example:
backup_configs/config_c.
Defaults — By default, MSS saves the running configuration as the
configuration filename used during the last reboot.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you do not specify a filename, MSS replaces the
configuration file loaded during the most recent reboot. To display the
filename of the configuration file MSS loaded during the most recent
reboot, use the display boot command.
The command completely replaces the specified configuration file with
the running configuration.

558

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Examples — The following command saves the running configuration to
the configuration file loaded during the most recent reboot. In this
example, the filename used during the most recent reboot is
configuration.
WX4400# save config
Configuration saved to configuration.

The following command saves the running configuration to a file named
testconfig1:
WX4400# save config testconfig1
Configuration saved to testconfig1.

See Also

set boot
configuration-file

„

display boot on page 547

„

display config on page 548

„

load config on page 551

Changes the configuration file to load after rebooting.
Syntax — set boot configuration-file filename
„

filename — Filename. Specify between 1 and 128 alphanumeric
characters, with no spaces.

To load the file from a subdirectory, specify the subdirectory name,
followed by a forward slash, in front of the filename. For example:
backup_configs/config_c.
Defaults — The default configuration filename is configuration.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The file must be located in the switch’s nonvolatile storage.
Examples — The following command sets the boot configuration file to
testconfig1:
WX4400# set boot configuration-file testconfig1
success: boot config set.

set boot partition

set boot partition

559

Specifies the boot partition in which to look for the system image file
following the next system reset, software reload, or power cycle.
Syntax — set boot partition {boot0 | boot1}
„

boot0 — Boot partition 0.

„

boot1 — Boot partition 1.

Defaults — By default, an WX switch uses the same boot partition for
the next software reload that was used to boot the currently running
image.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To determine the boot partition that was used to load the
currently running software image, use the dir command.
Examples — The following command sets the boot partition for the next
software reload to partition 1:
WX4400# set boot partition boot1
success: Boot partition set to boot1.

See Also
„

copy on page 542

„

dir on page 545

„

reset system on page 554

560

CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

19

TRACE COMMANDS

Use trace commands to perform diagnostic routines. While MSS allows
you to run many types of traces, this chapter describes commands for
those traces you are most likely to use. For a complete listing of the types
of traces MSS allows, type the set trace ? command.
CAUTION: Using the set trace command can have adverse effects on
system performance. 3Com recommends that you use the lowest levels
possible for initial trace commands, and slowly increase the levels to get
the data you need.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents trace commands alphabetically. Use Table 106 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 106 Trace Commands by Usage
Type Command
Trace set trace sm on page 567
set trace dot1x on page 566
set trace authentication on page 564
set trace authorization on page 565
display trace on page 563
save trace on page 564
clear trace on page 562
clear log trace on page 562

562

CHAPTER 19: TRACE COMMANDS

clear log trace

Deletes the log messages stored in the trace buffer.
Syntax — clear log trace
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To delete the trace log, type the following command:
WX4400# clear log trace

See Also

clear trace

„

display log buffer on page 582

„

set log on page 586

Deletes running trace commands and ends trace processes.
Syntax — clear trace {trace-area | all}
„

trace-area — Ends a particular trace process. Specify one of the

following keywords to end the traces documented in this chapter:

„

„

authorization — Ends an authorization trace

„

dot1x — Ends an 802.1X trace

„

authentication — Ends an authentication trace

„

sm — Ends a session manager trace

all — Ends all trace processes.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To clear all trace processes, type the following command:
WX4400# clear trace all
success: clear trace all

display trace

563

To clear the session manager trace, type the following command:
WX4400# clear trace sm
success: clear trace sm

See Also

display trace

„

display trace on page 563

„

set trace authentication on page 564

„

set trace authorization on page 565

„

set trace dot1x on page 566

„

set trace sm on page 567

Displays information about traces that are currently configured on the
WX switch, or all possible trace options.
Syntax — display trace [all]
„

all — Displays all possible trace options and their configuration.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To view the traces currently running, type the following
command:
WX4400# display trace
milliseconds spent printing traces: 1885.614
Trace Area
Level Mac
User
Port Filter
-------------------- ----- ----------------- ----------------- ---- -------dot1x
5
0
sm
5
0

See Also
„

clear trace on page 562

„

set trace authentication on page 564

„

set trace authorization on page 565

„

set trace dot1x on page 566

„

set trace sm on page 567

564

CHAPTER 19: TRACE COMMANDS

save trace

Saves the accumulated trace data for enabled traces to a file in the WX
switch’s nonvolatile storage.
Syntax — save trace filename
„

filename — Name for the trace file. To save the file in a subdirectory,

specify the subdirectory name, then a slash. For example: traces/trace1
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To save trace data into the file trace1 in the subdirectory
traces, type the following command:
WX4400# save trace traces/trace1

set trace
authentication

Traces authentication information.
Syntax — set trace authentication [mac-addr mac-address]
[port port-num] [user username] [level level]
„

mac-addr mac-address — Traces a MAC address. Specify a MAC
address, using colons to separate the octets (for example,
00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).

„

port port-num — Traces on a WX port number.

„

user username — Traces a user. Specify a username of up to

32 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
„

level level — Determines the quantity of information included in

the output. You can set the level with an integer from 1 to 10, where
level 10 provides the most information. Levels 1 through 5 provide
user-readable information. If you do not specify a level, level 5 is the
default.
Defaults — The default trace level is 5.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

set trace authorization

565

Examples — The following command starts a trace for information
about user jose’s authentication:
WX4400# set trace authentication user jose
success: change accepted.

See Also

set trace
authorization

„

clear trace on page 562

„

display trace on page 563

Traces authorization information.
Syntax — set trace authorization [mac-addr mac-address]
[port port-num] [user username] [level level]
„

„
„

„

mac-addr mac-address — Traces a MAC address. Specify a MAC
address, using colons to separate the octets (for example,
00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).
port port-num — Traces on a WX a port number.
user username — Traces a user. Specify a username of up to
80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
level level — Determines the quantity of information included in the

output. You can set the level with an integer from 1 to 10, where level 10
provides the most information. Levels 1 through 5 provide user-readable
information. If you do not specify a level, level 5 is the default.
Defaults — The default trace level is 5.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command starts a trace for information for
authorization for MAC address 00:01:02:03:04:05:
WX4400# set trace authorization mac-addr 00:01:02:03:04:05
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear trace on page 562

„

display trace on page 563

566

CHAPTER 19: TRACE COMMANDS

set trace dot1x

Traces 802.1X sessions.
Syntax — set trace dot1x [mac-addr mac-address] [port port-num]
[user username] [level level]
„

mac-addr mac-address — Traces a MAC address. Specify a MAC
address, using colons to separate the octets (for example,
00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).

„

port port-num — Traces on a WX port number.

„

user username — Traces a user. Specify a username of up to

80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
„

level level — Determines the quantity of information included in

the output. You can set the level with an integer from 1 to 10, where
level 10 provides the most information. Levels 1 through 5 provide
user-readable information. If you do not specify a level, level 5 is the
default.
Defaults — The default trace level is 5.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command starts a trace for the 802.1X
sessions for MAC address 00:01:02:03:04:05:
WX4400# set trace dot1x mac-addr 00:01:02:03:04:05:
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear trace on page 562

„

display trace on page 563

set trace sm

set trace sm

567

Traces session manager activity.
Syntax — set trace sm [mac-addr mac-address] [port port-num]
[user username] [level level]
„

„
„

„

mac-addr mac-address — Traces a MAC address. Specify a MAC
address, using colons to separate the octets (for example,
00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).
port port-num — Traces on a WX port number.
user username — Traces a user. Specify a username of up to
80 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
level level — Determines the quantity of information included in

the output. You can set the level with an integer from 1 to 10, where
level 10 provides the most information. Levels 1 through 5 provide
user-readable information. If you do not specify a level, level 5 is the
default.
Defaults — The default trace level is 5.a
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to trace session manager
activity for MAC address 00:01:02:03:04:05:
WX4400# set trace sm mac-addr 00:01:02:03:04:05:
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear trace on page 562

„

display trace on page 563

568

CHAPTER 19: TRACE COMMANDS

20

SNOOP COMMANDS

Use snoop commands to monitor wireless traffic, by using a Distributed
MAP as a sniffing device. The MAP copies the sniffed 802.11 packets and
sends the copies to an observer, which is typically a protocol analyzer
such as Ethereal or Tethereal.
(For more information, including setup instructions for the monitoring
station, see the “Remotely Monitoring Traffic” section in the
“Troubleshooting an WX Switch” chapter of the Wireless LAN Switch
Configuration Guide.)
This chapter presents snoop commands alphabetically. Use the following
table to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 107 Snoop Commands by Usage
Remote monitoring
(snooping)

set snoop on page 571
display snoop info on page 577
clear snoop on page 570
set snoop map on page 574
display snoop map on page 577
display snoop on page 576
clear snoop map on page 570
set snoop mode on page 575
display snoop stats on page 578

570

CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS

clear snoop

Deletes a snoop filter.
Syntax — clear snoop filter-name
„

filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command deletes snoop filter snoop1:
WX1200# clear snoop snoop1

See Also

clear snoop map

„

set snoop on page 571

„

display snoop info on page 577

Removes a snoop filter from an MAP radio.
clear snoop map filter-name dap dap-num radio {1 | 2}
„

filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.

„

dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP to which to snoop filter is

mapped.
„
„

radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)

„

Defaults — None.

„

Access — Enabled.

„

History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.

„

Examples — The following command removes snoop filter snoop2
from radio 2 on Distributed MAP 3:

WX1200# clear snoop map snoop2 dap 3 radio 2
success: change accepted.

set snoop

571

The following command removes all snoop filter mappings from all
radios:
WX1200# clear snoop map all
success: change accepted.

See Also

set snoop

„

set snoop map on page 574

„

display snoop on page 576

„

display snoop map on page 577

Configures a snoop filter.
set snoop filter-name [condition-list] [observer ip-addr]
[snap-length num]
„

filter-name — Name for the filter. The name can be up to 32

alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
„

condition-list — Match criteria for packets. Conditions in the list
are ANDed. Therefore, to be copied and sent to an observer, a packet
must match all criteria in the condition-list. You can specify up to
eight of the following conditions in a filter, in any order or
combination:
„

frame-type {eq | neq} {beacon | control | data |
management | probe}

„

channel {eq | neq} channel

„

bssid {eq | neq} bssid

„

src-mac {eq | neq} mac-addr

„

dest-mac {eq | neq} mac-addr

„

host-mac {eq | neq} mac-addr

„

mac-pair mac-addr1 mac-addr2

To match on packets to or from a specific MAC address, use the
dest-mac or src-mac option. To match on both send and receive
traffic for a host address, use the host-mac option. To match on a
traffic flow (source and destination MAC addresses), use the mac-pair
option. This option matches for either direction of a flow, and either
MAC address can be the source or destination address.

572

CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS

If you omit a condition, all packets match that condition. For example,
if you omit frame-type, all frame types match the filter.
For most conditions, you can use eq (equal) to match only on traffic
that matches the condition value. Use neq (not equal) to match only
on traffic that is not equal to the condition value.
„

observer ip-addr — Specifies the IP address of the station where

the protocol analyzer is located. If you do not specify an observer, the
MAP radio still counts the packets that match the filter.
„

snap-length num — Specifies the maximum number of bytes to

capture. If you do not specify a length, the entire packet is copied and
sent to the observer. 3Com recommends specifying a snap length of
100 bytes or less.
Defaults — No snoop filters are configured by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — Traffic that matches a snoop filter is copied after it is
decrypted. The decrypted (clear) version is sent to the observer.
For best results:
„

Do not specify an observer that is associated with the MAP where the
snoop filter is running. This configuration causes an endless cycle of
snoop traffic.

set snoop

„

„

573

If the snoop filter is running on a Distributed MAP, and the MAP used
a DHCP server in its local subnet to configure its IP information, and
the MAP did not receive a default gateway address as a result, the
observer must also be in the same subnet. Without a default gateway,
the MAP cannot find the observer.
The MAP that is running a snoop filter forwards snooped packets
directly to the observer. This is a one-way communication, from the
MAP to the observer. If the observer is not present, the MAP still sends
the snoop packets, which use bandwidth. If the observer is present
but is not listening to TZSP traffic, the observer continuously sends
ICMP error indications back to the MAP. These ICMP messages can
affect network and MAP performance.

Examples — The following command configures a snoop filter named
snoop1 that matches on all traffic, and copies the traffic to the device
that has IP address 10.10.30.2:
WX1200# set snoop snoop1 observer 10.10.30.2 snap-length 100

The following command configures a snoop filter named snoop2 that
matches on all data traffic between the device with MAC address
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff and the device with MAC address 11:22:33:44:55:66,
and copies the traffic to the device that has IP address 10.10.30.3:
WX1200# set snoop snoop2 frame-type eq data mac-pair
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff 11:22:33:44:55:66 observer 10.10.30.3
snap-length 100

See Also
„

clear snoop on page 570

„

set snoop map on page 574

„

set snoop mode on page 575

„

display snoop info on page 577

„

display snoop stats on page 578

574

CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS

set snoop map

Maps a snoop filter to a radio on a Distributed MAP. A snoop filter does
take effect until you map it to a radio and enable the filter.
Examples — set snoop map filter-name dap dap-num radio {1 | 2}
„
„

filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.
dap-num —Number of a Distributed MAP to which to map the snoop

filter.
„
„

radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)

Defaults — Snoop filters are unmapped by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — You can map the same filter to more than one radio. You can
map up to eight filters to the same radio. If more than one filter has the
same observer, the MAP sends only one copy of a packet that matches a
filter to the observer. After the first match, the MAP sends the packet and
stops comparing the packet against other filters for the same observer.
If the filter does not have an observer, the MAP still maintains a counter
of the number of packets that match the filter. (See display snoop stats
on page 578.)
Examples — The following command maps snoop filter snoop1 to radio
2 on Distributed MAP 3:
WX1200# set snoop map snoop1 dap 3 radio 2
success: change accepted.

set snoop mode

575

See Also

set snoop mode

„

clear snoop map on page 570

„

set snoop on page 571

„

set snoop mode on page 575

„

display snoop map on page 577

„

display snoop stats on page 578

Enables a snoop filter. A snoop filter does not take effect until you map it
to an MAP radio and enable the filter.
set snoop {filter-name | all}
mode {enable [stop-after num-pkts] | disable}
„

filter-name | all — Name of the snoop filter. Specify all to enable

all snoop filters.
„

enable [stop-after num-pkts] — Enables the snoop filter.

The stop-after option disables the filter after the specified number of
packets match the filter. Without the stop-after option, the filter
operates until you disable it or until the MAP is restarted.
„

disable — Disables the snoop filter.

Defaults — Snoop filters are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The filter mode is not retained if you change the filter
configuration or disable and reenable the radio, or when the MAP or the
WX switch is restarted. You must reenable the filter to place it back into
effect.
Examples — The following command enables snoop filter snoop1, and
configures the filter to stop after 5000 packets match the filter:
WX1200 set snoop snoop1 mode enable stop-after 5000
success: filter 'snoop1' enabled

See Also

576

CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS

display snoop

„

display snoop on page 576

„

display snoop info on page 577

„

display snoop map on page 577

„

display snoop stats on page 578

Displays the MAP radio mapping for all snoop filters.
Syntax — display snoop
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — To display the mappings for a specific MAP radio, use the
display snoop map command.
Examples — The following command shows the MAP radio mappings
for all snoop filters configured on a WX switch:
WX1200# display snoop
Dap: 3
Radio: 2
snoop1
snoop2
Dap: 2
Radio: 2
snoop2

See Also
„

clear snoop map on page 570

„

set snoop map on page 574

„

display snoop map on page 577

display snoop info

display snoop info

577

Shows the configured snoop filters.
Syntax — display snoop filter-name
„

filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command shows the snoop filters configured
in the examples above:
WX1200# display snoop info
snoop1:
observer 10.10.30.2 snap-length 100
all packets
snoop2:
observer 10.10.30.3 snap-length 100
frame-type eq data
mac-pair (aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff, 11:22:33:44:55:66)

See Also

display snoop map

„

clear snoop on page 570

„

set snoop on page 571

Shows the MAP radios that are mapped to a specific snoop filter.
Syntax — display snoop map filter-name
„

filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.

578

CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS

Usage — To display the mappings for all snoop filters, use the display
snoop command.
Examples — The following command shows the mapping for snoop
filter snoop1:
WX1200# display snoop map snoop1
filter 'snoop1' mapping
Dap: 3
Radio: 2

See Also

display snoop stats

„

clear snoop map on page 570

„

set snoop map on page 574

„

display snoop on page 576

Displays statistics for enabled snoop filters.
Examples — display snoop stats [filter-name [dap-num [radio
{1 | 2}]]]
„
„

filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP to which the snoop filter is

mapped.
„
„

radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The MAP retains statistics for a snoop filter until the filter is
changed or disabled. The MAP then clears the statistics.

display snoop stats

579

Examples — The following command shows statistics for snoop filter
snoop1:
WX1200# display snoop stats snoop1
Filter
Dap
Radio
Rx Match
Tx Match
Dropped
Stop-After
=========================================================================
snoop
3
1
96
4
0
stopped

Table 108 describes the fields in this display.
Table 108 display snoop stats Output
Field

Description

Filter

Name of the snoop filter.

Dap

Distributed MAP containing the radio to which the filter is
mapped.

Radio

Radio to which the filter is mapped.

Rx Match

Number of packets received by the radio that match the
filter.

Tx Match

Number of packets sent by the radio that match the filter.

Dropped

Number of packets that matched the filter but that were not
copied to the observer due to memory or network problems.

Stop-After

Filter state:
„

running—enabled

„

stopped—disabled

„

number-of-packets—If the filter is running and the
stop-after option was used to stop the filter, this field
displays the number of packets that still need to match
before the filter is stopped.

580

CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS

21

SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS

Use the system log commands to record information for monitoring and
troubleshooting. MSS system logs are based on RFC 3164, which defines
the log protocol.

Commands by
Usage

This chapter present system log commands alphabetically. Use Table 109
to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 109 System Log Commands by Usage
Type

Command

System Logs set log on page 586
set log trace mbytes on page 589
display log config on page 584
display log buffer on page 582
display log trace on page 585
clear log on page 581

clear log

Clears the log messages stored in the log buffer, or removes the
configuration for a syslog server and stops sending log messages to that
server.
Syntax — clear log [buffer | server ip-addr]
„
„

buffer — Deletes the log messages stored in nonvolatile storage.
server ip-addr — Deletes the configuration for and stops sending
log messages to the syslog server at this IP address. Specify an address
in dotted decimal notation.

Defaults — None.

582

CHAPTER 21: SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS

Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To stop sending system logging messages to a server at
192.168.253.11, type the following command:
WX4400# clear log server 192.168.253.11
success: change accepted.

Type the following command to clear all messages from the log buffer:
WX4400# clear log buffer
success: change accepted.

See Also

display log buffer

„

clear log trace on page 562

„

set log on page 586

Displays system information stored in the nonvolatile log buffer or the
trace buffer.
Syntax — display log buffer [{+|-}number-of-messages]
[facility facility-name] [matching string]
[severity severity-level]
„

buffer — Displays the log messages in nonvolatile storage.

„

+|- number-of-messages — Displays the number of messages

specified as follows:
„

„

„

A positive number (for example, +100), displays that number of log
entries starting from the oldest in the log.
A negative number (for example, -100) displays that number of log
entries starting from newest in the log.

facility facility-name — Area of MSS that is sending the log

message. Type a space and a question mark (?) after display log
buffer facility for a list of valid facilities.
„

matching string — Displays messages that match a string—for

example, a username or IP address.

display log buffer

„

583

severity severity-level — Displays messages at a severity level

greater than or equal to the level specified. Specify one of the
following:
„

emergency — The WX switch is unusable.

„

alert — Action must be taken immediately.

„

critical — You must resolve the critical conditions. If the
conditions are not resolved, the WX can reboot or shut down.

„

error — The WX is missing data or is unable to form a connection.

„

warning — A possible problem exists.

„

notice — Events that potentially can cause system problems have

occurred. These are logged for diagnostic purposes. No action is
required.
„

info — Informational messages only. No problem exists.

„

debug — Output from debugging.

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The debug level produces a lot of messages, many of which
can appear to be somewhat cryptic. Debug messages are used primarily
by 3Com for troubleshooting and are not intended for administrator use.
Examples — Type the following command to see the facilities for which
you can view event messages archived in the buffer:
WX4400# display log buffer facility ?

Select one of: KERNEL, AAA, SYSLOGD, ACL, APM, ARP,
ASO, BOOT, CLI, CLUSTER, COPP, CRYPTO, DOT1X, ENCAP, ETHERNET, GATEWAY, HTTPD,
IGMP, IP, MISC, NOSE, NP, RAND, RESOLV, RIB, ROAM, ROGUE, SM, SNMPD, SPAN, STORE,
SYS, TAGMGR, TBRIDGE, TCPSSL, TELNET, TFTP, TLS, TUNNEL, VLAN, X509, XML, MAP,
RAPDA, WEBVIEW, EAP, PORTCONFIG, FP.

The following command displays logged messages for the AAA facility:
WX4400# display log buffer facility AAA
AAA Jun. 25 09:11:32.579848 ERROR AAA_NOTIFY_ERR: AAA got SM
special event (98) on locality 3950 which is gone

584

CHAPTER 21: SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS

See Also

display log config

„

clear log on page 581

„

display log config on page 584

Displays log configuration information.
Syntax — display log config
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display how logging is configured, type the following
command:
WX4400#
Logging
Logging
Logging
Logging
Logging
Logging
Logging
Logging
Logging

display log config
console:
console severity:
sessions:
sessions severity:
buffer:
buffer severity:
trace:
trace severity:
buffer size:

Logging server:
Current session:
Current session severity:

See Also
„

set log on page 586

„

clear log on page 581

disabled
DEBUG
disabled
INFO
enabled
WARNING
enabled
DEBUG
10485760 bytes
10.1.1.10
disabled
INFO

severity DEBUG

display log trace

display log trace

585

Displays system information stored in the nonvolatile log buffer or the
trace buffer.
Syntax — display log trace [{+|-|/}number-of-messages]
[facility facility-name] [matching string]
[severity severity-level]
„

trace — Displays the log messages in the trace buffer.

„

+|-|/number-of-messages — Displays the number of messages

specified as follows:
„

„

„

„

A positive number (for example, +100), displays that number of log
entries starting from the oldest in the log.
A negative number (for example, -100) displays that number of log
entries starting from newest in the log.
A number preceded by a slash (for example, /100) displays that
number of the most recent log entries in the log, starting with the
least recent.

facility facility-name — Area of MSS that is sending the log

message. Type a space and a question mark (?) after display log
trace facility for a list of valid facilities.
„

„

matching string — Displays messages that match a string—for
example, a username or IP address.
severity severity-level — Displays messages at a severity level

greater than or equal to the level specified. Specify one of the
following:
„

emergency — The WX switch is unusable.

„

alert — Action must be taken immediately.

„

critical — You must resolve the critical conditions. If the
conditions are not resolved, the WX can reboot or shut down.

„

error — The WX is missing data or is unable to form a connection.

„

warning — A possible problem exists.

„

notice — Events that potentially can cause system problems have

occurred. These are logged for diagnostic purposes. No action is
required.
„

info — Informational messages only. No problem exists.

„

debug — Output from debugging.

586

CHAPTER 21: SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS

Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to see the facilities for which
you can view event messages archived in the buffer:
WX4400# display log trace facility ?

Select one of: KERNEL, AAA, SYSLOGD, ACL, APM, ARP,
ASO, BOOT, CLI, CLUSTER, COPP, CRYPTO, DOT1X, ENCAP, ETHERNET, GATEWAY, HTTPD,
IGMP, IP, MISC, NOSE, NP, RAND, RESOLV, RIB, ROAM, ROGUE, SM, SNMPD, SPAN, STORE,
SYS, TAGMGR, TBRIDGE, TCPSSL, TELNET, TFTP, TLS, TUNNEL, VLAN, X509, XML, MAP,
RAPDA, WEBVIEW, EAP, PORTCONFIG, FP.

See Also

set log

„

clear log on page 581

„

display log config on page 584

Enables or disables logging of WX and MAP events to the WX log buffer
or other logging destination and sets the level of the events logged. For
logging to a syslog server only, you can also set the facility logged.
Syntax — set log {buffer | console | current | server ip-addr
| sessions | trace} [severity severity-level] enable | disable]

Syntax — set log server ip-addr [severity severity-level
[local-facility facility-level]] [enable | disable]
„

„
„

„

buffer — Sets log parameters for the log buffer in nonvolatile
storage.
console — Sets log parameters for console sessions.
current — Sets log parameters for the current Telnet or console
session. These settings are not stored in nonvolatile memory.
server ip-addr — Sets log parameters for a syslog server. Specify an
address in dotted decimal notation.

set log

„

587

sessions — Sets the default log values for Telnet sessions. You can
set defaults for the following log parameters:
„

Severity

„

Logging state (enabled or disabled)

To override the session defaults for an individual session, type the set
log command from within the session and use the current option.
„

trace — Sets log parameters for trace files.

„

severity severity-level — Logs events at a severity level greater

than or equal to the level specified. Specify one of the following:
„

emergency — The WX switch is unusable.

„

alert — Action must be taken immediately.

„

critical — You must resolve the critical conditions. If the
conditions are not resolved, the WX can reboot or shut down.

„

error — The WX is missing data or is unable to form a connection.

„

warning — A possible problem exists.

„

notice — Events that potentially can cause system problems have

occurred. These are logged for diagnostic purposes. No action is
required.

„

„

info — Informational messages only. No problem exists.

„

debug — Output from debugging.

local-facility facility-level — For messages sent to a syslog

server, maps all messages of the severity you specify to one of the
standard local log facilities defined in RFC 3164. You can specify one
of the following values:
„

0 — maps all messages to local0.

„

1 — maps all messages to local1.

„

2 — maps all messages to local2.

„

3 — maps all messages to local3.

„

4 — maps all messages to local4.

„

5 — maps all messages to local5.

„

6 — maps all messages to local6.

„

7 — maps all messages to local7.

588

CHAPTER 21: SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS

If you do not specify a local facility, MSS sends the messages with their
default MSS facilities. For example, AAA messages are sent with
facility 4 and boot messages are sent with facility 20 by default.
„

enable — Enables messages to the specified target.

„

disable — Disables messages to the specified target.

Defaults — The following are defaults for the set log commands.
„
„

„

Events at the error level and higher are logged to the WX console.
Events at the error level and higher are logged to the WX system
buffer.
Trace logging is enabled, and debug-level output is stored in the WX
trace buffer.

Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Using the command with only enable or disable turns logging
on or off for the target at all levels. For example, entering set log buffer
enable with no other keywords turns on logging to the system buffer of
all facilities at all levels. Entering set log buffer disable with no other
keywords turns off all logging to the buffer.
Examples — To log only emergency, alert, and critical system events to
the console, type the following command:
WX4400# set log console severity critical enable
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

clear log on page 581

„

display log config on page 584

set log trace mbytes

set log trace
mbytes

589

Changes the size of trace log files.
Syntax — set log trace mbytes count
„

count — Size of the trace buffer, in megabytes (MB). You can specify

from 1 through 50.
Defaults — The default trace buffer size is 1 MB.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command increases the trace buffer size to
4 MB:
WX4400# set log trace mbytes 4
success: change accepted.

See Also
„

display log config on page 584

590

CHAPTER 21: SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS

22

BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS

Boot prompt commands enable you to perform basic tasks, including
booting a system image file, from the boot prompt (boot>). A CLI session
enters the boot prompt if MSS does not boot successfully or you
intentionally interrupt the boot process. To interrupt the boot process,
press q followed by Enter (return).
CAUTION: Generally, boot prompt commands are used only for
troubleshooting. 3Com recommends that you use these commands only
when working with 3Com Technical Support to diagnose a system issue.
In particular, commands that change boot parameters can interfere with
a WX switch’s ability to boot successfully.

Boot Prompt
Commands by
Usage

This chapter presents boot prompt commands alphabetically. Use
Table 110 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 110 Boot Prompt Commands by Usage
Type

Command

Command Information

ls on page 602
help on page 602

Booting

boot on page 593
reset on page 604
autoboot on page 592

File Management

dir on page 598
fver on page 601
version on page 606

Boot Profile Management display on page 599
create on page 596

592

CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS

Table 110 Boot Prompt Commands by Usage (continued)
Type

Command

Boot Profile
Management, cont.

next on page 603
change on page 595
delete on page 597

Diagnostics

diag on page 598
test on page 605

autoboot

Displays or changes the state of the autoboot option. The autoboot
option controls whether a WX switch automatically boots a system image
after initializing the hardware, following a system reset or power cycle.
Syntax — autoboot [ON | on | OFF | off]
„

ON — Enables the autoboot option.

„

on — Same effect as ON.

„

OFF — Disables the autoboot option.

„

off — Same effect as OFF.

Defaults — The autoboot option is enabled by default.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the current setting of the
autoboot option:
boot> autoboot
The autoboot flag is on.

See Also
„

boot on page 593

boot

boot

593

Loads and executes a system image file.
Syntax — boot [BT=type] [DEV=device] [FN=filename]
[HA=ip-addr] [FL=num] [OPT=option] [OPT+=option]
„

„

BT=type — Boot type:
„

c — Compact flash. Boots using nonvolatile storage or a flash card.

„

n — Network. Boots using a TFTP server.

DEV=device — Location of the system image file:
„

c: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 0

„

d: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 1

„

e: — Primary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot

„

f: — Secondary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot

„

boot0 — boot partition 0

„

boot1 — boot partition 1

„

FN=filename — System image filename.

„

HA=ip-addr — Host address (IP address) of a TFTP server. This

parameter applies only when the boot type is n (network).
„

„

FL=num — Number representing the bit settings of boot flags to pass
to the booted system image. Use this parameter only if advised to do
so by 3Com.
OPT=option — String up to 128 bytes of boot options to pass to the

booted system image instead of the boot option(s) in the currently
active boot profile. The options temporarily replace the options in the
boot profile. Use this parameter only if advised to do so by 3Com.
„

OPT+=option — String up to 128 bytes of boot options to pass to the
booted system image in addition to the boot option(s) in the currently
active boot profile. The options are appended to the options already in
the boot profile. Use this parameter only if advised to do so by 3Com.

Defaults — The boot settings in the currently active boot profile are used
by default.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

594

CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS

Usage — If you use an optional parameter, the parameter setting
overrides the setting of the same parameter in the currently active boot
profile. However, the boot profile itself is not changed. To display the
currently active boot profile, use the display command. To change the
currently active boot profile, use the change command.
Examples — The following command loads system image file
WXA30001.Rel from boot partition 1:
boot> boot FN=WXA03001.Rel DEV=boot1
Compact Flash load from boot0:WXA03001.Rel.
unzip: Inflating ramdisk_3.0.1_092304_WX4400 OK
unzip file len 36196930 OK

Copyright (c) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004
The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1989, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Detecting hardware...done.
readclock: 2004-9-29 21:45:7.31 UTC
system initialized (3.0.1), starting MSS
Executing update_3
Starting supervisor 3.0.1_092304_WX4400 ...
SNMPD Sep 29 21:45:34.262293 NOTICE SNMPD: SNMP Agent Resident Module Version
16.1.0.0
SNMPD Sep 29 21:45:34.263146 NOTICE SNMPD: Copyright (c) 2004 3Com Corporation.
All rights reserved.
SYS Sep 29 21:45:36.849457 NOTICE Port 1 up 1000 Full Duplex
SYSLOGD Sep 29 21:45:38.857125 ALERT SYSTEM_READY: The system has finished
booting. (cause was "Warm Reboot")

Copyright (c) 2004 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved.

Username:

See Also
„

change on page 595

„

display on page 599

change

change

595

Changes parameters in the currently active boot profile. (For information
about boot profiles, see display on page 599.)
Syntax — change
Defaults — The default boot type is c (compact flash). The default
filename is default. The default flags setting is 0x00000000 (all flags
disabled) and the default options list is run=nos;boot=0. The default
device setting is the boot partition specified by the most recent set boot
partition command typed at the Enabled level of the CLI, or boot 0 if the
command has never been typed.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — After you type the change command, the system interactively
displays the current setting of each parameter and prompts you for the
new setting. When prompted, type the new setting, press Enter to accept
the current setting, or type . (period) to change the setting to its default
value. To back up to the previous parameter, type - (hyphen).
For information about each of the boot parameters you can set, see
display on page 599.
Examples — The following command enters the configuration mode for
the currently active boot profile, changes the device to boot1, and leaves
the other parameters with their current settings:
boot> change
Changing the default configuration is not recommended.
Are you sure that you want to proceed? (y/n)
BOOT TYPE:
DEVICE:
FILENAME:
FLAGS:
OPTIONS:

[c]
[boot0:]boot1
[default]
[0x00000000]
[run=nos;boot=0]

See Also
„

boot on page 593

„

create on page 596

596

create

CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS

„

delete on page 597

„

display on page 599

„

next on page 603

Creates a new boot profile. (For information about boot profiles, see
display on page 599.)
Syntax — create
Defaults — The new boot profile has the same settings as the currently
active boot profile by default.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — A WX switch can have up to four boot profiles. The boot
profiles are stored in slots, numbered 0 through 3. When you create a
new profile, the system uses the next available slot for the profile. If all
four slots already contain profiles and you try to create a fifth profile, the
switch displays a message advising you to change one of the existing
profiles instead.
To make a new boot profile the currently active boot profile, use the next
command. To change boot parameter settings, use the change
command.
Examples — The following command creates a new boot profile in slot 1
on a WX switch that currently has only one boot profile, in slot 0:
boot> create
BOOT Index:
BOOT TYPE:
DEVICE:
FILENAME:
FLAGS:
OPTIONS:

1
c
boot1:
default
00000000
run=nos;boot=0

See Also
„

change on page 595

„

delete on page 597

delete

delete

„

display on page 599

„

next on page 603

597

Removes the currently active boot profile. (For information about boot
profiles, see display on page 599.)
Syntax — delete
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When you type the delete command, the next-lower
numbered boot profile becomes the active profile. For example, if the
currently active profile is number 3, profile number 2 becomes active after
you type delete to delete profile 3. You cannot delete boot profile 0.
Examples — To remove the currently active boot profile, type the
following command:
boot> delete
BOOT Index:
BOOT TYPE:
DEVICE:
FILENAME:
FLAGS:
OPTIONS:

1
c
boot1:
default
00000000
run=nos;boot=0

See Also
„

change on page 595

„

create on page 596

„

display on page 599

„

next on page 603

598

diag

CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS

Accesses the diagnostic mode.
Syntax — diag
Defaults — The diagnostic mode is disabled by default.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Access to the diagnostic mode requires a password, which is
not user configurable. Use this mode only if advised to do so by 3Com.

dir

Displays the boot code and system image files on a WX switch.
Syntax — dir [c: | d: | e: | f: | boot0 | boot1]
„

c: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 0 (primary).

„

d: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 1 (secondary).

„

e: — Primary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot.

„

f: — Secondary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot.

„

boot0 — Boot partition 0.

„

boot1 — Boot partition 1.

Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To display the system image software versions, use the fver
command. This command does not list the boot code versions. To display
the boot code versions, use the version command.
Examples — The following command displays all the boot code and
system image files on a WX switch:
boot> dir
Internal Compact Flash Directory (Primary):
WXA30001.Rel
8863722 bytes

display

599

Internal Compact Flash Directory (Secondary):
WXA30001.Rel
8862885 bytes

See Also

display

„

fver on page 601

„

version on page 606

Displays the currently active boot profile. A boot profile is a set of
parameters that a WX switch uses to control the boot process. Each boot
profile contains the following parameters:
„

Boot type — Either compact flash (local device on the WX switch) or
network (TFTP)

„

Boot device — Location of the system image file

„

Filename — System image file

„

„

Flags — Number representing the bit settings of boot flags to pass to
the booted system image.
Options — String up to 128 bytes of boot options to pass to the
booted system image

A WX switch can have up to four boot profiles, numbered 0 through 3.
Only one boot profile can be active at a time. You can create, change,
and delete boot profiles. You also can activate another boot profile in
place of the currently active one.
Syntax — display
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display the currently active boot profile, type the
following command at the boot prompt:
boot> display
BOOT Index:
BOOT TYPE:

0
c

600

CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS

DEVICE:
FILENAME:
FLAGS:
OPTIONS:

boot1:
default
00000000
run=nos;boot=0

Table 111 describes the fields in the display.
Table 111 Output of display command
Field

Description

BOOT Index

Boot profile slot, which can be a number from 0 to 3.

BOOT TYPE

Boot type:

DEVICE

„

c — Compact flash. Boots using nonvolatile storage or a
flash card.

„

n — Network. Boots using a TFTP server.

Location of the system image file:
„

c: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 0

„

d: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 1

„

e: — Primary partition of the flash card in the flash card
slot

„

f: — Secondary partition of the flash card in the flash
card slot

„

boot0 — boot partition 0

„

boot1 — boot partition 1

FILENAME

System image file name.

FLAGS

Number representing the bit settings of boot flags to pass to
the booted system image.

OPTIONS

String up to 128 bytes of boot options to pass to the booted
system image.

See Also
„

change on page 595

„

create on page 596

„

delete on page 597

„

next on page 603

fver

fver

601

Displays the version of a system image file installed in a specific location
on a WX switch.
Syntax — fver {c: | d: | e: | f: | boot0: | boot1:}
[filename]
„

c: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 0 (primary).

„

d: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 1 (secondary).

„

e: — Primary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot.

„

f: — Secondary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot.

„

boot0: — Boot partition 0.

„

boot1: — Boot partition 1.

„

filename — System image filename.

Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To display the image filenames, use the dir command. This
command does not list the boot code versions. To display the boot code
versions, use the version command.
Examples — The following command displays the system image version
installed in boot partition 1:
boot> fver boot1
File boot1:default version is 3.0.1.

See Also
„

dir on page 598

„

version on page 606

602

CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS

help

Displays a list of all the boot prompt commands or detailed information
for an individual command.
Syntax — help [command-name]
„

command-name — Boot prompt command.

Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you specify a command name, detailed information is
displayed for that command. If you do not specify a command name, all
the boot prompt commands are listed.
Examples — The following command displays detailed information for
the fver command:
boot> help fver
fver

Display the version of the specified device:filename.

USAGE: fver [c:file|d:file|e:file|f:file|boot0:file|boot1:file|
boot2:file|boot3:file]
Command to display the version of the compressed image file
associated with the given device:filename.

See Also
„

ls

ls on page 602

Displays a list of the boot prompt commands.
Syntax — ls
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

next

603

Usage — To display help for an individual command, type help followed
by the command name (for example, help boot).
Examples — To display a list of the commands available at the boot
prompt, type the following command:
boot> ls
ls
help
autoboot
boot
profile.
change
create
delete
next
display
dir
fver
version
reset
test
diag

Display a list of all commands and descriptions.
Display help information for each command.
Display the state of, enable, or disable the autoboot option.
Load and execute an image using the current boot configuration
Change the current boot configuration profile.
Create a new boot configuration profile.
Delete the current boot configuration profile.
Select the next boot configuration profile.
Display the current boot configuration profile.
Display the contents of the specified boot partition.
Display the version of the loadable image specified by device:filename.
Display HW and Bootstrap/Bootloader version information.
Reset the system.
Display the state of, enable, or disable the tests option.
Access the diagnostic command CLI.

See Also
„

next

help on page 602

Activates and displays the boot profile in the next boot profile slot. (For
information about boot profiles, see display on page 599.)
Syntax — next
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — A WX switch contains 4 boot profile slots, numbered
0 through 3. This command activates the boot profile in the next slot, in
ascending numerical order. If the currently active slot is 3, the command
activates the boot profile in slot 0.

604

CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS

Examples — To activate the boot profile in the next slot and display the
profile, type the following command:
boot> next
BOOT Index:
BOOT TYPE:
DEVICE:
FILENAME:
FLAGS:
OPTIONS:

0
c
boot1:
testcfg
00000000
run=nos;boot=0

See Also

reset

„

change on page 595

„

create on page 596

„

delete on page 597

„

display on page 599

Resets a WX switch’s hardware.
Syntax — reset
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — After resetting the hardware, the reset command attempts to
load a system image file only if other boot settings are configured to do
so.
Examples — To immediately reset the system, type the following
command at the boot prompt:
boot> reset
WX Bootstrap 3.1 Release
Testing Low Memory 1 ............
Testing Low Memory 2 ............
CISTPL_VERS_1: 4.1
  <5/3 0.6>
Reset Cause (0x0100) is WARM

test

605

3Com WX-4400 Bootstrap/Bootloader
Version 3.0.2 Release
Compiled on Wed Sep 22 09:18:47 PDT 2004 by
Bootstrap
Bootloader
Bootstrap
Bootloader

0
0
1
1

version:
version:
version:
version:

WX-4400 Board Revision:
WX-4400 Controller Revision:
WXA30001.Rel
BOOT Index:
BOOT TYPE:
DEVICE:
FILENAME:
FLAGS:
OPTIONS:

3.1
3.0.2
3.1
3.0.1

Active
Active

2.
5.
8863722 bytes

0
c
boot0:
default
00000000
run=nos;root=md0a

See Also
„

test

boot on page 593

Displays or changes the state of the poweron test flag. The poweron test
flag controls whether a WX performs a set of self tests prior to the boot
process.
Syntax — test [ON | on | OFF | off]
„

ON — Enables the poweron test flag.

„

on — Same effect as ON.

„

OFF — Disables the poweron test flag.

„

off — Same effect as OFF.

Defaults — The poweron test flag is disabled by default.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.

606

CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS

Examples — The following command displays the current setting of the
poweron test flag:
boot> test
The diagnostic execution flag is not set.

See Also
„

version

boot on page 593

Displays version information for a WX switch’s hardware and boot code.
Syntax — version
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command does not list the system image file versions
installed in the boot partitions. To display system image file versions, use
the dir or fver command.
Examples — To display hardware and boot code version information,
type the following command at the boot prompt:
boot> version
3Com WX-4400 Bootstrap/Bootloader
Version 3.0.2 Release
Compiled on Wed Sep 22 09:18:47 PDT 2004 by
Bootstrap
Bootloader
Bootstrap
Bootloader

0
0
1
1

version:
version:
version:
version:

WX-4400 Board Revision:
WX-4400 Controller Revision:

See Also
„

dir on page 598

„

fver on page 601

3.1
3.0.2
3.1
3.0.1
2.
5.

Active
Active

A
Register Your
Product

OBTAINING SUPPORT FOR YOUR
PRODUCT

Warranty and other service benefits start from the date of purchase, so it
is important to register your product quickly to ensure you get full use of
the warranty and other service benefits available to you.
Warranty and other service benefits are enabled through product
registration. Register your product at http://eSupport.3com.com/.
3Com eSupport services are based on accounts that you create or have
authorization to access. First time users must apply for a user name and
password that provides access to a number of eSupport features
including Product Registration, Repair Services, and Service Request. If
you have trouble registering your product, please contact 3Com Global
Services for assistance.

Purchase
Value-Added
Services

To enhance response times or extend warranty benefits, contact 3Com or
your authorized 3Com reseller. Value-added services like 3Com ExpressSM
and GuardianSM can include 24x7 telephone Technical Support, software
upgrades, onsite assistance or advance hardware replacement.
Experienced engineers are available to manage your installation with
minimal disruption to your network. Expert assessment and
implementation services are offered to fill resource gaps and ensure the
success of your networking projects. More information on 3Com
maintenance and Professional Services is available at
http://www.3com.com/

Contact your authorized 3Com reseller or 3Com for a complete list of the
value-added services available in your area.

608

APPENDIX A: OBTAINING SUPPORT FOR YOUR PRODUCT

Troubleshoot
Online

You will find support tools posted on the 3Com web site at
http://www.3com.com/

3Com Knowledgebase helps you troubleshoot 3Com products. This
query-based interactive tool is located at
http://knowledgebase.3com.com and contains thousands of technical
solutions written by 3Com support engineers.

Access Software
Downloads

Software Updates are the bug fix / maintenance releases for the version
of software initially purchased with the product. In order to access these
Software Updates you must first register your product on the 3Com web
site at http://eSupport.3com.com/
First time users will need to apply for a user name and password. A link to
software downloads can be found at http://eSupport.3com.com/, or
under the Product Support heading at http://www.3com.com/
Software Upgrades are the software releases that follow the software
version included with your original product. In order to access upgrades
and related documentation you must first purchase a service contract
from 3Com or your reseller.

Telephone
Technical Support
and Repair

To enable telephone support and other service benefits, you must first
register your product at http://eSupport.3com.com/
Warranty and other service benefits start from the date of purchase, so it
is important to register your product quickly to ensure you get full use of
the warranty and other service benefits available to you.
When you contact 3Com for assistance, please have the following
information ready:
„

Product model name, part number, and serial number

„

Proof of purchase, if you have not pre-registered your product

„

A list of system hardware and software, including revision level

„

Diagnostic error messages

„

Details about recent configuration changes, if applicable

Contact Us

609

To send a product directly to 3Com for repair, you must first obtain a
return authorization number (RMA). Products sent to 3Com, without
authorization numbers clearly marked on the outside of the package, will
be returned to the sender unopened, at the sender’s expense. If your
product is registered and under warranty, you can obtain an RMA
number online at http://eSupport.3com.com/. First time users will
need to apply for a user name and password.

Contact Us

3Com offers telephone, e-mail and internet access to Technical Support
and repair services. To access these services for your region, use the
appropriate telephone number, URL or e-mail address from the list
below.
Telephone numbers are correct at the time of publication. Find a current
directory of contact information posted on the 3Com web site at
http://csoweb4.3com.com/contactus/

Country

Telephone Number

Country

Telephone Number

Asia, Pacific Rim Telephone Technical Support and Repair
Australia
Hong Kong
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
New Zealand
Pakistan

1 800 678 515
800 933 486
+61 2 9424 5179 or
000800 650 1111
001 803 61009
00531 616 439 or
03 3507 5984
1800 801 777
0800 446 398
+61 2 9937 5083

Philippines
P.R. of China
Singapore
S. Korea
Taiwan
Thailand

1235 61 266 2602 or
1800 1 888 9469
800 810 3033
800 6161 463
080 333 3308
00801 611 261
001 800 611 2000

You can also obtain support in this region using the following e-mail: apr_technical_support@3com.com
Or request a repair authorization number (RMA) by fax using this number:
Europe, Middle East, and Africa Telephone Technical Support and Repair
From anywhere in these
regions, call:

+44 (0)1442 435529

From the following countries, you may use the numbers shown:

+ 65 543 6348

610

APPENDIX A: OBTAINING SUPPORT FOR YOUR PRODUCT

Country

Telephone Number

Country

Telephone Number

Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Ireland
Israel
Italy

01 7956 7124
070 700 770
7010 7289
01080 2783
0825 809 622
01805 404 747
06800 12813
1407 3387
1800 945 3794
199 161346

Luxembourg
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
U.K.

342 0808128
0900 777 7737
815 33 047
00800 441 1357
707 200 123
0800 995 014
9 021 60455
07711 14453
08488 50112
0870 909 3266

You can also obtain support in this region using the following URL:
http://emea.3com.com/support/email.html
Latin America Telephone Technical Support and Repair
Antigua
Argentina
Aruba
Bahamas
Barbados
Belize
Bermuda
Bonaire
Brazil
Cayman
Chile
Colombia
Costa Rica
Curacao
Ecuador
Dominican Republic

1 800 988 2112
0 810 444 3COM
1 800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
52 5 201 0010
1 800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
0800 13 3COM
1 800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112

Guatemala
Haiti
Honduras
Jamaica
Martinique
Mexico
Nicaragua
Panama
Paraguay
Peru
Puerto Rico
Salvador
Trinidad and Tobago
Uruguay
Venezuela
Virgin Islands

You can also obtain support in this region using the following:
Spanish speakers, enter the URL:
http://lat.3com.com/lat/support/form.html
Portuguese speakers, enter the URL:
http://lat.3com.com/br/support/form.html
English speakers in Latin America should send e-mail to:
lat_support_anc@3com.com
US and Canada Telephone Technical Support and Repair
1 800 876 3266

AT&T +800 998 2112
57 1 657 0888
AT&T +800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
571 657 0888
01 800 849CARE
AT&T +800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
54 11 4894 1888
AT&T +800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
57 1 657 0888

INDEX

A
autoboot 592

B
boot 593

C
change 595
clear {ap | dap} radio 272
clear accounting 201
clear authentication admin 202
clear authentication console 203
clear authentication dot1x 204
clear authentication last-resort 205
clear authentication mac 205
clear authentication proxy 206
clear authentication web 207
clear banner motd 38
clear boot config 541
clear dap 62
clear dot1x max-req 479
clear dot1x port-control 479
clear dot1x quiet-period 480
clear dot1x reauth-max 481
clear dot1x reauth-period 481
clear dot1x timeout auth-server 482
clear dot1x timeout supplicant 482
clear dot1x tx-period 483
clear fdb 96
clear history 38
clear igmp statistics 400
clear interface 115
clear ip alias 116
clear ip dns domain 117
clear ip dns server 117
clear ip route 118
clear ip telnet 119
clear location policy 208
clear log 581
clear log buffer 581
clear log server 581

clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear
clear

log trace 562
mac-user 209
mac-user attr 209
mac-user group 210
mac-usergroup 211
mac-usergroup attr 212
mobility-domain 262
mobility-domain member 262
mobility-profile 213
ntp server 119
ntp update-interval 120
port counters 63
port name 64
port type 65
port-group 63
radio-profile 274
radius 464
radius client system-ip 465
radius proxy client 466
radius proxy port 466
radius server 467
rfdetect attack-list 512
rfdetect black-list 513
rfdetect countermeasures mac 513
rfdetect ignore 513
rfdetect ssid-list 514
rfdetect vendor-list 515
security acl 424
security acl map 425
server group 467
server group load-balance 467
service-profile 275, 276
sessions 497
sessions network 498
snmp notify target 121
snmp profile 122
snmp trap receiver 121
snmp usm 122
snoop 570
snoop map 570
spantree portcost 372
spantree portpri 373
spantree portvlancost 373
spantree portvlanpri 374

612

INDEX

clear spantree statistics 375
clear summertime 123
clear system 39
clear system countrycode 39
clear system ip-address 39, 124
clear system location 40
clear system name 39
clear timezone 124
clear trace 562
clear user 213
clear user attr 214
clear user group 215
clear usergroup 215
clear usergroup attr 216
clear vlan 97
commit security acl 427
copy 542
create 596
crypto certificate 449
crypto certificate admin 449
crypto certificate eap 449
crypto generate key 451
crypto generate request 452
crypto generate request admin 452
crypto generate request eap 452
crypto generate self-signed 454
crypto generate self-signed admin 454
crypto generate self-signed eap 454
crypto otp 456
crypto otp admin 456
crypto otp eap 456
crypto pkcs12 457
crypto pkcs12 admin 457
crypto pkcs12 eap 457

D
delete 544, 597
diag 598
dir 545, 598
disable 33
display 599
display {ap | dap} config 277
display {ap | dap} counters 280
display {ap | dap} etherstats 284
display {ap | dap} group 285
display {ap | dap} qos-stats 282
display {ap | dap} status 287
display aaa 217
display accounting statistics 220
display arp 125
display auto-tune attributes 290
display auto-tune neighbors 292

display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display

banner motd 40
base-information 41
boot 547
config 548
crypto ca-certificate 459
crypto certificate 460
crypto key ssh 461
dap connection 294
dap global 295
dap unconfigured 297
dhcp-client 182
dhcp-server 183
dot1x 483
fdb 98
fdb agingtime 101
fdb count 101
igmp 400
igmp mrouter 404
igmp querier 405
igmp receiver-table 407
igmp statistics 409
interface 126
ip alias 127
ip dns 128
ip https 129
ip route 131
ip telnet 133
license 42
location policy 222
log buffer 582
log config 584
log trace 585
mobility-domain config 263
mobility-domain status 263
mobility-profile 222
ntp 134
ntp on page 163 121
port counters 66
port poe 68
port status 70
port-group 67
radio-profile 298
rfdetect attack-list 534
rfdetect black-list 535
rfdetect clients 535
rfdetect countermeasures 517
rfdetect counters 515
rfdetect data 518
rfdetect ignore 520
rfdetect mobility-domain 521
rfdetect ssid-list 525
rfdetect vendor-list 525
rfdetect visible 526

INDEX

display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display
display

roaming station 102
roaming vlan 104
security acl 429
security acl dscp 428
security acl editbuffer 429
security acl hits 430
security acl info 431
security acl map 432
security acl resource-usage 433
service-profile 302
sessions 500
sessions network 503
snmp community 186
snmp configuration 136
snmp counters 187
snmp notify profile 188
snmp notify target 189
snmp status 191
snmp usm 193
snoop 576
snoop info 577
snoop map 577
snoop stats 578
spantree 376
spantree backbonefast 378
spantree blockedports 379
spantree portfast 380
spantree portvlancost 381
spantree statistics 381
spantree uplinkfast 387
summertime 138
system 42
timedate 138
timezone 139
trace 563
tunnel 105
version 549
vlan config 106

F
fver 601

H
help 45, 602
history 46
hit-sample-rate 437

L
load config 551
ls 602

M
mkdir 553
monitor port counters 72

N
next 603

P
ping 140

Q
quit 34

R
reset 604
reset {ap | dap} 305
reset port 77
reset system 554
rmdir 556
rollback security acl 438

S
save config 557
save trace 564
set {ap | dap} bias 310
set {ap | dap} blink 311, 313
set {ap | dap} name 315
set {ap | dap} radio antennatype 315
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune
max-retransmissions 318
set {ap | dap} radio channel 320
set {ap | dap} radio min-client-rate 321
set {ap | dap} radio mode 323
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile 324
set {ap | dap} radio tx-power 325
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware 328
set accounting {admin | console} 223
set accounting {dot1x | mac | web} 224
set arp 141
set arp agingtime 142
set authentication admin 226
set authentication console 228
set authentication dot1x 230
set authentication last-resort 234
set authentication mac 236
set authentication proxy 238

613

614

set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set

INDEX

authentication web 239
auto-config 46
banner motd 49
boot configuration-file 558, 559
confirm 50
dap 77
dap auto 306
dap auto mode 308
dap auto radiotype 309
dap fingerprint 312
dap security 326
dot1x authcontrol 486
dot1x key-tx 488
dot1x max-req 489
dot1x port-control 490
dot1x quiet-period 491
dot1x reauth 491
dot1x reauth-max 492
dot1x reauth-period 493
dot1x timeout auth-server 493
dot1x timeout supplicant 494
dot1x tx-period 494
dot1x wep-rekey 495
dot1x wep-rekey-period 496
enablepass 35
fdb 107
fdb agingtime 108
igmp mrsol 414
igmp mrsol mrsi 414
igmp qri 418
igmp querier 419
igmp receiver 419
igmp rv 420
interface 143
interface dhcp-client 144
interface dhcp-server 145
interface status 146
ip alias 147
ip dns 147
ip dns domain 148
ip dns server 149
ip https server 150
ip route 150
ip snmp server 152
ip ssh 153
ip ssh absolute-timeout 154
ip ssh idle-timeout 155
ip ssh server 155
ip telnet 156
ip telnet server 157
length 51
license 52
location policy 241

set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set

log 586
log buffer 586
log console 586
log current 586
log server 586
log sessions 586
log trace 586
log trace mbytes 589
mac-user 245
mac-user attr 246
mac-usergroup attr 252
mobility profile 253
mobility-domain member 265
mobility-domain mode member seed-ip 266
mobility-domain mode seed domain-name 267
mobility-profile mode 255
ntp 158
ntp server 158
ntp update-interval 159
port 80
port name 82
port negotiation 83
port poe 84
port preference 85
port speed 85
port trap 86
port type ap 87
port type wired-auth 91
port-group 81
prompt 53
radio-profile active-scan 330
radio-profile auto-tune channel-config 330
radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown 331
radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval 332
radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff-timer 333
radio-profile auto-tune power-config 334
radio-profile auto-tune power-interval 335
radio-profile beacon-interval 329, 336
radio-profile countermeasures 337
radio-profile dtim-interval 338
radio-profile frag-threshold 339
radio-profile long-retry 339
radio-profile max-rx-lifetime 340
radio-profile max-tx-lifetime 341
radio-profile mode 342
radio-profile preamble-length 345
radio-profile rts-threshold 346
radio-profile service-profile 346
radio-profile short-retry 350
radio-profile wmm 350
radius 468
radius client system-ip 469
radius deadtime 468

INDEX

set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set

radius key 468
radius proxy client 470
radius proxy port 471
radius retransmit 468
radius server 472
radius timeout 468
rfdetect active-scan 528
rfdetect attack-list 528
rfdetect black-list 529
rfdetect countermeasures 530
rfdetect countermeasures mac 530
rfdetect ignore 530
rfdetect log 531
rfdetect signature 532
rfdetect ssid-list 532
rfdetect vendor-list 533
security acl 439
security acl ip icmp 439
security acl ip ip 439
security acl ip tcp 439
security acl ip udp 439
security acl map 444
server group 474
server group load-balance 475
service-profile auth-dot1x 351
service-profile auth-fallthru 352
service-profile auth-psk 354
service-profile beacon 355
service-profile cipher-ccmp 356
service-profile cipher-tkip 357
service-profile cipher-wep104 358
service-profile cipher-wep40 359
service-profile psk-phrase 360
service-profile psk-raw 361
service-profile rsn-ie 362
service-profile shared-key-auth 363
service-profile ssid-name 363
service-profile ssid-type 364
service-profile tkip-mc-time 365
service-profile web-aaa-form url 366
service-profile wep active-multicast-index 367
service-profile wep active-unicast-index 368
service-profile wep key-index 369
service-profile wpa-ie 370
snmp community 160
snmp notify target 162
snmp profile 167
snmp protocol 172
snmp security 173
snmp trap 167
snmp trap receiver 162
snmp usm 174
snoop 571

set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set

snoop map 574
snoop mode 575
spantree 388
spantree backbonefast 389
spantree fwddelay 390
spantree hello 390
spantree maxage 391
spantree portcost 392
spantree portfast 393
spantree portpri 394
spantree portvlancost 395
spantree portvlanpri 396
spantree priority 397
spantree uplinkfast 397
summertime 177
system contact 54
system countrycode 54
system ip-address 57, 179
system location 58
system name 58
timedate 180
timezone 181
trace authentication 564
trace authentication mac-addr 564
trace authentication port 564
trace authentication user 564
trace authorization 565
trace authorization mac-addr 565
trace authorization port 565
trace authorization user 565
trace dot1x 566
trace dot1x mac-addr 566
trace dot1x port 566
trace dot1x user 566
trace sm 567
trace sm mac-addr 567
trace sm port 567
trace sm user 567
user 256
user attr 257
user group 258
user password 256
usergroup 259
usergroup attr 259
vlan name 109
vlan port 110
vlan tunnel-affinity 111
web-aaa 260

T
telnet 195
test 605

615

616

INDEX

traceroute 196

V
version 606



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Modify Date                     : 2005:06:23 15:39:08Z
Create Date                     : 2005:06:23 15:39:08Z
Page Count                      : 616
Creation Date                   : 2005:06:23 15:39:08Z
Mod Date                        : 2005:06:23 15:39:08Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Author                          : Shelley Bandy
Metadata Date                   : 2005:06:23 15:39:08Z
Creator                         : Shelley Bandy
Title                           : cmdref.book
Page Mode                       : UseNone

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools